IBM Network Card Magstar 3494 User Manual
Magstar 3494 Tape Library  
IBM  
Operator Guide  
GA32-0280-09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Magstar 3494 Tape Library  
IBM  
Operator Guide  
GA32-0280-09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note!  
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under “Notices” on  
page 337.  
Ninth Edition (May 1999)  
|
|
This edition, GA32-0280-09, is a major revision of GA32-0280-08, which is now obsolete. Significant changes or  
additions to the text and illustrations are indicated by a vertical line to the left of the change.  
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.  
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow  
disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.  
This edition applies to the initial release of the product and to all subsequent releases and modifications until  
otherwise indicated in new editions. Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office  
serving your locality. Publications are not stocked at the address given below.  
A readers’ comment form is provided at the back of this publication. Either mail the form or fax it to (520) 799-2906.  
If the form has been removed, address your comments about this book to IBM Corporation, Department 61C, 9000  
South Rita Road, Tucson, Arizona 85744-0001, U.S.A.  
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any  
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.  
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1993, 1999. All rights reserved.  
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract  
with IBM Corp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Figures .  
Preface .  
Organization  
Related Information .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ix  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xiii  
xiii  
. xiv  
3490E.  
3590 .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xiv  
xv  
xv  
xv  
xv  
xv  
xvi  
xvi  
AIX .  
.
AS/400  
RISC System/6000 .  
MVS .  
VM .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Additional  
Summary of Changes  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xix  
Chapter 1. Introduction .  
IBM 3494 Tape Libraries .  
Functional Components .  
Cartridge Input and Output Facilities.  
High-Capacity Output Facility .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
4
16  
16  
16  
17  
17  
18  
19  
20  
20  
22  
22  
23  
24  
25  
25  
27  
27  
27  
28  
28  
28  
29  
.
High-Capacity Input/Output Facility .  
Single-Cell Output Facility  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station Feature  
.
.
.
.
Cartridge Tape.  
Tape Cartridge Requirements .  
Cartridge File Protection .  
Cartridge System Tape Labels .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Unlabeled Tape Facility  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Cartridge Labeling .  
Media-Type Labeling  
Cartridge Storage Cells  
.
.
.
Reserved Cartridge Storage Cells  
Cartridge Storage Capacity .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Library Manager .  
User Interface .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Password-Protection  
Database .  
.
.
.
High Availability (Model HA1) .  
Database Information Available to a Host .  
Operational Modes and States .  
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 2. Controls and Indicators .  
Operator Panel .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31  
32  
32  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
38  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Power Controls and Status Indicators .  
Motion Controls and Status Indicators .  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station Status Indicators .  
Library Manager .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3490 Tape Subsystem Controls for Models C10, C11, C1A, C22, and C2A  
3490 Tape Subsystem Controls for Model F1A .  
3590 Model B1A Tape Subsystem Controls .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3494 Model B18 Operator Panel .  
Power Controls  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
3494 Model B16 Virtual Tape Server Controls .  
3494 Model B18 Virtual Tape Server Controls .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
39  
39  
Chapter 3. Operational Characteristics .  
3490E/3590 Tape Subsystem Operation .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
41  
41  
41  
41  
42  
42  
42  
42  
43  
43  
44  
44  
44  
45  
45  
45  
45  
46  
46  
47  
47  
48  
52  
52  
52  
53  
54  
54  
55  
55  
57  
57  
57  
58  
59  
59  
59  
59  
60  
60  
Virtual Tape Server .  
Emulation of 3490-Type Tape Drives  
Tape Volume Cache  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Storage Management of the Tape Volume Cache .  
Maintaining Data Fragments from Copied Volumes .  
Fast Response for Non-specific Mount Requests .  
Deletion of VTS Logical Volume .  
Scratch Stacked Volumes  
Integration with the 3494 Library .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
|
|
|
.
.
.
Logical Library Partitioning .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SCSI Host Attachment .  
Operator Interface .  
Logical Volume Inventory.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
VTS Import/Export Overview  
Local and Remote Power Control.  
Operator Involvement .  
System Administrator Involvement  
Error Detection and Reporting .  
.
.
.
.
.
Inventory Update .  
Volume Categories .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Physical Volume States .  
Logical Volume States .  
.
Physical Volser Validity Checking .  
Logical Volser Validity Checking .  
Command Priorities in the Queue.  
Priority Levels .  
Operations .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Host-Initiated Operations .  
|
|
Export Operations  
Import Operations  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Stand-Alone Operations .  
Initial Cartridge Installation .  
Cartridge Placement  
.
.
.
Initial Volume Inventory Upload  
Host Operation Control  
.
.
.
Actions to Avoid when Operating a 3494 .  
Things You Should Never Do .  
Things You Should Try to Avoid Doing .  
.
.
.
Chapter 4. Operational Modes and States, and Informational States  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
63  
63  
63  
63  
63  
64  
65  
65  
65  
66  
66  
66  
Operational Modes .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Auto Mode .  
Pause Mode  
Manual Mode .  
.
.
.
.
.
|
Additional Operational Modes in the HA1 Environment .  
Home Cell Mode .  
Operational States .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Library manager initialization  
Initialization complete .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Online State  
Offline State  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
iv Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shutdown pending .  
Library Manager Switchover in Progress .  
Accessor Switchover in Progress .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
66  
66  
66  
67  
67  
68  
68  
68  
69  
70  
70  
70  
71  
71  
71  
71  
72  
72  
72  
72  
72  
73  
73  
73  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Dual Active Accessor Status.  
Informational States. .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Relationship between Operational Modes and States  
Operational Mode Transitions .  
Pause Mode to Auto Mode .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Auto Mode to Pause Mode (No Error) .  
Pause Mode to Manual Mode .  
Manual Mode to Pause Mode .  
Auto Mode to Manual Mode.  
Manual Mode to Auto Mode .  
Initialization State to Auto, Pause, or Manual Mode .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Auto Mode to Pause Mode (Forced).  
Operational State Transitions . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Shutdown Pending State to Shutdown State.  
Shutdown State to Library Manager Initialization State .  
Library Manager Initialization State to Initialization Complete State  
Offline State to Online State.  
Online State to Offline State.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Initialization Complete State to Online or Offline State .  
Offline State to Shutdown Pending State .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Informational State Transitions .  
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 5. Basic Operating Procedures  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
75  
75  
75  
76  
76  
76  
76  
77  
77  
78  
81  
81  
81  
82  
82  
Powering On the 3494.  
Powering Off the 3494.  
Changing to Pause Mode  
Changing to Auto Mode .  
Changing from Local to Remote Power  
Changing from Remote to Local Power  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Inserting Cartridges .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using Empty Cartridge Cells to Insert Cartridges .  
Using the Convenience Input⁄Output Station Feature to Insert Cartridges .  
Using the High-Capacity Input/Output Facility .  
Removing Ejected Cartridges .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing an Ejected Cartridge from the Single-Cell Output Facility .  
Removing Ejected Cartridges from the High-Capacity Output Facility.  
Removing Ejected Cartridges from the High-Capacity Input/Output Facility  
Removing Ejected Cartridges from the Convenience Input⁄Output Station  
Feature  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
82  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
85  
88  
92  
92  
92  
93  
94  
95  
95  
96  
98  
99  
Using the Library Manager .  
Making Library Manager Selections .  
Selections with the Keyboard .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Selections with the Pointing Device .  
Track Pointer Keyboard .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the Help Pull-Down  
Help Search  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Help Action Bar and Function Keys .  
Key Functions .  
Using the Operator Menu.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the Mode Pull-Down .  
Auto  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 100  
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pause .  
Manual  
Online.  
Offline .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 100  
. 101  
. 101  
. 103  
. 104  
. 105  
. 106  
. 108  
. 108  
. 109  
. 111  
. 115  
. 118  
. 119  
. 122  
. 123  
. 125  
. 126  
. 128  
. 129  
. 130  
. 131  
. 135  
. 136  
. 137  
. 139  
. 139  
. 144  
. 145  
. 150  
. 152  
. 155  
. 158  
. 158  
. 159  
. 160  
. 161  
. 163  
. 165  
. 165  
. 166  
. 167  
. 169  
. 174  
. 176  
. 180  
. 184  
. 185  
. 190  
. 191  
. 198  
. 199  
. 200  
. 202  
. 202  
. 204  
Service Menu .  
Switch Active Library Manager to Standby  
Accessors .  
Lockup Library Manager .  
Shutdown  
Using the Status Pull-Down .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Operational Status .  
Component Availability.  
VTS Status .  
Performance Statistics .  
Accessor Mounts per Hour .  
VTS Active Data .  
VTS Data Flow  
VTS Mount Hit Data  
VTS Physical Device Mount History .  
VTS Logical Mounts Per Hour .  
.
.
.
.
.
|
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
VTS Active Data Distribution  
Using the System Summary.  
LAN Status .  
Dual Accessor Zones .  
Using the Queues Pull-Down .  
Using the Database Pull-Down.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Search Database For Volumes.  
Find Logical Volume’s Home  
List Database Volumes  
Stacked Volume Map .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the Commands Pull-Down .  
Schedule Cleaning .  
Eject a Cleaner Cartridge.  
Cleaner Cartridge Masks .  
Send Message to Host Consoles .  
Promote a Command in the Queue .  
Volser Range for Media Types .  
Insert VTS Logical Volumes .  
Insert VTS Logical Volumes Status .  
Eject a VTS Stacked Volume .  
Set VTS Category Attributes  
Set VTS Management Policies.  
Inventory New Storage or Re-inventory Complete System.  
Re-Inventory with Virtual Tape Servers .  
Inventory Update .  
Stand-Alone Device.  
Insert Unlabeled Cartridges .  
Add LAN Host .  
Delete LAN Host .  
Update LAN Host Information .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
LM LAN Information.  
Operator Intervention .  
System Administrator Password .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
|
|
|
Managing Import/Export Volumes.  
Manage Unassigned Volumes .  
.
.
.
Manage Import Volumes .  
.
.
vi Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
|
|
Manage Insert Volumes .  
Manage Export-Hold Volumes .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 205  
. 206  
. 207  
. 208  
. 208  
. 209  
. 213  
. 213  
. 215  
. 215  
. 221  
. 226  
. 226  
. 226  
. 227  
. 228  
. 230  
. 231  
. 232  
. 232  
. 234  
. 235  
. 236  
. 237  
. 238  
. 239  
. 240  
Cancel Export/Import .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Service Access  
SNMP Options  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the Library Manager’s SNMP Features  
Trouble Shooting .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Receiving SNMPD Traps on the Monitor Station .  
Programming Tools .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
OPINT Library Manager SNMP Traps .  
UNSOL Library Manager SNMP Traps .  
CHCK1 Library Manager SNMP Traps .  
TESTM Library Manager SNMP Traps .  
Using the Options Pull-Down  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using Manual Mode.  
.
.
.
.
Starting Manual Mode .  
Operating in Manual Mode .  
Mounting Cartridges  
Demounting Cartridges  
Inserting Cartridges .  
Ejecting Cartridges .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Reviewing Unknown Volume Locations.  
Error Processing .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Locating and Identifying Home Cell Locations .  
Ending Manual Mode .  
Cartridge Removal from the Gripper.  
Using the Keyboard Template .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager Console Feature .  
Installing and Configuring.  
Starting DCAF on the Remote Library Manager Console .  
Controlling the Tape Library from the Remote Library Manager Console  
Using Keystrokes during a Session from the Remote Library Manager  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 241  
. 242  
. 242  
. 246  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Console .  
Using Hot-Key Combinations  
Sending the Alt+Esc Command to the Library Manager.  
Sending the Alt+Tab Command to the Library Manager.  
Sending the Ctrl+Esc Command to the Library Manager .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 246  
. 248  
. 248  
. 248  
. 249  
. 249  
. 251  
. 253  
. 253  
. 253  
. 253  
. 255  
. 257  
Changing the Session State from the Remote Library Manager Console  
Using the Pointing Device during a Session .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Moving Among Multiple Sessions .  
Transferring Files.  
Library Manager Operations with a Remote Library Manager Console .  
Changing the Session State of the Library Manager .  
Changing the Password from the Library Manager  
Remote Library Manager Console Problem Analysis and Operational Tips.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures.  
Quick Reference Table to Problem Determination Procedures .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 259  
. 259  
. 260  
. 261  
. 261  
Failure and Exception Condition Reporting .  
Library Manager Failure Recovery Procedures .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Library Manager Failure in a DFSMS/MVS Environment  
Start the Library Manager and Host Recovery Procedure (DFSMS/MVS  
Environment)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 263  
. 265  
Library Manager Failure in an MVS/BTLS Environment.  
Contents vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Start the Library Manager and Host Recovery Procedure (MVS/BLTS  
Environment)  
DFSMS System Managed Tape Messages .  
Table for DFSMS Library Failure Messages or Exception Conditions .  
Information Provided at the Library Manager Console .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 266  
. 268  
. 269  
. 276  
. 277  
. 279  
. 279  
. 282  
. 282  
. 283  
. 284  
. 285  
. 286  
. 288  
. 292  
. 293  
. 295  
. 302  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the System Summary Window  
Using the Component Availability Status Window .  
Using the Search Database for Volumes Window .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the Whole Queue Window .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Intervention Required Conditions and Actions .  
Quick Reference Table to Intervention Required Conditions .  
Table for Intervention Conditions of Library Tape Drives  
Table for Intervention Conditions of Other Library Components .  
Table for Intervention Conditions of Input/Output Stations .  
Table for Intervention Conditions of External Cartridge Labels .  
Table for Intervention Conditions of Data Cartridges .  
Table for Intervention Conditions of Cleaner Cartridges .  
Table for Intervention Conditions of a Library Virtual Tape Server .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Virtual Tape Server Recovery Actions .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix A. Keyboard Template .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 305  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 307  
. 307  
. 307  
. 314  
. 316  
. 326  
. 327  
. 330  
. 331  
. 334  
. 335  
Import and Export List Volumes Format  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Export List Volume .  
Import List Volume .  
Status Codes in Status File .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Import and Export Messages from Library  
Export Status Messages .  
Import Status Messages .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Export/Import List Volumes Failure-Reason Text .  
Category Recovery .  
Reuse of Exported Stacked Volumes  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Notices .  
Trademarks.  
Communications Statements  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 337  
. 337  
. 338  
. 338  
. 339  
. 340  
Federal Commission (FCC) Statement .  
Laser Safety and Compliance .  
Operator Safety .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Glossary  
Index .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 341  
. 347  
. 353  
.
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You.  
viii Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
1. IBM 3494 Tape Libraries .  
2. Control Unit Frame Functional Components, 3490E (Front View) .  
3. Control Unit Frame Functional Components, 3590 (Front View) .  
4. Control Unit Frame Functional Components (Rear View)  
5. Storage Frame Functional Components (front) .  
6. Drive Unit Frame Functional Components (front) .  
7. Drive Unit Frame Functional Components (rear)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
5
6
7
8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9
.
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
19  
20  
21  
23  
24  
25  
31  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
64  
65  
67  
67  
69  
79  
80  
89  
90  
93  
94  
94  
95  
98  
98  
99  
8. Model B16 Virtual Tape Server Functional Components (front) .  
9. Model B16 Virtual Tape Server Functional Components (rear)  
10. Model B18 Virtual Tape Server (front)  
11. Model B18 Virtual Tape Server Functional Components (rear)  
12. Model HA1, Left Service Bay Functional Components (right front) .  
13. Model HA1, Right Service Bay Functional Components (right front)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14. Control Unit Frame Cartridge Storage Cells .  
15. Cartridge System Tape Identification .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16. Cartridge System Tape .  
17. Cartridge System Tape Labels .  
18. Cartridge Label Position .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19. Cartridge Storage Cell Names .  
20. Cartridge Storage Cell Labeling  
21. Control Unit Frame Front Door .  
22. Operator Panel without Convenience Input⁄Output Station Feature .  
23. Operator Panel with Convenience Input⁄Output Station Feature .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24. Library Manager .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25. 3490E Controls and Indicators .  
26. 3490E Controls and Indicators for Model F1A  
27. 3590 Model B1A Operator Panel .  
.
.
.
.
28. Model B18 Virtual Tape Server Operator Panel .  
|
|
29. Active Library Manager.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
30. Standby Library Manager .  
31. Dual Active Accessor Status — enabling .  
32. Dual Active Accessor Status — disabling .  
33. Auto Pending Pop-Up Window .  
34. Inserting Cartridges in the Convenience Input⁄Output Station .  
.
.
.
.
35. Optional 30-Cell I/O .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
36. Operator Panel Controls .  
37. System Menu .  
38. Pointing Device  
39. Track Pointer Keyboard  
40. Help Pull-Down Menu .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
41. Help Index Pop-Up Window .  
42. Operator Menu.  
.
.
.
.
.
43. System Summary Pop-Up Window .  
44. Mode Pull-Down Menu . .  
.
.
.
.
45. Initial Mode/State Selection Pop-Up Window .  
46. Fast-Ready Category Check Pop-Up Window  
47. Offline Request Pop-Up Window .  
. 102  
. 102  
. 103  
. 104  
. 104  
. 105  
. 105  
. 106  
. 106  
.
.
.
.
|
48. Mode/State Change Request Pop-Up Window .  
49. Service Menu Notice  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
50. System Administrator Password Pop-Up Window .  
51. Library Switch Over Confirmation Pop-Up Window  
52. Switching Pop-Up Window  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
53. Accessor Switch Over Confirmation Pop-Up Window.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ix  
 
54. Switching Pop-Up Window  
55. Dual Active Accessor Status Pop-Up Window — Enabling .  
56. Mark Accessor Active Pop-Up Window .  
57. Dual Active Accessor Status Pop-Up Window — Disabling.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 107  
. 107  
. 108  
. 108  
. 109  
. 109  
. 110  
. 111  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
58. System Administrator Password Pop-Up Window .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
59. Shutdown Panel .  
60. Status Pull-Down Menu  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
61. (Part 1 of 3) Operational Status Pop-Up Window .  
62. (Part 2 of 3) Operational Status Pop-Up Window (single accessor  
systems) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 113  
63. (Part 3 of 3) Operational Status Pop-Up Window (dual accessor systems) 114  
64. (Part 1 of 3) Component Availability Status Pop-Up Window .  
65. (Part 2 of 3) Component Availability Status Pop-Up Window .  
66. (Part 3 of 3) Component Availability Status Pop-Up Window .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 116  
. 117  
. 117  
. 118  
. 120  
. 121  
. 122  
. 123  
. 125  
. 126  
. 128  
. 129  
. 130  
. 131  
. 135  
. 136  
. 137  
. 138  
. 139  
. 140  
. 143  
. 144  
. 145  
. 150  
. 152  
. 157  
. 158  
. 159  
. 160  
. 160  
. 162  
. 164  
. 165  
. 166  
. 167  
. 169  
. 170  
. 171  
. 171  
. 172  
. 173  
. 173  
. 175  
. 176  
. 177  
|
67. VTS Status Pop-Up Window.  
68. (Part 1 of 2) Performance Statistics Pop-Up Window .  
69. (Part 2 of 2) Performance Statistics Pop-Up Window .  
70. Accessor Mounts per Hour Pop-Up Window .  
71. VTS Active Data Pop-Up Window .  
72. VTS Data Flow Pop-Up Window .  
73. VTS Mount Hit Data Pop-Up Window  
74. VTS Physical Device Mount History Pop-Up Window.  
75. VTS Logical Mounts Per Hour Pop-Up Window .  
76. VTS Active Data Distribution Pop-Up Window  
77. System Summary Pop-Up Window .  
78. LAN Status Pop-Up Window. .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
79. Dual Accessor Zones Pop-Up Window .  
80. Queues Pull-Down Menu .  
81. Mount Queue .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
82. Database Pull-Down Menu .  
83. Search Database for Volumes Pop-Up Window .  
84. Status Flags.  
85. Find Logical Volume’s Home Pop-Up Window .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
86. List Database Volume’s Pop-Up Window .  
87. Stacked Volume Map Pop-Up Window .  
88. Commands Pull-Down Menu  
89. Clean Schedule Pop-Up Window .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
90. Eject a Cleaner Cartridge Pop-Up Window  
91. Cleaner Cartridge Masks .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
92. Host Message Pop-Up Window  
93. Promote Command Pop-Up Window.  
94. Volser Ranges Pop-Up Window  
95. Insert VTS Logical Volumes Pop-Up Window  
96. Insert VTS Logical Volumes Status Pop-Up Window .  
97. Eject a VTS Stacked Volume Pop-Up Window .  
98. Set VTS Category Attributes Pop-Up Window  
99. Set VTS Management Policies Pop-Up Window  
100. Display VTS Export/Import Volumes Window.  
101. Save Logical Volumes Window .  
102. Set the Volser Range Window .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
|
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
103. Inventory Cleaner Masks Pop-Up Window.  
104. Inventory Status Pop-Up Window .  
.
.
.
105. Inventory Status Pop-Up Window (Dual Active Accessor systems) .  
106. Service Pull-down Menu .  
107. VTS Online/Offline Pop-Up Window .  
108. Disable Inventory Update Dialog Box  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
x
Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109. Enable Inventory Update Dialog Box.  
110. Perform Inventory Update Dialog Box .  
111. Inventory Update Status Box  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 177  
. 178  
. 178  
. 178  
. 179  
. 181  
. 183  
. 183  
. 185  
. 186  
. 188  
. 190  
. 191  
. 192  
. 193  
. 195  
. 197  
. 198  
. 200  
. 201  
. 202  
. 204  
. 205  
. 206  
. 207  
. 208  
. 210  
. 211  
. 212  
. 213  
. 227  
. 228  
. 228  
. 229  
. 230  
. 233  
. 234  
. 236  
. 237  
. 238  
. 239  
. 241  
. 242  
. 242  
. 243  
. 243  
. 244  
. 244  
. 245  
. 245  
.
.
.
.
112. Inventory Update Status Box (Dual Active Accessor systems)  
113. Perform Inventory Update (Partial) Window .  
114. Setup Stand-Alone Device Pop-Up Window .  
115. Reset Stand-Alone Device Pop-Up Window .  
116. Stand-Alone Device Status Pop-Up Window .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
117. Insert Unlabeled Cartridges Window .  
.
.
.
118. Add LAN Host to Library Pop-Up Window (APPC Selected) .  
119. Add LAN Host to Library Pop-Up Window (APPC/VTAM Selected).  
120. Add LAN Host to Library Pop-Up Window (TCP/IP Selected) .  
121. Delete LAN Host from Library Pop-Up Window .  
122. Update LAN Host Information Pop-Up Window .  
123. Change LAN Host Information Pop-Up Window (APPC)  
124. Change LAN Host Information Pop-Up Window (APPC/VTAM) .  
125. Change LAN Host Information Pop-Up Window (TCP/IP) .  
126. Library LAN Information Pop-Up Window .  
127. Operator Intervention Pop-Up Window .  
128. System Administrator Password Pop-Up Window .  
129. Manage Unassigned Volumes Pop-Up Window .  
130. Manage Import Volumes Pop-Up Window .  
131. Manage Insert Volumes Pop-Up Window .  
132. Manage Export-Hold Volumes Pop-Up Window .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
|
|
|
|
|
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
133. Cancel Export/Import Pop-Up Window .  
134. SNMP Basic Block Diagram .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
135. Select SNMP Trap Types Pop-Up Window  
136. Change SNMP Trap Destinations Pop-Up Window (OS/2 2.11) .  
137. SNMP Configuration Pop-Up Window .  
138. TESTM SNMP Trap Message Pop-Up Window .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
139. Options Pull-Down Menu .  
140. Mode Pull-Down Menu .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
141. Mode/State Change Request Pop-Up Window .  
142. Manual Pending Wait Message.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
143. Manual Mode Terminal Pop-Up Window with Action List  
144. Manual Mode Insert Cartridges Screen .  
145. Manual Mode Insert Cartridges Pop-Up Window  
|
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
146. Manual Mode Review List Screen.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
147. Manual Mode Error Processing Screen .  
148. Manual Mode Locate Cartridge Home Screen .  
149. Cartridge Removal from the Gripper .  
150. LAN Attachments .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
151. Icon for Distributed Console Access Facility .  
152. Distributed Console Access Facility Icon  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
153. DCAF Controlling Main Window  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
154. DCAF Directory  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
155. DCAF Target Password  
156. Initiating the Remote Library Manager Console .  
157. Establishing Communication with the Library Manager .  
158. Remote Library Manager Console Main Menu .  
159. Remote Library Manager Console Window with Keystrokes Pull-Down  
.
.
.
Menu .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 247  
160. Remote Library Manager Console Session Window with Session  
Pull-Down Menu .  
161. Remote Library Manager Console Session Window .  
162. Window List .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 250  
. 252  
. 254  
|
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Figures xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163. Active Session .  
164. Changing Sessions .  
165. Session Pull-down Menu .  
166. DCAF Password .  
167. Library Manager Switching Window .  
168. Library Manager Switching Window .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 255  
. 255  
. 256  
. 256  
. 264  
. 267  
. 280  
. 340  
.
.
.
169. Status Flags.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
170. Laser Safety Caution Label .  
xii Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
This book provides information for the new operator and for the experienced  
operator to use the IBM Magstar 3494 Tape Library. If you are a new operator,  
give special attention to the organization of this book (see “Organization”) and read  
the sections indicated for new operators.  
Users of this information should be familiar with the 3490E magnetic tape  
subsystems. IBM recommends that you read the IBM 3494 Tape Library  
Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0279.  
Organization  
The material in this publication is presented as follows:  
v “Chapter 1. Introduction” on page 1 contains an introduction and a description of  
the IBM 3494 Tape Library. This section is required reading if you are a new  
operator.  
v “Chapter 2. Controls and Indicators” on page 31 contains a description of the  
location and function of the controls and indicators found on the 3494. This  
section is required reading if you are a new operator.  
v “Chapter 3. Operational Characteristics” on page 41 contains a description of the  
operational characteristics of the 3494. This section includes information for the  
experienced operator or system administrator.  
v “Chapter 4. Operational Modes and States, and Informational States” on page 63  
provides a description of the different modes and states of the 3494. This section  
includes information for the experienced operator or system administrator.  
v “Chapter 5. Basic Operating Procedures” on page 75 provides a description of  
the tasks performed by using the 3494 operator panel. This section is required  
reading if you are a new operator.  
A quick reference table for basic operating procedures is included at the start of  
this section.  
v “Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures” on page 85 provides detailed  
information about using the library manager and the tasks that may be performed  
with the library manager. This section includes information for the experienced  
operator or system administrator.  
A quick reference table for advanced operating procedures is included at the start  
of this section.  
v “Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager Console Feature” on page 241 provides  
information on the remote library manager.  
v “Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures” on page 259 provides  
information on error reporting and recovery. This section includes information for  
the experienced operator or system administrator.  
A quick reference table for problem determination procedures is included in this  
section.  
v “Appendix A. Keyboard Template” on page 305 identifies the uses of the library  
manager function keys.  
v “Glossary” on page 341 lists important terms used in this book.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xiii  
 
v “Index” on page 347 lists items to which a reader may need to refer.  
Related Information  
For additional information about the IBM 3494 Tape Library, see:  
v IBM 3494 Tape Library Operator Safety Translations, GA32-0299  
v IBM 3494 Tape Library Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0279  
v IBM 3494 Tape Library User’s Guide: Media Library Device Driver for AS/400 ,  
GC35-0153  
v IBM 3494 Tape Library User’s Guide: Library Control Device Driver for VSE/ESA,  
GC35-0176  
v IBM Online Library Omnibus Edition Hardware Collection, SK2T-5843.  
v IBM 3494 Tape Library Operator Training Video Tape, GV38-0294 (PAL format)  
or GV38-0293 (NTSC format)  
v IBM 3494 Tape Library Operator’s Quick Guide, GX35-5051  
v IBM Magstar 3494 Tape Libraries: A Practical Guide, SG24-4632  
v IBM Magstar Virtual Tape Server: Implementation Guide, SG24-2229  
v Guide to sharing and partitioning IBM Tape Library Dataservers, SG24-4409  
3490E  
For additional information about the IBM 3490E Magnetic Tape Subsystems, see:  
v Care and Handling of the IBM Magnetic Tape Cartridge, GA32-0047  
v Tape and Cartridge Requirements for the IBM Magnetic Tape Cartridge Drives,  
GA32-0048  
v Tape and Cartridge Requirements for the IBM Enhanced Capacity Magnetic Tape  
Cartridge Drives, GA32-0216  
v IBM 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Enhanced Capability Models C10, C11,  
C1A, C22, and C2A Introduction, GA32-0217  
v IBM 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Enhanced Capability Models C10, C11,  
C1A, C22, and C2A Operator’s Guide, GA32-0218  
v IBM 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Enhanced Capability Models C10, C11,  
C1A, C22, and C2A Hardware Reference, GA32-0219  
v IBM 3490 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Enhanced Capability Models C10, C11,  
C1A, C22, and C2A Planning and Migration Guide, GC35-0219  
v Distributed Console Access Facility: Installation and Configuration Guide,  
SH19-4068  
v Distributed Console Access Facility: User’s Guide, SH19-4069  
v IBM 3490E Tape Subsystem Models F01, F1A, F11, and FC0 Installation,  
Planning and Operator’s Guide, GA32-0378  
v FC 3000 Maintenance Instructions, GA32-0402  
xiv Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3590  
v IBM 3590 High Performance Tape Subsystem Introduction and Planning Guide,  
GA32-0329.  
v IBM 3590 High Performance Tape Subsystem Hardware Reference, GA32-0331  
v IBM 3590 High Performance Tape Subsystem User‘s Guide, GA32-0330.  
v IBM 3590 High Performance Tape Subsystem Operator’s Training Video Tape,  
GV38-0290 (NTSC format) or GV38-0291 (PAL format)  
v IBM 3590 High Performance Tape Subsystem Operator’s Quick Guide,  
GA32-0354  
v IBM Magstar 3590 Tape Subsystem: Multiplatform Implementation, SG24-2549  
AIX  
For additional information about the AIX subsystems and software, see:  
v AIX/ESA System Planning Guide, GC23-3061  
v AIX/ESA Diagnosis Guide, SC23-3079  
v AIX/ESA Device Driver Developer’s Guide, SC23-3085  
v AIX Parallel and ESCON Channel Tape Attachment/6000 Installation and User’s  
Guide, GA32-0311  
v AIX for RISC System/6000 Installation Guide, SC23-2341  
v AIX for RISC System/6000 General Concepts and Procedures, GC23-2202  
AS/400  
For additional information about the AS/400 subsystems and software, see:  
v AS/400 Physical Planning Guide and Reference, GA41-9571  
v IBM Application System/400 Control Language Reference, SC41-0030  
v IBM Application System/400 Security Concepts and Planning, SC41-8083  
v AS/400 Automated Tape Library Planning Guide - V3R6 Documentation,  
SC41-3309  
RISC System/6000  
For additional information about the RISC System/6000 subsystems and software,  
see:  
v RISC System/6000 Getting Started: Using RISC System/6000, GC23-2377  
v RISC System/6000 Getting Started: Managing RISC System/6000 , GC23-2378  
v RISC System/6000 Problem Solving Guide , SC23-2204  
v RISC System/6000 System Overview , GC23-2406  
v RISC System/6000 Planning for System Installation, GC23-2407  
MVS  
For information about MVS systems and software, see:  
v Basic Tape Library Support User’s Guide and Reference , SC26-7016  
v DFSMS/MVS General Information Library Guide , GC26-4900  
v DFSMS/MVS Object Access Method Planning, Installation, and Storage  
Administration Guide for Tape Libraries , SC26-3051  
Preface xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v DFSMS/MVS Implementing and Customizing DFSMShsm , SH21-1078  
v DFSMS/MVS Planning for Installation , SC26-4919  
v DFSMS/MVS Object Access Method Application Programmer’s Reference ,  
SC26-4917  
v DFSMS/MVS Guide and Master Index , GC26-4904  
v JES3 Command Reference , SC23-0063  
v Multiple Virtual Storage/Enterprise System Architecture Library Guide for System  
Product , GC28-1601  
v MVS/ESA Storage Management Library: Storage Management Reader’s Guide ,  
GC26-3122  
v MVS/ESA Planning: Installation and Migration for MVS/ESA System Product  
Version 4 , GC28-1077  
v MVS/ESA Conversion Notebook for MVS/ESA System Product Version 4 ,  
GC28-1608  
v MVS/ESA System Data Set Definition , GC28-1628  
v MVS⁄ESA Command Reference , GC28-1826  
VM  
For information about VM systems and software, see:  
v Virtual Machine/Enterprise System Architecture Library Guide and Master Index ,  
GC24-5518  
v Virtual Machine/Enterprise System Architecture Library Guide and Master Index  
for System/370 , GC24-5436  
v Virtual Machine/Enterprise System Architecture General Information , GC24-5550  
v VM/ESA: DFSMS/VM Installation and Customization , SC26-4704  
v VM/ESA: DFSMS/VM Removable Media Services User’s Guide and Reference ,  
SC35-0141  
v VM/ESA: DFSMS/VM Messages and Codes , SC26-4707  
Additional  
For additional information, see:  
v Environmental Record Editing and Printing (EREP) Program User’s Guide and  
Reference , GC28-1378  
v IBM General Information Manual: Installation Manual—Physical Planning ,  
GC22-7022  
v IBM SCSI Tape Drive and Library Device Drivers Installation and User’s Guide ,  
GC35-0154  
v IBM System/360, System/370, 4300, 9370, and ES/9000 Processors:  
Input/Output Equipment Installation Manual—Physical Planning , GC22-7064  
v Resource Access Control Facility (RACF) General Information, GC28-0722  
v POWERstation and POWERserver System/390 Enterprise Systems Connection  
Channel Emulator User’s Guide and Service Information, SA23-2722  
v POWERstation and POWERserver S/370 Channel Emulator/A User’s Guide and  
Service Information , SA23-2696  
v VTAM V4R2 Resource Definition Reference , SC31-6498  
v VSE/ESA System Control Statements V2R1 , SC33-6613  
v Distributed Console Access Facility: V1R3 Installation Guide , SH19-4068  
xvi Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Distributed Console Access Facility: V1R3.1 Target User’s Guide , SH19-6839  
v Distributed Console Access Facility: V1R3.1 User’s Guide , SH19-4069  
|
|
|
|
|
You can send us comments about this book electronically:  
v IBMLink from US: STARPUBS at SJEVM5  
v IBMLink from Canada: STARPUBS at TORIBM  
v IBM Mail Exchange: USIB3VVD at IBMMAIL  
v Internet: starpubs@us.ibm.com  
Preface xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xviii Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
Summary of Changes  
|
|
|
|
This book contains the following changes to the previous edition.  
v Addition of VTS Import/Export functions  
v Addition of SCSI attachment capability to VTS subsystems  
v Attachment to Microsoft Windows NT processors  
Changes to correct errors or omissions in the previous edition are also included.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xix  
 
xx Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
The 3494 Tape Library automates the retrieval, storage, and control of Cartridge  
System Tape, Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape, and High Performance  
Cartridge Tape. In conjunction with supporting software and 3490E Models C1A,  
C2A and F1A, 3590 Model B1A, 3590 Model A00 or A50, 3494 Model B16 and B18  
Virtual Tape Servers, and Model HA1 High Availability Unit, the 3494 allows  
cartridges to be mounted and demounted automatically on tape drives.  
Note: The 3494 Operator Training Video Tape and the 3494 Operator’s Quick  
Guide are supplied with accessories.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
 
IBM 3494 Tape Libraries  
Figure 1 on page 3 shows three possible configurations of the 3494. The 3494 is  
available in multiple configurations using one control unit frame and up to fifteen  
optional frames. The available frame types are:  
v The tape library control unit frame, „1ꢀ or „3ꢀ, includes the operator panel, a  
tape subsystem (3490E Model CxA or F1A with drives, 3590 Model B1A tape  
drives, or 3590 Model A00 or A50 Control Unit with drives), a library manager,  
cartridge storage cells, a cartridge accessor, and if ordered, the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station. One control unit frame is required in every library  
configuration.  
v The optional drive unit frame „4ꢀ contains additional cartridge storage and may  
contain a 3490E Model CxA or F1A tape subsystem, 3590 Model B1A tape  
drives, or a 3590 Model A00 or A50 Control Unit with drives.  
v The optional Model B16 Virtual Tape Server (VTS) frame „5ꢀ contains additional  
cartridge storage and the controller and associated disk storage for the VTS. A  
drive unit frame„4ꢀ that holds the 3590 Model B1A tape drives, managed by the  
Model B16 VTS, must be located to the left of the Model B16 Virtual Tape Server  
frame.  
v The optional stand-alone 3494 Model B18 Virtual Tape Server frame „8ꢀ contains  
the controller and associated disk storage for the VTS. A drive unit frame „4ꢀ that  
holds the 3590 Model B1A tape drives, managed by the Model B18 VTS, may be  
located at any position in the library (except frame 1) but must be within a  
distance of 14 m (46 ft.) from the Model B18.  
v The optional frame „6ꢀ contains additional cartridge storage only.  
v The Optional HA1 Service Bays (left „2ꢀ and right „7ꢀ) contain a service area for  
the accessors.  
2
Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 1. IBM 3494 Tape Libraries  
Note: For additional 3494 configurations, see IBM 3494 Tape Library Introduction  
and Planning Guide, GA32-0279.  
The control unit frame provides full library function without the other optional  
frames. Adding the optional frames to the control unit frame provides for additional  
storage and tape drive capabilities. See Table 2 on page 25 for the cartridge  
capacity of each frame.  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Functional Components  
Figure 2 on page 5 and Figure 3 on page 6 show the following functional  
components of the control unit frame, viewable from the front:  
„1ꢀ Cartridge storage cells  
Are located on the interior side of front doors and on the back walls of the  
3494. See „1ꢀ in Figure 2 on page 5 or in Figure 3 on page 6.  
„2ꢀ Magnetic tape subsystem  
The 3494 uses either the 3490E Magnetic Tape Subsystem Model C1A or  
C2A, Figure 2 on page 5, 3490E Magnetic Tape Subsystem Model F1A, or  
the 3590 High Performance Magnetic Tape Subsystem Model B1A, Figure 3  
on page 6, with or without a 3590 Model A00 or A50 Control Unit.  
„3ꢀ Rail system  
The cartridge accessor is carried through the library on the rail system. The  
rail system consists of two horizontal rails, one at the top and one at the  
bottom.  
„4ꢀ Convenience Input⁄Output Station  
The 3494 may have a Convenience Input⁄Output Station feature installed for  
inserting or ejecting cartridges without interrupting the normal automated  
operations.  
Two features are available: either the ten-cartridge capacity Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station as shown in Figure 2 on page 5 or the 30-cartridge  
capacity Convenience Input⁄Output Station (not shown).  
|
|
|
|
Note: The Convenience Input⁄Output Station feature is required for  
Import/Export operations in the Model B18 VTS with the Advanced  
Function Feature.  
|
„5ꢀ Operator panel  
The basic operating procedures are performed from the operator panel.  
4
Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 2. Control Unit Frame Functional Components, 3490E (Front View)  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 3. Control Unit Frame Functional Components, 3590 (Front View)  
Figure 4 on page 7 shows the following functional components of the control unit  
frame, viewable from the rear:  
„1ꢀ Library manager  
Controls all operations in the 3494. Its hardware consists of a controller,  
display, pointing device, and keyboard. An optional Remote Library  
Manager Console feature is also available for remote installation on a Local  
Area Network (LAN) environment. During normal operations, the operator  
panel controls are used to operate the 3494. The library manager is used  
for error recovery, operations status, and service.  
„2ꢀ Cartridge storage cells  
Are located on the interior side of the front doors on the 3494 and on the  
back interior wall.  
„3ꢀ Cartridge accessor  
Moves on horizontal and vertical axes, moving cartridges between the  
storage cells, devices, and input and output facilities. The vision system  
(barcode reader) on the cartridge accessor identifies cartridges.  
„4ꢀ Picker  
Is the part of the cartridge accessor that actually picks cartridges. The  
picker comes standard with one gripper installed or two grippers if the  
optional Dual Gripper feature is installed.  
„5ꢀ 3590 Model A00 or A50 Control Unit  
is the 3590 Model A00 or A50 Control Unit.  
6
Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 4. Control Unit Frame Functional Components (Rear View)  
Figure 5 on page 8 shows the functional components of the storage frame, viewable  
from the front:  
„1ꢀ Cartridge storage cells  
Are located on the interior side of the front door and on the back wall of the  
frame.  
„2ꢀ Rail system  
The cartridge accessor is carried through the library on the rail system  
installed in each frame. The rail system consists of two horizontal rails, one  
at the top and one at the bottom of the frame.  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 5. Storage Frame Functional Components (front)  
Figure 6 on page 9 shows the functional components of the drive unit frame with  
four 3590 tape subsystems and a 3590 Model A00 or A50 Control Unit, viewable  
from the front:  
„1ꢀ Cartridge storage cells  
Are located on the interior side of the front door and on the back wall of the  
frame.  
„2ꢀ Magnetic tape subsystems  
The magnetic tape subsystems that can be installed in a drive frame are  
the 3490E Magnetic Tape Subsystem Model C1A or C2A (not shown), the  
3590 Magnetic Tape Subsystem Model F1A (one or two per frame), or the  
3590 High Performance Magnetic Tape Subsystem Model B1A with or  
without a 3590 Model A00 or A50 Control Unit.  
„3ꢀ Rail system  
The cartridge accessor is carried through the library on the rail system  
installed in each frame. The rail system consists of two horizontal rails, one  
at the top and one at the bottom of the frame.  
8
Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 6. Drive Unit Frame Functional Components (front)  
Figure 7 on page 10 shows the functional components of the drive unit frame with  
four 3590 tape subsystems and a 3590 Model A00 or A50 Control Unit, viewable  
from the rear (shown with rear door removed):  
„1ꢀ Cartridge storage cells  
Are located on the interior side of the front door and on the back wall of the  
frame.  
„2ꢀ Rail system  
The cartridge accessor is carried through the library on the rail system  
installed in each frame. The rail system consists of two horizontal rails, one  
at the top and one at the bottom of the frame.  
„3ꢀ Power control compartment  
Power to all components in the frame is distributed through the power  
control compartment.  
„4ꢀ 3590 Model A00 or A50 Control Unit  
The 3590 Model A00 or A50 Control Unit consists of a RISC processor and  
associated adapter cards.  
„5ꢀ 3590 tape subsystems  
From one to four 3590 magnetic tape subsystems can be installed along  
with the 3590 Model A00 or A50 Control Unit. From one to six 3590  
magnetic tape subsystems can be installed without a Model A00 or A50  
Control Unit (not shown).  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 7. Drive Unit Frame Functional Components (rear)  
Figure 8 on page 11 shows the functional components of the Model B16 Virtual  
Tape Server frame, viewable from the front:  
„1ꢀ Cartridge storage cells  
Are located on the interior side of the front door and on the back wall of the  
frame.  
„2ꢀ Rail system  
The cartridge accessor is carried through the library on the rail system  
installed in each frame. The rail system consists of two horizontal rails, one  
at the top and one at the bottom of the frame.  
10 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 8. Model B16 Virtual Tape Server Functional Components (front)  
Figure 9 on page 12 shows the functional components of the Model B16 Virtual  
Tape Server frame, viewable from the rear (shown with rear door removed):  
„1ꢀ Cartridge storage cells  
Are located on the interior side of the front door and on the back wall of the  
frame.  
„2ꢀ Rail system  
The cartridge accessor is carried through the library on the rail system  
installed in each frame. The rail system consists of two horizontal rails, one  
at the top and one at the bottom of the frame.  
„3ꢀ Power control compartment  
Power to all components in the frame is distributed through the power  
control compartment.  
„4ꢀ Virtual Tape Server controller  
The Virtual Tape Server controller consists of a RISC processor and  
associated adapter cards.  
„5ꢀ Disk storage  
Disk storage holds the contents of the Tape Volume Cache and is managed  
by the Virtual Tape Server controller. Two or four disk storage features are  
installed in a Virtual Tape Server control unit frame.  
Chapter 1. Introduction 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 9. Model B16 Virtual Tape Server Functional Components (rear)  
Figure 10 on page 13 shows the Model B18 Virtual Tape Server frame, viewable  
from the front:  
12 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 10. Model B18 Virtual Tape Server (front)  
Figure 11 on page 14 shows the functional components of the Model B18 Virtual  
Tape Server frame, viewable from the rear (shown with rear door removed):  
„1ꢀ Disk storage  
Disk storage holds the contents of the Tape Volume Cache and is managed  
by the Virtual Tape Server controller. One to four disk storage features may  
be installed in a Model B18 VTS.  
„2ꢀ Virtual Tape Server controller  
The Virtual Tape Server controller consists of a RISC processor and  
associated adapter cards.  
„3ꢀ Power control compartment  
Power to all components in the frame is distributed through the power  
control compartment.  
Chapter 1. Introduction 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 11. Model B18 Virtual Tape Server Functional Components (rear)  
Figure 12 on page 15 shows the following functional components of the Model HA1  
Left Service Bay from the right front:  
„1ꢀ Cartridge storage cells  
Are located on the interior side of the front doors on the 3494 and on the  
back interior wall but are for service use only.  
„2ꢀBarrier door  
Used by service personnel to separate the service bay from the main aisle  
of the 3494. This allows for concurrent service of the accessor and the  
associated hardware.  
14 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 12. Model HA1, Left Service Bay Functional Components (right front)  
Figure 13 on page 16 shows the following functional components of the Model HA1,  
Right Service Bay from the right front:  
„1ꢀ Cartridge storage cells  
Are located on the interior side of the front doors on the 3494 and on the  
back interior wall but are for service use only.  
„2ꢀ Barrier door  
Used by service personnel to separate the service bay from the main aisle  
of the 3494. This allows for concurrent service of the accessor and the  
associated hardware.  
„3ꢀHot standby library manager  
The Hot Standby Library Manager can take control of all operations in the  
3494. Its hardware consists of a controller, display, pointing device, and  
keyboard. An optional Remote Library Manager Console feature is also  
available for remote installation on a Local Area Network (LAN)  
environment.  
Hot standby accessor or second active accessor (not visible)  
Moves on horizontal and vertical axes, moving cartridges between the  
storage cells, devices, and input and output facilities. The vision system  
(barcode reader) on the cartridge accessor identifies cartridges. This  
accessor can be controlled by either Library Manager.  
Picker (not visible)  
The part of the cartridge accessor that picks the cartridges. The picker  
comes standard with one gripper installed or two grippers if the optional  
Dual Gripper feature is installed.  
Chapter 1. Introduction 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 13. Model HA1, Right Service Bay Functional Components (right front)  
Cartridge Input and Output Facilities  
The following four types of input and output facilities are available on the 3494:  
v High-capacity output facility  
v High-capacity input/output facility  
v Single-cell output facility  
v Convenience Input⁄Output Station feature  
High-Capacity Output Facility  
The high-capacity output facility, if defined during installation, reserves a section of  
the cartridge storage area for high-capacity output of cartridges.  
Library Type  
Single Gripper  
Dual Gripper  
Cartridge Capacity  
10, 20, 40, 80, or a full door  
10, 20, 36, 72, or a full door  
The cartridge cells are located inside the control unit frame on wall 2, column A,  
starting with cell 1 (expressed as location 2 A 1) „2ꢀ (see Figure 14 on page 17).  
See “Removing Ejected Cartridges from the High-Capacity Output Facility” on  
page 82 for operating instructions.  
High-Capacity Input/Output Facility  
A High-Capacity Input/Output facility may be defined for the inside wall (drive side  
walls) so that both inserts (Input) and ejects (Output) can be performed. Storage  
Unit (SU), B16 or Drive unit (DU) walls, 3 through 31 (odd numbered walls only),  
16 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
can be configured as High-Capacity Input/Output. An SU, or B16, configured as  
High-Capacity I/O can contain 100 (upper half) or 200 (whole wall) cells. A DU  
configured as High-Capacity I/O contains from 50 (six 3590 drives) to 135 (two  
3590 drives) and uses all available cells in the wall. Only a single wall can be  
configured at any time (single High-Capacity input/output facility).  
Single-Cell Output Facility  
If a Convenience Input⁄Output Station is not installed and a high-capacity output  
facility or high-capacity input/output facility is not defined, a single cell in the door of  
the control unit frame is provided for output. The location of the single cell „1ꢀ as  
shown in Figure 14 is defined as 2 A 1. If the optional dual gripper feature is  
installed, the single cell location is 2 A 3. Any empty and unassigned cell can be  
used for input operations. See “Removing an Ejected Cartridge from the Single-Cell  
Output Facility” on page 81 for operating instructions.  
Figure 14. Control Unit Frame Cartridge Storage Cells  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station Feature  
If the Convenience Input⁄Output Station feature is installed, you can add or remove  
from ten to 30 cartridges from the library without interrupting the normal operations  
of the library. See “Using the Convenience Input⁄Output Station Feature to Insert  
Cartridges” on page 78 and “Removing Ejected Cartridges from the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station Feature” on page 82 for the operating instructions for this  
feature.  
Chapter 1. Introduction 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
|
There are two modes of operation for the Convenience Input⁄Output Station while in  
Input mode: Insert, and Import. If one or more Virtual Tape Servers are  
Import/Export capable, then the Convenience Input⁄Output Station will be in Import  
mode.  
Cartridge Tape  
The 3494 is designed to automate the storage and movement of the Cartridge  
System Tape, the Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape, and the 3590 High  
Performance Cartridge Tape.  
Note: The 3590 High Performance Cartridge Tape can only be used on 3590 High  
Performance Magnetic Tape Subsystems. The Cartridge System Tape and  
the Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape can only be used on 3490E  
Magnetic Tape Subsystems.  
The 3494 supports an intermix of the Cartridge System Tape, the Enhanced  
Capacity Cartridge System Tape, and the High Performance Cartridge Tape  
depending on the model of tape drive subsystem installed. The Enhanced Capacity  
Cartridge System Tape is visually distinguished from the Cartridge System Tape by  
its two-color (gray and white) plastic case. The High Performance Cartridge Tape is  
visually distinguished from the Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape and the  
Cartridge System Tape by its black plastic case, blue plastic inserts, and blue  
leader block.  
Figure 15 on page 19 shows the Cartridge System Tape „1ꢀ, Enhanced Capacity  
Cartridge System Tape „2ꢀ, and the High Performance Cartridge Tape „3ꢀ. Note the  
blue plastic inserts of the High Performance Cartridge Tape cartridge and the  
placement of the media-type label (either 1, E, or J).  
The vision system identifies the type of cartridge during an inventory or insert  
operation by reading a separate, media-type label to distinguish between the three  
types of cartridges. A standard Cartridge System Tape is identified by a media-type  
label with the character 1. The Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape is  
identified with the character E. The High Performance Cartridge Tape cartridge is  
identified with the character J. See “Unlabeled Tape Facility” on page 22 for more  
information.  
Notes:  
1. If both 3490 and 3590 drive types are installed in the 3494, all cartridges should  
have a label in the seventh character position. See Figure 15 on page 19.  
2. The media type of the cartridge can be determined in several ways:  
v The most desirable method is for the vision system to read the seventh  
character on the label.  
v If users have cartridges without the seventh character, they may assign  
volser ranges (see “Volser Range for Media Types” on page 161) for  
determining the media type. If the vision system does not successfully read a  
seventh character, the library manager checks the volser read against the  
established volser ranges. If the volser is found, the media type that is  
associated with the range is used.  
v Additionally, a default media type can be set during a teach operation. The  
default media type is used for the cartridge if the vision system cannot  
18 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
successfully read a seventh character and there is no volser range that  
includes this volser. This method is typically used for Cartridge System Tape  
without the seventh character.  
If none of the above methods are successful at assigning a media type, the  
cartridge is ejected, and an operator intervention is set.  
The vision system also identifies the cartridge volser during an inventory or insert  
operation by reading the external labels on the cartridge. The media-type and volser  
information is then stored in the database in the library manager.  
Blue  
Gray  
Gray  
White  
Black  
Figure 15. Cartridge System Tape Identification  
Tape Cartridge Requirements  
Figure 16 on page 20 shows the cartridge system tape requirements:  
v The tape cartridge „1ꢀ should have an external label „2ꢀ applied.  
v The file-protect selector „3ꢀ must be set to the correct position for the volume’s  
intended purpose (see “Cartridge File Protection” on page 20).  
v The leader block „4ꢀ on the tape cartridge must be seated before inserting the  
cartridge into the library.  
v The tape cartridge is inserted into the library cartridge storage cells in the  
direction „5ꢀ shown so that the external label is readable when stored.  
Note: When inserting the tape cartridges into the Convenience Input⁄Output  
Station feature, insert the external label side first in the direction „6ꢀ.  
Chapter 1. Introduction 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 16. Cartridge System Tape  
Cartridge File Protection  
Each tape cartridge includes a file-protect selector „3ꢀ (see Figure 16) that, when  
set to the file-protect position, prevents writing on or erasing data from the tape.  
Normally, cartridges used in the 3494 should not be manually file-protected. If  
required, software can be used to file-protect the cartridges. This allows the host,  
when appropriate, to identify a cartridge that no longer contains current data and  
can be a scratch cartridge. Do not file-protect scratch cartridges because new data  
cannot be written to file-protected cartridges. For additional information, refer to  
Care and Handling of the IBM Magnetic Tape Cartridge  
Cartridge System Tape Labels  
Each tape cartridge in the 3494 must have external labels that are operator- and  
machine-readable. The labels identify the volume serial number (volser) and type of  
cartridge. Currently supported labels are Tri-Code, available from Wright Line  
Corporation, Tri-Optic, available from Engineered Data Products, and labels from  
Information Data Storage.  
Note: The only exception for the label requirement is when using the Unlabeled  
Tape Operations function. See “Unlabeled Tape Facility” on page 22 for more  
information.  
The volser label contains up to six characters, and the separate media-type label  
provides a seventh character for media-type identification. A volser can contain one  
to six characters, with blanks padded on the right for a volser with fewer than six  
characters. Characters can be uppercase A–Z and numerics 0–9. Each tape  
cartridge typically has a separate single-character media-type label that identifies  
the cartridge type. The media-type label character for a Cartridge System Tape is 1,  
for an Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape is E, and for High Performance  
Cartridge Tape is J.  
Note: See “Cartridge Tape” on page 18 for the process used to determine the  
cartridge media type.  
20 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The external labels on the cartridges identify the cartridges to the 3494. Host  
control software in some operating environments requires that internally written  
labels on volumes correspond to external volsers. IBM recommends that  
correspondence of external and internal cartridge labels be verified by library control  
software as part of mount processing. Cleaner cartridges must also have operator  
and machine-readable external labels to identify each cartridge.  
High Performance Cartridge Tapes (HPCT) managed by the VTS are automatically  
checked for the correct internal volume label and re-labeled if necessary.  
Figure 17 shows the possible labeling configurations of the tape cartridges and  
Table 1 shows how the library handles the different types of labeling configurations.  
Blue  
Gray  
Black  
White  
Gray  
White  
Gray  
Gray  
Figure 17. Cartridge System Tape Labels  
Table 1. Cartridge Tape Labeling (Media type default set to Cartridge System Tape)  
Media-Type  
Cartridge Type  
Color  
Label  
Handled as:  
„1ꢀ Cartridge System Tape  
Gray  
Not present  
Cartridge System  
Tape(default, see note)  
„2ꢀ Cartridge System Tape  
Gray  
Present (1)  
Cartridge System Tape  
„3ꢀ Enhanced Capacity  
Cartridge System Tape  
Gray and  
white  
Not present  
Cartridge System  
Tape(default, see note)  
„4ꢀ Enhanced Capacity  
Cartridge System Tape  
Gray and  
white  
Present (E)  
Present (J)  
Enhanced Capacity  
Cartridge System Tape  
„5ꢀ High Performance  
Cartridge Tape  
Black with  
blue leader  
block and  
identification  
notches  
High Performance Cartridge  
Tape  
Note: The default could be Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape or High  
Performance Cartridge Tape instead of Cartridge System Tape; refer to “Operational Status”  
on page 111.  
Chapter 1. Introduction 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unlabeled Tape Facility  
Note: Do not use this function with cartridges with machine-readable labels.  
Unlabeled tape operations are designed to allow the operator to occasionally insert  
volumes into the 3494 that do not have external machine-readable volser and  
media-type labels. Once inserted through the unlabeled tape facility, the volumes  
may be used in the same manner that regular, properly labeled volumes are used,  
with the exception of any operations that require the external machine-readable  
label to be read.  
It is not recommended that volumes to be managed by the VTS be inserted using  
this facility. However, in the event the external label on a stacked volume becomes  
damaged, this facility can be used to re-insert the volume until its external label can  
be replaced.  
To use the unlabeled tape facility, the operator selects the Insert Unlabeled  
Cartridges command from the Commands pull-down on the library manager. The  
operator then provides the volser and media-type information requested. The  
unlabeled tapes are then placed into the Convenience Input⁄Output Station. The  
library will then move the cartridges from the Convenience Input⁄Output Station to  
their designated cells. The library manager database is updated to indicate the  
location of the cartridges using the volser and media-type information provided. All  
hosts are notified that the cartridges have been added to the insert category just as  
regular, properly labeled volumes are handled.  
Inventory update operations only verifies that all unlabeled cartridges are in cells  
that previously contained unlabeled cartridges.  
Note: This facility should not be used for a large number of cartridges or for  
cartridges that are stored in the library for a long time. Refer to “Insert  
Unlabeled Cartridges” on page 184 for additional information.  
Cartridge Labeling  
To apply an external volser cartridge label, do the following:  
1. Examine the label before you apply it to the cartridge. Do not use the label if it  
has voids or smears in the printed characters or bar codes.  
2. Remove the label from the label sheet carefully so you do not stretch the label  
or cause the edges to curl.  
3. Line up either end of the label with the lip of the label indentation. Be sure to  
position the bar-code side of the label toward the inside edge of the indentation.  
Do not allow the label to roll up or over this lip; the label must be flat within the  
cartridge indentation surface. Apply the label either from the top or from the  
bottom. Carefully position the label within the indentation on the end of the  
cartridge away from the leader block. The machine-readable bar code must face  
to the right.  
4. Apply the label parallel to the long edge of the indentation. Do not pull the label  
excessively because it will stretch.  
5. Smooth out the label so that no wrinkles or bubbles exist on the label. Use light  
finger pressure to smooth the label and secure it to the cartridge.  
6. Verify that the label is smooth and parallel and has no roll-up or roll-over.  
22 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The label must be flat to within 0.5 mm (0.2 in.) over the length of the label and  
have no folds, missing pieces, or smudges. Figure 18 shows the correct position  
of the label on the cartridge case.  
N o Ro ll- u p o r Ro ll-o v e r  
N o Wrink les  
N o B ub b les  
N o Stre tc h  
Parallel to Ed g e  
N o Ro ll- u p o r Ro ll-o v e r  
Figure 18. Cartridge Label Position  
Do not place a new label over an existing label. Remove an old label by slowly  
pulling it at a right angle to the cartridge case. Do not reuse a label.  
No other labels can be placed on the same surface as the external volser cartridge  
label. Labels on other surfaces of the cartridge must not interfere with the cartridge  
accessor’s gripper or the tape drives, and should not be machine readable as that  
may interfere with the ability of the vision system to read the volser and the  
media-type label.  
Media-Type Labeling  
Media-type labels are applied in two different ways as follows:  
v If the cartridge has no separate area below the volser label (for example, an  
indented area), place the media-type label in line and just below the volser label.  
v If the cartridge has a separate area (for example, an indented area)  
approximately 2 mm (0.08 in.) below the &vol label, place the media-type label in  
the separate area.  
The label must be flat to within 0.5 mm (0.2 in.) over the length of the label and  
have no folds, missing pieces, or smudges. The label must not be rotated more  
than 3° from being parallel with the edges of the cartridge.  
Chapter 1. Introduction 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cartridge Storage Cells  
The cartridge cell locations are named so the operator can find the cartridges  
during Manual mode operation. The cell name consists of three values: a wall  
number, a column letter, and a row number. For example, Figure 19 shows cell  
location 2 A 1.  
Figure 19. Cartridge Storage Cell Names  
Figure 20 on page 25 shows the cartridge storage cell labeling.  
Wall number  
The wall numbers „3ꢀ that are even-numbered represent the walls on the  
front doors of the library. The wall numbers that are odd-numbered  
represent the walls on the rear of the library.  
Column letters  
The column letters „1ꢀ range from A to E and are labeled from left to right.  
Note: The control unit frame has only four columns; therefore, the letter  
range is from A to D.  
Row numbers  
The row numbers „2ꢀ range from 1 to 20 or from 1 to 40, depending on the  
frame and the wall. The numbers start with 1 at the top of the frame and  
end at 40 for the lowest row.  
24 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
A
B
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 20. Cartridge Storage Cell Labeling  
Reserved Cartridge Storage Cells  
The library reserves certain cells within the library for functions that the operator  
does not actively control.  
In non-high availability models these locations are Error Recovery Cells 1 A 1 (1 A 3  
instead of 1 A 1 if the optional Dual Gripper feature is installed) and CE cartridge  
cell 1 A 20. If both 3490E and 3590 tape subsystems are present, CE cartridge 1 A  
19 is also reserved. These are used for error recovery cell and for service  
cartridges. In high availability models, these locations are Error Recovery Cell 1 A 1  
and 1 A 2 or 1 A 3 and 1 A 4 if the Dual Gripper Feature is installed. CE cartridge  
cells are in the service bays.  
Cartridge Storage Capacity  
Table 2 shows the cartridge capacity of each frame.  
Table 2. Magstar 3494 Cartridge Capacity  
Without  
With  
Model or Frame  
Dual Gripper  
Dual Gripper  
Model L10, L12, or L14  
240 (see notes 1, 4, 5, 216 (see notes 2, 4, 5,  
and 6)  
and 6)  
Model S10, FC 5400  
400  
360  
Chapter 1. Introduction 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 2. Magstar 3494 Cartridge Capacity (continued)  
Without  
With  
Model or Frame  
Dual Gripper  
Dual Gripper  
Model D10  
400  
360  
(without 3490 Model CxA/F1A)  
Model D10, FC 5300  
300  
270  
(with 3490 Model CxA/F1A)  
Model D12, FC 5500  
400  
335  
360  
305  
Model D12, FC 5302  
(with one or two 3590 Models B1A)  
Model D12, FC 5302, FC 5502  
290  
250  
260  
230  
(with three or four 3590 Models B1A)  
Model D12, FC 5302 (with RPQs), FC  
5502 (with RPQ)  
(with five or six 3590 Models B1A)  
Model D14  
400  
345  
305  
360  
305  
275  
(without 3590 Model B1A)  
Model D14, FC 5304  
(with one or two 3590 Models B1A)  
Model D14, FC 5304 (with RPQ)  
(with three or four 3590 Models B1A)  
Model B16, or FC 5500  
Model B18  
400  
0
360  
0
Model HA1 (service bays)  
Notes:  
0
0
1. The optional Convenience Input⁄Output Station feature reduces the cartridge capacity by  
30 cartridges (FC 5210) or 80 cartridges (FC 5230).  
2. With dual grippers installed, the optional Convenience Input⁄Output Station feature  
reduces the cartridge capacity by 26 cartridges (FC 5210) or 72 cartridges (FC 5230).  
3. Selecting the high-capacity input/output station facility reduces the cartridge capacity,  
depending on the options chosen (see “High-Capacity Input/Output Facility” on page 16).  
4. One cell is reserved for ejecting cartridges if the optional Convenience Input⁄Output  
Station feature is not installed and the high-capacity output facility is not defined.  
5. A maximum of two cells are reserved for certain service representative functions. When  
the high availability unit is installed, there are no cells reserved in the L1x unit for  
service functions.  
6. One cell is reserved for error-recovery operations for configurations without the high  
availability unit and two cells are reserved for error-recovery operations for  
configurations with the high availability unit.  
26 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Library Manager  
The library manager processes all requests and control functions in the library.  
User Interface  
The user interface enables the operator to obtain information about the operation of  
the library and instructs the library manager to perform specific tasks through the  
use of the library manager console (display, keyboard, and pointing device).  
Password-protection for the level of authorization is optional. The user interface  
recognizes the following three authorization levels:  
General operator  
A general operator performs the day-to-day basic interactions with the  
library. This is generally limited to inquiries about the library status or to  
perform cartridge insert and eject operations. A general operator has a  
limited level of authorization.  
System administrator  
A system administrator is an operator with additional training on the  
management of not only the library but of the data also. The system  
administrator typically handles the initial installation of volumes into the  
library and the problem resolution with volumes during operation. The  
system administrator has authorization access to all functions of the library,  
except for those uniquely related to the service and repair of the library.  
Service representative  
The service representative has full authorization access to all functions of  
the library.  
Password-Protection  
|
|
The following functions of the library manager can be protected by a password if  
the customer chooses to use password-protection:  
v Service menu  
v Inventory new storage  
v Re-inventory complete system  
v Emergency power off (EPO) recovery  
v Shutdown  
v Keyboard and display lockup  
v System administrator to unlock  
v Unlock keyboard and display  
v Service Access  
|
v Cancel VTS Export/Import  
Each time a user enters a part of the application where a password is required,  
then enters a password, a log entry is made at the library manager. Exiting a  
protected menu also creates a log entry. See “System Administrator Password” on  
page 200 for more information.  
Chapter 1. Introduction 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Database  
The library manager creates and maintains a database that contains the  
configuration of the library, the physical location information for all the elements of  
the library serviced by the cartridge accessor, the inventory of the physical cartridge  
volumes and logical volumes managed by a VTS, and information about their use  
and current status, and the status of each 3490E/3590 device and virtual device. As  
operations progress through the library, the database is dynamically updated on the  
disk drive to reflect the current status of the library.  
High Availability (Model HA1)  
If the high availability model is installed, a second library manager is provided in the  
right-hand service bay. Each library manager contains two hard (disk) drives, a  
primary and secondary disk. Under normal operation, one library manager is the  
active library manager and the other library manager is the standby library manager.  
The active library manager, on its primary disk, creates and maintains the database,  
which is dynamically updated to reflect the current status of each library. The  
standby library primary disk contains a back-up of the database, which is also  
dynamically updated to reflect the current status of the library.  
If the active library manager fails, the standby library manager automatically  
becomes the active library manager and takes control of operations. A new backup  
database is then created on the active library manager’s secondary disk drive. The  
new active library manager runs in degraded mode until the failing library manager  
is repaired. This allows continued operation of the 3494.  
Database Information Available to a Host  
The library manager maintains information in its database that may be requested  
through a host. The form of the particular host request is dependent on the host  
environment. The following information is available through the host:  
Category inventory data  
Records for 100 volumes in the library for the category specified, starting  
after the sequence number specified by the request. If fewer than 100  
volumes are in the category, all of the remaining records are returned. Each  
record contains the current status and media-type for a volume in the  
inventory.  
Device data  
Information about any particular device within the library. This information  
includes the device states, volser, and category of the mounted cartridge.  
Expanded volume data  
More detailed information about the current status and media-type for a  
specific volume than the volume data information request. It does not  
provide physical location information for the volume.  
Inventory volume count  
The number of volumes in the library for either the entire inventory or a  
specified category.  
Inventory data  
Records for 100 volumes in the library, starting after the volume specified  
by the request. If fewer than 100 volumes remain in the library, all of the  
28 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
remaining records are returned. Each record contains the current status and  
media-type for a volume in the inventory.  
Library information data  
The current operational status of the library and basic library configuration  
data with information on installed options.  
Reserved category data  
Information about the categories that have already been reserved within the  
library.  
Statistical data  
Information about the current workload and performance characteristics of  
the library.  
Volume data  
Information about the current status and media-type of specified volume.  
Category attribute data  
Information about the category attributes, for example, name.  
Operational Modes and States  
The 3494 operates in one of the following modes:  
Auto  
Pause  
Manual  
The operational states of the 3494 are as follows:  
Online  
Offline  
For a detailed description of these operations, see “Chapter 4. Operational Modes  
and States, and Informational States” on page 63.  
Chapter 1. Introduction 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
30 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2. Controls and Indicators  
The controls and the indicators for the 3494 are described in this chapter.  
The 3494 is controlled through the use of the operator panel „1ꢀ (see Figure 21) on  
the front of the control unit frame. The Convenience Input⁄Output Station feature „2ꢀ  
is also on the front of the control unit framenext to the operator panel, if it is  
installed. The handles „3ꢀ for opening the doors on the front of the frames are  
located next to the door locks „4ꢀ. The library manager is in the rear of the control  
unit frame. The tape subsystem controls are on the front of the drives inside the  
control unit frame and drive unit frame.  
Note: Two keys are supplied with the 3494. One key is used by the operators and  
service personnel to open the front doors on the library. The other key is for  
use by service personnel to open the doors on the back of the library.  
Figure 21. Control Unit Frame Front Door  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
 
Operator Panel  
The 3494 operator panel is mounted on the front door of the control unit frame.  
Normal operation of the 3494 is controlled through the use of this operator panel.  
Power Controls and Status Indicators  
See Figure 22 on page 33 for the locations of the controls and indicators.  
„1ꢀ Unit Emergency switch  
The Unit Emergency switch turns off power to the 3494 immediately and  
should only be used in an emergency. The Unit Emergency switch must be  
in the on position for the 3494 to be powered on.  
Note: If the 3494 Library has more than eight frames, or has the optional  
High Availability Model Service Bays, a second unit emergency  
switch is located at the right end of the Library. Either switch can be  
used to immediately turn off power.  
Note: The 3494 Library Unit Emergency switches do not turn off power to  
the attached stand-alone Model B18 Virtual Tape Server.  
„2ꢀ Unit Power switch  
The Unit Power switch turns power on and off to the components inside the  
3494. The Unit Power switch is used to power on and off the 3494 under  
normal conditions. Using the Unit Power switch to turn off power to the  
3494 allows the library manager, Virtual Tape Servers, tape control units,  
and tape drives to shut down in an orderly manner.  
„3ꢀ Rack Power Ready LED  
The Rack Power Ready light-emitting diode (LED), when lit, indicates the  
AC power is on in the 3494 control unit.  
„4ꢀ System Power Ready LED  
The System Power Ready LED, when lit, indicates the AC power is on to  
the control units and drive units inside the 3494.  
„5ꢀ Power Off Pending LED  
The Power Off Pending LED, when flashing, indicates the power to the  
3494 is being turned off.  
„6ꢀ Local Remote power switch  
The Local Remote power switch allows the library’s power to be controlled  
by the switches on the operator panel (local) or through an AS/400 host  
(remote) if the Local Remote Power Feature is installed. The Local Remote  
switch must be in the local position if the remote power feature is not  
installed.  
Attention: Pressing the Local Remote switch to the remote position, if the  
Local Remote Power feature is not installed, causes the 3494 to power off.  
Motion Controls and Status Indicators  
See Figure 22 on page 33 for the locations of the controls and indicators.  
„7ꢀ Auto mode switch and status LED  
The Auto mode motion control switch allows the operator to place the  
library into Auto mode. The LED flashes during the mode transition and  
32 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
remains lit when in Auto mode. If the mode transition cannot be completed,  
the Intervention Required LED will light.  
„8ꢀ Pause mode switch and status LED  
The Pause mode motion control switch allows the operator to place the  
library into Pause mode. The LED flashes during the mode transition and  
remains lit when in Pause mode. If the mode transition cannot be  
completed, the Intervention Required LED will light.  
„9ꢀ Intervention Required LED  
The Intervention Required LED, when lit, indicates operator interventions  
are required. See “Operator Intervention” on page 199 for instructions to  
perform operator interventions.  
Figure 22. Operator Panel without Convenience Input⁄Output Station Feature  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station Status Indicators  
If the Convenience Input⁄Output Station feature is installed on the 3494, four  
additional status lights are present on the operator panel. See Figure 23 on page 34  
for the locations of the controls and the indicators.  
„1ꢀ Input Mode  
The Input Mode LED, when lit, indicates that cartridges are in the  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station and the station is in Input mode.  
„2ꢀ Output Mode  
The Output Mode LED, when lit, indicates that cartridges are being ejected  
from the library into the Convenience Input⁄Output Station.  
„3ꢀ Unload Required  
The Unload Required LED, when lit, indicates that the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station has ejected cartridges that need to be removed.  
Chapter 2. Controls and Indicators 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
„4ꢀ Input⁄Output Locked  
The I⁄O Locked LED, when lit, indicates that the Convenience Input⁄Output  
Station station is locked and being used by the cartridge accessor.  
„5ꢀConvenience Input/Output Station Operation Tab  
The Convenience Input⁄Output Station operation tab is used to open the  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station door when the door is unlocked (when  
the I⁄O Locked LED is not lit).  
Figure 23. Operator Panel with Convenience Input⁄Output Station Feature  
Library Manager  
The library manager display „1ꢀ (see Figure 24 on page 35) and keyboard (with  
pointing device) „2ꢀ are located in the rear of the control unit frame. The library  
manager is used to perform system administrator activities and advanced operator  
activities. The brightness and contrast controls for the library manager display are  
located on the back of the display. An optional Remote Library Manager Console  
feature is also available for installing in a remote location on a LAN environment.  
The library manager display is shut off by the operating system software when there  
has been no activity by the operator. This “snooze” function is provided to conserve  
power and increase the reliability of the display hardware. If the library is powered  
on and the display is off, the operator can press any key on the keyboard to  
activate the display.  
See “Selections with the Pointing Device” on page 92 for a detailed description on  
using the pointing device. The optional High Availability Model, Service Bay B, is  
similar in looks and function.  
34 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 24. Library Manager  
3490 Tape Subsystem Controls for Models C10, C11, C1A, C22, and  
C2A  
The 3490E Model CXA control unit operator panel „1ꢀ and the 3490E Model CXA  
drive unit operator panel „2ꢀ (see Figure 25 on page 36) are accessible to the  
operator by opening the front door of the frame containing the tape subsystem to be  
accessed.  
When 3490E subsystems are attached to the 3494, the following 3490E functions  
change:  
Drive control  
The loading and the unloading of volumes are controlled by the library  
manager. The 3490E subsystem communicates with the library manager to  
update the database with the drive status and the cartridge location  
information.  
Message displays  
The library manager controls which messages are displayed to prevent the  
messages from getting out of synchronization with the library manager  
during Manual mode operations.  
Attention interrupt  
The library manager can use the communication path to the 3490E  
subsystems to send information to the host.  
For more information on 3490E controls and indicators, see IBM 3490 Magnetic  
Tape Subsystem Enhanced Capability Models C10, C11, C1A, C22, and C2A  
Chapter 2. Controls and Indicators 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operator’s Guide or IBM 3490E Tape Subsystem Models F01, F1A, F11, and FC0  
Installation, Planning and Operator’s Guide.  
C h a n n e l S ta tu s  
E n a b l e  
D i s a b l e  
A
IM L  
P o w e r O n  
P o w e r O ff  
A
Wa it  
E rr o r  
E n a b l e  
B
D i s a b l e  
B
X X X X X X X  
X
R e a d y  
U n lo a d  
P r o t e c te d  
Figure 25. 3490E Controls and Indicators  
3490 Tape Subsystem Controls for Model F1A  
The 3490E Model F1A drive unit operator panel „1ꢀ is accessible to the operator by  
opening the front of the frame containing the tape subsystem to be accessed.  
When 3490E subsystems are attached to the 3494, the following 3490E functions  
change:  
Drive control  
The loading and the unloading of volumes are controlled by the library  
manager. The 3490E subsystem communicates with the library manager to  
update the database with the drive status and the cartridge location  
information.  
Message displays  
The library manager controls which messages are displayed to prevent the  
messages from getting out of synchronization with the library manager  
during Manual mode operations.  
Attention interrupt  
The library manager can use the communication path to the 3490E  
subsystems to send information to the host.  
36 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For more information on 3490E controls and indicators, see IBM 3490E Tape  
Subsystem Models F00, F01, F1A, and F11 Installation, Planning, and Operator’s  
Guide.  
Figure 26. 3490E Controls and Indicators for Model F1A  
3590 Model B1A Tape Subsystem Controls  
The 3590 Model B1A operator panel „1ꢀ (see Figure 27 on page 38) is accessible  
to the operator by opening the front door of the frame containing the tape  
subsystem to be accessed.  
Chapter 2. Controls and Indicators 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 27. 3590 Model B1A Operator Panel  
When 3590 subsystems are attached to the 3494, the following 3590 functions  
change:  
Drive control  
The loading and unloading of volumes is controlled by the library manager.  
The 3590 subsystem communicates with the library manager to update the  
database with the drive status and cartridge location information.  
Message displays  
The library manager controls which messages are displayed to prevent the  
messages from getting out of synchronization with the library manager  
during Manual mode operations.  
Attention interrupt  
The library manager can use the communication path to the 3590 Model  
A00 subsystem to send information to the host.  
For more information on 3590 controls and indicators, see IBM 3590 High  
Performance Tape Subsystem User’s Guide , GA32-0330.  
3494 Model B18 Operator Panel  
The 3494 Model B18 Virtual Tape Server operator panel is mounted on the rear  
door of the unit frame.  
Power Controls  
Figure 28 on page 39 shows the location of the power control on the Model B18  
VTS.  
„1ꢀ Unit Emergency switch  
The Unit Emergency switch turns off power to the 3494 Model B18  
38 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
immediately and should only be used in an emergency. Abrupt removal of  
power in case of emergency may cause loss of customer data. The Unit  
Emergency switch must be in the on position for the 3494 Model B18 to be  
powered on by the associated 3494 Library.  
Note: The 3494 Model B18 Unit Emergency switch will not cause power to  
be removed from the associated 3494 library.  
Figure 28. Model B18 Virtual Tape Server Operator Panel  
3494 Model B16 Virtual Tape Server Controls  
All control functions for the Model B16 Virtual Tape Server are integrated into the  
library manager. See “Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures” on page 85.  
3494 Model B18 Virtual Tape Server Controls  
All control functions for the Model B18 Virtual Tape Server, other than emergency  
power control, are integrated into the library manager. For more information, see  
“Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures” on page 85. Refer to “3494 Model  
B18 Operator Panel” on page 38 for the Unit Emergency Switch Function.  
Chapter 2. Controls and Indicators 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
40 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3. Operational Characteristics  
The operational characteristics of the 3494 are described in this chapter.  
3490E/3590 Tape Subsystem Operation  
The 3494 controls the loading, unloading, and affiliated operation of the tape  
subsystem in the library. No operator attendance is required unless the library is  
unable to recover from a subsystem problem.  
In addition to existing tape subsystem error recovery, the control unit and the library  
manager execute additional recovery procedures when the tape drive detects a  
load, unload, or tension loss failure.  
Virtual Tape Server  
The IBM Magstar 3494 Model B16 or B18 Virtual Tape Server provides for a higher  
utilization of 3590 tape technology than enabled by current tape controller concepts.  
A Virtual Tape Server provides the improvement in utilization without impacting  
current operating system or independent software vendors. The subsystem  
combines the random access and high performance characteristics of disk storage  
with outboard hierarchical storage management and virtual tape drives to provide  
significant reductions in the number of physical cartridges, tape drives, and  
automated libraries needed to store the customer tape data. The key concepts for  
the architecture of the subsystem are:  
v Emulation of 32 or 64 3490-type tape drives  
v Tape volume cache  
v Storage management of the tape volume cache  
v Maintaining data fragments from copied volumes  
v Fast response for non-specific mount requests  
Emulation of 3490-Type Tape Drives  
From a host perspective, the Virtual Tape Server subsystem looks like two or four  
3490E control units, each with 16 tape drives. Each emulated drive is called a  
virtual tape drive. The subsystem handles all 3490 tape commands. Emulating a  
3490–type tape drive eliminates the need for host software support of a new type of  
tape drive in order to utilize the capacity of 3590–type tape drives. There is no  
direct relationship between a virtual tape drive and a real 3590 tape drive.  
Data is written and read as if it is stored on a real Cartridge System Tape or an  
Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape. However, within the subsystem, data is  
stored on disks. All tape read and write commands are translated to read and write  
data records from or to disk storage. Tape marks are stored as special records on  
the disk storage as well. Volumes residing on disk storage are called virtual  
volumes.  
The amount of data stored on a virtual volume is variable up to a maximum as  
determined by the media type selected. Two media types are emulated (standard  
Cartridge System Tape and Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape); they can  
hold up to 400MB or 800MB of customer data, respectively. The 3494 Model B18  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
 
with the ESCON High Performance Option (EHPO) feature emulates storage of up  
to 2.4 GB (3:1 compression) on the virtual Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System  
Tape.  
All host interactions with data in a Virtual Tape Server subsystem are through virtual  
volumes and associated virtual tape drives; there is no direct access to the data on  
a physical cartridge or drive.  
Tape Volume Cache  
The size of the disk storage is large enough so more virtual volumes can be  
retained in it than just the ones currently associated with the virtual drives. After an  
application closes a virtual volume, if it was modified, a copy of it is made by the  
storage management software in the subsystem onto a physical tape. The virtual  
volume remains available on the disk storage until the space it occupies is needed  
to satisfy another mount request. Leaving the virtual volume in the disk storage  
allows for fast access to it during a subsequent request for the volume. The disk  
storage, and management of that space to keep volumes available after they are  
closed, is called the tape volume cache. The performance for mounting of a volume  
that is in the tape volume cache is quicker than if a real physical volume is  
mounted. Disk storage, in effect, caches the tape volumes and provides for fast  
access.  
Storage Management of the Tape Volume Cache  
Storage management software in the subsystem manages the contents of the tape  
volume cache. Virtual tape volumes are copied from the tape volume cache to  
physical tape when the virtual volume has been closed, and they are recalled from  
tape to the tape volume cache when they are again requested to be mounted. The  
storage management software stacks multiple migrated files onto a 3590 tape,  
thereby utilizing its storage capacity.  
Maintaining Data Fragments from Copied Volumes  
When the cache space occupied by a closed virtual tape volume is needed for  
other active virtual volumes, the data it represents is not completely removed. A  
fragment of the data is kept on disk storage. The data fragment includes information  
about the copied virtual volume so that it can be recalled and it also includes the  
first several records from the last use of the volume. Normally, the first few records  
on a tape contain a tape volume label, and enough data records are maintained to  
contain an IBM standard tape label plus any unique user label records.  
Fast Response for Non-specific Mount Requests  
When a non-specific mount is requested, the customer application is going to write  
data from the beginning of tape, overwriting any existing data on the tape. The host  
can request a non-specific mount in a 3494 by specifying a category instead of a  
specific volser in the mount request. The library manager then selects the next  
available volume assigned to the specified category to satisfy the host request.  
Within a Virtual Tape Server subsystem, the data fragment is used in conjunction  
with a mount from category request to provide very fast response times for  
non-specific mounts. Categories used for non-specific mounts are defined through  
the library manager as “Fast Ready” categories (refer to Figure 98 on page 167).  
When a mount request specifies a category defined as “Fast Ready”, the mount is  
satisfied by accessing the data fragment in the tape volume cache associated with  
42 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the virtual volume selected by the library manager to satisfy the request. No recall  
of the data from the previous usage of the volume is performed because the  
fragment contains the label information needed by the host tape management  
software to validate the use of the volume for a non-specific mount request. The  
subsystem signals the host that the mount is complete when the fragment is  
accessed. The result is a very short mount response time because no physical  
movement or mounting of a cartridge is involved.  
If a mount request specifies a category that has not been defined as “Fast Ready”,  
the library has no indication that the application intends to write from the beginning  
of the volume. It is likely that the selected virtual volume will not be resident in the  
tape volume cache and will have to be recalled from physical tape.  
Deletion of VTS Logical Volume  
Logical volumes in a VTS can only be deleted under the control of the attached  
hosts. A logical volume can be deleted only if it is in the Insert category or a  
category with a Fast-Ready attribute set (see “Set VTS Category Attributes” on  
page 166). When a logical volume is deleted, it is removed from the library’s  
inventory and any data that was associated with the volume is deleted. A logical  
volume which is in a Fast-Ready category is deleted from a VTS by performing the  
following steps. (A logical volume which is in the Insert category is deleted from a  
VTS by performing step 2 only).  
1. Assigning the logical volume to a category within the library that has the  
Fast-Ready attribute assigned. This is accomplished by the tape management  
system when the data associated with the volume reaches its expiration date  
and the volume is returned to the scratch pool.  
2. Subsequently, assigning the logical volume to an eject category. This can be  
done by asking that the volume be ejected from the library, using  
platform-specific library control interfaces; for example, with MVSE/ESA or  
OS/390, through the tape management interfaces, ISMF panels or MVS  
operator commands.  
Note: Once a logical volume has been deleted from the library, data on the volume  
is deleted and cannot be recovered.  
| Scratch Stacked Volumes  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is essential that sufficient scratch stacked volumes be available for use by a VTS  
for copying a virtual volume when the volume is closed. A warning is provided when  
the Free Storage Threshold cannot be met with the scratch stacked volumes which  
are available. See the Set VTS Management Policies Pop-Up Window, shown in  
Figure 99 on page 169. The number of empty scratch volumes can be determined  
by using the Search Database for Volumes pop-up window, Figure 83 on page 140,  
with a Search Criteria of category FF03. The records found will be the count of  
empty scratch volumes.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Reclaim Threshold Percentage as entered on the Set VTS Management  
Policies pop-up window becomes important when the supply of scratch stacked  
volumes is low. The VTS Space Reclamation Algorithm may impact the VTS  
performance when it is necessary to reclaim expired space on stacked volumes. A  
high Reclaim Threshold Percentage requires that more active data be moved (using  
VTS resources) to free the stacked volume for scratch use. As a general rule, you  
should try not to go above 30% to 40% as a Reclaim Threshold Percentage. It is  
better to add additional stacked volumes rather than raise this value. When there  
Chapter 3. Operational Characteristics 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
|
|
are less than 10 scratch stacked volumes, the Inhibit Reclaim Schedule shown on  
the Set VTS Management Policies pop-up window, Figure 99 on page 169, will not  
be in effect and the VTS will proceed to reclaim space on stacked volumes until at  
least 15 scratch stacked volumes are available. This activity may affect the  
performance of the host jobs running on the VTS.  
Integration with the 3494 Library  
A Virtual Tape Server subsystem must be associated with an IBM library because  
the physical assets used by the subsystem are managed by the library manager in  
the library. The physical assets include the 3590 tape drives and the 3590  
cartridges used for stacking logical volumes. The library manager provides several  
other key functions involving a Virtual Tape Server subsystem. These functions  
include:  
v Logical library partitioning  
v Operator interface  
v Logical volume inventory  
Logical Library Partitioning  
To support the product requirement that a Virtual Tape Server subsystem can  
coexist with current 3490 and native 3590 subsystems in the same library, the  
library manager partitions the physical library into logical libraries. This must be  
done because a Virtual Tape Server subsystem presents the image of 3490-type  
tape drives, and yet cannot read or write a real 3490 cartridge. By placing a Virtual  
Tape Server subsystem in its own logical library, host software will not be able to  
attempt to allocate a Virtual Tape Server drive for a real 3490 mount and vice versa.  
A logical library can contain either of the following:  
v A single Virtual Tape Server subsystem  
v Current 3490 or native 3590 subsystems  
Each logical library will have its own unique library sequence number and will look  
like a separate physical library to the hosts attached to the subsystems in that  
partition.  
Note: Currently, up to two Virtual Tape Servers (only one of which may be a Model  
B16) are allowed in a physical library.  
| SCSI Host Attachment  
|
|
|
|
|
The SCSI Host Attachment feature provides attachment to RS/6000 systems. The  
sharing of a VTS among S/390 and RS/6000 systems requires assignment of virtual  
drive usage in a manner similar to stand-alone tape drives. Because only one host  
system at a time can use a drive, the drive has to be dedicated to that host during  
processing.  
|
|
|
|
|
For a detailed discussion on tape library sharing between S/390 and SCSI hosts,  
including considerations about drive sharing, volume sharing and related software  
implementation steps, refer to Guide to Sharing and Partitioning IBM Tape Library  
Dataservers, SG24-4409. The SCSI target addresses are discussed in IBM 3494  
Tape Library Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0279.  
44 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operator Interface  
The library manager console is used to perform the setup, management, and status  
functions needed to support a Virtual Tape Server subsystem.  
Logical Volume Inventory  
The data base in the library manager is expanded to handle the large number of  
logical volumes that a Virtual Tape Server subsystem uses. There are also new  
operator functions which allow the addition of logical volumes by specifying a  
volume serial number range through the library manager console (refer to Figure 95  
on page 164).  
|
| VTS Import/Export Overview  
|
Import/Export Operations  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Import and Export operations provide a way to move logical volumes out of a  
VTS subsystem to physical cartridges called Exported Stacked Volumes and to  
return them to the same or move them to another VTS. Lists of volumes for Import  
or Export are provided to a VTS on logical volumes called the Import List Volume or  
the Export List Volume, which are resident in the VTS. The Status File on the  
Import or Export List Volume provides status for each logical volume being  
processed. See “Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function”  
on page 307 for information about preparing the Import or Export List Volume.  
|
Import  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Import operation allows logical volumes which are stored on physical Exported  
Stacked Volumes to become logical volumes within a Virtual Tape Server. A specific  
volume or all volumes may be imported from Exported Stacked Volumes which  
have been entered into a library through the Convenience Input⁄Output Station and  
have been moved to the Import category by an operator at the Library Manager  
console. Host console messages provide status on progress and completion of the  
Import operation.  
|
Export  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Export operation allows customer data on logical volumes in a Virtual Tape  
Server to be removed from the VTS onto physical Exported Stacked Volumes. The  
list of volumes to export and a destination for each volume is provided by the host  
operator or tape management system. Logical volumes with the same destination  
are grouped on the same Exported Stacked Volume and this physical volume is  
then moved into a category which allows an operator at the Library Manager  
console to eject the cartridge through the Convenience Input⁄Output Station for  
storage outside the library or movement to another tape library to be imported into a  
VTS. Host console messages provide status on progress and success of the Export  
operation.  
Local and Remote Power Control  
The local power is controlled by the operator using a switch at the operator control  
panel. See “Changing from Local to Remote Power” on page 76 and “Changing  
from Remote to Local Power” on page 76 for operating instructions.  
Chapter 3. Operational Characteristics 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The remote power control, a 3494 feature for AS/400, supports both local and  
remote power controls. When the library is in local power mode, an operator can  
activate the power-on and the power-off sequences.  
When in remote power mode, each host, through its AS/400 interface, can request  
that the power-on or power-off sequence be initiated. Any host requesting a  
power-on sequence will cause the 3494 to power on unless the library is already  
powered on. Only the last host requesting the library to power off will initiate a  
power off-sequence.  
Operator Involvement  
During normal automated operation, no operator attendance is required except to  
add or to remove cartridges.  
Operator assistance is required if an error or exception condition occurs from which  
the library cannot recover on its own. Depending on the type of error or exception  
condition experienced, some or all of the library operations are suspended until the  
problem is corrected. If an error occurs that prevents the movement of cartridges,  
the library manager suspends performing requests that require cartridge accessor  
movement. The operator can use the library manager or the remote library manager  
console (if the optional Remote Library Manager Console feature is installed) to  
identify the cause of the error. If the operator can correct the error, the library may  
be placed in Pause mode, and the front doors may be opened to provide operator  
access. After the problem is resolved, the library may be returned to Auto mode.  
If the problem cannot be resolved by the operator, the operator may start Manual  
mode operations in the library. When in Manual mode, the library manager instructs  
the operator to perform manual mount and demount operations until the problem is  
resolved by a service representative. After the problem is resolved, the operator can  
return the library to Auto mode.  
Note: When the high availability model is installed, control will automatically switch  
to the ‘hot standby’ component and the failed component will be marked  
unavailable. Concurrent maintenance can be performed to repair the failing  
unit. Operator involvement is needed only when a second failure occurs  
before the first failure is repaired.  
System Administrator Involvement  
Normal daily operations of the library do not require any system administrator  
involvement. System administrator involvement may be required if an error condition  
occurs that cannot be resolved by the operator. A system administrator can obtain  
operational and performance information from the library manager or the remote  
library manager console (if the optional Remote Library Manager Console feature is  
installed) at any time.  
The system administrator may also use the library manager or remote library  
manager console to search for cartridges in the library that have problems with their  
external labels, cartridges that have been misplaced or have other problems that  
need to be corrected.  
Note: The tasks performed by a system administrator are typically  
password-protected to prevent unauthorized personnel from inadvertently or  
46 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
intentionally damaging the library manager database or other operations.  
Use of password-protection is optional.  
Error Detection and Reporting  
When the library is powered on, the library manager, the 3490E/3590 tape  
subsystems and Virtual Tape Servers perform power-on diagnostics. The library  
performs real-time error detection, fault isolation, error reporting, and error recovery  
during normal operation.  
In the event of a failure, the information is reported to the attached hosts for logging  
and possible host recovery actions. When appropriate, host console messages are  
posted by the library drive support software in the control program to request  
operator-required actions or to present information for the operator. Refer to  
“Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager Console Feature” on page 241.  
Inventory Update  
When inventory update is enabled and a door is opened then closed, an inventory  
update is performed upon the return to auto mode. This process checks all of the  
cartridge storage cells in the frames that had doors opened, and depending on the  
selection made during the teach process, may also check any adjacent frames to  
the frames that had doors opened.  
Note: The drive feeds are also inventoried.  
During an inventory update, processing of Audit and Eject operations are held until  
the update has been completed. Selected mounts and demounts are processed,  
depending on where the cartridge resides. No mounts or demounts are performed  
on cartridges which reside in a rack that must be verified in the inventory update  
operation, until the inventory update is complete. The duration of the inventory  
update is affected by the number of database updates required and the number of  
mounts and demounts that are done concurrently with the inventory update.  
The Disable Inventory Update option is made available to the operator, at the mode  
selection window, when the library is powered on. This option, if selected, disables  
the inventory update during a cold start of the library, and speeds up the process of  
bringing the library Online. Selecting Disable Inventory Update at the mode  
selection window does not disable Inventory Update during normal operation.  
A Disable Inventory Update option is available from the Commands pull-down. This  
option disables the inventory update process on a cold start of the library, during  
normal operations, and speeds up the process of changing modes after the doors  
on the library are opened.  
Note: The Disable Inventory Update option is not recommended for users who  
open the library doors to add and to remove cartridges because no changes  
in the library inventory are noted until inventory update is performed. If  
cartridge inserts and ejects are handled through the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station or High-Capacity Input/Output Facility, then running with  
Inventory Update disabled will speed operation. When the doors have  
opened, Partial Inventory Update can be selected from the Commands  
pull-down; this provides the most customer flexibility.  
Chapter 3. Operational Characteristics 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Enable Inventory Update option is also available from the Commands  
pull-down. This option allows the user to enable the inventory update process.  
Inventory Update would then be done on all doors at initialization and following  
manual mode and to all doors opened on the transition from pause to auto.  
Inventory update determines if any cartridges have been added, removed, or  
moved, and the library manager updates the cartridge inventory. During inventory  
update, one of the three following activities takes place:  
v If a cartridge is found in its expected location, no update takes place.  
v If a cartridge is found that is not in the inventory, the inventory is updated, with  
volser added to the Insert category.  
v If a cartridge in the inventory is not found, it is placed in the manually ejected  
category.  
v If an unlabeled cartridge is found, the cartridge is ejected from the library unless  
the unlabeled cartridge was inserted by using the Unlabeled Tape facility and the  
unlabeled cartridge is found in its home cell.  
See “Insert Unlabeled Cartridges” on page 184 for information regarding the use  
of unlabeled cartridges.  
Volume Categories  
The host can associate volumes into logical groupings in the library. A logical  
grouping is called a category, which the library manager identifies by a hexadecimal  
number from 0000 to FFFF. Table 3 shows the assignment of the categories.  
The library manager maintains the order in which volumes are added to a category.  
The volumes chosen from a category are managed by a first-in first-out (FIFO) rule.  
However, if during the choosing of a volume from a category, the next volume is in  
use, inaccessible, or misplaced, the volume is skipped and the next available  
volume is chosen.  
Note: For logical volumes in a “Fast-Ready” category, an odd/even volser selection  
algorithm is used to maximize VTS performance.  
Table 3. Volume Categories  
Category  
(in hex)  
Name  
Definition  
0000  
Null  
Set when the library command specifies that the  
category already associated with the volume is to be  
used or the command does not specify a category.  
Using the null category does not affect the volume’s  
order within the category to which it is assigned.  
Logical volumes are also added to the FF00 when they  
are inserted via the panel. See “Insert VTS Logical  
Volumes” on page 163  
0001 to  
FEFF  
General programming Assigned by the host control program.  
use  
Note: Categories FF00 to FFFE are reserved for hardware functions.  
48 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 3. Volume Categories (continued)  
Category  
(in hex)  
Name  
Definition  
FF00  
Insert  
Set when a tape volume is added to the inventory. The  
3494 reads the external label on the volume, creates  
an inventory entry for the volume, and assigns the  
volume to this category. The attached hosts are  
notified when one or more volumes are assigned to  
this category. Logical volumes are also added to the  
FF00 when they are inserted via an operator panel.  
See “Insert VTS Logical Volumes” on page 163 for  
more information.  
FF01  
Virtual Tape Server  
(VTS) Insert  
Set when a stacked tape volume associated with a  
VTS is added to the inventory. The 3494 reads the  
external label on the volume, creates an inventory  
entry for the volume, uses the volser ranges to  
associate the volume with a VTS, and assigns the  
volume to this category. The associated VTS is notified  
when one or more volumes are assigned to this  
category.  
FF03  
FF04  
VTS Scratch  
VTS Private  
Assigned by the VTS to stacked volumes that are  
scratch in the VTS.  
Assigned by the VTS to stacked volumes that are  
private in the VTS.  
FF05,  
FF06  
VTS disaster recovery Used by the VTS during disaster recovery operations.  
FF07 to  
FF0F  
—
Reserved  
FF10  
Convenience eject  
Set when the library manager accepts an eject  
request. The volume becomes eject pending and the  
3494 queues the tape volume to be moved to the  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station. When the cartridge  
accessor delivers the volume to the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station, it is deleted from the inventory.  
Logical volumes can be ejected if they are in the Insert  
category or a category defined as “Fast-Ready”, and  
they are not in use. When a logical volume is ejected,  
it is deleted from the inventory.  
FF11  
Bulk eject  
Set when a library manager accepts an eject request.  
The volume becomes eject pending and the 3494  
queues the tape volume to be moved to the  
high-capacity output facility. When the cartridge  
accessor delivers the volume to the output rack, it is  
deleted from the inventory.  
Logical volumes can be ejected if they are in the Insert  
category or a category defined as “Fast-Ready”, and  
they are not in use. When a logical volume is ejected,  
it is deleted from the inventory.  
Chapter 3. Operational Characteristics 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 3. Volume Categories (continued)  
Category  
(in hex)  
Name  
Definition  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
FF12  
Export-Pending  
Category  
At the start of export operation processing, the VTS  
assigns the logical volumes to be exported to this  
category to remove them from access by attached  
hosts. If the Library Export operation is cancelled or  
fails, any logical volumes assigned to this category are  
reassigned to the category they were in prior to the  
export operation. When a logical volume is assigned to  
the export-pending category, the original category  
information is preserved.  
|
|
|
|
FF13  
FF14  
Exported Category  
Import Category  
Once a group of logical volumes to export have been  
placed on a stacked volume and all processing for that  
stacked volume is completed, the VTS assigns the  
logical volumes to this category.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Stacked volumes that contain logical volumes to import  
into the VTS are assigned to this category. When they  
are first added to the library through the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station, they are placed in the Unassigned  
category automatically by the Library Manager. Prior to  
starting the import operation, the operator must  
manually move these volumes into the Import category  
via the Manage Unassigned Volumes panel, shown  
in Figure 129 on page 202.  
|
|
|
|
|
FF15  
FF16  
Import-Pending  
Category  
As part of import operation processing, the VTS  
assigns the logical volumes being imported to this  
category. If the Library Import operation is cancelled or  
fails, any logical volumes assigned to this category are  
deleted from the library inventory.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unassigned Category J type cartridges are assigned to this category when  
the Convenience Input⁄Output Station is in the Import  
Mode. Volumes remain in this category until the  
operator assigns them to either the Import Category or  
the Insert Category, or selects to eject them. Volumes  
are assigned to this category by the Library Manager  
when they are input via the Convenience Input⁄Output  
Station. They are assigned to this category if the  
library contains one or more VTS subsystems that  
have Import/Export capability.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
FF17  
Export Hold Category Exported stacked volumes are assigned to this  
category by the VTS. This is a ″limbo″ category where  
export volumes are placed when the export operation  
is completed. The Manage Export Hold Volumes  
panel, shown in Figure 132 on page 206, is used by  
the operator to cause volumes in this category to be  
ejected.  
|
|
FF18 to  
FFF5  
—
Reserved  
50 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 3. Volume Categories (continued)  
Category  
(in hex)  
Name  
Definition  
FFF6  
Service volume, 3590 Set when the library manager detects that a volume  
only  
has a unique service volser. Volsers that fit the mask  
CE xxx (where xxx represents any valid volser  
characters) are service volumes. The imbedded blank  
makes these labels unique from customer volumes.  
Normally, service cartridges have volsers with the  
prefix CE (for example, CE 099). The specific cell  
location is predefined. The host does not have a  
record of a volume in the service volume category. The  
volumes in this category are not reported in inventory  
data in response to a request from the host.  
FFF7  
Mount from input  
station  
Volumes to be used in a mount from the input station  
operation are placed in this category during the  
operation.  
FFF8  
FFF9  
—
Reserved  
Service volume,  
3490E only  
Set when the library manager detects that a volume  
has a unique service volser. Volsers that fit the mask  
CE xxx (where xxx represents any valid volser  
characters) are service volumes. The imbedded blank  
makes these labels unique from customer volumes.  
Normally, service cartridges have volsers with the  
prefix CE (for example, CE 099). The specific cell  
location is predefined. The host does not have a  
record of a volume in the service volume category. The  
volumes in this category are not reported in inventory  
data in response to a request from the host.  
FFFA  
Manually ejected  
—
Assigned to this category if the cartridge that was in  
the inventory is not found.  
FFFB to  
FFFC  
Reserved  
FFFD  
FFFE  
FFFF  
Cleaner volume (3590 Assigned to this category when the cleaner volumes  
use only)  
are identified by the library manager. Cleaner volumes  
are recognized when their volser matches a mask set  
up by the operator through the library manager  
console. (See “Cleaner Volume Masks” on page 172.)  
The host does not have a record of volumes in the  
cleaner volume category. Volumes in this category are  
not reported in inventory data in response to a request  
from the host. The vision uses the media type label to  
determine that a cleaner cartridge is a 3590 type.  
Cleaner volume  
(3490E use only)  
Assigned to this category when the cleaner volumes  
are identified by the library manager. Cleaner volumes  
are recognized when their volser matches a mask set  
up by the operator through the library manager  
console. (See “Cleaner Volume Masks” on page 172.)  
The host does not have a record of volumes in the  
cleaner volume category. Volumes in this category are  
not reported in inventory data in response to a request  
from the host. The vision uses the media type label to  
determine that a cleaner cartridge is a 3490 type.  
Volser specific  
Set by the control program. Any tape mount request to  
this category must be for a specific volser, not based  
on the category.  
Chapter 3. Operational Characteristics 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Physical Volume States  
A volume is in the inventory if an entry (in the inventory) for the volser is in the  
database. The following states are associated with a physical volume:  
Inaccessible  
A volume is in the library manager inventory, but is currently in a location  
that is not accessible by the cartridge accessor.  
Misplaced  
A volume is in the inventory, and the library manager determines that it is  
not in the position indicated by the inventory.  
Mounted  
A volume is currently mounted on a drive or a mount was accepted for the  
volume.  
Unreadable  
The vision system read the external bar-code label on a volume that has a  
defect in the external label or the volume does not have an external label.  
This state is not modified if the vision system is not operational.  
Manual mode  
The volume required movement when the 3494 was in Manual mode. The  
volume is flagged in the inventory as a Manual mode volume until it is  
successfully moved or audited in Auto mode or during inventory update.  
Logical Volume States  
A volume is in the inventory if an entry (in the inventory) for the volser is in the  
database. The following state is associated with a logical volume:  
Mounted  
A volume is currently mounted on a drive or a mount was accepted for the  
volume.  
Physical Volser Validity Checking  
As a physical cartridge is added to the tape library inventory, the library manager  
checks the volser to ensure that it is readable, is not already in the inventory, and is  
not otherwise invalid.  
|
|
|
The Convenience Input⁄Output Station will be in either Import Mode or Insert Mode,  
depending upon the capabilities of the VTSs in the library and the configuration of  
the library.  
The Convenience Input⁄Output Station is in Insert Mode when the library does not  
have a VTS that is capable of Import/Export operations.  
|
|
The Convenience Input⁄Output Station is in Import Mode when the library has at  
least one VTS that is capable of Import/Export operations.  
|
|
|
|
The mode of the Convenience Input⁄Output Station is stored so that the Library  
Manager “remembers” the mode across shutdowns. Once the mode is determined,  
the stored mode is used each time the Library Manager initializes. The mode will  
change if the configuration changes or the VTS capabilities change.  
52 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the Convenience Input⁄Output Station is in Import mode, any J-type cartridge  
(High-Performance Cartridge Tape) is added to the database in the Unassigned  
category. Using the Manage Unassigned Volumes panel, shown in Figure 129 on  
page 202, the operator can assign the volumes in the Unassigned category to the  
Import category, assign volumes to the appropriate Insert category and partition  
based on the volser ranges, or eject a volume.  
If any character of the volser cannot be read or any character is invalid (not A–Z or  
0–9 or blank), the volser is not added to the inventory and the cartridge is ejected  
to an Input/Output Station. A volume notification message is sent to all attached  
hosts indicating that a volume remains in the Input/Output Station with an invalid or  
unreadable label. If this happens, the operator must determine why the volser is  
unreadable and correct the label before trying to reinsert the cartridge.  
If the cartridge media type cannot be determined by the vision system, and the  
volser does not fit into an established volser range, and a default media type is not  
defined, then the cartridge will be ejected from the library to an input/output station.  
When a volser is inserted in the Convenience Input⁄Output Station that is already in  
the inventory (a possible duplicate volser), an audit is performed.  
If the volser is a duplicate, the cartridge is ejected to the Convenience Input⁄Output  
Station. If the volser is not a duplicate, the cartridge from the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station is left in the new home cell.  
If the misplaced or inaccessible volume indicators are set in the database, they are  
reset and a notification is sent to all attached hosts that indicates the volume was  
found or made accessible again. Also, if the volume was used during Manual mode  
indicator was set, it is reset.  
A notification that describes the results of the audit is sent to all attached hosts.  
Note: A service volume found in the Convenience Input⁄Output Station causes a  
validity check because its volser contains an invalid character—an  
embedded blank. A service volume must, instead, be placed in the cell  
reserved for it in the Control Unit frame, or be inserted using a special  
service volume insert process available in Service Mode.  
Logical Volser Validity Checking  
When logical volumes are inserted into the library (refer to “Insert VTS Logical  
Volumes” on page 163), the library manager checks the volser range values for  
validity.  
The Insert Logical Volumes function is not performed if the volser range characters  
are invalid (not A-Z or 0-9), there are fewer than 6 characters, or if the two volsers  
entered are not the same format. Corresponding characters in each volser must  
both be either alphabetic or numeric. For example, AAA998 and AAB114 are of the  
same form, whereas AA9998 and AAB114 are not.  
Logical volume volsers must be unique within a physical library. If a volser already  
exists in the database for any logical library (non-VTS or VTS), the logical volume is  
not inserted. The Library Manager then attempts to insert the next logical volume.  
Chapter 3. Operational Characteristics 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Priorities in the Queue  
The library manager manages the operations queue with a set of priority levels. The  
library manager places operation requests in the queue in priorities from 0 through  
9. A command priority of 0 is the highest priority and a command priority of 9 is the  
lowest priority. The priorities are established so Mount requests take precedence  
over any other operation, except for operations that must be executed on a priority  
basis. Therefore, priority level 0 is reserved for internally generated operations,  
while host requests start with priority level 1.  
Higher priority operations are taken from the queue first. Within a priority level,  
operations are taken first-in first-out (FIFO). (The order may be shuffled if  
commands get requeued because something, such as an I/O station, may be busy).  
Priority Levels  
Table 4 shows the priority levels, the operations in each level, and the operations  
that the operator can promote to priority 2. The highest priority that an operator can  
promote a queued operation is Level 2.  
Note: If a priority 3 operation is in the queue for a specified period of time, it is  
automatically promoted to a priority 2. This prevents priority 3 mounts from  
being “blocked out” by higher priority operations.  
|
Table 4. Command Queue Priorities  
Priority  
Operations  
Promotable  
0
1
Inventory update  
—
—
v
v
v
v
v
Mount from category  
Mount from input station operations  
Mount cleaner cartridge  
Export  
|
|
Import  
2
—
v
v
Promoted by operator  
|
Logical Mount - category or specific  
3
4
Mount specific volser  
Yes  
Yes  
v
v
v
Move cartridge from input station  
Unlabeled tape operations  
Eject volser  
5
6
7
8
9
Audit volser  
Yes  
—
Reserved  
Demount  
Yes  
—
Reserved  
Offline command  
—
For details on Mount Operations, Demount Operations, and Audit Operations, see  
“Host-Initiated Operations” on page 55.  
54 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operations  
The 3494 performs host-initiated and stand-alone operations.  
Host-Initiated Operations  
The following are host-initiated operations:  
v Mount operations  
v Demount operations  
v Eject operations  
v Audit operations  
v Import operations  
v Export operations  
Mount Operations  
Host-initiated mount operations result in either a physical or logical mount being  
performed by the library. Whether the host-initiated mount is physical or logical is  
determined by the drive address to which the mount is issued. When issued to a  
drive address within a Virtual Tape Server, the library performs a logical mount  
operation. For all other drive addresses, a physical mount operation is performed.  
The library manager directs the cartridge accessor to move a physical volume from  
its current location to the specified drive. The following are types of mount  
operations:  
Mount specific  
The specific volser to be mounted is specified in the mount request.  
Mount from category  
The volser to be mounted is picked from the specified category in the  
mount request.  
Physical mount operations result in a volume being placed in a drive and loaded by  
the drive. Physical mounts are performed by the cartridge accessor.  
Mounts for logical volumes are performed by the Virtual Tape Server. They may or  
may not require a physical mount.  
Logical mount operations result in a virtual volume being made available to the host  
through a virtual tape drive. Following are the types of logical mount operations:  
Fast-Ready Mount  
The host requested a category mount and the category was designated as  
a “Fast-Ready” category. This type of mount selects a volser from the  
specified category and logically mounts it on the virtual tape drive. An  
odd/even volser selection algorithm is used to maximize VTS performance.  
No recall of the data from the prior use of the volser from physical tape is  
performed.  
Cache Mount  
The host requested a specific volser and the virtual volume for that volser is  
resident in the tape volume cache. No recall of data from a physical tape is  
performed.  
Chapter 3. Operational Characteristics 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Physical Mount Required  
The host requested a specific volser or specified a category that was not  
designated as a “Fast-Ready” category. The volser needed to satisfy that  
the mount operation is not resident in the tape volume cache and must be  
recalled from the physical tape. The library manager directs the cartridge  
accessor to move the required physical volume to one of the 3590 tape  
drives managed by the VTS so the recall operation can be performed.  
Demount Operations  
The 3494 performs a physical demount operation whenever a volume is unloaded  
from a physical tape drive. A similar operation occurs for the virtual tape drives  
within a Virtual Tape Server. When a virtual volume is unloaded from a virtual tape  
drive, a logical demount operation is performed.  
The following are two types of demount operations:  
v A demount has been requested and the volume is currently at the tape drive.  
For a physical demount, this operation is used to move a volume from a tape  
drive to a storage cell. When the volume is placed in the storage cell, the  
demount is considered complete.  
For a logical demount, this operation updates the status of the virtual volume in  
the library manager database to indicate that it is no longer mounted. No physical  
movement of a volume is involved.  
v A demount has been requested and the volume has not yet been mounted.  
This operation is used to cancel a mount operation that has not been started.  
The library recognizes that since a demount request has been received for a  
mount that has not yet taken place, the host must not really want the mount to  
take place. Therefore, the demount request and the mount request cancel each  
other.  
Eject Operations  
An eject operation results in a physical cartridge being placed in a cell of an output  
facility in the library. The type of output facility may be either the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station or the High-Capacity output facility and is specified by the host  
as part of the eject request. An eject request is considered complete when the  
specified cartridge is placed in the cell of an output station. On completion, the  
specified volume is removed from the library manager inventory.  
Logical volumes managed by a Virtual Tape Server cannot be ejected from the  
library unless they are assigned to the Insert category or a category designated as  
a “Fast-Ready” category. Any host request to eject a logical volume not in the Insert  
category or a “Fast-Ready” category will fail. An ejected logical volume is removed  
from the library manager inventory.  
Audit Operations  
The purpose of an audit is to ensure (by using the vision system) that the physical  
cartridge associated with the volser specified in the request is physically in the  
library where expected. If the volser specified in the request is a physical volume  
that is in the library manager’s inventory, the audit operation checks the external  
label of the cartridge in the storage cell specified in the library manager database. It  
must match what is in the database. If the volume is mounted on a tape drive, the  
audit is held until the volume is demounted and returned to its storage cell.  
56 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the volser specified is a logical volume in the library manager’s inventory, the  
library manager determines the physical volume the logical volume resides on and  
performs an audit of that physical volume. The audit operation is successful if the  
physical volume is found in the expected storage cell or if it is currently mounted on  
a physical drive in the Virtual Tape Server.  
An audit operation for a volser that has been placed in an output facility of the  
library will fail because the volser is no longer in the library manager’s inventory.  
Audit operations are queued in the library manager and have a lower execution  
priority than mounts. An audit operation is complete when validation of the location  
of the specified volser has been attempted and the host has been notified of the  
success or failure of the validation.  
|
| Export Operations  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Export operation allows logical volumes within a VTS to be copied to physical  
Exported Stacked Volumes that can be removed from a library. The logical volumes  
are deleted from the VTS and are no longer accessible in the VTS. A destination for  
each logical volume may be specified in order to create one or more Exported  
Stacked Volumes for a destination. Prior to executing the Export operation, it is  
necessary to provide a list of logical volumes to be exported as described in  
“Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function” on page 307.  
Exported Stacked Volumes may be ejected from the Export-Hold category by using  
the Manage Export-Hold Volumes pop-up window, shown in Figure 132 on page 206  
.
| Import Operations  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Import operation allows one or more logical volumes from Exported Stacked  
Volumes to be copied into a VTS. The Exported Stacked Volumes must be inserted  
into the library by using the Convenience Input⁄Output Station and a list of logical  
volumes to be imported must be provided as described in “Appendix B. Virtual Tape  
Server Import/Export Advanced Function” on page 307. Exported Stacked Volumes  
remain in the Import category upon completion of the Import operation for further  
disposition by an operator using the Manage Import Volumes pop-up window,  
Figure 130 on page 204.  
Stand-Alone Operations  
Stand-alone operations may be performed by using stand-alone software when a  
host cannot send mount commands to the library. Some examples are as follows:  
Stand-alone dump  
The host must receive an initial program load (IPL) from tape, and then  
dump the host memory contents to a separate tape. The tape may then be  
mounted later under the control of a host.  
Stand-alone restore  
The host must receive an IPL with a function to restore the contents of  
DASD volumes from data stored on the tape volumes. After the DASD  
volumes are restored, the host system may receive an IPL with restored  
DASD volumes.  
Following are the two types of stand-alone operations:  
Chapter 3. Operational Characteristics 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using automatic cartridge loader mode  
Although the tape drives in the 3494 do not have automatic cartridge  
loaders, the 3494 allows for automatic mounting of the next cartridge, of a  
predefined sequential set, in a specified library tape drive. The 3494  
supports the assignment of cartridges to a special category, the assignment  
of a specified drive for restricted use with the special category, and the  
ending of the restricted usage of a tape drive.  
Mounting transient tape cartridges  
Note: The Convenience Input⁄Output Station feature must be installed to  
take advantage of this function.  
The 3494 Mount from Input Station function supports special usage of the  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station for the use of transient tape cartridges  
that are not part of the 3494 inventory. In this special-use mode, tape  
cartridges in the Convenience Input⁄Output Station are sequentially  
mounted, used (read or written), demounted, and returned to the  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station. This function is available as a selection  
from the Commands pull-down.  
See “Stand-Alone Device” on page 180 for more information on stand-alone  
operations.  
Initial Cartridge Installation  
Physical cartridges may be loaded into the library after the hardware installation is  
complete. The loading of physical cartridges can take place prior to the teach  
operation and the inventory operation. Logical volumes can be inserted after a  
teach. The following types of cartridges may be loaded:  
Customer volumes  
Customer volumes are the initial set of data and scratch volumes to be  
automated. Any number of cartridges may be added to the library up to the  
maximum available cartridge storage cells in the library.  
Cleaner volumes  
One cleaner volume should be installed in the library for each frame that  
contains a tape subsystem. The cleaner cartridge type (3490E/3590)  
depends on whether the tape subsystem uses 3490 or 3590 media. The  
cleaner cartridges may be place in any available cell.  
Note: The external volser must match the mask value that is provided, or  
the inventory operation will treat the cleaner cartridge as a normal  
customer volume.  
Service volume  
One or two service volumes are installed in the library by the service  
representative depending on the library configuration.  
Logical Volumes  
If a Virtual Tape Server (VTS) is installed, logical volumes are inserted into  
the library using the “Insert Logical Volumes” panel. Refer to Figure 95 on  
page 164.  
58 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Stacked Volumes  
If a Virtual Tape Server is installed, the 3590 High Performance Cartridge  
Tapes that it will use to store and manage logical volumes cannot be loaded  
into the library without first:  
v Performing an initial teach of the library.  
v Setting up one or more volser ranges that identify the stacked volumes  
that the Virtual Tape Server will manage. See “Volser Range for Media  
Types” on page 161 for a description of how to enter the volser ranges.  
Cartridge Placement  
When you place cartridges into the library, performance will be improved if you  
adhere to the following guidelines:  
v On initial loading of cartridges into the library, cluster cartridges around the tape  
subsystems they will be used with.  
v For Inventory Update Inserts, place cartridges as near as possible to the tape  
subsystems on which you intend to issue mounts for those volumes.  
v 3590 cartridges that will be used as stacked volumes for a particular VTS system  
should be placed in cells close to those drives associated with the VTS.  
Initial Volume Inventory Upload  
After the 3494 completes all the initialization operations (including teach and  
inventory) and enters the Online state for the first time, the host software requests  
an upload of the volume inventory. The information from the library manager  
database is uploaded to the attached hosts before host applications can use the  
3494.  
The process to upload the information requires no operator action.  
Host Operation Control  
The host operation control of the 3494 is operating-system dependent. Because the  
3494 operates under a variety of host operating systems, you must be familiar with  
the operating system for your library and the required protocol.  
For more information about the host operating systems, see the IBM 3494  
Introduction and Planning Guide and “Related Information” on page xiv.  
Actions to Avoid when Operating a 3494  
This section gives two lists of actions to avoid when operating a 3494. The first list  
(Things you should Never do) is the most important, as these actions can result in  
serious problems. The second list is also important, but these actions are more  
readily corrected and will result in problems of a less serious nature.  
Chapter 3. Operational Characteristics 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Things You Should Never Do  
This section gives a list of actions that you should never perform when operating a  
3494. Failure to follow these recommendations will result in serious problems,  
including severe performance degradation.  
v Never remove cartridges from tape drives unless told to do so by the Library  
Manager. Moving a cartridge can result in it being marked misplaced or  
inaccessible. The Library Manager will automatically clear the drive while in  
Automatic mode. Here are some cases where the Library Manager will indicate  
that the operator should clear the drive:  
– An operator intervention indicates that a tape drive failure has occurred and  
the cartridge should be removed from the specified drive.  
– A re-inventory of the complete system has been requested. At this time all  
cartridges should be removed from the drives and placed in empty cells. The  
re-inventory scans all cells and recreates the inventory database.  
– If the library is being used in Manual Mode and a mount is requested for a  
drive that has a cartridge in its feed slot, the cartridge should be removed  
from the drive so the mount can be performed. On returning to Automatic  
mode, cartridges which are already loaded in the drives or in the feed slot  
should be left in place.  
v Never insert more cartridges into empty cells in the library than there are free  
cells indicated on the Operational Status panel. This is because cartridges  
currently loaded on drives must have a cell available when they are unloaded  
from the drive.  
v Never insert cartridges into empty cells or move cartridges around in the library  
unless the Inventory Update function is enabled. Unless these cells are scanned  
on returning to Automatic Mode, the Library Manager will not be able to tell which  
cartridges have been added or moved.  
v Never fail to save the logical volumes associated with a VTS during a  
Re-inventory Complete System unless they truly need to be deleted.  
v Never leave Manual Mode until mounts that were started (cartridges that were  
physically placed in the feed slot of a drive) have been cleared from the Manual  
Mode panel.  
|
|
|
v Never place Exported Stacked Volumes in the High-Capacity Input/Output Facility  
or into free cells in the library. This would cause them to be inserted as scratch  
volumes, and the data on them would be permanently lost.  
|
|
|
v Never load a drive without being told to do so by the Library Manager (which  
only occurs in Manual Mode). If you need to load a cartridge without entering it  
into the library database, use the Mount From Input Station function.  
Things You Should Try to Avoid Doing  
This section gives a list of actions you should avoid when operating a 3494, but  
whose consequences are less serious than those in the list above. Failure to follow  
these recommendations may still cause significant performance degradation.  
v Avoid leaving the Convenience Input⁄Output Station door open. After several  
minutes this will result in an operator intervention being sent to the host  
indicating the Convenience Input⁄Output Station door is open.  
v Avoid running with the library completely full. Running with a full library makes it  
impossible to insert any more cartridges into the library and results in cartridges  
being left in the I/O stations (Convenience and High-Capacity). It may also hinder  
60 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
recovery of misplaced or inaccessible cartridges, which would have to be  
recovered through the error recovery cell one at a time.  
v Avoid running large database searches (for instance, searching for all volsers in  
the library) from the Database pull-down while the library is busy. This can tie up  
the database and cause performance degradation.  
v Avoid opening the enclosure doors without first pausing the accessors.  
Chapter 3. Operational Characteristics 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. Operational Modes and States, and Informational  
States  
The operational modes and states, and informational states of the 3494 are  
described in this chapter.  
The current status of the library manager is defined as follows:  
v Operational mode  
v Operational state  
v Informational state  
The operational mode and state information are available through the library  
manager console, or the remote library manager console if the optional Remote  
Library Manager Console feature is installed. To view this information, do the  
following:  
Select Status from the Operator pull-down menu  
Select System summary  
Note: If the display appears blank, press any key on the keyboard to activate  
the display.  
Operational Modes  
The library operates in one of the following modes:  
Auto Mode  
In this mode, the cartridge accessor is operational. All commands are managed by  
the library manager under host program control or from the library manager  
console. The front doors of the library must be closed to operate in Auto mode.  
Pause Mode  
In this mode, the processing of Mount, Demount, Eject, and Audit requests is  
suspended. The 3494 enters this mode automatically when a failure prevents  
automatic operation or when instructed from the library manager console or the  
operator panel. This mode allows the operator to open the front doors on the library  
to correct an intervention condition or to insert cartridges into the library or remove  
cartridges from the high-capacity output facility. All Host requests for Mount,  
Demount, Eject, and Audit operations are queued until the 3494 is returned to Auto  
mode.  
When the operator changes the mode from Auto to Pause, the library manager  
instructs the cartridge accessor to park. If an error condition occurs, power is  
immediately removed from the cartridge accessor and any operations in progress  
are suspended.  
Manual Mode  
In this mode, the cartridge accessor is parked in the home position, if possible, or  
moved by the operator to gain access to the desired cartridge or drive. The library  
manager provides instructions to the operator to perform tasks that are normally  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
 
performed automatically. This mode allows the operator to perform library tasks, for  
example, mounting and ejecting, until the 3494 is returned to Auto mode.  
|
| Additional Operational Modes in the HA1 Environment  
|
|
|
In a Library with the HA1 feature attached, one library manager is active, and the  
other is standby. Figure 29 shows the screen for the active Library Manager, and  
Figure 30 on page 65 shows the screen for the standby Library Manager.  
|
Figure 29. Active Library Manager  
|
64 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 30. Standby Library Manager  
| Home Cell Mode  
The library operates in either fixed home cell or floating home cell mode. The home  
cell mode selection is made by the service representative, during the teach process,  
as follows:  
Fixed home cell  
Fixed home cell mode assigns each physical cartridge to a fixed storage  
cell location when it enters the library, and it is always returned to the same  
location after it is used.  
Floating home cell  
A physical cartridge is put into a cartridge cell location that optimizes  
performance.  
Notes:  
1. Regardless of the mode specified during installation, the library only operates in  
fixed home cell mode when in Manual mode.  
Operational States  
The library operates in one of the following operational states:  
Library manager initialization  
The tape library starts the library manager application, power-on and interface  
verification tests, library manager database verification, and restarts error recovery  
(if applicable).  
Chapter 4. Operational Modes and States, and Informational States 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Initialization complete  
The tape library starts the library manager application and determines the  
operational mode and state. The mode and state are based on the availability  
conditions of the components and whether the 3494 is taught and inventoried. If the  
3494is taught and inventoried, the library manager waits for one of the following  
conditions:  
v An operator instruction to proceed to an operation mode and operational state.  
v A time-out interval expires and causes the 3494 to go to the default operational  
mode and operational state set by the availability conditions of the tape library  
components.  
Online State  
Offline State  
In this state, the library manager accepts and processes host commands.  
In this state, the library manager does not accept or process host commands.  
Commands received before entering the Offline state are processed.  
Operations performed while the 3494 is in the Offline state, such as inventory, do  
not report errors to the host. Messages that may occur during Offline operations are  
displayed on the library manager console and the remote library manager console if  
the optional Remote Library Manager Console feature is installed.  
Shutdown pending  
The library manager closes and exits the library manager application.  
Library Manager Switchover in Progress  
When the high availability model is attached, this condition occurs when the active  
and standby library managers switch roles. This can occur on a failure or request  
by the operator. The library manager is in this state until the switchover completes.  
Note: In case of a Library Manager failure, all attached hosts are notified and the  
library is taken off line. There is a short delay while the switchover completes  
and the operator must then vary the library on line. Any tape job that  
abended (including those that use logical drives of a Virtual Tape Server)  
must be resubmitted, and failed in-process tape operations must be  
reissued. Library Manager console operations being performed by the  
operator, including VTS-related operations, may require a restart.  
Accessor Switchover in Progress  
When the high availability model is attached, this condition occurs when the active  
and standby accessors switch roles. This can occur on a failure or request by the  
operator. The library is in this state until the switchover completes.  
66 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Active Accessor Status  
When the dual active accessors feature is installed, it may be enabled or disabled.  
Figure 31 shows the pop-up window for the transition into the dual active accessor  
mode, and Figure 32 shows the pop-up window for the transition out of dual active  
accessor mode. Each of these windows is shown until the transition is complete.  
Figure 31. Dual Active Accessor Status — enabling  
Figure 32. Dual Active Accessor Status — disabling  
Informational States  
In addition to the operational states, the following informational states further define  
the state of the 3494 (one or more of which can occur at the same time):  
Degraded operation  
Indicates that a component of the library is unavailable (except 3490E/3590  
and Virtual Tape Server subsystems). When Model HA1 or the Dual Active  
Accessors feature is installed, this includes the ability of the standby library  
manager or the standby accessor to take over in the event of a failure.  
Safety interlocks open  
Indicates that an interlock (front door) on the safety circuit is open.  
Vision System non-operational  
Indicates that the vision system has failed and is unable to read the  
external volume labels on the cartridges.  
Chapter 4. Operational Modes and States, and Informational States 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Intervention required  
Indicates that a condition in the tape library must be corrected by operator  
intervention.  
Library manager check-1 condition  
Indicates that the library manager has detected an unrecoverable condition  
that does not allow continued execution of host requests, and will attempt to  
re-initialize or switch to the standby library manager if the high availability  
model is installed to correct the problem.  
All storage cells full  
Indicates that all of the customer storage cells in the library have cartridges  
assigned to them.  
Out of cleaner volumes  
Indicates that a clean operation is required; however, there are no usable  
cleaner volumes of the right media type in the tape library.  
Note: This informational state is entered in a mixed tape drive system  
(3490E/3590), if either type of cleaner cartridge is missing.  
Dual write disabled  
Indicates that the process that keeps the secondary database in sync with  
the primary database is not running. This is normal if the second hard drive  
feature that provides a secondary database is not installed.  
Relationship between Operational Modes and States  
When an operational mode or state change is requested, the library manager must  
perform some steps before the change is completed. During this transition period,  
the immediate mode or state of the tape library is mode or state pending. For  
example, if the tape library is in the Online state and a request is made to enter the  
Offline state, the immediate operational state is Offline Pending. The System  
Summary window on the library manager console indicates whether the mode or  
state is pending. Sometimes the change between the modes and the states occurs  
quickly, and the pending status is displayed briefly.  
Operational Mode Transitions  
The library is only in one operational mode at any one time.  
When a change in operational mode is requested from the library manager, a  
pop-up window is displayed that allows the operator to confirm the mode change  
request.  
Note: This applies to the active library when the high availability model is installed.  
Pause Mode to Auto Mode  
A request to enter Auto mode can be performed by the operator using the operator  
panel (see “Changing to Auto Mode” on page 76) or by using the library manager.  
However the request is generated, the status of the 3494 is checked.  
When a request to enter Auto mode is started using the library manager, the  
following actions occur during the change from Pause mode to Auto mode:  
68 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. The library manager checks the status of the interface to the cartridge accessor.  
If it is not available, a pop-up window is displayed indicating the cartridge  
accessor interface is unavailable. The operator can cancel the request to Auto  
mode.  
2. The library manager checks the cartridge accessor status. If it is not available  
because of a previous failure, the accessor is tested to see if it can be made  
available. If it can be made available, the transition to automatic is attempted. If  
a hardware problem is detected, the library returns to Pause and a pop-up  
window indicates the cartridge accessor is unavailable. The operator can cancel  
the request to Auto mode.  
3. The library manager checks the power status of the cartridge accessor. If power  
is not on, a pop-up window indicates the fault and prompts the operator to  
ensure all safety interlocks are closed.  
4. If the high availability model is installed, the library manager determines which  
accessor is to be the active accessor based on the previous state. If both are  
available, the preferred accessor is the local accessor. If both are not available,  
a pop-up window is displayed. The operator can cancel the request to auto  
mode.  
5. The Pause Mode pop-up window is closed.  
6. The Auto LED on the operator panel flashes until the transition is complete and  
then stays lit. The Auto Pending pop-up window indicates that the library is  
changing from Pause mode to Auto mode ( Figure 33). Emergency Motion Off  
recovery is in progress will appear in the pop-up window for a short time  
during this transition. When emergency motion off recovery is complete, the  
pop-up window closes.  
Figure 33. Auto Pending Pop-Up Window  
7. The 3494 enters Auto mode.  
8. An attention message is sent to all attached hosts indicating that the state of the  
library has changed.  
Auto Mode to Pause Mode (No Error)  
A request to enter Pause mode can be performed by the operator at the operator  
panel (see “Changing to Pause Mode” on page 76) or by using the library manager.  
However the request is generated, the status of the 3494 is checked.  
When a request to enter Pause mode is started using the library manager, the  
following actions occur during the change from the Auto mode to the Pause mode:  
1. The Pause Pending pop-up window is displayed indicating that the change to  
Pause mode is in progress and that the cartridge accessor is being parked. The  
Pause LED on the operator panel flashes until the transition is complete and  
then stays lit. The border of the Pause Pending pop-up window alternates  
Chapter 4. Operational Modes and States, and Informational States 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
between its highlighted and non-highlighted color to provide a visual indication  
that the 3494 is still in Pause Pending mode. The library manager also beeps  
five times.  
2. The System Summary window is updated to indicate that the operational mode  
is Pause Pending.  
3. The library manager instructs the cartridge accessor to move to its park location  
after completing the operations in progress.  
4. The library manager is notified that the cartridge accessor is in its park location.  
5. The library manager removes power from the cartridge accessor.  
6. The library manager enters Pause mode and sends an attention message to all  
attached hosts indicating that the state of the library changed.  
7. The Pause Pending window is removed, and the System Summary window  
indicates that the operational mode is Pause and that power is off.  
8. The Pause Mode window is displayed that instructs the operator to wait while  
the cartridge accessor is being parked. If the cartridge accessor cannot be  
parked or if the status of its power is unknown, the window includes this  
information.  
Pause Mode to Manual Mode  
A request to enter Manual mode is initiated by an operator using the library  
manager (see “Using Manual Mode” on page 227). No specific operations are  
performed by the library manager during the change from Pause to Manual mode.  
As Manual mode is entered, an attention message is sent to all attached hosts the  
indicates the state of the library changed to Manual mode.  
The operational status is changed to Manual. If the cartridge accessor cannot be  
parked or if the status of its power is unknown, the pop-up window includes this  
information.  
Manual Mode to Pause Mode  
A request to enter Pause mode must be performed by an operator using the library  
manager. During the change to Pause mode, the following steps are performed:  
1. Operations that were fetched from the operations queue, but not confirmed as  
executed by the operator, are returned to the operations queue for execution  
when the library returns to Auto mode.  
2. The library manager enters Pause mode and sends an attention message to all  
attached hosts indicating that the state of the library changed.  
Auto Mode to Manual Mode  
When an operator selects Manual mode while the 3494 is in Auto mode, the library  
performs the operations required to move to Pause mode and then move to Manual  
mode. All pop-up windows indicate that the 3494 is in Manual Pending even as it is  
moving through Pause mode. Also, an attention message is only sent when Manual  
mode is entered, not for the intermediate pause mode. During the change from Auto  
to Manual mode, the following steps are performed:  
1. A Manual Pending pop-up window is displayed indicating that the change to  
Manual mode is in progress and that the cartridge accessor is being parked.  
2. The System Summary window indicating that the operational mode is Manual  
Pending.  
70 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. The operations necessary to park the cartridge accessor and remove its power  
are performed (see “Auto Mode to Pause Mode (No Error)” on page 69).  
4. The library completes the change to Manual mode (see “Pause Mode to Manual  
Mode” on page 70).  
5. An attention message is sent to all attached hosts indicating that the state of the  
library changed.  
Manual Mode to Auto Mode  
When an operator wants to select Auto mode while the 3494 is in Manual mode,  
the operator must use the library manager. The library performs the operations to  
move to Pause mode and then move to Auto mode. All pop-up windows indicate  
that the 3494 is in Auto Pending as it is moving through Pause mode. In addition,  
an attention message is only sent when Auto mode is entered, not for the  
intermediate Pause mode. During the change from Manual to Auto mode, the  
following steps are performed:  
1. The System Summary window indicates that the operational mode is Auto  
Pending.  
2. The 3494 completes the change to Pause mode as described in “Manual Mode  
to Pause Mode” on page 70.  
3. The library completes the change to Auto mode as described in “Pause Mode to  
Auto Mode” on page 68.  
4. An attention message is sent to all attached hosts indicating that the state of the  
library changed.  
Initialization State to Auto, Pause, or Manual Mode  
During the initialization-complete state, the library manager determines which  
operational mode to enter. The determination is made by examining the database  
and the state of the cartridge accessor power. When the determination is made, the  
change to the selected mode occurs. The steps taken during the transition are the  
same as an operator request when the library is in Pause mode and Offline state.  
Auto Mode to Pause Mode (Forced)  
If a severe error or condition is detected, and the error or condition is such that it is  
not possible to continue automated operation, the library is forced into Pause mode.  
Power is immediately removed from the cartridge accessor and any operations in  
progress are stopped. When the library manager enters Pause mode, it sends an  
attention message to all attached hosts indicating that the state of the library  
changed. The state-change message and an associated unsolicited unit check  
indicates the error recovery action (ERA).  
The Pause Mode pop-up window directs the operator to open the library. In most  
cases, the cartridge accessor cannot be parked.  
Operational State Transitions  
The tape library is only in one operational state at any time.  
Chapter 4. Operational Modes and States, and Informational States 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shutdown Pending State to Shutdown State  
During this change, the library manager application is removed from memory.  
Shutdown State to Library Manager Initialization State  
This change occurs when the library manager controller is powered on or when a  
severe error occurs.  
Library Manager Initialization State to Initialization Complete State  
After the library manager starts the main process of the library manager application,  
the tape library enters the initialization complete state. No actions are taken during  
this change.  
Offline State to Online State  
The request to enter the Online state can be either operator or library manager  
initiated. In either case, the following steps are performed during the transition:  
1. The database is examined to determine if both the teach and the inventory  
operations have completed. The tape library cannot enter the Online state  
unless they have completed.  
2. The status of the interfaces to the tape subsystems and host systems is  
examined to determine whether any interfaces are initialized with the library  
manager. If at least one of the tape subsystems interfaces is initialized and the  
associated control unit is Online to the library manager, the tape library enters  
the Online state and notifies all attached hosts. If no interfaces are initialized,  
the tape library enters the Online state but does not send a notification.  
3. If a VTS is installed, the Library Manager checks for defined “Fast-Ready”  
categories. If none are found, a message stating that Fast-Ready categories  
should be defined is displayed for 1 minute or until OK is selected. Notify your  
system administrator if you see this message.  
Online State to Offline State  
A request to enter the Offline state is initiated by an operator. After it is requested,  
the transition must complete before a transition to the Online state can be  
requested. The following actions are performed during the change to the Offline  
state:  
1. A notification is sent to all attached hosts indicating that the tape library is  
entering the Offline state. The 3490E/3590 control units, Virtual Tape Servers,  
and the Library Managerwill fail any later host requests for tape library functions.  
2. All host requests that were accepted and queued before the request to enter the  
Offline state are processed. Responses are provided to the requesting host as  
appropriate.  
3. All internal commands queued before the request to enter the Offline state will  
complete and, if errors are detected, appropriate host notifications are  
generated.  
4. After all queued commands are completed and responses are sent, the tape  
library enters the Offline state.  
Note: The change from the Online to the Offline state can take more than ten  
minutes if a high-capacity output operation was started before the request to  
72 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
go to the Offline state. This time is needed to move the cartridges to the  
high-capacity output facility from the storage cells. If a high-capacity  
operation is in progress, the operator is prompted to cancel the operation. If  
the operator does not cancel the high-capacity operation, the Offline request  
is cancelled.  
|
|
|
Note: Online to Offline State — not allowed if an Export or an Import operation is in  
progress. A pop-up message will be displayed alerting the operator to do one  
of the following:  
|
|
v Wait for the operation to complete.  
v Cancel the operation from the host.  
|
|
v Cancel the operation by selecting “Cancel VTS Export/Import” from the  
Commands/System Management pulldown.  
|
Figure 48 on page 104 shows the pop-up message with these three options.  
| Initialization Complete State to Online or Offline State  
During the initialization complete state, the library manager determines which  
operational state to enter. The determination is made by examining the database.  
The steps taken during the transition are the same as for an operator request as  
described in “Offline State to Online State” on page 72 or “Online State to Offline  
State” on page 72.  
Offline State to Shutdown Pending State  
A request to enter the shutdown pending state is made through an operator  
request. No actions are taken during the change.  
Informational State Transitions  
One or more information states may be active at any time in the tape library. When  
an informational state is entered or left, and the tape library is in the Online state, a  
notification indicating the change is sent to all attached hosts. Most of the states are  
a condition in the 3494, and no actions are performed during the change into or out  
of the state.  
The following describes any additional steps performed during the change into or  
out of a state:  
Degraded  
When a component of the tape library becomes available, the library  
manager determines whether any other components are unavailable. If all  
components are now available, the tape library leaves the degraded state.  
Safety interlock open  
When a safety interlock (front door) is open, the library manager examines  
the condition of the tape library to determine whether the interlock opening  
was expected or unexpected. If the opening was unexpected, the tape  
library is forced into Pause mode.  
Intervention required  
When a condition requiring intervention is corrected, the library manager  
determines whether any other intervention requirements exist. If none exist,  
the tape library leaves the intervention-required state.  
Chapter 4. Operational Modes and States, and Informational States 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Library manager check-1 condition  
The library manager: detects an unrecoverable condition that does not allow  
continued execution of host requests, and will attempt to re-initialize to  
correct the problem.  
74 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. Basic Operating Procedures  
The basic operating procedures for the 3494 are described in this chapter.  
Table 5 shows the basic operating procedures that an operator can perform by  
using the operator panel on the front of the control unit frame.  
Table 5. Quick Reference to Basic Operating Procedures  
Task  
Procedure  
Powering on the 3494  
Powering off the 3494  
Changing to Pause mode  
Changing to Auto mode  
Changing from local to remote power  
“Powering On the 3494”.  
“Powering Off the 3494”.  
“Changing to Pause Mode” on page 76.  
“Changing to Auto Mode” on page 76.  
“Changing from Local to Remote Power” on  
page 76.  
Changing from remote to local power  
“Changing from Remote to Local Power” on  
page 76.  
Inserting cartridges  
“Inserting Cartridges” on page 77.  
Removing ejected cartridges  
“Removing Ejected Cartridges” on page 81.  
Powering On the 3494  
1. Press the Unit Emergency switch (on the operator panel) to the On position (if it  
is not already in the On position).  
Notes:  
a. The library must be powered off and remain off for 30 seconds before you  
attempt to power the library on again. The 30-second wait is needed to  
allow the 3490E tape subsystem sufficient time to properly initialize.  
b. If the 3494 Library has more than eight frames, or the high availability model  
is installed, both unit emergency switches must be set to the On position.  
The second switch is located at the right-hand end of the Library (when  
facing the cartridge access doors).  
c. If the 3494 Model B18 VTS is installed, the unit emergency switch on the  
Model B18 must be set to the On position.  
2. Press the Unit Power switch, on the operator panel, to the On position.  
Notes:  
a. If the remote power feature is installed and the Local Remote switch is in  
the Remote position, the Unit Power switch cannot power on the 3494.  
b. When the Rack Power Ready and Power System Ready LEDs are lit, the  
power to the library is on.  
3. If the library is attached to an AS/400, ensure the media library device driver is  
initialized.  
4. Ensure all drives are varied Online to the appropriate host.  
Powering Off the 3494  
1. Ensure all drives are varied Offline to the appropriate host.  
2. Press the Unit Power switch, on the operator panel, to the Off position.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
 
Note: If the Local/Remote switch is in the Local position, the Unit Power switch  
can power off the 3494.  
3. Observe the Power Off Pending LED on the operator panel. The LED flashes  
until the 3494 is powered off.  
The system can take up to 20 minutes in a library with a VTS to shutdown.  
When the shutdown completes, the 3494 (including the Model B18, if installed)  
is powered off.  
Note: The library may be powered off immediately, in an emergency, by using the  
Unit Emergency switch on either the operator panel or at the right end of the  
Library. The second switch, at the right end, is provided if the library has  
more than eight frames or the high availability model is installed.  
Attention: Using the Unit Emergency switch for immediate power off can cause  
database problems or check disk (CHKDSK) problems with the library manager or  
VTS controller. The 3494 Model B18 Virtual Tape Server will not be powered off by  
the 3494 Unit Emergency switch, but the associated tape drives will have power  
removed.  
Changing to Pause Mode  
1. Press the Pause button on the operator panel.  
2. Observe the Pause LED on the operator panel. The LED flashes until the library  
is in Pause mode. When the library is in Pause mode, the Pause LED stays lit.  
Note: The Auto LED stays lit until the library enters Pause mode.  
Changing to Auto Mode  
1. Press the Auto button on the operator panel.  
2. Observe the Auto mode LED on the operator panel. The LED flashes until the  
library is in Auto mode. When the library is in Auto mode, the Auto LED stays lit.  
Note: The Pause LED stays lit until the library enters Auto mode.  
Changing from Local to Remote Power  
If the remote power feature is installed, change to remote power by pressing the  
Local Remote power switch to the Remote position.  
If the remote power feature is not installed, the Local Remote power switch must be  
in the Local position.  
Attention: Pressing the Local Remote Power switch to the Remote position powers  
off the 3494 if the remote power feature is not installed.  
Changing from Remote to Local Power  
If the remote power feature is installed, change to local power by pressing the Local  
Remote power switch to the Local position.  
Attention: Pressing the Local Remote Power switch to the Local position powers  
off the 3494 if the Unit Power switch is in the Off position.  
76 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Inserting Cartridges  
Cartridges can be inserted into the library in the following ways:  
v See “Initial Cartridge Installation” on page 58.  
v See “Using Empty Cartridge Cells to Insert Cartridges”.  
v See “Using the Convenience Input⁄Output Station Feature to Insert Cartridges” on  
page 78.  
v See “Using the High-Capacity Input/Output Facility” on page 81.  
Note: The type of input⁄output facility available to the operator was defined during  
the teach process.  
Note: Make sure that there are enough available cells for the cartridges you are  
inserting. Use the Operational status panel (Figure 61 on page 111) to check  
the number of empty storage cells in the library.  
Inserting stacked volumes for a Virtual Tape Server (VTS) requires that 1 or more  
volser ranges have been set up for the VTS before the stacked volumes are  
inserted. Refer to Figure 94 on page 162.  
Inserting logical volumes for a VTS is accomplished using the “Insert Logical  
Volumes” panel. Refer to Figure 95 on page 164.  
Using Empty Cartridge Cells to Insert Cartridges  
|
|
Attention: Never place Exported Stacked Volumes into free cells, as this will cause  
the data on them to be overwritten.  
1. Place the library in Pause mode by pressing the Pause mode Motion Control  
switch on the operator panel.  
2. When the Pause mode status light is lit, unlock and open the front door on any  
frame.  
3. Insert the cartridges into any empty cartridge storage cells, except error  
recovery cell locations 1 A 1 (1 A 3 instead of 1 A 1 if the optional Dual Gripper  
feature is installed), 1 A 20, 1 A 19 (if two service volumes are used) and the  
high-capacity output facility cells. See “Cartridge Placement” on page 59 for  
cartridge placement guidelines.  
Note: The error recovery cell locations for a High Availability, single gripper unit  
are 1 A 1 and 1 A 2. The error recovery cell locations for a High  
Availability, dual gripper unit are 1 A 3 and 1 A 4. On all High Availability  
models, service volumes are stored in the service bays.  
Note: If there is no convenience I/O station and no High Capacity I/O defined,  
then cell 2 A 1 is reserved for ejects.  
Note: The cartridges must be inserted into the cartridge storage cells so that  
the leader block is on the right and the volser label is visible. See  
Figure 16 on page 20.  
4. Close and lock the front door.  
5. Press the Auto mode Motion Control switch on the operator panel.  
Chapter 5. Basic Operating Procedures 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: If the inventory update is not enabled, select Perform Inventory Update  
from the Commands pull-down (see “Using the Commands Pull-Down”  
on page 152) to add the newly inserted cartridges to the library manager  
database and to send messages to the hosts. Perform Partial may also  
be selected. The operator is shown which doors were opened and may  
select or deselect doors to re-inventory. All other library activity is held  
until the inventory update is completed (approximately 4 minutes per  
frame being inventoried).  
If the high availability model is installed, do not insert cartridges into the  
service bays, as they cannot be accessed by the library.  
Using the Convenience Input⁄Output Station Feature to Insert  
Cartridges  
Cartridges may be inserted into the library by using the Convenience Input⁄Output  
Station during normal automatic operation by performing the following steps:  
Note: The ten-cell I/O station feature is shown in Figure 34 on page 79. Figure 35  
on page 80 shows the optional 30 cell I/O. If the 30-cell I/O is installed, the  
operation remains the same, but there are two operator doors. The upper  
operator door „1ꢀ provides access to the top 10 cells. The lower operator  
door „2ꢀ provides access to the lower 20 cells. (Both doors open together.)  
1. Check the status of the Convenience Input⁄Output Station on the operator panel.  
If the Output Mode status light and the Unload Required status light are not lit  
on the operator panel, proceed to step 2.  
If the Output Mode status light or the Unload Required status light is lit on the  
operator panel, open the Convenience Input⁄Output Station door and remove all  
the cartridges in the Convenience Input⁄Output Station.  
2. Insert the cartridges „2ꢀ (see Figure 34 on page 79) that you want to add to the  
library into the Convenience Input⁄Output Station „1ꢀ with the cut-off corner (and  
leader block) to the left and the external label facing to the inside of the  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station. Shut the Convenience Input⁄Output Station  
door.  
|
|
The Input Mode indicator will light and stay lit until all the cartridges in the  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station are stored.  
3. Repeat these steps until all of your cartridges are inserted.  
|
Convenience I/O Mode  
|
|
|
|
|
The Convenience Input⁄Output Station will be in either Import Mode or Insert Mode,  
depending upon the capabilities of the VTSs in the library and the configuration of  
the library. (See Figure 77 on page 131.) The Convenience Input⁄Output Station is in  
Insert Mode when the library does not have a VTS that is capable of Import/Export  
operations.  
The Convenience Input⁄Output Station is in Import Mode when the library has at  
least one VTS that is capable of Import/Export operations.  
The mode of the Convenience Input⁄Output Station is stored so that the Library  
Manager “remembers” the mode across shutdowns. Once the mode is determined,  
the stored mode is used each time the Library Manager initializes. The mode will  
change if the configuration changes or the VTS capabilities change. The System  
78 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Summary pop-up window (Figure 43 on page 98) shows the Convenience I/O  
Mode of Import or Insert.  
|
Figure 34. Inserting Cartridges in the Convenience Input⁄Output Station  
|
Using the Convenience Input⁄Output Station Import Mode  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the Convenience Input⁄Output Station is in Import Mode, any J-type cartridge  
(High Performance Cartridge Tape) that is inserted into the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station will be added to the Unassigned category of the library.  
Exported Stacked Volumes are J-type cartridges that contain logical volumes that  
have been exported from a VTS. In order to import logical volumes, those  
cartridges that are Exported Stacked Volumes must be moved by an operator into  
the Import category of the library after having been input into the library. To use the  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station in Import mode, an operator must:  
|
|
1. Input cartridges into the library as described previously for use of the  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station.  
|
|
|
|
|
2. If any of the cartridges are J-type, observe the Manage Unassigned Volumes  
pop-up window (see Figure 129 on page 202), which will be automatically  
presented. All J-type cartridges will be displayed in the Unassigned category.  
CST and ECCST cartridges will have been input in the Insert category of the  
library and will not be displayed.  
|
|
|
3. Exported Stacked Volumes in the Unassigned category that will be used for an  
Import operation must be moved into the Import category using the Manage  
Unassigned Volumes pop-up window.  
|
|
|
4. J-type cartridges that are being inserted for use as stacked volumes in a VTS  
must be moved into the Insert category. The Manage Unassigned Volumes  
pop-up window provides this capability as well as the Volser ranges pushbutton  
Chapter 5. Basic Operating Procedures 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
for validating the ranges that have been defined for physical volumes. J-type  
cartridges that are not in a VTS range of stacked volumes will be inserted for  
native 3590 use.  
|
|
|
|
5. J-type cartridges that are intended for native 3590 use must be moved into the  
Insert category. The Volser ranges pushbutton allows validation of physical  
stacked volume ranges to insure that native 3590 cartridges will not become  
VTS stacked volumes  
|
|
|
|
6. The Category Recovery section in “Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server  
Import/Export Advanced Function” on page 307 provides instructions for  
recovery from errors made when moving cartridges from the Unassigned  
category.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: The Convenience Input⁄Output Station is used for Exported Stacked Volumes  
to be Imported, VTS stacked volumes, and J-type 3590 native use volumes.  
The task of moving volumes from the Unassigned category into the Import or  
Insert categories can be simplified by scheduling insertion of different volume  
types at different times.  
Figure 35. Optional 30-Cell I/O  
80 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the High-Capacity Input/Output Facility  
|
|
Attention: Never place Exported Stacked Volumes into the High Capacity  
Input/Output Facility, as this will cause the data on them to be overwritten.  
The defined facility will be scanned on the first transition to Automatic mode even if  
Inventory Update is disabled or on any transition to Automatic mode if the door  
associated with the frame containing the facility has been opened. The scan is done  
in the above cases regardless of the state of Inventory Update (enabled/disabled).  
Following the scan of the facility, all library activity is restored (mounts, demounts,  
conv. I/O). VOLSERS to be inserted are added to the database and the host is  
notified. Once the category has changed, the VOLSERS may be mounted directly  
from the high capacity area.  
New VOLSERs found in the facility are inserted and those already existing in the  
facility are left ejected. VOLSERs are inserted from the facility in a top to bottom  
and right to left sequence (E 01 to A xx). VOLSERs are ejected to the facility in a  
top to bottom and left to right sequence (A 01 to E xx). The physical movement of  
the cartridge is scheduled with regular library activity. The operator may change the  
priority on a particular insert so movement will be completed faster.  
Configuring the High-Capacity I/O is done during a teach operation under the Teach  
pull-down in Service mode.  
Note: There should be enough free cells in the library to hold the cartridges that  
must be moved when High-Capacity I/O is configured. When the facility is  
moved to a new location, both the old location rack and the new location  
rack are scanned.  
Removing Ejected Cartridges  
You may remove ejected cartridges from the library in the following ways:  
v By removing an ejected cartridge from the single-cell output facility  
v By removing an ejected cartridge from the High-Capacity Output facility or  
High-Capacity Input/Output facility  
v By removing an ejected cartridge from the Convenience Input⁄Output Station  
feature  
Notes:  
1. The type of input⁄output facility available to the operator was defined during  
installation of the library.  
2. Avoid manually removing cartridges from library cells. Have the host eject them  
to an input/output facility.  
Removing an Ejected Cartridge from the Single-Cell Output Facility  
1. Press the Pause button on the operator panel.  
2. Observe the Pause mode LED on the operator panel. The LED flashes until the  
library is in Pause mode and then stays lit.  
3. Unlock and open the control unit frame front door and retrieve the ejected  
cartridge from the single-cell output facility at location 2 A 1 (or location 2 A 3 if  
the optional Dual Gripper feature is installed).  
4. Shut and lock the control unit frame door.  
Chapter 5. Basic Operating Procedures 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Press the Auto mode button on the operator panel.  
6. Observe the Auto mode LED on the operator panel. The LED flashes until the  
library is in Auto mode and then stays lit.  
Note: If the high availability model is installed, the output facility still uses cells in  
the control unit. The cells in the service bays are not available to the library.  
Removing Ejected Cartridges from the High-Capacity Output Facility  
1. Press the Pause button on the operator panel.  
2. Observe the Pause mode LED on the operator panel. The LED flashes until the  
library is in Pause mode and then stays lit.  
3. Unlock and open the control unit frame front door and retrieve the ejected  
cartridges from the area defined as the high-capacity facility output area.  
4. Shut and lock the control unit frame door.  
5. Press the Auto mode button on the operator panel.  
6. Observe the Auto mode LED on the operator panel. The LED flashes until the  
library is in Auto mode and then stays lit.  
Note: If the high availability model is installed, the output facility still uses cells in  
the control unit. The cells in the service bays are not available to the library.  
Removing Ejected Cartridges from the High-Capacity Input/Output  
Facility  
1. Press the Pause button on the operator panel.  
2. Observe the Pause mode LED on the operator panel. The LED flashes until the  
library is in Pause mode and then stays lit.  
3. Unlock and open the frame door that contains the High-Capacity Input/Output  
facility and retrieve the ejected cartridges from the area defined as the  
High-Capacity Input/Output facility.  
4. Shut and lock the frame door.  
5. Press the Auto mode button on the operator panel.  
6. Observe the Auto mode LED on the operator panel. The LED flashes until the  
library is in Auto mode and then stays lit.  
Note: If the high availability model is installed, the output facility still uses cells in  
the control unit. The cells in the service bays are not available to the library.  
Removing Ejected Cartridges from the Convenience Input⁄Output  
Station Feature  
1. Observe the Output mode LED on the operator panel. If the LED is lit, the  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station has ejected cartridges.  
2. Open the Convenience Input⁄Output Station door and remove all the cartridges.  
3. Close the Convenience Input⁄Output Station door.  
|
|
|
|
Note: The Convenience Input⁄Output Station receives ejected cartridges of all  
types. A mixture of CST, ECCST, and HPCT (I, E, and J-types) should be  
expected and no order relation exists. J-type cartridges may be any of the  
following:  
|
v Newly-created Exported Stacked Volumes from the Export-Hold category  
82 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
v Exported Stacked Volumes that were used in an Import operation from the  
Import category  
|
|
v VTS stacked volumes being ejected  
v Native 3590 cartridges being ejected by a host  
|
|
|
Site operations management of time periods for Export and Import  
operations can minimize the mix of cartridges in the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station.  
Chapter 5. Basic Operating Procedures 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures  
The advanced operating procedures for the 3494 are described in this chapter.  
Table 6 shows the advanced operating procedures an operator can perform by  
using the library manager at the rear of the library.  
Table 6. Quick Reference to Advanced Operating Procedures  
Task  
Reference  
Using the library manager  
Making selections with the library manager  
“Using the Library Manager” on page 88.  
“Making Library Manager Selections” on  
page 92.  
Making selections with a keyboard  
“Selections with the Keyboard” on page 92.  
Making selections with the pointing device  
“Selections with the Pointing Device” on  
page 92.  
Using the Help pull-down  
Using the Help search  
“Using the Help Pull-Down” on page 94.  
“Help Search” on page 95.  
Using the Help action bar and function keys “Help Action Bar and Function Keys” on  
page 95.  
Using the Operator menu  
“Using the Operator Menu” on page 98.  
“Using the Mode Pull-Down” on page 99.  
“Auto” on page 100.  
Using the Mode pull-down  
Using the Auto selection  
Using the Pause selection  
Using the Manual selection  
Using the Online selection  
Using the Offline selection  
Using the Service menu selection  
Switching the Active Library to Standby  
“Pause” on page 100.  
“Manual” on page 101.  
“Online” on page 101.  
“Offline” on page 103.  
“Service Menu” on page 104.  
“Switch Active Library Manager to Standby”  
on page 105.  
Switching the Active Accessor to Standby  
“Switch Active Accessor to Standby” on  
page 106.  
Enabling Dual Active Accessors  
Disabling Dual Active Accessors  
“Enable Dual Active Accessors” on page 107.  
“Disable Dual Active Accessors” on  
page 107.  
Using the Shutdown selection  
“Shutdown” on page 108.  
Using the Status pull-down  
“Using the Status Pull-Down” on page 109.  
“Operational Status” on page 111.  
“Component Availability” on page 115.  
“Using the Status Pull-Down” on page 109.  
“Performance Statistics” on page 119.  
Figure 70 on page 122.  
Using the Operational Status selection  
Using the Component availability selection  
Using the VTS Status selection  
|
Using the Performance Statistics selection  
Displaying Accessor Mounts per Hour  
Using the VTS Active data selection  
Using the VTS Data flow selection  
Using the VTS Mount hit data selection  
“VTS Active Data” on page 123.  
“VTS Data Flow” on page 125.  
“VTS Mount Hit Data” on page 126.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
 
Table 6. Quick Reference to Advanced Operating Procedures (continued)  
Task Reference  
Using the VTS Physical device mount history “VTS Physical Device Mount History” on  
selection  
page 128.  
Using the VTS Logical mounts per hour  
selection  
“VTS Logical Mounts Per Hour” on page 129.  
Using the VTS Active Data Distribution  
selection  
“VTS Active Data Distribution” on page 130.  
Using the System Summary window  
Requesting LAN status  
“Using the System Summary” on page 131.  
“LAN Status” on page 135.  
Displaying the Dual Active Accessor  
Boundary  
“Dual Accessor Zones” on page 136.  
Using the Queues pull-down  
Using the Database pull-down  
“Using the Queues Pull-Down” on page 137.  
“Using the Database Pull-Down” on  
page 139.  
Searching the database for volumes  
“Search Database For Volumes” on  
page 139.  
Using the Search Entry Field selection  
Using the Flag selection  
“Search Criteria” on page 140.  
141.  
Using the Search Results selection  
“Search Results” on page 142.  
“Displaying Search Results” on page 143.  
Using the Displaying Search Results  
selection  
Find a logical volume’s home  
“Find Logical Volume’s Home” on page 144.  
“List Database Volumes” on page 145.  
“Stacked Volume Map” on page 150.  
Using the List Database Volumes selection  
Using the Stacked Volume Map Selection  
Using the Commands pull-down  
“Using the Commands Pull-Down” on  
page 152.  
Scheduling drive cleaning  
“Schedule Cleaning” on page 155.  
Ejecting a cleaner cartridge  
Changing cleaner masks  
“Eject a Cleaner Cartridge” on page 158.  
“Cleaner Cartridge Masks” on page 158.  
Sending a message to a host console  
“Send Message to Host Consoles” on  
page 159.  
Promoting a command in the queue  
Setting volser ranges  
“Promote a Command in the Queue” on  
page 160.  
“Volser Range for Media Types” on  
page 161.  
Inserting logical volumes  
“Insert VTS Logical Volumes” on page 163.  
“Eject a VTS Stacked Volume” on page 165.  
“Set VTS Category Attributes” on page 166.  
Ejecting stacked volumes  
Setting VTS category attributes  
Setting VTS management policies  
“Set VTS Management Policies” on  
page 167.  
|
|
|
|
Manage Unassigned Volumes  
Manage Import Volumes  
“Manage Unassigned Volumes” on page 202.  
“Manage Import Volumes” on page 204.  
“Manage Insert Volumes” on page 205.  
“Manage Export-Hold Volumes” on page 206.  
Manage Insert Volumes  
Manage Export-Hold Volumes  
86 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 6. Quick Reference to Advanced Operating Procedures (continued)  
Task  
Reference  
|
Cancel Export/Import  
“Cancel Export/Import” on page 207.  
Inventorying new storage or re-inventorying  
the complete system  
“Inventory New Storage or Re-inventory  
Complete System” on page 169.  
Disabling the inventory update  
Enabling the inventory update  
Performing the inventory update (Full)  
“Disable Inventory Update” on page 176.  
“Enable Inventory Update” on page 177.  
“Perform Inventory Update (Full)” on  
page 177.  
Performing the inventory update (Partial)  
“Perform Inventory Update (Partial)” on  
page 179.  
Setting up a stand-alone device  
Resetting a stand-alone device  
“Stand-Alone Device” on page 180.  
“Reset Stand-Alone Device” on page 182.  
Checking the status of a stand-alone device “Stand-Alone Device Status” on page 183.  
Inserting unlabeled cartridges  
Adding a LAN host  
“Insert Unlabeled Cartridges” on page 184.  
“Add LAN Host” on page 185.  
Deleting a LAN host.  
“Delete LAN Host” on page 190.  
Updating LAN host information  
Requesting LAN host information  
Performing operator interventions  
“Update LAN Host Information” on page 191.  
“LM LAN Information” on page 198.  
“Operator Intervention” on page 199.  
Changing the system administrator password “System Administrator Password” on  
page 200.  
Enable/Disable Service Access  
Starting SNMP  
“Service Access” on page 208.  
“Starting SNMP” on page 212.  
“Stopping SNMP” on page 212.  
Stopping SNMP  
Changing SNMP trap destinations  
“Configuring SNMP Trap Destinations” on  
page 210.  
Selecting SNMP trap types  
Sending a TESTM trap  
“Selecting SNMP Trap Types” on page 209.  
“Sending TESTM Messages” on page 213.  
“Using the Options Pull-Down” on page 226.  
“Using Manual Mode” on page 227.  
“Starting Manual Mode” on page 228.  
“Operating in Manual Mode” on page 230.  
“Mounting Cartridges” on page 231.  
“Demounting Cartridges” on page 232.  
“Inserting Cartridges” on page 232.  
Using the Options pull-down  
Using Manual mode  
Starting Manual mode  
Operating in Manual mode  
Mounting cartridges in Manual mode  
Demounting cartridges in Manual mode  
Inserting cartridges in Manual mode  
Ejecting cartridges in Manual mode  
“Ejecting Cartridges” on page 234.  
Reviewing unknown volume locations in  
Manual mode  
“Reviewing Unknown Volume Locations” on  
page 235.  
Handling error processing in Manual mode  
“Error Processing” on page 236.  
Locating and identifying home cell locations Figure 148 on page 238.  
in Manual mode  
Ending Manual mode  
“Ending Manual Mode” on page 238.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 6. Quick Reference to Advanced Operating Procedures (continued)  
Task  
Reference  
Removing a cartridge from the gripper  
“Cartridge Removal from the Gripper” on  
page 239.  
Using the keyboard template  
“Using the Keyboard Template” on page 240.  
Using the remote library manager console  
“Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager  
Console Feature” on page 241.  
Using the Library Manager  
The library manager display contains one Operator menu. The Operator menu  
contains all the functions needed at the operator level. Additional menus and  
pull-down menus are accessed through the Operator menu.  
Note: The Service menu item listed on the Mode pull-down allows access to  
functions used by service personnel.  
Within the library manager application, the primary visual and interactive  
components are the windows, icons, free-moving pointing device, and the various  
controls to select windows, size windows, make selections, and initiate actions. Not  
all windows contain all the items described. Figure 36 on page 89 shows these key  
components, and the text describes the uses of these components.  
Note: The display panels shown are examples and may not be exactly the same  
as the panels displayed on your library manager display.  
88 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 36. Operator Panel Controls  
„1ꢀ System Menu Icon  
This horizontal line, when selected with a single click of the pointing device,  
causes a pull-down window (see Figure 37) with an expanded list of  
selections to be displayed. Double-clicking on this icon causes the pop-up  
window that contains the system menu icon to be closed (removed). See  
“Making Library Manager Selections” on page 92 for explanations of clicking  
with a pointing device.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 37. System Menu  
„2ꢀ Title Bar  
This area, at the top of each window, contains the window title.  
Note: By clicking on the title bar and holding down the pointing device  
button, the entire window can be dragged (moved) to a different  
location on the screen. See “Selections with the Pointing Device” on  
page 92 for instructions to operate the pointing device.  
„3ꢀ Window-Sizing Icons  
The window-sizing icons are used as follows:  
|
|
v To enlarge (maximize) the window to the full size of the screen (large  
square)  
|
v To restore the window to its original size (small square with brackets)  
|
|
v To minimize (to an icon) the selected window (small square) and place a  
predefined icon near the bottom of the screen  
|
To restore the window to the screen, double-click on the icon.  
Note: The window-sizing icons, for a particular window, may be hidden if  
one or more additional windows are expanded to cover the desired  
window. You can close the overlaying windows to gain access to the  
desired window, or you can click on any part of the desired window.  
„4ꢀ Sizeable-Window Border  
By using the pointing device, a vertical border can be moved in or out to  
decrease or increase the width of the window. A horizontal border can be  
moved up or down to decrease or increase the height of the window.  
„5ꢀ Vertical Scroll Bar  
The scroll bars are used to move additional, unseen information into view  
on the screen. By clicking on the up or down scroll bar arrows, current  
information can be scrolled (moved) vertically off the screen and new  
information scrolled vertically on to the screen.  
The bold (dark colored) portions of the scroll bars show whether, and how  
much, information is available to be displayed. Typically, these areas are  
not bold. They are of a lighter color than the slider box. A slider box (the  
90 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
unshaded part of the scroll bar) shows the position and the size of the  
visible information in relation to the information that is available. As the  
window is scrolled, the upper and lower bold bars change size to reflect the  
amount of information that is available for display in both up and down  
directions. All available information is visible if no slider box is shown.  
„6ꢀ Non-Sizeable Window Border  
A non-sizeable window border cannot be used to increase or decrease the  
size of the window.  
„7ꢀ Dialog or Message Box  
Dialog and message boxes are displayed when the application needs  
additional information, or when information is presented to the operator.  
Dialog and message boxes can also include radio buttons, check boxes,  
and push-buttons to allow the operator to respond to an application.  
„8ꢀ Horizontal Scroll Bar  
The scroll bars are used to move additional, unseen information into view  
on the screen. By clicking on the left or the right scroll bar arrows, current  
information can be scrolled (moved) horizontally off the screen and new  
information scrolled horizontally on to the screen. The bold (dark colored)  
portions of the scroll bars show whether, and how much, information is  
available to be displayed. Typically, these areas are not bold. They are of a  
lighter color than the slider box. As the window is scrolled, the left and the  
right bold bars change size to reflect the amount of information that is  
available for display in both directions.  
„9ꢀ Push buttons  
Push buttons allow the operator to select a particular action, which occurs  
immediately. The ellipsis (...) following a menu item indicates that a pop-up  
window will be opened if that item is selected.  
„10ꢀ Check Boxes  
A check box is a two-part control consisting of a square box and text.  
Unlike radio buttons, one or more boxes can be selected. To select a check  
box, place the pointing device on the box and click. The box is marked with  
an X to show that it was selected. Click on the text again to cancel the  
choice.  
„11ꢀ Radio Buttons  
Radio buttons allow the operator to choose between two or more possible  
responses or actions. Only one choice is allowed within any set of radio  
buttons. If a second choice is made, the first choice is cancelled. The action  
selected by the radio button typically occurs after all screen selections are  
made and a push-button is selected to initiate the actions.  
„12ꢀ Pull-Down Menu  
Pull-down menus are an expansion of an action bar item. The pull-down is  
displayed when the corresponding action bar item is selected. The ellipsis  
(...) following a menu item indicates that a pop-up window will be opened if  
that item is selected. A right-pointing triangle (Ê) at the right of a selection  
item indicates that this selection has an associated hidden pull-down that  
will be displayed if the item is selected.  
Click on the desired action to highlight the item. If a line item is reduced in  
contrast (dimmer) from other items (Action 2 in Figure 36 on page 89), the  
item is not available for selection.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
„13ꢀ Action Bar  
The action bar is the primary window containing keywords that, when  
selected, cause a pull-down window to be displayed.  
Click on the desired action to highlight the item. If a line item is dimmed,  
the item is not available for selection.  
Making Library Manager Selections  
You can make selections from the action bar of the Operator menu, with choices  
from the pull-down menus, or by active radio buttons, check boxes, and  
push-buttons. Although you can use either the keyboard or the pointing device to  
make your choices, the pointing device is the preferred method for ease of use.  
Selections with the Keyboard  
You can use the keyboard to make selections instead of using the pointing device.  
1. Activate the Operator (or main) menu action bar by pressing Ctrl+F10.  
2. Highlight the item by using one of the following methods:  
v Use the cursor arrow keys to highlight the desired item.  
v Key in the underlined letter of the desired item, which is usually the first letter  
in the item.  
3. Press the Enter key.  
The panel for the selected item is then displayed.  
4. Return to the Operator menu action bar by pressing the Esc key.  
5. Press the Esc key a second time to deactivate the Operator menu action bar.  
Figure 38 on page 93 shows the commonly used keys.  
Note: Some actions prompt for confirmation before actual selection occurs.  
Confirmation is typically done by pressing the Enter key or selecting an OK  
or a Yes push button.  
Selections with the Pointing Device  
There are two types of keyboard available. One has a trackball pointing device, as  
shown in Figure 38 on page 93. The other has a red button (trackpoint) in the  
middle of the keyboard as shown in Figure 39 on page 94.  
The pointing devices are used to select items on the display, and actions are taken  
by using the accompanying buttons.  
To select items by using the trackball pointing device, do the following:  
1. Rotate the ball „5ꢀ to position the pointer on the object.  
2. Press and quickly release button „1ꢀ. This action selects an object and is  
referred to as clicking on an object.  
3. Press and quickly release button „1ꢀ twice to initiate the selected item. This  
action is referred to as double-clicking on an object.  
To select and move an object on the screen, do the following:  
1. Rotate the ball „5ꢀ to position the pointer on the object.  
92 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Click on the object using button „2ꢀ or „4ꢀ to select and lock the pointer on the  
object.  
3. Rotate the ball to move the object. This action is also referred to as dragging an  
object.  
4. Release the object by pressing either button.  
Note: The object may also be moved by holding down button „1ꢀ or button „3ꢀ  
while moving the ball and then releasing the button when the object is  
positioned as desired.  
Figure 38. Pointing Device  
Track Pointer Keyboard  
To select items using the Track Pointer keyboard, do the following:  
1. Gently press the track point („3ꢀ in Figure 39 on page 94) in the direction you  
desire the pointer to move and position the pointer on the object.  
2. Press and quickly release button „1ꢀ in Figure 39 on page 94. This action  
selects an object and is referred to as “clicking on an object”.  
3. Press and quickly release button „1ꢀ in Figure 39 on page 94 twice to initiate  
the selected item. This action is referred to as “double-clicking on an object”.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 39. Track Pointer Keyboard  
To select and move an object on the screen, do the following:  
1. Gently press the trackpoint („3ꢀ in Figure 39) to position the pointer on the  
object.  
2. Press and hold button „1ꢀ in Figure 39 down.  
3. Gently press the trackpoint („3ꢀ in Figure 39) to move the object. This action is  
also referred to as “dragging an object”.  
4. Release the object by releasing button „1ꢀ.  
Note: Button „2ꢀ in Figure 39 is not used.  
Using the Help Pull-Down  
The help facility provides additional information for using the various items on the  
panels. To get help for an action bar item, pull-down menu item, or pop-up window,  
use the pointing device to click on the help action bar item or, from the keyboard,  
highlight the field or item and press F1. The help panel displayed gives a brief  
description of the item or field.  
A help selection also appears on the action bar of the Operator menu. This  
selection is made in the same way as any other selection. Figure 40 shows the  
Help pull-down.  
Figure 40. Help Pull-Down Menu  
The Help pull-down menu includes the following additional choices:  
Help for help  
Explains the content and how to use the other help choices.  
94 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Extended help  
Provides general information about the Operator menu. Click on Extended  
help from the Help pull-down menu (or select and press Enter). You can  
also press F2 from within a help window.  
Keys help  
Displays a list of key assignments available. Click on Keys help from the  
Help pull-down menu (or select and press Enter). You can also press F9  
from within a help window.  
Help index  
Provides an alphabetic list of items along with a search capability of all the  
help information in the application. See Figure 41. You can press F11 or  
Shift+F1 from within a help window to view this list.  
About Displays the library manager copyright notice and version, and the  
operating system version.  
Figure 41. Help Index Pop-Up Window  
Help Search  
To search the list of help topics, do the following:  
1. Click on Search from the Services pull-down menu (or select and press Enter).  
Note: The Services menu is available under any of the Help pull-down panels.  
2. Type the word or phrase in the Search field (case is ignored).  
3. Click on the desired search pattern, for example, the Index radio button. On the  
keyboard, use the tab keys to move between the radio button and the  
push-button groups, and then highlight the desired search pattern by using the  
cursor arrow keys.  
4. Click on Search or select and press Enter.  
Help Action Bar and Function Keys  
The following action bar choices are always available:  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Services  
Search through the help windows.  
Options  
Expand or contract the list of available help windows or display the list of  
help windows you have viewed during the session.  
Help Provide help to use the Help facility.  
If you select Contents from the Options pull-down menu, the contents window  
appears. This window lists all the available help topics. A plus sign (+) next to a  
topic indicates that additional entries are available for that topic. Click on the plus  
sign to see the complete list. If you are using a keyboard, press the Up or Down  
arrow key to highlight the topic and then press the + key.  
Words and phrases that are highlighted indicate that help is available for that topic.  
Highlighting can be words in reverse text (text with white letters on a black  
background) or words set off in a different color. To select, move the pointing device  
arrow to the reverse text topic and double-click. (See “Selections with the Pointing  
Device” on page 92 for instructions to use the pointing device to make selections.)  
To make a keyboard selection, tab to the highlighted word and press Enter. (See  
“Selections with the Keyboard” on page 92 for instructions to use the keyboard to  
make selections.)  
If you want to view a topic, double-click on the topic (or select and press Enter).  
After selecting a topic, the information for that topic appears in a window. The topic  
title appears at the top of the window to remind you of the topic being viewed.  
To close a help window, press the Esc key. The previous help topic appears if one  
is available. If not, the previous window appears.  
To exit the Help facility without viewing previous help topics, click on Close from the  
system menu pull-down menu, press Ctrl+F4, press Alt+F4, press Esc, or  
double-click on the system menu icon.  
Note: When two keys are joined with +, for example, Ctrl+F4, press and hold Ctrl,  
press F4, and then release F4 and Ctrl.  
You can also move the pointing device arrow to the − sign in the upper left-hand  
corner of the help window and double-click with the pointing device button. (See  
“Selections with the Pointing Device” on page 92 for instructions to use the pointing  
device to make selections.)  
Key Functions  
The following keys are available for use with the library manager:  
F1  
F2  
Displays the help window.  
Displays extended help (general help information) from within the currently  
displayed help window.  
F3  
Initiates shutdown procedures.  
F9  
Displays a list of keys from within any help window.  
Activates the pop-up window action bar.  
F10  
F11 or Shift+F1  
Displays the Help index from within any help window.  
96 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ctrl+F10  
Activates the Operator menu action bar.  
Ctrl+PgUp  
Displays the text to the left of the window.  
Ctrl+PgDn  
Displays the text to the right of the window.  
Alt+F4  
Alt+F5  
Alt+F7  
Alt+F8  
Alt+F9  
Alt+F10  
Closes the window.  
Restores the window to its original size.  
Moves the window.  
Sizes the window.  
Minimizes the window on the display.  
Maximizes (enlarges) the window.  
Alt+Spacebar  
Cycles between the application panel and the selected pull-down menu.  
Shift+F10  
Displays information about the help facility.  
Shift+Esc  
Cycles between the application panel and the selected pull-down menu.  
Shift+Tab  
Moves the cursor to the left among a group of choices.  
Tab  
Moves the cursor to the right among a group of choices.  
Arrows  
Moves the cursor among selectable choices.  
End  
Causes the last selectable item in the pull-down menu to be highlighted  
(ready for selection).  
Esc  
Cancels a pull-down menu or a system menu.  
Home Causes the first selectable item in the pull-down menu to be highlighted  
(ready for selection).  
PgDn Scrolls down one window.  
PgUp Scrolls up one window.  
Underlined letter  
Permits simplified keyboard selection by using only a single letter for an  
action bar or a pull-down menu item.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Operator Menu  
The Operator menu (see Figure 42) is displayed after the following:  
v The library manager is powered on.  
v The Copyright panel is displayed.  
v The Auto mode/Online state process has completed.  
Figure 42. Operator Menu  
The Operator menu panel consists of a title bar, an action bar, and initially, the  
System Summary window. See Figure 43.  
Figure 43. System Summary Pop-Up Window  
You can select any of the action items from the Operator menu. When one of the  
action items is selected, a pull-down menu is displayed with additional information  
or selections.  
Selection  
Pull-Down Menu Selections  
Mode Allows selection of an operational mode and state (see “Using the Mode  
Pull-Down” on page 99).  
Status  
Displays subsystem status and statistics (see “Using the Status Pull-Down”  
on page 109).  
Queues  
Displays the contents of the command queues (see “Using the Queues  
Pull-Down” on page 137).  
Database  
Provides database search procedures for volumes (see “Using the  
Database Pull-Down” on page 139).  
Commands  
Provides operator commands and allows responses to intervention-required  
conditions (see “Using the Commands Pull-Down” on page 152).  
98 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Options  
Provides various subsystem options (see “Using the Options Pull-Down” on  
page 226).  
Help Provides general help (see “Using the Help Pull-Down” on page 94).  
See “Key Functions” on page 96 for a listing of the keys associated with the  
Operator menu.  
Using the Mode Pull-Down  
Use the Mode pull-down (see Figure 44) to change the Operating mode of the  
3494. The Mode pull-down shows the current Operating mode and state of the  
3494 by using check marks next to appropriate line items. When you select a new  
mode or state, the check marks are moved to the new line items.  
Figure 44. Mode Pull-Down Menu  
The Mode pull-down selections are as follows:  
Auto Selects automated operation. (See “Auto” on page 100.)  
Pause Pauses cartridge accessor motion. (See “Pause” on page 100.)  
Manual  
Places the 3494 in Manual mode. (See “Manual” on page 101.)  
Online  
Allows the 3494 to accept host commands. (See “Online” on page 101.)  
Offline  
Causes the 3494 to reject host commands. (See “Offline” on page 103.)  
Service menu  
Displays the service menu. (See “Service Menu” on page 104.)  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operator menu  
Causes the operator menu to be displayed when in service mode.  
Switch active library manager to standby  
Allows the operator to manually switch the active library to be the standby  
library manager.  
Accessors  
Allows the operator to manually switch the active accessor to be the  
standby accessor, enable dual active accessors, or disable dual active  
accessors.  
Lockup library manager  
Locks keyboard and display to system administrator password.  
Shutdown  
Causes the 3494 to enter the shutdown process. (See “Shutdown” on  
page 108.)  
Auto  
Select Auto for automated operations. After confirmation of the Auto mode selection,  
the library manager sends all motion commands to the cartridge accessor controller.  
You are prompted to confirm the selection. The confirmation step allows you to  
explore the list of pull-down items before you confirm the selection.  
If you select Auto from Pause mode, cartridge accessor motion is again enabled. If  
selected while in Manual mode, all commands queued for the Manual mode are  
requeued for the cartridge accessor and the cartridge accessor’s motion is enabled.  
The icon before Auto indicates that Auto mode was selected.  
When the library manager is powered on and the initialization code executes  
successfully, Auto mode is started automatically after two minutes if the user does  
not intervene. The operator or service representative may want to prevent the  
library manager from automatically going Online and in Auto mode. A pop-up  
window is displayed (after the IBM logo panel display times out) that allows the user  
to press the Enter key and continue directly into Auto mode and Online state or  
select one of the following:  
v Auto mode and Offline state  
v Pause mode and Online state  
v Pause mode and Offline state  
v Manual mode and Online state  
v Manual mode and Offline state  
See Figure 45 on page 102 for the mode selection pop-up window.  
Note: Auto mode and Online state is the default without user intervention.  
Pause  
Select Pause mode for the cartridge accessor to move to its park position in the  
service area after finishing the operation in progress. Note that several commands  
may have to complete before the 3494 enters Pause mode. You are then prompted  
to confirm the selection. The icon before Pause indicates that Pause mode was  
selected.  
100 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The library manager continues to accept commands from the host. The commands  
are either performed (immediate non-motion, non-mount commands) or queued  
(motion commands) if the 3494 is Online.  
The System Summary window contains the operational mode status and displays  
Pause Pending from the time that Pause is requested until the time that the  
cartridge accessor is stopped. When the cartridge accessor is stopped, the System  
Summary window displays Pause.  
Use Pause mode when you want to stop all cartridge accessor motion in an orderly  
manner (usually to open a front door).  
To resume cartridge accessor motion, select Auto from the Mode pull-down menu.  
Note: If you are in Pause mode and you want to go to the Offline state, you must  
go to either Auto mode or Manual mode. From either of these modes  
(selected from the Pause/Offline Pending pop-up window), you can complete  
the transition to the Offline state. This process allows the 3494 to handle all  
pending host commands before going to the Offline state.  
Manual  
Use Manual mode when the cartridge accessor is out of service. In Manual mode,  
the library manager console displays all mount and eject requests. The display also  
shows the cartridge volser, the tape library drive number, and the location of the  
cartridge.  
When selected, the mode changes from Auto or Pause mode to Manual mode. You  
are prompted to confirm the selection. The icon before Manual indicates that  
Manual mode was selected. The cartridge accessor is automatically parked in the  
home position. The library manager then directs motion commands to the Manual  
mode window instead of to the cartridge accessor.  
See “Using Manual Mode” on page 227 for a complete description of the Manual  
mode operating procedure.  
Online  
Selecting Online causes the library manager to send a message to all attached  
3490E/3590 and Virtual Tape Servers to indicate that the library manager is Online.  
If Online is selected and the library manager is already Online, the selection is  
ignored and no messages are sent to the attached control units. The pop-up  
window indicates Online Pending while the library manager is in the process of  
going Online.  
You are prompted to confirm the selection. The select button in front of Online  
indicates that the Online state was selected.  
When the library manager is powered on and after all the initialization code  
executes successfully, Auto mode and Online state starts automatically after a  
two-minute delay if the user does not intervene. The operator or service personnel  
may want to prevent the library manager from automatically going Online and in  
Auto mode. A pop-up window is displayed (after the IBM logo panel display times  
out) that allows you to press the Enter key and continue directly into Auto mode and  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Online state or to make a selection. Selections that are not possible are disabled  
(dimmed). See Figure 45.  
Figure 45. Initial Mode/State Selection Pop-Up Window  
While in Online mode, the library manager is capable of receiving, queueing, and  
executing commands from attached hosts.  
Whenever the Library Manager is brought Online, a check for Fast Ready  
Categories is made. If the library has a VTS installed and there are no Fast Ready  
Categories defined, a warning message is displayed (see Figure 46). The message  
simply warns that at least one Fast Ready Category should be defined. The  
warning message is automatically removed after one minute if the OK button is not  
selected. If a VTS is not installed or there are Fast Ready Categories defined, no  
warning message is displayed. See “Set VTS Category Attributes” on page 166 for  
information on setting Fast Ready Categories.  
Note: Notify your system administrator if you see this message.  
Figure 46. Fast-Ready Category Check Pop-Up Window  
102 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Offline  
Select Offline for the cartridge accessor to complete all queued requests. No  
additional requests are accepted. During the processing of queued requests, the  
3494 is in the Offline Pending state. If Offline is selected and the library manager is  
already Offline, the selection is ignored and no messages are sent to the attached  
hosts. The pop-up window indicates Offline Pending while the library manager is in  
the process of going Offline.  
You are prompted to confirm the selection. The select button in front of Offline  
indicates that the Offline state was selected.  
The Offline Request pop-up window (see Figure 47) instructs the operator to vary  
the library Offline and to resolve any intervention-required conditions.  
Figure 47. Offline Request Pop-Up Window  
|
|
|
|
The library manager cannot go to the Offline state if an Export or an Import  
operation is in progress. If the operator attempts to do this, the pop-up message  
shown in Figure 48 on page 104 will be displayed alerting the operator to do one of  
the following:  
|
|
v Wait for the operation to complete.  
v Cancel the operation from the host.  
|
|
v Cancel the operation by selecting “Cancel VTS Export/Import” from the  
Commands/System Management pulldown.  
|
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 48. Mode/State Change Request Pop-Up Window  
|
If no intervention-required conditions exist, the instruction is reduced in contrast  
(dimmer) from other items. The Offline Request pop-up window has the following  
controls:  
OK  
Operator intervention  
If enabled, this selection takes the operator to the Operator Intervention  
This selection continues the Offline process.  
pop-up window.  
Cancel  
This selection cancels the Offline request and leaves the library in the  
Online operational state.  
Help This selection provides additional information to aid the operator in the  
Offline process.  
A message is sent to all attached hosts that indicates the library manager is going  
Offline. When the library manager is Offline, maintenance activity can be performed,  
or the library manager can be powered off after shutdown is selected. See  
“Shutdown” on page 108.  
Service Menu  
The Service menu allows the service representative, or an operator with service  
level authorization, access to additional service functions. This menu is active only  
when the Operator menu is displayed.  
Typically, Service mode is password-protected. The password-protection option can  
be selected during installation. Figure 49 shows the service menu notice that is  
displayed when service mode is accessed and is not password-protected.  
Figure 49. Service Menu Notice  
104 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Switch Active Library Manager to Standby  
Note: This selection is only available when the high availability model is installed  
and the standby library manager is enabled.  
The switch active library manager to standby option allows the operator to manually  
switch the active library to become the standby library manager. To process the  
switch over, the active library manager must be offline and in pause mode. The  
switch takes approximately five minutes to complete. The library manager may  
prompt the operator for the administrator password (see Figure 50).  
Figure 50. System Administrator Password Pop-Up Window  
The library manager then asks for the operator for confirmation before continuing  
with the switch over (see Figure 51).  
Figure 51. Library Switch Over Confirmation Pop-Up Window  
During the switch over, the library manager displays the standby pop-up window  
(see Figure 52 on page 106).  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 52. Switching Pop-Up Window  
When the system status screen is displayed, the switch over is complete.  
Accessors  
Switch Active Accessor to Standby  
Note: This selection is only available when Model HA1 is installed.  
The switch active accessor to standby option allows the operator to manually switch  
the active accessor to become the standby accessor. When selected, the library  
manager asks the operator for confirmation before continuing with the switchover  
(see Figure 53).  
Figure 53. Accessor Switch Over Confirmation Pop-Up Window  
During the switch over, the library manager displays the standby pop-up window  
(see Figure 54 on page 107).  
106 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 54. Switching Pop-Up Window  
Enable Dual Active Accessors  
Note: This selection is only available when the dual active accessors feature is  
installed.  
The enable dual active accessors option allows the operator to manually enable the  
dual active accessors feature. When selected, the library manager displays the Dual  
Active Accessor Status Pop-up Window. See Figure 55.  
Figure 55. Dual Active Accessor Status Pop-Up Window — Enabling  
Disable Dual Active Accessors  
Note: This selection is only available when the dual active accessors feature is  
installed.  
The disable dual active accessors option allows the operator to manually disable  
the dual active accessors feature. When selected, the library manager displays the  
Mark Accessor Active Pop-Up Window. See Figure 56 on page 108.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 56. Mark Accessor Active Pop-Up Window  
Once you select an accessor to leave active, the library manager displays the Dual  
Active Accessor Status Pop-Up Window. See Figure 57.  
Figure 57. Dual Active Accessor Status Pop-Up Window — Disabling  
Lockup Library Manager  
Locks the keyboard and display until the system administrator’s password is  
entered.  
Shutdown  
The Shutdown option prepares the library manager for the power-off procedure. If  
the library manager is currently in the Offline state and Pause mode, the volume  
database is stopped, files are closed, and the library manager program is ended.  
The system administrator password is required to initiate the shutdown procedures  
if the password option is chosen. (See “System Administrator Password” on  
page 200 for instructions to set the administrator password.)  
Select Shutdown from the Mode pull-down or press the F3 key to cause the  
System Administrator Password pop-up window to appear. See Figure 58 on  
page 109.  
Note: This window will only appear if the password option is chosen.  
108 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 58. System Administrator Password Pop-Up Window  
If you select Cancel, the shutdown request is ended and the pop-up window is  
closed. If you enter a valid password and select OK, an Are you sure? query is  
presented. If you select No, the shutdown request is ended. If you select Yes, the  
shutdown panel is shown. Figure 59 displays the shutdown panel.  
|
|
Figure 59. Shutdown Panel  
Using the Status Pull-Down  
Use the Status pull-down (see Figure 60 on page 110) to display the status of the  
3494.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 60. Status Pull-Down Menu  
The Status pull-down selections are as follows:  
Operational status  
Displays the status. (See “Operational Status” on page 111.)  
Component availability status  
Displays the status. (See “Component Availability” on page 115.)  
|
|
|
VTS status  
Displays the status of each VTS configured in the library. (See “VTS Status”  
on page 118.)  
Performance Statistics  
Displays statistics. (See “Performance Statistics” on page 119.)  
Accessor Mounts per Hour  
Displays Mounts per hour for each accessor. (See Figure 70 on page 122.)  
|
|
VTS x Allows selection of the following for each VTS, where x denotes the VTS  
number:  
|
|
|
VTS Active data  
Displays VTS Active data statistics (See “VTS Active Data” on  
page 123.)  
|
|
|
VTS Data flow  
Displays VTS Data Flow statistics (See “VTS Data Flow” on  
page 125.)  
|
|
|
VTS Mount Hit Data  
Displays VTS Mount Hit Data (See “VTS Mount Hit Data” on  
page 126.)  
110 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
VTS Physical device mount history  
Displays VTS Physical device Mount history (See Figure 74 on  
page 128.)  
|
|
|
VTS Logical Mounts per hour  
Displays VTS Logical Mounts per hour statistics (See “VTS Logical  
Mounts Per Hour” on page 129.)  
|
|
|
Active Data Distribution  
Displays VTS Active Data Distribution statistics (See Figure 76 on  
page 130.)  
|
System summary  
Displays subsystem status. (See “Using the System Summary” on  
page 131.)  
LAN Status  
Displays LAN status. (See “LAN Status” on page 135.)  
Dual accessor zones  
Displays frames serviced by each accessor. (See Figure 79 on page 136.)  
Operational Status  
Figure 61 shows the top half of the Operational Status pop-up window. Figure 62  
shows the bottom half of the Operational Status pop-up window for systems that  
only have a single accessor. Figure 63 on page 114 shows the bottom half of the  
Operational Status pop-up window for systems that have dual accessors.  
Figure 61. (Part 1 of 3) Operational Status Pop-Up Window  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Pending Operations shows the number of pending operations for the following  
requests:  
v Mounts and demounts  
v Ejects and inserts  
v Audits  
v Cleans  
v Exports  
v Imports  
|
|
When an operation is pending, it is in progress, queued, or blocked. If you need  
more specific information about a pending operation, select the appropriate queue.  
(See “Using the Queues Pull-Down” on page 137.)  
Library sequence numbers shows the unique identification numbers for each  
logical library within the physical 3494. Numbers are displayed for non-VTS  
libraries, and for each VTS library which exists in the 3494 tape library. These  
numbers are assigned at the plant of manufacture and set during the teach  
operation.  
Tape subsystem IDs shows the unique identification numbers for the tape  
subsystems installed in the 3494. The host software uses this information to  
determine the configuration.  
Capacity shows the total and empty number of storage cells in the library. It also  
shows the total and empty number of high-capacity output facility cells.  
Home Cell Mode shows where the accessor will return a cartridge after processing.  
In Fixed mode, the cartridge will be returned to the cell from which it was originally  
retrieved. In Floating mode, the cartridge will be returned to a cell determined by  
the library manager.  
112 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 62. (Part 2 of 3) Operational Status Pop-Up Window (single accessor systems)  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 63. (Part 3 of 3) Operational Status Pop-Up Window (dual accessor systems)  
Database Dual Write shows whether the database dual-write function is enabled. It  
indicates Disabled, Enabled, or Not installed.  
|
|
Dual Active Accessors Feature shows the status of the dual active accessors  
feature. It indicates Disabled, Enabled, or Not installed.  
|
|
|
Standby Library Manager indicates the status of the standby library manager. It  
indicates Enabled, Disabled, Pending (waiting for a database copy to complete),  
or Code Update (shut down for a code update by service personnel).  
Dual Library Manager Unit Primary Link indicates the status of the primary  
communication path between the two library managers. It indicates Enabled or  
Disabled or Not Installed.  
Dual Library Manager Alternate Link indicates the status of the secondary  
communication path between the two library managers. It indicates Enabled or  
Disabled or Not Installed.  
|
|
Transaction logging shows the status of transaction logging. It indicates Disabled  
or Enabled.  
Accessor A Port or Accessor B Port shows the status of the accessor port  
initialization. It indicates Initialized, Not initialized, Not installed, Not taught or  
Not available.  
Default Cartridge Type shows the default cartridge type Options are 1, E J, or  
None.  
114 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Initialization shows status of the tape subsystem control unit ports and direct  
attach ports. It indicates whether a port is a Direct Attach or Control unit port. It  
indicates Initialized, Not initialized, or Not installed.  
The Operational Status window has the following pull-downs available from its  
action bar:  
Refresh  
Immediately refreshes or updates the contents of the window. The window  
is periodically refreshed; however, clicking the pointing device on the  
selection area of the window causes an immediate update of the window.  
Help Provides help about the items in the window.  
To close the window, select Close from the system menu icon (upper-left corner of  
the window).  
Component Availability  
The library manager keeps track of which components are available so that it can  
make the best use of the available hardware when processing commands. When a  
component fails, the component is automatically marked unavailable for use. The  
library manager does not use the component (for example, a 3490E/3590 drive)  
until it is marked available via the Service menu on the library manager console.  
The availability status of all the library components can be displayed on the library  
manager console. Availability information is kept in the library manager database so  
that it is not lost if the library manager is shutdown.  
Drives can be marked on the library manager as available or unavailable. If a drive  
is available, it is available to the cartridge accessor. If the drive is marked  
unavailable, the drive is not available to the cartridge accessor.  
Note: Device availability or unavailability is independent of the drive status (Online  
or Offline) with the host.  
A drive is marked unavailable when something prevents the cartridge accessor from  
going to that drive, for example, the drive is being serviced. Even if no host  
requests are made for the drive, the library manager may try to clean a drive if it is  
available.  
Device availability is not checked when host requests are received and validated  
because the drive availability can change between the time the command is  
accepted and the time the request is executed. If a host request is accepted and  
the required drive is marked as unavailable when it is time to execute the request,  
the request fails. Conversely, if the required drive is unavailable at request  
acceptance but is made available before the request executes, the request  
completes normally.  
Figure 64 on page 116, Figure 65 on page 117, and Figure 66 on page 117 show the  
Component Availability Status windows.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 64. (Part 1 of 3) Component Availability Status Pop-Up Window  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station  
The station’s availability is shown by 1, 0, or — — —, where 1 indicates  
available, 0 indicates not available, and — — — indicates not installed.  
Cartridge Accessor  
The cartridge accessor’s availability is shown by 1, 0, or — — —, where 1  
indicates available, 0 indicates not available, and — — — indicates not  
installed.  
Grippers  
Each gripper’s availability is shown by 1, 0, or — — —, where 1 indicates  
available, 0 indicates not available, and — — — indicates not installed.  
Vision System  
The vision system’s availability is shown by 1, 0, or — — —, where 1  
indicates available, 0 indicates not available, and — — — indicates not  
installed.  
116 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 65. (Part 2 of 3) Component Availability Status Pop-Up Window  
Figure 66. (Part 3 of 3) Component Availability Status Pop-Up Window  
Ports Figure 65, and Figure 66 show part of the tape subsystem pictorial  
presentation. Subsystem 1 in the figure represents the left-most tape  
subsystem in the library when you face the front of the library. The control  
unit (CU) ports associated with that particular control unit are displayed  
within the box. The port’s availability is shown by 1 or 0, where 1 indicates  
available, and 0 indicates not available.  
Devices  
Figure 65, and Figure 66 show part of the tape subsystem pictorial  
presentation. A drawing of each tape subsystem is displayed with the drive  
IDs shown for each drive. If a VTS library is installed, the virtual  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
subsystems are represented by a figure that looks similar to a 16 drive  
3490E tape subsystem. Each subsystem is presented separately in the  
window. The drive availability is shown by 1, 0, – – –, where 1 indicates  
available, 0 indicates not available, and – – – indicates not installed.  
The Component Availability Status window has the following pull-down available  
from its action bar:  
Help Provides help about the Component Availability Status window.  
To close the window, select Close from the system menu icon (upper-left  
corner of the window).  
| VTS Status  
|
|
Figure 67 shows the VTS Status window.  
Figure 67. VTS Status Pop-Up Window  
|
|
This panel displays information about the status of each VTS installed in the library.  
This window includes the following information for each installed VTS:  
|
|
|
|
Library Sequence Number  
Displays the library sequence number of this VTS. If the VTS has the SCSI  
Host Attachment Feature, then ’(SCSI)’ will be displayed following the  
Library Sequence Number.  
|
|
|
VTS Attachment Type  
There are 2 types of VTS connection to the Library Manager: ARTIC or  
LAN.  
|
|
|
|
Physical/Virtual Device Frame  
The physical device frame is the number of the frame that contains the  
physical devices used by this VTS. The virtual device frame is the number  
of the frame that contains the VTS processor. For an ARTIC-attached VTS  
118 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
this field displays the frame number. For a LAN-attached VTS, ″B18″ is  
displayed since the VTS processor is in a rack not attached to the library  
frames.  
|
|
Exp/Imp Capable  
If the VTS is Import/Export capable, this field will be ″Yes″.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
VTS Port  
This is the Library Manager port used to communicate with the VTS. For an  
ARTIC-attached VTS this is ARTIC port 0. For a LAN-attached VTS this is  
the LAN port number which starts at 0x10. If the Library Manager has  
initialized with the port, the port’s number is displayed. If it is not initialized  
a dash (-) is displayed.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Physical Device Ports  
These are the Library Manager ports used to communicate with the  
physical devices associated with the VTS. For an ARTIC-attached VTS  
there is one port for each physical drive. For a LAN-attached VTS there is  
only one port used to communicate with all of the VTS physical drives. If  
the Library Manager has initialized with a port, the port’s number is  
displayed. If it is not initialized a dash (-) is displayed.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Virtual Device Ports  
These are the Library Manager ports used to communicate with the virtual  
devices associated with the VTS. There is one port for each virtual  
subsystem of 16 drives. An ARTIC-attached VTS has 2 virtual subsystems.  
A LAN-attached VTS can have either 2 or 4 virtual subsystems. If the  
Library Manager has initialized with a port, the port’s number is displayed. If  
it is not initialized a dash (-) is displayed.  
|
|
|
|
VTS Primary IP Address  
This is only displayed for a LAN-attached VTS. This is the IP address of the  
Library Manager which is used by the VTS processor to communicate with  
the Library Manager.  
|
|
|
The VTS Status window has the following buttons:  
OK  
Closes the VTS Status window.  
Help Provides help about the VTS Status window.  
| Performance Statistics  
Figure 68 on page 120 and Figure 69 on page 121 show the Performance Statistics  
window.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 68. (Part 1 of 2) Performance Statistics Pop-Up Window  
The Performance Statistics window displays the following statistics on the 3494:  
v The number of mounts for the previous 7 days  
v The number of mounts for the previous 24 hours  
v The number of mounts per hour for the previous 24 hours  
v The average mount time for the previous 24 hours  
v The number of ejects for the previous 24 hours  
v The number of inserts for the previous 24 hours  
v The number of audits for the previous 24 hours  
v The peak number of mounts per hour for the previous 24 hours  
v The time when peak mounts per hour occurred  
v The number of mounts during the last hour  
v The number of demounts during the last hour  
v The number of ejects during the last hour  
v The number of inserts during the last hour  
v A graph of the number of mounts per hour for the previous 24 hours  
Hourly statistics are calculated on the hour (7:00, 8:00, and so on).  
120 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 69. (Part 2 of 2) Performance Statistics Pop-Up Window  
The Performance Statistics window has the following pull-downs available from its  
action bar:  
Refresh  
Refreshes or updates the contents of the window immediately instead of  
periodically (about every 30 seconds). You can also click the pointing  
device on the client area of the window.  
Help Provides help about the Performance Statistics window.  
To close the window, select Close from the system menu icon (upper-left corner of  
the window).  
The performance statistics reflect physical activity in the library. Commands  
involving VTS logical volumes are not part of these statistics.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Accessor Mounts per Hour  
Figure 70 shows the Accessor Mounts per Hour window.  
Figure 70. Accessor Mounts per Hour Pop-Up Window  
The Accessor Mounts per Hour window displays a graph showing the number of  
mounts per hour for each accessor. Data is displayed for the previous 24 hours.  
The current hour’s data is designated by an asterisk for Accessor A and a diamond  
for accessor B.  
The Accessor Mounts per Hour window has the following pull-downs available from  
its action bar:  
Refresh  
Refreshes or updates the contents of the window immediately. You can also  
click the pointing device on the client area of the window.  
Help Provides help about the Accessor Mounts per Hour window.  
To close the window, select Close from the system menu icon (upper-left corner of  
the window).  
122 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTS Active Data  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Active Data window (Figure 71) displays a graph showing the amount of active  
data, amount of free storage, maximum active data, and a free storage alarm level  
for the stacked volumes in a VTS. The data stored on stacked volumes is from the  
Tape Volume Cache and may be compressed when the VTS has the EHPO feature;  
therefore, the graphs do not represent actual host data bytes, but the compressed  
volume sizes as stored in the Tape Volume Cache. A separate graph is available for  
each VTS in the library. Data is displayed for the previous 29 days as of midnight  
and for the current day on an hourly snapshot.  
Figure 71. VTS Active Data Pop-Up Window  
|
|
|
|
Active Data is the total size, as stored in the Tape Volume Cache, of all active  
logical volumes that have been copied to stacked volumes. Virtual volumes that  
exist in the Tape Volume Cache but have not been copied to tape are not included.  
Invalidated (non-active) copies of logical volumes are also not included in the graph.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Maximum Active Data is the total capacity of all stacked volumes that have been  
inserted in the VTS. For the model B16, the Maximum Active Data is a theoretical  
value computed by assuming that stacked volumes are filled with a 2:1  
compression ratio. The model B18 uses the actual compression ratio achieved for  
all data copied from the Tape Volume Cache to full stacked volumes to calculate the  
Maximum Active Data. Because data received from enhanced ESCON host  
attachments has previously been compressed into the Tape Volume Cache,  
compression to the stacked volume from the Tape Volume Cache will be  
approximately 1 to 1 for the B18. Note that invalidated copies of logical volumes  
reduce the amount of active data you can store on the stacked volumes.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
|
|
Free Storage is the total capacity of all empty stacked volumes in the library  
calculated by using a compression ratio as described for Maximum Active Data  
above. Partially filled stacked volumes are not included in this calculation. Free  
Storage gives an indication of how much data from the Tape Volume Cache can be  
added to stacked volumes currently in the VTS.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Free Storage Alarm Level is a threshold to warn you when to add more stacked  
volumes to the VTS library. If the number of empty stacked volumes available is  
less than the number of stacked volumes required to store the amount of Tape  
Volume Cache data specified by the Free Storage Threshold (GB), the Library  
Manager signals an intervention required condition to notify the operator to add  
more stacked volumes. You can modify the alarm threshold on the Library  
Manager’s VTS Management Policies window. See “Set VTS Management Policies”  
on page 167 for more information.  
The VTS Active Data window has the following pull-downs available from its action  
bar:  
Refresh  
Refreshes or updates the contents of the window immediately. You can also  
click the pointing device on the client area of the window.  
Help Provides help about the VTS Active Data window.  
To close the window, select Close from the system menu icon (upper-left corner of  
the window).  
124 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTS Data Flow  
Figure 72 shows the VTS Data Flow window.  
Figure 72. VTS Data Flow Pop-Up Window  
The VTS Data Flow window displays a graph showing the amount of data written to  
and read from the channel. A separate graph is available for each VTS in the  
Library. Data is displayed for the previous 24 hours. The current hour’s data is  
designated by the diamond shaped marker.  
The VTS Data Flow window has the following pull-downs available from its action  
bar:  
Refresh  
Refreshes or updates the contents of the window immediately. You can also  
click the pointing device on the client area of the window.  
Help Provides help about the VTS Data Flow window.  
To close the window, select Close from the system menu icon (upper-left corner of  
the window).  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTS Mount Hit Data  
Figure 73 shows the VTS Mount Hit Data window.  
Figure 73. VTS Mount Hit Data Pop-Up Window  
The VTS Mount Hit Data window displays a graph showing how logical mounts  
have been accomplished as a percentage of the total mounts for an hour. The three  
types are: Fast ready, cache hit, and logical mounts requiring a recall. A separate  
graph is available for each VTS in the Library. Data is displayed for the previous 24  
hours. The current hour’s data is designated by the diamond shaped marker.  
|
A Fast Ready Hit is a mount that the host requested where the category of the  
volser was designated as a “Fast ready” category. This type of mount does not  
require any recall of data from tape. This is the fastest type of mount.  
A Cache Hit is a mount where the volume to be mounted still resides within the  
VTS cache. This type of mount does not require any recall of data from tape.  
A Physical Mount Required means that a stacked volume needed to be mounted  
and data read from it to satisfy the logical mount request. This is the slowest type of  
mount.  
The graph displays 3 lines, one for each type of mount, as a percentage of the total  
number of mounts for an hour.  
126 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The VTS Mount Hit Data window has the following pull-downs available from its  
action bar:  
Refresh  
Refreshes or updates the contents of the window immediately. You can also  
click the pointing device on the client area of the window.  
Help Provides help about the VTS Mount Hit Data window.  
To close the window, select Close from the system menu icon (upper-left corner of  
the window).  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VTS Physical Device Mount History  
Figure 74 shows the VTS Physical Device Mount History window.  
Figure 74. VTS Physical Device Mount History Pop-Up Window  
The VTS Physical Device Mount History Data window displays a graph showing the  
minimum, average, and maximum number of physical drives used at one time to  
mount stacked volumes. A separate graph is available for each VTS in the Library.  
Data is displayed for the previous 24 hours. The current hour’s data is designated  
by the diamond shaped marker.  
This data can be used to determine if there are a sufficient number of physical  
drives to handle the mount workload. It can also be used to determine if the mount  
workload should be shifted such that the mounts requiring a recall (mounting of a  
stacked volume) be redistributed to other times of the day.  
The VTS Physical Device Mount History window has the following pull-downs  
available from its action bar:  
Refresh  
Refreshes or updates the contents of the window immediately. You can also  
click the pointing device on the client area of the window.  
Help Provides help about the VTS Physical Device Mount History window.  
128 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To close the window, select Close from the system menu icon (upper-left corner of  
the window).  
VTS Logical Mounts Per Hour  
Figure 75 shows the VTS Logical Mounts Per Hour window.  
Figure 75. VTS Logical Mounts Per Hour Pop-Up Window  
The VTS Logical Mounts Per Hour window displays a graph showing the number of  
logical mounts per hour. A separate graph is available for each VTS in the Library.  
Data is displayed for the previous 24 hours. The current hour’s data is designated  
by the diamond shaped marker.  
The VTS Logical Mounts Per Hour window has the following pull-downs available  
from its action bar:  
Refresh  
Refreshes or updates the contents of the window immediately. You can also  
click the pointing device on the client area of the window.  
Help Provides help about the VTS Logical Mounts Per Hour window.  
To close the window, select Close from the system menu icon (upper-left corner of  
the window).  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VTS Active Data Distribution  
Figure 76 shows the VTS Active Data Distribution window.  
Figure 76. VTS Active Data Distribution Pop-Up Window  
The VTS Active Data Distribution window displays a graph showing the distribution  
of active data on stacked volumes. A separate graph is available for each VTS in  
the Library. Data is displayed in 5% increments. The first data point shows the  
number of volumes that contain 0 to 5 percent active data, the second data point  
shows the number of volumes containing 6 to 10 percent, and so on.  
The VTS Active Data Distribution window has the following pull-downs available  
from its action bar:  
Refresh  
Refreshes or updates the contents of the window immediately. You can also  
click the pointing device on the client area of the window to refresh.  
Help Provides help about the VTS Active Data Distribution window.  
To close the window, select Close from the system menu icon (upper-left corner of  
the window).  
130 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the System Summary  
The System Summary window (see Figure 77) provides an overview of important  
3494 information.  
Figure 77. System Summary Pop-Up Window  
The System Summary window contains the following:  
Operational mode  
Shows whether the subsystem is in Auto, Auto Pending, Pause, Pause  
Pending, Manual Pending, or Manual mode. See “Using the Mode  
Pull-Down” on page 99 for an explanation of the operational modes.  
Library Manager  
Shows whether the library manager is Online Pending, Online, Offline  
Pending, or Offline to the attached tape control units. See “Using the Mode  
Pull-Down” on page 99 for an explanation of the Online and Offline states.  
Direct attach ports  
Shows which of the direct attached ports are initialized. Each installed port  
is shown from left to right (0–3 and/or 8–B). If a port’s number appears, that  
port is initialized. A ‘–’ shows that the port is not initialized, and a blank  
shows the port is not installed.  
CU ports (RTIC 0x)  
Shows which serial control unit (CU) ports are initialized. Each installed port  
is shown from left to right (0–F depending on port configuration). If a port’s  
number appears, that port is initialized. A ‘–’ shows that the port is not  
initialized, and a blank shows the port is not installed.  
CU ports (LAN 1x)  
Shows which LAN attached control ports are initialized.  
Host LAN ports  
Shows the total number of initialized LAN attach ports. If no LAN attach  
ports are initialized, a Not Initialized message is displayed. A dash shows  
that no LAN ports are initialized.  
Convenience I/O  
Shows whether the Convenience Input⁄Output Station is/has:  
v Not installed  
v Not available  
v Empty  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v Volumes present  
v Opened  
v Unknown  
|
|
|
Convenience I/O Mode  
Shows the mode setting for the Convenience I/O station. Possible mode  
settings are:  
|
|
|
|
v Insert  
v Import  
v Unknown  
v none (This field is blank if the Convenience I/O is not installed)  
|
High-Capacity Output or Input/Output Status  
Shows the status of the high-capacity facility. Not Inventoried indicates an  
inventory operation must be performed before the number of empty  
cartridge storage cells is known. Empty cells- x indicates the high-capacity  
operation is complete and the number of empty cells that remain available  
in the high-capacity facility. Failed indicates the high capacity output  
operation failed. Cancelled indicates the operation was cancelled by an  
operator. In Progress indicates either an Inventory Update that includes the  
high-capacity rack is in progress or a high-capacity only Inventory Update  
is in progress. Percent Complete indicates the progress of the high  
capacity facility. Blank indicates the 3494 has not been taught. Not  
Installed indicates the high-capacity facility was not defined when the 3494  
was taught.  
High Capacity Rack  
Shows which rack contains either the high capacity output facility or the  
high capacity input/output facility. Blank indicates the facility is not installed.  
Inventory Update  
Shows whether inventory update is installed. If inventory update is installed,  
its operational status is displayed. Disabled indicates inventory update will  
not be performed. Not started indicates an inventory update operation has  
not been performed since the 3494 was initialized. Failed indicates the  
inventory update operation failed. Cancelled indicates the inventory update  
operation was cancelled by an operator. In progress indicates the inventory  
update operation is in progress. Percent Complete indicates the progress  
of the inventory update. Completed indicates the inventory update  
operation has completed. An inventory update status panel is displayed  
during the Inventory Update Operation (IUO). Refer to “Perform Inventory  
Update (Partial)” on page 179. Blank indicates the 3494 has not been  
taught.  
Enclosure doors  
Shows the status of the enclosure doors. The window displays Closed if  
the front doors are closed. If any front door is open, the window displays  
Open.  
Overall system  
Shows the overall subsystem status. OK indicates that the subsystem is  
functional. Degraded indicates that some part of the subsystem failed but  
the subsystem can function in a degraded manner. Use Operational status  
and Component availability status from the Status pull-down for  
additional information. (See “Operational Status” on page 111.)  
Standby LM (Library Manager)  
Shows the status of the standby library manager. Enabled indicates the  
132 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
standby LM is functional. Disabled indicates the standby LM is not  
functional and causes the overall system to report Degraded. Not Installed  
indicates the standby LM feature is not installed. Degraded indicates the  
standby LM has lost one of its communication links with the active library  
manager.Not Taught indicates the accessor has not completed a  
successful teach, thus making it unusable.  
Active Accessor  
Shows which accessor is the active accessor. A indicates accessor A is  
active and B indicates accessor B is active. None indicates that there is  
currently not an active accessor (both are unavailable).Both indicates that  
both accessors are currently active on a Dual Active Accessors system.  
Standby Accessor  
Shows the status of the standby accessor. Available indicates that the  
standby can be used if an accessor switch occurs. Service Mode indicates  
the accessor is unavailable while being serviced. Not available indicates  
the accessor has components marked unavailable that currently make it  
unusable. Not installed indicates that the second accessor is not installed.  
If the field is blank, it indicates that both accessors are active.  
Accessor  
Shows the status of the cartridge accessor. OK indicates the accessor is  
functional. Failed indicates that the cartridge accessor failed and cannot  
function. Degraded indicates that some part of the accessor components  
has failed, but the accessor can still function in a degraded manner.  
Gripper  
Shows the status of the gripper. OK indicates that the installed gripper on  
the cartridge accessor is functional. Degraded indicates that one of two  
grippers failed on a cartridge accessor. Failed indicates that the gripper  
failed and the cartridge accessor is unavailable for use. If the high  
availability model is installed, the gripper status displayed shows the status  
for both accessors. OK indicates that the grippers on both accessors are  
functional. Degraded indicates that one of the grippers has failed on either  
the standby or active accessor. If dual grippers are installed, Degraded  
indicates that one, two, or three of the grippers have failed. Failed indicates  
that all the grippers have failed.  
Vision Shows the status of the vision system. OK indicates that the vision system  
on the cartridge accessor is functional. Failed indicates that the vision  
system failed. If the high availability model is installed, the vision system  
status displayed shows the status for both cartridge accessors.OK indicates  
that both vision systems on the cartridge accessors are functional.  
Degraded indicates that one of the vision systems has failed. Failed  
indicates that all vision systems have failed.  
Power Shows the power status to the cartridge accessor. OK indicates that power  
is enabled to the cartridge accessor. Power is Off indicates that power is  
disabled to the cartridge accessor. If the high availability model is installed,  
the power status displayed shows the status for both cartridge accessors.  
OK indicates that power is enabled to both cartridge accessors. Power is  
off indicates that power is disabled to both cartridge accessors. Degraded  
indicates that power is disabled on one of the cartridge accessors. This is  
OK if power was turned off to one accessor and the system has not yet  
transitioned to Auto.  
Port  
Shows the status of the communication port between the accessor  
controller and the library manager. OK indicates communication on this port  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
is established and is active. Not initialized indicates communication on this  
port is not established or is lost. Not installed indicates installation is not  
complete. If the high availability model is installed, the port status shows the  
status for both cartridge accessors. OK indicates communication on this  
port is established and is active for both cartridge accessors. Not initialized  
indicates communication on this port is not established or is lost for both  
cartridge accessors. Degraded indicates communication on this port is  
established and is active for one of the cartridge accessors.  
Intervention  
Shows whether any operator-intervention operations are to be performed.  
None indicates that no intervention-required conditions exist in the library.  
Required indicates that one or more intervention-required conditions exist  
in the library. See “Operator Intervention” on page 199.  
The System Summary window has the following pull-down option available from the  
action bar:  
Help Provides help concerning the System Summary window.  
To close the window, select Close from the system menu icon (upper-left  
corner of the window).  
134 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LAN Status  
The LAN Status pop-up window provides information on the status of the hosts  
attached to the library system via LAN. Figure 78 shows the LAN Status pop-up  
window.  
Figure 78. LAN Status Pop-Up Window  
Host Alias  
This field lists the aliases of the LAN attached hosts. The alias for a host is  
a nickname supplied by the customer for that host. If this field is blank, no  
alias has been set up for this particular host.  
Host Name  
This field lists the names of all the hosts that are (LAN) configured with the  
library system via LAN.  
For TCP/IP hosts, the Host Name is the Hostname defined in the TCP/IP  
network. In Figure 78, rs6000.tucson.com is a TCP/IP Hostname.  
For APPC and APPC/VTAM hosts, the Host Name is a combination of the  
Host Network ID and the Host Location Name. For example, if the Host  
Network ID is USIBMSU, and the Host Location Name is S10A4045, then  
the Host Name is USIBMSU.S10A4045.  
Port  
Init  
The Library Manager assigns a LAN port number to each LAN attached  
host. The LAN port number is displayed in this field as a hexadecimal  
number, and is used by service personnel in problem determination.  
This field indicates if the LAN port is initialized.  
v 0 indicates the LAN is not initialized.  
v 1 indicates the LAN is initialized.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Previously Initialized  
This field indicates if the Library Manager has previously been initialized  
with this host via LAN.  
v 0 in this field indicates the Library Manager has not yet been initialized  
with this host.  
v 1 in this field indicates the Library Manager is initialized or was  
previously initialized with this host.  
The LAN Status panel has the following push-buttons:  
OK  
Closes the window.  
Help Display the help panel.  
Dual Accessor Zones  
Figure 79 shows the Dual Accessor Zones window.  
Figure 79. Dual Accessor Zones Pop-Up Window  
The Dual Accessor Zones window displays a diagram showing the string of frames  
that make up the library, and indicators showing which frames are serviced by each  
accessor. Boundary is the frame number of the frame that is currently serving as  
the zone boundary between Accessor A’s work zone and Accessor B’s work Zone.  
Mode is the boundary mode (fixed or float). Fixed means the boundary is fixed,  
and will not change based on activity. Float means that the boundary will change  
automatically based on activity to balance the accessor workload. The default mode  
is float.  
The Dual Accessor Zones window has the following push-buttons:  
OK  
Closes the Dual Accessor Zones window.  
Help Provides help about the Dual Accessor Zones window.  
To close the window, select the OK push-button in the lower left corner of the  
window.  
136 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Queues Pull-Down  
The Queues pull-down (see Figure 80) allows the operator to display the various  
types of requests that are in progress or waiting to be performed.  
Figure 80. Queues Pull-Down Menu  
Select any item from this pull-down to display a moveable, sizeable, scrollable  
window containing the requested information. In each case, the window has an  
action-bar option to update the information in the window.  
The Queues pull-down selections are as follows:  
Whole queue  
Displays all the requests in the request queue.  
Mount queue  
Displays all the mount operations in the request queue.  
Demount queue  
Displays all the demount operations in the request queue.  
Eject queue  
Displays all the eject operations in the request queue.  
Insert queue  
Displays all the insert operations in the request queue.  
Audit queue  
Displays all the audit operations in the request queue.  
Clean queue  
Displays all the clean operations in the request queue.  
The queue windows, for example, Mount Queue (see Figure 81 on page 138),  
contain the following information for each operation in the queue:  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 81. Mount Queue  
Priority  
The priority group in which the operation was placed.  
Action  
The name of the request.  
Volser The volser associated with the operation. The field is blank if no volser is  
identified. The clean queue entry does not require a volser field.  
Device  
The device identifier associated with the operation. The field is blank if no  
device is identified. The eject, insert, and audit queues do not require a  
device field.  
Status  
The current status of the operation:  
Queued  
The operation is waiting for action.  
In Progress  
The operation is currently being executed.  
Blocked  
The operation is waiting for another operation to complete  
execution before the blocked operation can start. No operator  
action is needed.  
Use the Whole Queue window to determine why a library operation is not  
completing an operation as expected.  
Each queue window has the following pull-down menus available from its action  
bar:  
Refresh  
Refreshes or updates the contents of the window immediately instead of  
periodically.  
Help Displays a help panel with information about the queue windows.  
Each window can be closed by selecting Close on the system menu icon in the  
upper-left corner of the window.  
138 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Database Pull-Down  
Use the Database pull-down (see Figure 82) to view selected volumes based on the  
specified search criteria.  
Figure 82. Database Pull-Down Menu  
The Database pull-down selections are as follows:  
Search database for volumes  
Allows a search of the volume database based on search criteria. (See  
“Search Database For Volumes”.)  
Find a logical volume’s home  
Used to determine which physical volume a logical volume resides on. (See  
“Find Logical Volume’s Home” on page 144.)  
List Database Volumes  
Used to output a customized database search to a flat file on a diskette or  
the C drive. (See “List Database Volumes” on page 145.) The library must  
be Offline to use this option.  
Stacked Volume Map  
Used to output to diskette a map of logical volumes that reside on a  
stacked volume. (See “Stacked Volume Map” on page 150.)  
Search Database For Volumes  
The Search Database for Volumes pop-up window allows a search of the volume  
database for specific volumes, based on search criteria. The more search criteria  
used, the more restrictive the search. See Figure 83 on page 140 for a sample  
window.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 83. Search Database for Volumes Pop-Up Window  
Search Criteria  
The following are selections that can be included in the search criteria:  
Volser Enter the volser used in the search. The volser consists of one to six  
alphanumeric characters that match the cartridge label. You can include a  
wildcard (pattern-matching) character, where ? or _ indicates one character  
and * or % indicates multiple characters.  
Category  
Enter the category used in the search. A category is a logical grouping of  
cartridges for a specific use. The categories are 0000 to FFFF, must contain  
4 hexadecimal characters, and cannot contain wildcard characters. The  
following are predefined categories:  
FF00 Insert  
FF01 VTS Insert  
FF03 VTS Scratch  
FF04 VTS Private  
FF05 VTS Disaster Recovery  
FF06 VTS Disaster Recovery  
FF10 Convenience eject  
FF11 Bulk eject  
|
|
|
FF12 Export-Pending Category  
FF13 Exported Category  
FF14 Import Category  
140 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
FF15 Import-Pending Category  
FF16 Unassigned Category  
FF17 Export Hold Category  
FFF6 Service volser (3590)  
FFF9 Service volser (3490E)  
FFFA Manually ejected  
FFFD Cleaner volser (3590)  
FFFE Cleaner volser (3490E)  
Device  
Either press Enter or select the device used in the search. A device is  
represented by a three-digit tape device identifier. Valid device identifiers  
can be obtained by clicking on the down-facing arrow. Single and multiple  
character wildcards are valid.  
Media Type  
Select the correct media types for the type of tape drives and associated  
logical library installed in the library.  
1 - CST (non-VTS)  
Cartridge System Tape in a non-VTS logical library  
E - ECCST (non-VTS)  
Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape in a non-VTS logical  
library  
J - HPCT (non-VTS)  
High Performance Cartridge Tape in a non-VTS logical library  
1 - CST (VTS 1)  
Logical Cartridge System Tape in VTS 1 logical library  
E - ECCST (VTS 1)  
Logical Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape in VTS 1 logical  
library  
J - HPCT (VTS 1)  
High Performance Cartridge Tape in VTS 1 logical library  
|
|
1 - CST (VTS 2)  
Logical Cartridge System Tape in VTS 2 logical library  
|
|
|
E - ECCST (VTS 2)  
Logical Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape in VTS 2 logical  
library  
|
|
J - HPCT (VTS 2)  
High Performance Cartridge Tape in VTS 2 logical library  
|
|
?
Unknown. This is an actual media type that is no longer used. The  
selection is available for backward compatibility.  
|
|
Don’t Care  
Don’t use media type as a search criterion.  
|
|
Volser Flags  
The following are flag selections that can be included in the search criteria:  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
Misplaced  
The cartridge location is unknown. A volser specified in a library  
request is not in the library where expected.  
|
|
Unreadable  
The vision system cannot read the cartridge volser (bar-code label).  
|
|
Mounted  
The cartridge is mounted or being mounted on a drive.  
|
|
|
|
|
Inaccessible  
The cartridge accessor cannot access the cartridge. A volser  
specified in a library request is in the library, but cannot be  
accessed by the cartridge accessor because of a problem with  
either the cartridge or the cell that contains the cartridge.  
|
|
Manual mode  
An operator handled the cartridge during Manual mode processing.  
Start the search by using the search criteria entered.  
|
|
Search  
|
|
|
The following are possible values for each Volser flag:  
Yes  
Search for volumes to which this flag applies.  
No  
Search for volumes to which this flag does not apply.  
|
|
Ignore  
Search for volumes without regard for this flag.  
|
Search Results  
The results of the search are displayed in a list. The display list can contain up to  
100 records at one time. The vertical scroll bar in the display list can be used to  
scroll through 100 records. If you find more than 100 records, use the Next 100 and  
Prev 100 push-buttons to display the additional records. Each record contains the  
following information:  
Volser The volume serial number of the cartridge.  
M.T.  
The media type of the cartridge  
1
Cartridge System Tape in non-VTS logical library  
E
Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape in non-VTS logical  
library  
J
High Performance Cartridge Tape in non-VTS logical library  
Logical Cartridge System Tape in VTS 1 logical library  
1-1  
E-1  
Logical Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape in VTS 1 logical  
library  
J-1  
Stacked High Performance Cartridge System Tape in VTS 1 logical  
library  
1-2  
E-2  
Logical Cartridge System Tape in VTS 2 logical library  
Logical Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape in VTS 2 logical  
library  
J-2  
Stacked High Performance Cartridge System Tape in VTS 2 logical  
library  
142 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
?
Unknown  
Cat.  
The category represented by four digits that identify the group of volumes  
or a predefined category.  
Cat. Order  
The position of the cartridge in the category.  
|
Flags The status of the flags.  
|
|
Note: For service volumes, the status of the volumes is not reflected in the  
flags.  
|
Figure 84 shows a summary of the flag values.  
Figure 84. Status Flags  
Device  
The tape device identifier if the cartridge is mounted.  
The storage cell that contains the cartridge.  
Cell  
Home The cartridge home cell location.  
Mounts  
The total number of times that the cartridge was mounted.  
Displaying Search Results  
The View Database panel contains push-buttons for the following selections:  
Top  
Display the first database records found that match the search criteria.  
Bottom  
Display the last database records found that match the search criteria.  
Next 100  
If you find more than 100 records, display the next 100 records in the list  
box. If you find fewer than 100 records, this control is disabled.  
Previous 100  
If you find more than 100 records, display the previous 100 records in the  
display list. If you find fewer than 100 records, this control is disabled.  
Cancel  
Close the View Database pop-up window.  
Help Display a help panel with information about the View Database window.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Find Logical Volume’s Home  
The Find Logical Volume’s Home pop-up window allows you to find which stacked  
volume a logical volume resides on. See Figure 85 for a sample window.  
Figure 85. Find Logical Volume’s Home Pop-Up Window  
Enter the logical volume’s Volser in the edit field then select the “Find” button. A  
message “Search in progress” is displayed while the search is occurring. The  
appropriate VTS is interrogated for where the logical volume resides.  
The stacked volume’s Volser is displayed on the panel if the search is successful  
and the logical volume does reside on a stacked volume.  
Messages describing why the search failed are displayed if the search is not  
successful.  
The Find Logical Volume’s Home panel contains push-buttons for the following  
selections:  
Find Initiates the search for the logical volume’s home  
Cancel  
Close the Find Logical Volume’s Home pop-up window.  
Help Display a help panel with information about the Find Logical Volume’s  
Home window.  
144 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
List Database Volumes  
Figure 86. List Database Volume’s Pop-Up Window  
This panel allows you to create an output file containing a customized listing of  
selected database columns. The output file is a flat file that can be output to a  
selectable file name on a diskette or to C:\LM\LISTDB.LST.  
The library must be in the Offline state for this operation.  
During the output process a message, **** OPERATION IN PROGRESS **** is  
displayed.  
Specify the list output contents on the output columns using the five Output  
column drop-down list controls. Each drop-down list contains the following  
selections:  
None List nothing for this column.  
Volser List the Volser.  
Cell  
List the volume’s current rack, column and row.  
Home List the volume’s home rack, column and row.  
Category  
List the volume’s category in hexadecimal form.  
Category Order  
List the volume’s category order in decimal form.  
Media Type  
List the volume’s media type. The media type describes the physical  
cartridge characteristics as well as which logical library the volume is  
associated with as follows:  
1
CST, Cartridge System Tape for non-VTS library  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
E
ECCST, Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape for non-VTS  
library  
J
HPCT, High Performance Cartridge Tape for non-VTS library  
CST, Logical Cartridge System Tape for VTS 1 library  
1-1  
E-1  
ECCST, Logical Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape for VTS  
1 library  
J-1  
1-2  
E-2  
HPCT, High Performance Cartridge Tape for VTS 1 library  
CST, Logical Cartridge System Tape for VTS 2 library  
ECCST, Logical Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape for VTS  
2 library  
J-2  
HPCT, High Performance Cartridge Tape for VTS 2 library  
Mount Date  
List the last date the volume was mounted or inserted.  
Mounts  
List the number of times the volume has been mounted.  
Misplaced  
List if the volume is misplaced.  
Zero (0) indicates the volume is not misplaced. One (1) indicates the  
volume is misplaced.  
Unreadable  
List if the volume’s label is unreadable.  
Zero (0) indicates the volume’s label is readable. One (1) indicates the  
volume’s label is unreadable.  
Mounted  
List if the volume is mounted.  
Zero (0) indicates the volume is not mounted. One (1) indicates the volume  
is mounted.  
Inaccessible  
List if the volume is inaccessible.  
Zero (0) indicates the volume is accessible. One (1) indicates the volume is  
inaccessible.  
Manual mode  
List if the volume is was moved during manual mode.  
Zero (0) indicates the volume was not moved during manual mode. One (1)  
indicates the volume was moved during manual mode.  
Up to five output columns can be selected to be included in the output list. The data  
is sorted by the first two output columns. The first column takes precedence over  
the second column.  
The amount of data contained in the list can be decreased by narrowing certain list  
criteria. One or more of the following can be used to refine the data retrieved:  
Specific Rack  
Select this checkbox if the list output should only include volumes from a  
particular rack. Use the associated drop-down list to select which rack to  
limit the output to. The drop-down list contains all of the racks in the library.  
146 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specific Media Type  
Select this checkbox if the list output should only include volumes of a  
certain media type. Use the associated drop-down list to select which media  
type to limit the output to. The media type describes the physical  
characteristics of the cartridge as well as the logical library the volume is  
associated with. The library sequence number is shown next to each media  
type (xxxxx). Some or all of the following selections are available based on  
the number and type of logical libraries:  
v 1 - CST (Non-VTS xxxxx)  
v E - ECCST (Non-VTS xxxxx)  
v J - HPCT (Non-VTS xxxxx)  
v 1 - CST (VTS 1 xxxxx)  
v E - ECCST (VTS 1 xxxxx)  
v J - HPCT (VTS 1 xxxxx)  
v 1 - CST (VTS 2 xxxxx)  
v E - ECCST (VTS 2 xxxxx)  
v J - HPCT (VTS 2 xxxxx)  
Specific Category  
Select this checkbox if the list output should only include volumes with a  
specific category. Use the associated entry field to enter the desired  
category. The category must be entered as a 4 digit hexidecimal number.  
Volser Mask  
Select this checkbox if the list output should only include volumes that  
match the volser mask. Use the associated entry field to enter the 1 to 6  
character volser mask. You can include a wildcard (pattern-matching)  
character, where ? or _ indicates one character and * or % indicates  
multiple characters.  
Flags Select the desired flag radio buttons if the list should only include volumes  
with certain flags set or cleared. Each flag can be set to 1 of 3 possible  
settings by clicking on the associated radio button.  
The flags can be:  
v Yes  
The flag’s condition applies to this volume (list volumes that this flag  
applies to).  
v No  
The flag’s condition does not apply to this volume (list volumes that this  
flag does not apply to).  
v Ignore  
List volumes with the flags set to any value (list volumes without regard  
to the state of the flag).  
The following flags can be selected:  
v Misplaced  
v Unreadable  
v Mounted  
v Inaccessible  
v Manual Mode  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The output listing can be created on the A: diskette drive or on the C: drive. Select  
the desired radio button. A filename can be entered if the A: drive is selected. The  
filename can be up to 79 characters long. If the C: drive is selected, the output is  
sent to C:\LM\LISTDB.LST.  
The output listing consists of the following:  
v The date and time.  
v The selection criteria.  
v Column headings describing the contents of each column  
v The selected data  
v Total number of records listed.  
If the output listing spans multiple diskettes, the selection criteria is not repeated.  
Various messages can appear during or at the end of the list database operation.  
Possible messages are:  
v Insert a formatted disk into Drive A: Select OK to begin the operation.  
Displayed initially when the output listing is being directed to the A: drive.  
v Insert another formatted disk into Drive A: Select OK to begin the  
operation.  
Displayed if the output listing is large enough that it spans multiple diskettes.  
v The List Database Volumes operation completed successfully.  
The output listing has been created and the operation is complete.  
v The List Database Volumes operation failed.  
The operation failed due to an internal error, try again.  
v The disk is write-protected. Insert another disk into Drive A: Select OK to  
retry the operation.  
The diskette is write protected. Insert in a diskette that is not write-protected and  
try again.  
v The disk in the A: Drive is full. Insert another formatted disk into Drive A:  
Select OK to begin the operation.  
Displayed if the A: drive was selected for output and there is not enough room on  
the diskette to fit the output listing.  
v The disk in the A: Drive is not formatted. Insert another formatted disk into  
Drive A: Select OK to begin the operation.  
The diskette is not formatted. Insert a formatted diskette and try again.  
v The operation could not be completed because the C: Drive is full.  
Displayed if the C: drive was selected for output and there is not enough room  
on the drive to fit the output listing.  
v A disk error occurred attempting the List Database Volumes operation.  
The operation failed due to a disk error. Insert another diskette and try again.  
Following are examples of using the List Database Volumes function.  
v Find all misplaced volumes in rack 3 and display their locations.  
1. Select Volser for Output Column 1.  
2. Select Home for Output Column 2.  
3. Check the Specific Rack checkbox.  
4. Select rack 3 in the associated drop-down list.  
5. Select the Yes radio button associated with Misplaced.  
148 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Select the desired Output Device radio button and enter the Filename if A:  
is selected.  
7. Insert a non-write protected diskette in the A: drive if A: was selected.  
8. Select the Create list button. An Operation In Progress message is displayed  
during the list operation.  
9. A completion message is displayed when the operation is complete.  
v Find all volumes starting with BCD in rack 4 and display their locations and  
category.  
1. Select Volser for Output Column 1.  
2. Select Category for Output Column 2.  
3. Select Home for Output Column 3.  
4. Check the Specific Rack checkbox.  
5. Select rack 4 in the associated drop-down list.  
6. Check the Volser Mask checkbox.  
7. Enter BCD* in the Volser Mask entry field.  
8. Select the desired Output Device radio button and enter the Filename if A:  
is selected.  
9. Insert a non-write protected diskette in the A: drive if A: was selected.  
10. Select the Create list button. An Operation In Progress message is  
displayed during the list operation.  
11. A completion message is displayed when the operation is complete.  
The panel’s pushbuttons are:  
Create list  
Initiate the list database volumes operation  
Cancel  
Close the panel.  
Help Display this help panel  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stacked Volume Map  
The Stacked Volume Map pop-up window allows you to obtain a map of logical  
volumes that reside on a stacked volume. This function is only available if a VTS is  
installed in the library. See Figure 87 for a sample window.  
Figure 87. Stacked Volume Map Pop-Up Window  
Insert a blank, formatted diskette in drive A. The search will not proceed unless a  
diskette is in the drive.  
Enter the stacked volume’s Volser in the edit field then select the “Get map” button.  
A message “Search in progress” is displayed while the search is occurring. The  
appropriate VTS is interrogated for the map of the stacked volume.  
The logical volumes are retrieved 100 at a time from the appropriate VTS. A  
message is displayed when the complete map is received successfully.  
The stacked volume map will be stored on the A: diskette in a file named  
STxxxxxx.MAP where xxxxxx is the stacked volume VOLID.  
Messages describing why the search failed are displayed if the search is not  
successful.  
The output file is in the following format:  
Version: 00001  
Time and Date of Map: 13:40:24 04/24/1998  
Library Sequence Number: 12345  
Customer ID: IBM Global Services  
Stacked Volser: BAR010  
Number of Logicals: 120  
LOG000  
LOG010  
LOG234  
.
.
.
LOG465 SPAN  
150 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If a logical volume spans 2 stacked volumes, the word SPAN appears next to the  
volser.  
Stacked Volume Map panel contains push-buttons for the following selections:  
Get Map  
Initiate the search for logical volumes  
Cancel  
Close the Stacked Volume Map pop-up window.  
Help Display a help panel with information about the Stacked Volume Map  
window.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Commands Pull-Down  
Use the Commands pull-down (see Figure 88) to work with the tape library  
commands.  
Figure 88. Commands Pull-Down Menu  
The Commands pull-down selections are as follows:  
Cleaning  
Allows the selection of the following:  
Schedule cleaning  
Schedule the cleaning of the tape drives based on time or usage.  
(See “Schedule Cleaning” on page 155.)  
Eject a cleaner cartridge  
Eject a selected cleaner cartridge. (See “Eject a Cleaner Cartridge”  
on page 158.)  
Cleaner masks  
Change cleaner masks. (See “Cleaner Cartridge Masks” on  
page 158.)  
Send message to host consoles  
Display a pop-up window where you enter a message (70 characters  
maximum). The message is then sent to all the hosts. (See “Send Message  
to Host Consoles” on page 159.)  
Promote a command in the queue  
Display a pop-up window that allows the user to select one or more  
requests in the command queue to be promoted. (See “Promote a  
Command in the Queue” on page 160.)  
System management  
Allows the selection of the following:  
Volser range for media types  
This panel allows the entry of up to 50 volser ranges and  
associated media types. The volser ranges are used to help  
determine a volser’s media type when it is inserted into the library.  
152 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(See “Volser Range for Media Types” on page 161.) Volser Ranges  
are used only for physical volumes.  
Insert VTS logical volumes  
This panel allows the insert of logical volumes into a VTS library.  
(See “Insert VTS Logical Volumes” on page 163.)  
Eject a VTS stacked volume  
This panel allows a VTS stacked volume to be ejected from the  
library. (See “Eject a VTS Stacked Volume” on page 165.)  
Set VTS category attributes  
This panel allows the setting of a category to a “Fast Ready”  
category. (See “Set VTS Category Attributes” on page 166.)  
Set VTS management policies  
This panel allows the entry of the “Inhibit Reclaim Schedule”, “Free  
Storage Alarm Threshold”, and “Reclaim Threshold”. (See “Set VTS  
Management Policies” on page 167.)  
|
|
|
|
|
Manage Unassigned Volumes  
This panel allows the operator to move physical volumes (J-type,  
HPCT) in the Unassigned category to the Import category, Insert  
category, or to eject the volumes. (See “Manage Unassigned  
Volumes” on page 202.)  
|
|
|
|
|
Manage Import Volumes  
This panel allows the operator to move physical volumes (J-type,  
HPCT) in the Import category to the Insert category, or if desired,  
eject the volumes from the library. See “Manage Import Volumes”  
on page 204.)  
|
|
|
|
Manage Insert Volumes  
This panel allows the operator to re-evaluate the physical volumes  
in the Insert category for 3590 native use or eject the volumes from  
the library. (See “Manage Insert Volumes” on page 205.)  
|
|
|
|
|
Manage Export-Hold Volumes  
This panel allows the operator to move Exported Stacked Volumes  
in the Export-hold category to the Import category or eject the  
Exported Stacked Volumes from the library. (See “Manage  
Export-Hold Volumes” on page 206.)  
|
|
|
|
Cancel Export/Import  
This panel allows the operator to send a cancel request for an  
in-progress Import or Export operation. (See “Cancel Export/Import”  
on page 207.)  
Inventory  
Allows the selection of the following:  
Inventory new storage  
Start an inventory of any storage components that were not  
inventoried previously. (See “Inventory New Storage or Re-inventory  
Complete System” on page 169.) This is typically a system  
administrator password-protected function.  
Re-inventory complete system  
Inventory all storage components. (See “Inventory New Storage or  
Re-inventory Complete System” on page 169.) This is typically a  
system administrator password-protected function.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Disable inventory update  
Disables inventory update allowing doors to be opened and closed  
without performing inventory update. (See “Disable Inventory  
Update” on page 176.)  
Enable inventory update  
Enables inventory update to take place whenever the library system  
is returned to Auto/Online mode after an enclosure door is opened  
and closed. (See “Enable Inventory Update” on page 177.)  
Perform inventory update (Full)  
Performs an immediate inventory update. This option is only  
available if the library system is in Auto mode and Online state.  
(See “Perform Inventory Update (Full)” on page 177.)  
Perform inventory update (Partial)  
Performs inventory on just the frames on which the doors have  
been opened. This option is only available if the library system is in  
Auto mode and Online state. (See “Perform Inventory Update  
(Partial)” on page 179.)  
Stand-alone drive  
Allows the selection of the following:  
Setup stand-alone drive  
Set up special stand-alone library functions. (See “Stand-Alone  
Device” on page 180.)  
Reset stand-alone drive  
Reset stand-alone drives. (See “Reset Stand-Alone Device” on  
page 182.)  
Stand-alone drive status  
Provides status for stand-alone drives. (See “Stand-Alone Device  
Status” on page 183.)  
Insert unlabeled cartridges  
Display the Insert Unlabeled Cartridge pop-up window that allows the  
operator to insert unlabeled cartridges into the library. (See “Insert  
Unlabeled Cartridges” on page 184.)  
LAN Options  
Allows the selection of the following:  
Add LAN host  
(See “Add LAN Host” on page 185)  
Delete LAN host  
(See “Delete LAN Host” on page 190)  
Update LAN host information  
(See “Update LAN Host Information” on page 191)  
LM LAN information  
(See “LM LAN Information” on page 198)  
Operator intervention  
Display the intervention-required conditions. You can specify the items  
where action was taken. (See “Operator Intervention” on page 199.)  
154 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Change system administrator password  
Display a pop-up window that allows the user to change the system  
administrator’s password. (See “System Administrator Password” on  
page 200.)  
Service Access  
Allows for selection of the following:  
Enable service access  
Provides the ability to access the library managers through a modem  
connection when installed. (See “Service Access” on page 208.)  
Disable service access  
Prevents the ability to access the library managers through a modem  
connection if installed. (See “Service Access” on page 208.)  
SNMP Options  
Allows for selection of the following:  
Start SNMP  
Provides the ability to start the SNMP messaging process. (See “SNMP  
Options” on page 208.)  
Stop SNMP  
Provides the ability to stop the SNMP messaging process. (See “SNMP  
Options” on page 208.)  
Change SNMP trap destinations  
Provides the ability to add and delete the SNMP trap destinations for SNMP  
trap messages. (See “SNMP Options” on page 208.)  
Select SNMP trap types  
Provides the ability to select the SNMP trap type of messages to be sent to  
an SNMP monitoring station. (See “SNMP Options” on page 208.)  
Send TESTM trap  
Provides the ability to send test messages to SNMP monitoring stations.  
(See “SNMP Options” on page 208.)  
Schedule Cleaning  
From the Commands pull-down, the operator can schedule automatic cleaning of  
the tape drives based on time or usage. Also, the 3490E/3590control units can  
request a cleaning based on tape drive performance.  
3490E or 3590 Device Cleaning  
Device cleaning in the library is managed by the library manager. During installation  
of the 3494 and at any other time, a cleaning schedule can be established by  
selecting the Commands pull-down from the Operator menu, and then selecting the  
Schedule Cleaning item. An operator can then specify one of the following cleaning  
schedules:  
Time of Week  
The tape subsystem drives are cleaned at specific times and days during a  
week. This sets up a cleaning based on time.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Usage The tape subsystem drives are cleaned after a specified number of mounts  
on a per drive basis.  
The operator settings do not affect the cleaning caused by tape drive performance.  
The tape subsystem control unit examines tape drive performance to determine if a  
drive must be cleaned. When the tape subsystem control unit determines that a  
drive must be cleaned, the tape subsystem control unit informs the library manager  
to place a clean operation in the operations queue.  
When the clean operation is executed, the next least-recently used cleaner volume  
is selected from the appropriate cleaner-volume category and mounted on the drive.  
When the volume is unloaded after the clean operation, the host systems are  
notified that a cleaning operation completed.  
Cleaner Cartridge Replacement at End-of-Life  
Cleaner cartridges are automatically ejected from the library when they are used the  
maximum number of times specified in the Clean Schedule window.  
When the number of mounts of a cleaner cartridge equals the number of allowed  
uses, that cartridge is automatically ejected and placed in the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station. All attached hosts are notified that a cleaner volume was  
ejected from the 3494. If the library is out of cleaner cartridges and a drive must be  
cleaned, all attached hosts are notified the 3494 is out of cleaner volumes. Operator  
intervention is posted on the library manager console.  
A value can be specified for the maximum uses of a cleaner cartridge before it is  
ejected from the 3494. For 3490E, the default is 200 and the maximum allowed is  
500. For 3590, the recommended usage is 100.  
Errors related to the handling of a cleaner volume are not reported to the host; they  
are logged by the library manager.  
Clean Schedule Panel Controls  
The Clean Schedule pop-up window (see Figure 89 on page 157) allows you to  
schedule cleaning of the tape drives by either time or usage.  
156 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 89. Clean Schedule Pop-Up Window  
Clean based on time  
This radio button selects the Timed clean area of the window. Select the  
Days to clean and Time of day fields for entering time parameters.  
Clean based on usage  
This radio button selects the Usage clean area of the window for entering  
numbers. Specify drive cleaning in the Enter the number of mounts  
before the drive clean operation field.  
The selections are as follows:  
Usage clean  
Specify that tape drives are cleaned after a certain number of mounts on a  
per-drive basis. The default is 500.  
Days to clean  
Specify the days during a week when cleaning is to be initiated.  
Time of day  
Specify the time of the day when cleaning is to be started. Enter the time of  
day in the fields provided based on a 24-hour clock, for example, 16:00 is  
4:00 p.m.  
Maximum cleaner usage  
For both time and usage based cleans a maximum cleaner usage must be  
entered. Change the maximum number of times that cleaner volumes are  
used before they are automatically ejected from the 3494. For 3490E, the  
default is 200 and the maximum allowed is 500. For 3590, the  
recommended usage maximum is 100.  
OK  
Set the new clean schedule.  
Cancel  
Close the pop-up window without changing the cleaning schedule.  
Help Display the help information.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The cleaning schedule is stored in the library manager database. When the  
cleaning schedule is changed, the tape drive’s usage-based clean counter is reset  
to zero.  
Eject a Cleaner Cartridge  
The Eject a Cleaner Cartridge pop-up window (see Figure 90) allows the operator to  
select a cleaner cartridge in the library and then eject the selected cleaner cartridge  
from the library.  
Figure 90. Eject a Cleaner Cartridge Pop-Up Window  
A list of cleaner cartridges is presented in the list box.  
Use the mouse or keyboard to highlight the cleaner cartridges that are to be  
ejected, then select the Eject button.  
Following are the push-buttons:  
Eject Ejects the selected cleaner cartridge from the library.  
Cancel  
Closes the window.  
Help Provides help concerning the Eject a Cleaner Cartridge window.  
Cleaner Cartridge Masks  
The Cleaner Masks pop-up window allows the entry of cleaner masks.  
At least one of the masks must be set (for example, CLN***). The CLN prefix is not  
a requirement. Any valid volser can be used. See “Cleaner Volume Masks” on  
page 172 for additional information.  
158 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: When “Cleaner Cartridge Masks” is selected from the “Commands”  
pull-down, the following rules apply to the changing of the masks. These  
rules do not apply when the masks are changed as part of a full inventory  
operation.  
1. A cleaner mask cannot match the volser of any data cartridge in the  
library. You must either enter a different cleaner mask or eject all data  
cartridges in the library that match the cleaner mask before using the  
mask.  
2. You cannot delete a cleaner mask when there are cleaner cartridges in  
the library that match this mask. You must either retain this cleaner mask  
or eject all cleaner cartridges that match this mask before deleting the  
mask.  
See Figure 91 for information on how to set the cleaner volume masks.  
Figure 91. Cleaner Cartridge Masks  
The following are the push-buttons:  
OK  
Check masks and save.  
Cancel  
Closes the window without saving any changes.  
Help Provides help concerning the Cleaner Cartridge Mask window.  
Send Message to Host Consoles  
The Host Message pop-up window (see Figure 92 on page 160) allows you to enter  
up to 70 characters to be sent to all attached hosts. The library manager must be  
Online for this selection. If not, an error message is displayed that indicates the  
3494 must be Online.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The acknowledgment Message has been sent to all attached hosts indicates that  
the broadcast was processed.  
Figure 92. Host Message Pop-Up Window  
The following are the push-buttons:  
Send Sends the message to all attached hosts.  
Cancel  
Closes the window.  
Help Provides help concerning the Host Message window.  
Promote a Command in the Queue  
When the Promote a command in the queue selection is made from the  
Commands pull-down, the Promote Command pop-up window (see Figure 93) is  
displayed.  
Figure 93. Promote Command Pop-Up Window  
The list box in the window shows the commands in the command queue. For each  
command, the priority and volser, if applicable, are shown. The commands are  
160 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
shown in priority order with the highest priority command at the top of the list.  
Commands to be promoted are selected by highlighting. If a command is selected  
for promotion and the command is already in progress, the command is not  
promoted. The list box is automatically updated when a command is promoted. The  
following are the push-buttons:  
Promote  
Promotes all highlighted commands to the top of the priority 2 queue.  
Cancel  
Closes the pop-up window. Any promoted commands stay promoted.  
Help Provides additional information about the Promote Commands pop-up  
window.  
Select Inserts  
Highlights all Insert commands for volumes entered through the  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station.  
Volser Range for Media Types  
This panel allows the entry of up to 50 volser ranges and associated media types.  
The volser ranges are used to help determine a physical volume’s media type when  
it is inserted into the library. When a range is added or modified, the system  
automatically combines overlapping ranges with the same media type and checks  
for range conflicts.  
When a volser range changes, the media types for existing volumes in the library  
do not change. Volumes inserted subsequently will reflect the new set of ranges  
and associated media types. A volser range cannot conflict with existing volsers of a  
different media type.  
A volume’s media type is determined by using the following rules:  
1. The media type returned by the vision system is used as a first choice.  
2. If the media type returned is for an HPCT type cartridge and there is more than  
one logical library in the physical library, the volser ranges are used to  
determine to which logical library the volume is assigned.  
3. The volser ranges are used to determine a volume’s media type if it cannot be  
determined by the vision system. If the volume being inserted appears within  
one of the ranges, the range’s associated media type is used. The search of the  
ranges is an inclusive search.  
4. The system uses the default media type defined during the teach process to  
determine the media type if the volser does not fall into one of the ranges.  
5. The volume is ejected if there is no default media type.  
To add a range, enter the two volsers, select a media type and select the  
Add/Modify range button.  
To modify a range, double-click the mouse on the range, modify the volsers, select  
the media type, and select the Add/Modify range button.  
To delete a range, double-click the mouse on the range, and select the Delete  
range button.  
To determine if a volser is in a range, enter the volser in the “From” entry field and  
select the Volser in range? button.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To query the number of volsers in a range, highlight the range in the list box and  
select the Total volsers in range button.  
This panel has the following controls:  
Range 1 and 2 entry fields  
The volser entry fields can contain up to six alphanumeric characters. The 2  
volsers must be entered in the same format. Corresponding characters in  
each volser must both be either alphabetic or both be numeric. For  
example, AAA998 and AAB004 are of the same form, whereas AA9998 and  
AAB004 are not.  
The volsers that fall within a range are determined as follows. The volser  
range is incremented where alphabetic characters are incremented  
alphabetically and numeric characters are incremented numerically. For  
example, volser range ABC000 through ABD999 would result in a range of  
2000 volsers (ABC000 - ABC999 and ABD000 - ABD999).  
Media type list box  
A selectable list of media types. Highlight the desired media type for the  
range.  
Volser ranges list box  
A scrollable list of the volser ranges. Highlighting a range causes the  
volsers and media type to appear in the entry fields and the media type list  
box. Highlight a range before selecting the Delete range button.  
Figure 94. Volser Ranges Pop-Up Window  
The following are the push-buttons:  
Add/Modify range  
Add or modify a range. The volsers entered and media type selected are  
162 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
used to add or modify a range. An error message is displayed if there is a  
problem with the new or modified range.  
Delete range  
Deletes the highlighted range from the list of ranges. You are prompted to  
confirm the delete operation. Select Yes to perform the range delete. Select  
No to cancel the range delete.  
Volser in range?  
Checks to see if the volser entered in the “From” entry field is in a defined  
range. If so, the range is highlighted in the list box.  
Total volsers in range  
Computes the number of physical volumes that are within a highlighted  
range.  
Cancel  
Close the volser range panel. All changes to the ranges are saved.  
Help Display this help panel.  
Insert VTS Logical Volumes  
The Insert VTS Logical Volumes pop-up window allows the insert of logical volumes  
into a VTS library. With the Warp 4.0 operating system, up to a total of 150,000  
logical volumes can be inserted into the 3494 library (with prior versions of the  
operating system, up to 50,000 logical volumes can be inserted). For information on  
determining which operating system you have, see “Using the Help Pull-Down” on  
page 94 and 95.  
Volsers must be unique within a physical library. A logical volume’s volser cannot  
match another logical or physical volume’s volser. If a duplicate volser is  
encountered, the duplicate is not inserted.  
Note: On High Availability machines, dual write mode is suspended during the  
insert operation if more than 1000 volumes are being inserted.  
To insert logical volumes:  
1. Enter a volser or range of volsers to be inserted into the library.  
2. Select the cartridge type to be emulated.  
3. Select which VTS library the volumes are to be inserted into.  
4. Select the Insert button.  
This panel has the following controls:  
Volser 1 and 2 entry fields  
Volser entry fields must contain six alphanumeric characters. The 2 volsers  
must be entered in the same format. Corresponding characters in each  
volser must both be either alphabetic or both be numeric. For example,  
AAA998 and AAB004 are of the same form, whereas AA9998 and AAB004  
are not.  
The volser is incremented where alphabetic characters are incremented  
alphabetically and numeric characters are incremented numerically. For  
example, volser range ABC000 through ABD999 would result in an insert of  
2000 volsers (ABC000 - ABC999 and ABD000 - ABD999).  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Media type radio buttons  
These buttons allow the selection of which type of physical cartridge the  
logical volume will emulate. The selections are Cartridge System Tape  
(CST) or Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape (ECCST).  
VTS Library Selection  
These buttons allow the selection of which VTS library the logical volumes  
will be inserted into. Buttons are displayed only for the number of VTS  
libraries installed.  
Figure 95. Insert VTS Logical Volumes Pop-Up Window  
The following are the push-buttons:  
Insert Initiates the insert operation. The number of volumes that will be inserted is  
displayed for operator confirmation. Select Yes to proceed with the insert or  
No to abort the insert.  
A check is made to make sure that the total number of logical volumes for  
the 3494 library does not exceed the maximum allowable number. If the  
insert would result in more than the maximum allowable number of logical  
volumes in the 3494 library, an error message is displayed and the insert is  
aborted.  
When multiple Virtual Tape Server subsystems are in the 3494 Library,  
logical volumes may be assigned to each VTS subsystem in any quantity,  
providing the total for all logical volumes does not exceed the maximum  
allowable for the 3494 Library.  
During the insert operation, a status panel (see Figure 95) is displayed,  
indicating the progress of the insert operation.  
Cancel  
Close the insert logical volumes.  
Help Display the Insert VTS logical volumes help panel.  
164 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Insert VTS Logical Volumes Status  
The Insert VTS Logical Volumes Status pop-up window displays the status of the  
logical insert operation. It displays the range of volsers to be inserted and which  
volser is currently being inserted. The status is automatically updated every 5  
seconds.  
Figure 96. Insert VTS Logical Volumes Status Pop-Up Window  
The following are the push-buttons:  
Cancel insert operation  
Stop the logical insert operation. You are prompted to confirm the  
cancellation. Select Yes to cancel the insert operation. Select No to  
continue the insert operation. Any logical volumes inserted prior to the  
cancellation remain inserted.  
Help Display the Insert VTS Logical Volumes Status help panel.  
Eject a VTS Stacked Volume  
The Eject a VTS Stacked Volume pop-up window allows a stacked volume to be  
ejected from the library. Enter the stacked volume’s volser then select the Eject  
button. The list box displays the stacked volumes that are currently in the process  
of being ejected.  
When a stacked volume eject is initiated, a request is sent to the associated VTS to  
eject the stacked volume. The VTS then copies any active data off of the stacked  
volume onto other stacked volumes. When all active data has been removed, the  
VTS initiates the eject of the now empty stacked volume. This process can take a  
long time.  
|
|
Notes:  
|
|
|
1. If the Library Manager is busy, the VTS is busy, and the stacked volume being  
ejected contains many active data files, the eject process may take a VERY  
long time (up to several hours).  
|
|
2. Only one eject of a stacked volume can be in-progress for each VTS. If more  
than one is attempted, an error popup message will result.  
|
|
|
3. Exported Stacked Volumes (those in the Unassigned, Import or Export-Hold  
categories) cannot be ejected using this panel. If this is attempted, an error  
popup message will result.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
Figure 97. Eject a VTS Stacked Volume Pop-Up Window  
The following are the push-buttons:  
Eject Initiate the stacked volume eject operation. You are prompted to confirm the  
eject operation. Select Yes to continue the eject operation. Select No to  
cancel the eject operation.  
Cancel  
Close the panel immediately, changes are saved.  
Help Display the Eject a VTS Stacked Volume help panel.  
Set VTS Category Attributes  
The Set VTS Category Attributes pop-up window allows categories to be defined as  
“Fast Ready” categories. A Fast Ready category means that any category mounts  
from this category can be accomplished without recalling data from a stacked  
volume. This enables quick mount times since a recall is not required to satisfy the  
mount request.  
To define a “Fast Ready” category, enter the 4 digit hexadecimal category number,  
select the desired VTS, then select the Add category button.  
To delete a category from the “Fast Ready” category list, highlight the category in  
the list box then select the Delete category button.  
166 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 98. Set VTS Category Attributes Pop-Up Window  
Following are the push-buttons:  
Add category  
Adds the entered category to the selected VTS’s “Fast Ready” category list.  
Delete category  
Deletes the highlighted category from the associated VTS’s “Fast Ready”  
category list. You are prompted to confirm the delete operation. Select Yes  
to continue the delete operation. Select No to cancel the delete operation.  
Cancel  
Close the panel immediately.  
Help Display the Set VTS Category Attributes help panel.  
Set VTS Management Policies  
The Set VTS Management Policies pop-up window allows the Inhibit Reclaim  
Schedule, Free Storage Threshold, and Reclaim Threshold to be set.  
The “Inhibit Reclaim Schedule” defines when the VTS should not perform reclaim  
operations. Reclaim operations require physical drives. This means that drives are  
used for reclaim operations at the same time others are used to recall data to  
satisfy mount requests. During times of heavy mount activity it may be desirable to  
make all of the physical drives available for recall operations. If these periods of  
heavy mount activity are predictable, the “Inhibit Reclaim Schedule” can be used to  
inhibit reclaim operations for the heavy mount activity periods. Up to 14 entries can  
be added to the schedule.  
If the VTS must perform a reclaim in order to continue operating, the inhibit reclaim  
schedule is ignored.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Five drop-down lists and a set of check boxes are used to set up an inhibit reclaim  
entry. The drop-down lists contain the following:  
v Day of week  
Sunday through Saturday or Every day. If “Every day” is selected, the “Start time”  
and “Duration” entered will apply to every day of the week.  
v Start Hour and Minute  
The start hour and minute for the inhibit. A 24 hour clock is used where 00 in the  
hour field means midnight.  
v Duration Hours and Minutes  
The number of hours and minutes that the inhibit reclaim should remain in effect.  
Up to 167 hours and 59 minutes can be specified (7 days minus 1 minute).  
Specifying the maximum will essentially always inhibit reclaim.  
v Check boxes to indicate which VTS to apply the schedule to.  
Add an entry to the inhibit reclaim schedule by selecting a day of week, a start time,  
the duration, then select the Add button.  
Delete an entry by highlighting it in the list box then selecting the Delete button.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Free Storage Threshold is used to provide a warning when the VTS is running  
low on free storage, the capacity of all the empty stacked volumes in the VTS. A  
threshold is provided for each VTS installed in the library and is entered in GB. The  
default value is 100 GB. The VTS Active Data window displays the Free Storage  
Threshold as the Free Storage Alarm Level. If the free storage drops below the  
threshold (alarm level), the Library Manager signals an intervention-required  
condition to notify the operator to add more stacked volumes.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The number of stacked volumes required to store the Free Storage Threshold GB  
specified on the Set VTS Management Policies window is dependent on the  
compression of data when writing from the Tape Volume Cache to the stacked  
volume. The 3494-B18 VTS with enhanced ESCON host attachments provides  
compression into the Tape Volume Cache; therefore, further compression when  
writing to the stacked volume is unlikely, and the capacity of a stacked volume will  
be approximately 10 GB of Tape Volume Cache data. The earlier VTS, 3494-B16,  
relied on the compression capability of the Magstar 3590 drives to store  
approximately 20 GB of Tape Volume Cache data, assuming a compression ratio of  
2:1.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Free Storage Threshold of 100 GB requires five empty cartridges for the model  
B16 VTS; however, with the model B18 VTS, a Free Storage Alarm is sent when  
only 10 empty stacked volumes are available because the Tape Volume Cache data  
has already been compressed when received into the Tape Volume Cache.  
Assuming a compression ratio of 3:1 with the enhanced ESCON host attachments,  
an alarm at the Free Storage Threshold of 100 GB, representing 10 empty stacked  
volumes, allows storage of 300 GB of logical volume data.  
|
|
|
To get an alarm when the number of empty stacked volumes drops below 50, you  
would specify a Free Storage Threshold of 500 GB on a model B18 with enhanced  
ESCON attachments, and of 1000 GB on other VTS models.  
|
|
|
|
The Reclaim Threshold Percentage is used to identify when a stacked volume is to  
be made available for reclamation. Each stacked volume has some amount of  
active data and some amount of inactive (no longer needed) data. If the percentage  
of active data is less than the percentage specified in this panel, the stacked  
168 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
|
|
|
volume is available to go through reclamation. During the reclamation process all of  
the active data from the original stacked volume is moved to another stacked  
volume. After all active data is moved from the original stacked volume, its category  
is set to scratch. This makes it available for reuse.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Reclaim Threshold Percentage is initially set at 10%. We recommend that you  
start with this value and slowly raise it by 5% increments, as necessary. As a  
general rule try not to go above 30% to 40%. It is better to add additional stacked  
volumes rather than raise this value. The higher this number is, the longer it takes  
the VTS subsystem to reclaim a stacked volume because more data must be  
copied from one stacked volume to another stacked volume. The Active Data  
Distribution bar graph will assist you in setting this number. See “VTS Active Data  
Distribution” on page 130, for information about displaying the panel.  
Figure 99. Set VTS Management Policies Pop-Up Window  
The following are the push-buttons:  
Add  
Adds an entry to the inhibit reclaim schedule.  
Delete Deletes an entry from the inhibit reclaim schedule.  
Save Close the panel and save all the changes made to the inhibit reclaim  
schedule, reclaim threshold, and free storage threshold.  
Cancel  
Close the panel without saving any of the changes.  
Help Display the Set VTS Management Policies help panel.  
Inventory New Storage or Re-inventory Complete System  
These selections are typically system administrator password-protected. The  
inventory process can only be performed when:  
v The library manager is Offline and in Auto mode.  
v The teach process is completed.  
v The cleaner volume masks are set (see “Cleaner Volume Masks” on page 172).  
v The volser ranges are set (see Figure 102 on page 171).  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select a type of inventory as follows:  
v Inventory new storage (at subsystem installation time)  
Note: Selecting inventory new storage causes any cartridges with unreadable  
external labels to be ejected.  
v Re-inventory the complete system (at any time)  
Note: If Virtual Tape Servers are installed, see “Re-Inventory with Virtual Tape  
Servers” on page 174.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: If Re-inventory Complete System is selected and there are VTS Import  
or Export stacked volumes in the Unassigned, Import, or Export-Hold  
categories, then the panel shown in Figure 100 will be displayed and the  
operator will not be allowed to continue with the reinventory until the  
Import/Export volumes are ejected from the library. The reinventory is  
blocked to prevent the possible destruction of important Exported data.  
The operator should exit this panel and then select the appropriate  
panel(s) under the Commands pulldown under System Management on  
the LM Operator Panel and eject the indicated volumes. When all the  
Import/Export volumes are removed from the library, the operator can then  
select Reinventory Complete System and continue.  
|
|
Figure 100 shows the Display VTS Export/Import Volumes Window.  
Figure 100. Display VTS Export/Import Volumes Window  
170 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
Save Logical Volumes  
When a complete inventory is requested and the library contains a VTS, the  
operator is prompted to save the logical volumes. Answering Yes will save the  
logical volumes. They will not need to be reinserted after the inventory completes.  
Answering No will erase all the logical volumes. The logical volumes must be  
reinserted after the inventory completes.  
Figure 101. Save Logical Volumes Window  
Set the Volser Range  
When selecting a type of inventory, an option is presented to set the volser ranges.  
See Figure 102 for information on how to set the volser range.  
Figure 102. Set the Volser Range Window  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This panel is similar to the volser ranges panel selectable from the commands pull  
down (refer to Figure 94 on page 162). The only difference is the addition of the  
“Start Inventory” button. Select this button after reviewing/modifying the volser  
ranges. Selecting the “Start Inventory” button allows the inventory process to  
continue. Selecting the “Cancel” button cancels the inventory process.  
Cleaner Volume Masks  
When selecting a type of inventory, an option is presented to set the cleaner  
volume masks. At least one of the masks must be set (for example, CLN***). The  
CLN prefix is not a requirement. Any valid volser can be used. See Figure 103 for  
information on how to set the cleaner volume masks.  
The cleaner volume masks are external labels with patterns of characters used to  
identify which volumes are cleaner cartridges. The cleaner volume masks allow for  
identification of cleaning cartridges that either are put into the 3494 through an input  
station or are identified during an inventory operation. When identified, cleaner  
volumes are assigned to a cleaner volume category.  
The pop-up window allows the entry of up to 10 cleaner masks. If this is the first  
time the masks are presented, the first mask is set to a default value of CLN*** and  
the other nine masks are set to blanks. If this is not the first time the masks are  
presented, whatever was last entered is displayed. The asterisk (*) can be used in  
the mask and is interpreted as a wildcard character (any valid character). When the  
masks are set, any volser labels that match any of the masks are considered  
cleaner volumes.  
Figure 103. Inventory Cleaner Masks Pop-Up Window  
The following are the push-buttons:  
172 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Start inventory  
Starts the inventory process.  
Cancel inventory  
Cancels the inventory process.  
Help Provides help for the Inventory Cleaner Masks pop-up window.  
Inventory Status  
The Inventory Status pop-up window displays the status information about the  
inventory operation in progress. It is updated periodically as the operation  
progresses. See Figure 104.  
Figure 104. Inventory Status Pop-Up Window  
This pop-up window contains the following messages:  
v Rack XX is being inventoried and Number of racks complete. This display  
occurs during the physical inventory operation.  
v Indexing database, please stand by. This display occurs after the physical  
inventory operation.  
v Inventory cancel in progress, please stand by. This display occurs when the  
inventory is cancelled.  
Note: If the Dual Active Accessors Feature is installed, information is displayed for  
both accessors. See Figure 105.  
Figure 105. Inventory Status Pop-Up Window (Dual Active Accessor systems)  
The following are the push-buttons:  
Cancel inventory  
Cancel the inventory in progress. You are prompted to confirm your  
selection. If you select Yes, the inventory is cancelled, the current rack  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
being inventoried is marked not inventoried, and the window is closed. If  
you select No, the inventory continues. This push-button is disabled  
(grayed, or reduced contrast) during the indexing database phase.  
Note: If the inventory is cancelled, select inventory new storage when  
ready to continue. This selection allows the inventory to continue  
from the point that the original inventory was cancelled.  
Help Display information about this pop-up window.  
Re-Inventory with Virtual Tape Servers  
Prior to selecting “Re-inventory complete system”, VTS stacked volumes which are  
mounted on the 3590 tape drives which are associated with the VTS must be  
returned to 3494 Tape Library cartridge storage cells. This is achieved by setting the  
VTS subsystems to the OFFLINE state before setting the 3494 Tape Library to the  
OFFLINE state.  
To prepare for “Re-inventory complete system”:  
1. All logical libraries (Virtual Tape Servers and non-VTS logical libraries, if any)  
must be varied offline at the attaching hosts.  
2. Select Service menu from the Mode pull-down to allow access to additional  
service functions.  
3. From the Service pull-down, shown in Figure 106 on page 175, select VTS  
Subsystem Management and Online/Offline to display the VTS Online/Offline  
Panel (Figure 107 on page 176).  
4. Set the VTS unit(s) Offline by performing the following steps:  
a. Select VTS1-> Offline and wait for messages indicating Offline initiated  
successfully and Offline completed successfully. If an error message is  
displayed, contact your service representative.  
b. If a second VTS is installed, select VTS2->Offline and wait for messages  
indicating Offline initiated successfully and Offline completed successfully.  
c. When all VTS units are offline, close the panel by selecting Cancel on the  
Online/Offline panel.  
5. Place the 3494 Tape Library in the Offline state using the Mode pull-down.  
6. From the Commands pull-down, select Inventory and then select  
Re-inventory complete system. When the inventory operation is complete,  
return the tape library to the Online state using the Mode pull-down.  
Note: Be sure to select Yes on the Save Logical Volumes Window (see  
Figure 101 on page 171) when asked if you want to save the VTS logical  
volumes.  
7. From the Service pull-down, place all Virtual Tape Servers Online using VTS  
Subsystem Management and Online/Offline displays.  
8. Select Operator menu from the Mode pull-down to display only operator action  
bar items.  
9. Attaching hosts may vary libraries online.  
Figure 106 on page 175 shows the Service Pull-Down Menu.  
174 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 106. Service Pull-down Menu  
Figure 107 on page 176 shows the VTS Online/Offline Pop-Up Window.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 107. VTS Online/Offline Pop-Up Window  
Inventory Update  
The Inventory Update facility allows for the following operations:  
v Disable Inventory Update  
v Enable Inventory Update  
v Perform Inventory Update (Full)  
v Perform Inventory Update (Partial)  
Disable Inventory Update  
Select Disable Inventory Update to prevent the inventory update from being  
performed after opening and closing a door.  
This selection is remembered across shutdowns. See Figure 108 on page 177 for  
the Disable Inventory Update dialog box.  
Note: Cartridges should only be inserted or ejected through an I/O facility while  
Inventory Update is disabled.  
176 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This is typically a system administrator password-protected function. The  
password-protection option can be selected during installation. (See “System  
Administrator Password” on page 200.)  
Figure 108. Disable Inventory Update Dialog Box  
Enable Inventory Update  
Select Enable Inventory Update for an inventory update to be performed after  
opening and closing a door. Figure 109 shows the Enable Inventory Update dialog  
box.  
This selection is remembered across shutdowns.  
Figure 109. Enable Inventory Update Dialog Box  
Perform Inventory Update (Full)  
Select Perform Inventory Update (Full) to perform an inventory update immediately.  
All frames in the library will be inventoried. Figure 111 shows the Perform Inventory  
Update status dialog box.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 110. Perform Inventory Update Dialog Box  
The Inventory Update Status pop-up window Figure 111 displays the status  
information about the inventory update operation in progress.  
Figure 111. Inventory Update Status Box  
The pop-up window contains the following messages:  
v Rack XX is being inventoried and Number of racks complete. This display  
occurs during the physical inventory operation.  
v Database update in progress. This display occurs after the physical inventory  
operation.  
Note: If the Dual Active Accessors Feature is installed, information is displayed for  
both accessors. See Figure 112.  
Figure 112. Inventory Update Status Box (Dual Active Accessor systems)  
178 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Perform Inventory Update (Partial)  
Only those frames associated with doors that have been opened will be inventoried.  
If adjacent frame update was enabled during teach, the frames to either side will  
also be inventoried. If dual active accessors is installed, both accessors are used if  
racks on both sides of the library are being inventoried; otherwise only one  
accessor is used.  
The panel in Figure 113 is used to select which frames should be scanned during  
the inventory update operation.  
1. A checked checkbox indicates that a frame’s door has been opened since the  
last inventory.  
2. An unchecked box indicates that a frame’s door has not been opened since the  
last inventory.  
3. The partial inventory update operation will inventory the frames whose checkbox  
is checked.  
4. Check or uncheck the checkboxes to reflect which frames you want inventoried  
then press the Perform inventory update... button.  
5. Mounts and demounts are allowed during an inventory update, for cartridges  
that are in a rack which has already been inventoried or is not involved in the  
inventory update. However, performing mounts and demounts during an  
inventory update does affect the duration of the inventory update operation.  
This panel’s pushbuttons are:  
Perform inventory update  
Begin the inventory update operation on the selected frames.  
Cancel  
Cancel the frame selection.  
Help Display this help panel.  
Figure 113. Perform Inventory Update (Partial) Window  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Stand-Alone Device  
The stand-alone drive facility allows for the following operations:  
v Setup stand-alone drive  
v Reset stand-alone drive  
v Stand-alone drive status  
Setup Stand-Alone Device  
The Setup Stand-Alone Device selection allows a drive to be set up in stand-alone  
mode. This mode is used to allow a host to run software that, in general, is in  
complete control of the drive. The software needs to be attached to a tape drive  
that is physically or virtually inside a library. The software is not aware that the drive  
is in the library, and it cannot issue commands to mount and demount volumes in  
that library.  
Stand-Alone drive is supported for virtual drives within a Virtual Tape Server with  
the exception of the “Mount from Input Station” feature.  
Stand-Alone drive is not supported for the physical drives associated with a Virtual  
Tape Server.  
To assist the host software, stand-alone mode is used by the library to automatically  
load and unload one or more specific cartridges into a specific drive, without any  
host software interaction. The host software allows the operator to specify which  
cartridge is mounted and demounted into a drive by using the library manager  
console. Figure 114 on page 181 shows the Setup Stand-Alone Device Pop-Up  
Window.  
Note: The drive that is being used in stand-alone mode should be varied off from  
all hosts except the host that is being used in this special mode. This will  
prevent unwanted interaction from all hosts except the desired one.  
180 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 114. Setup Stand-Alone Device Pop-Up Window  
Enter device  
This drop-down list box lists all the drives in the library, including virtual  
drives. It excludes physical drives associated with a Virtual Tape Server.  
The selectable operations are as follows:  
Mount a single volume  
This operation causes the single volume to be mounted in a requested  
drive. When this operation is selected, a volser must be entered in the  
volser field and either Do not change volume category or Change at  
mount must be selected.  
Demount a single volume  
This operation causes a single volume to be demounted from the requested  
drive. When this operation is selected, a volser can be entered in the  
volser field or the field can be left blank. If the field is left blank, the volume  
currently mounted in the drive is demounted. Do not change volume  
category or Change at demount must be selected for this operation.  
Mount from Input Station  
This operation mounts non-library cartridges located in the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Stationdirectly on the requested drive and then returns them to  
the Convenience Input⁄Output Station after unloading.  
Mount from Input Station is not supported for virtual drives within a VTS.  
Assign category to a device  
This operation causes a category to be assigned to a drive. When this  
operation is selected, a Category to assign to device must be entered  
and one of three Change volume category options must be selected.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: If the Select volumes in category order is selected, one of the  
following (mount) options should also be selected or the drive will not  
be put in stand-alone mode.  
Volser This entry field is active when either the Mount a single volume or  
Demount a single volume is selected. This field must be filled out for the  
Mount a single volume but is optional for the Demount a single volume  
selection.  
Category to assign to device  
This entry field is active when Assign category to a device is selected. A  
valid category must be entered. The drop-down list displays the current user  
categories and their host-assigned aliases.  
Select volumes in category order  
This option is available if Assign category to a device has been selected.  
Selecting this option causes volumes to be mounted in their category order.  
Mount first volume without host interaction  
This option is available if Assign category to a device has been selected.  
Selecting this option causes the first mount to a device to be performed  
without host interaction.  
Mount/demount volumes without host interaction  
This option is available if Assign category to a device has been selected.  
Selecting this option causes mounts and demounts to be performed  
automatically without host interaction.  
The following are methods for changing a volume’s category:  
Do not change volume category  
This selection leaves the volume category alone during the stand-alone  
device operation.  
Change at mount  
This selection changes the volume’s category when a volume is mounted. If  
this is method is selected, a valid entry must be made into Category to  
change volser to: field.  
Change at demount  
This selection changes the volume’s category when the volume is  
demounted. If this method is selected, a valid entry must be made into the  
Category to change volser to: field.  
Category to change volser to:  
A valid category must be entered in this field. The drop-down list displays  
the current user categories and their host-assigned aliases.  
The following are the push-buttons:  
OK  
Requests that a device be set up as stand-alone device. If the information  
entered is valid, you are prompted to confirm the request.  
Cancel  
Closes this panel without setting up a device as stand-alone.  
Help Displays help for this panel.  
Reset Stand-Alone Device  
This selection allows a device to be taken out of stand-alone mode. The panel  
presents a list of devices that are currently in stand-alone mode. The device to be  
182 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
reset is selected and then the Reset button is selected. A message is displayed if  
there are no devices currently in stand-alone mode. Figure 115 shows the Reset  
Stand-Alone Device Pop-Up Window.  
Figure 115. Reset Stand-Alone Device Pop-Up Window  
Reset Request that a device be taken out of stand-alone mode. If a valid device is  
entered, you are prompted to confirm your request.  
Cancel  
Closes this panel without resetting a stand-alone device.  
Help Displays help for this panel.  
Stand-Alone Device Status  
Each device set up as a stand-alone device has a separate status panel.  
Figure 116 shows the Stand-Alone Device Status Pop-Up Window.  
Figure 116. Stand-Alone Device Status Pop-Up Window  
Device  
The device identification of the stand-alone device.  
Device category  
The category associated with the stand-alone device, if any. The device  
category is displayed as 0 if the device does not have an associated  
category. The FFF7 category is used for Mount From Input Station.  
Volser Displays the volser of the currently mounted volume or the volser of the  
volume in the process of being mounted.  
ICL mode  
A device is set up to implicitly mount and demount volumes if the Mount /  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
demount volumes without host interaction option was selected when the  
device was set up as a stand-alone device. The ICL mode status is  
displayed as Yes if this option was selected and displayed as No if the  
option was not selected.  
Status  
The current status of the device is displayed here.  
Close This selection removes this window from the display.  
Help Displays the help for this panel.  
Insert Unlabeled Cartridges  
Note: Do not use this function with cartridges with machine-readable labels.  
The Insert Unlabeled Cartridges operation is designed to allow the operator to insert  
volumes into the library manager database that do not have an external machine  
readable label. These volumes may be used in the same manner that regular,  
properly labelled, volumes are used, except for operations requiring an external  
machine readable label. To insert unlabeled cartridges, follow these steps:  
1. Ensure the Convenience Input⁄Output Station is empty.  
2. Enter the volsers and the cartridge type of all the cartridges to be inserted in the  
spaces on the Insert Unlabeled Cartridges pop-up window. Figure 117 on  
page 185 shows the Insert Unlabeled Cartridges pop-up window.  
Note: If a volume with a machine readable label is inserted with a different  
volser entered on the pop-up window, problems will occur during a  
subsequent Inventory or Inventory Update operation.  
3. Place the cartridges in the Convenience Input⁄Output Station in the same  
sequence as represented on the pop-up window and close the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station door.  
4. Select the OK button.  
Each volser entered is checked to ensure it is a valid number and that no other  
cartridge in the library has the same number. The validity of the cartridge type is  
also checked. Valid characters for an unlabeled cartridge volser are alphanumeric  
characters plus the following special characters: – # & $ @. The cartridges are then  
inserted into the library. After all the cartridges are inserted into the library, the  
operation may be repeated.  
If the misplaced or inaccessible flags are set for an existing volser in the library,  
the cartridge is inserted and the flags are cleared.  
5. Select Cancel to cancel the Insert Unlabeled Cartridges operation.  
The Insert Unlabeled Cartridge function can be used to insert empty stacked  
volumes for a VTS. To be successful, the volser must fall into a stacked volume  
volser range (see Figure 117 on page 185) and the media type must be a “J”.  
However, it is recommended that the Insert Unlabeled cartridge function NOT be  
used for stacked volumes in normal operations. It should only be used for  
re-inserting volumes that have a damaged external label.  
184 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 117. Insert Unlabeled Cartridges Window  
The following are the push-buttons:  
OK  
Perform the Insert Unlabeled Cartridges  
operation.  
Help  
Display the help panel  
Cancel  
Close this panel and cancel the Insert  
Unlabeled Cartridges operation.  
Displays the next ten cells when the optional  
30 cell I/O is installed.  
Next 10  
Previous 10  
Displays the previous ten cells when the  
optional 30 cell I/O is installed.  
Add LAN Host  
This panel allows a LAN attached host to be configured for communication with this  
3494. Up to 32 LAN host ports can be configured. The information to be entered  
may be available from a command on the host. For example, on the AS/400, the  
Display LAN Information (DSPLANMLD) command will provide this information. The  
person who set up your LAN configuration may also be able to provide this  
information. Figure 118 on page 186 shows the Add LAN Host to Library pop-up  
window.  
Communication Protocol  
Select the type of communication protocol for use with this host.  
Each LAN host has a particular LAN protocol that it uses to communicate  
with the 3494. Following are some of the hosts and their associated  
protocols:  
AS/400  
uses APPC  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following commands on the AS/400 will provide the information  
needed to fill in the Add LAN Host Screen:  
v
If the AS/400 operating system is less than version V3R6, use  
DSPLANMLD, Display LAN Information.  
v If the AS/400 operating system is version V3R6 or higher, use  
DSPLANMLB, Display LAN Media Library Information.  
VSE/ESA  
uses APPC/VTAM  
RISC System/6000  
uses TCP/IP  
SUN uses TCP/IP  
90765 SP2  
uses TCP/IP  
If APPC is selected as the communications protocol, a pop-up window as shown in  
Figure 118 will appear. This allows a LAN connected host such as an AS/400 to be  
added to the 3494 configuration. Fill in the following fields:  
Figure 118. Add LAN Host to Library Pop-Up Window (APPC Selected)  
Host Alias  
The alias for a host is a customer supplied nickname for that host. This is  
an optional field and may be left blank if an alias is not desired. This entry  
field will only accept alpha-numeric characters and the “.” character.  
Host Transaction Program Name  
Specifies the name of the LAN transaction program that runs on the host to  
receive data from the Library Manager. For example, on the AS/400, the  
LAN transaction program name is QMLD/QMLDSTRCC. This entry field will  
only accept alpha-numeric characters and the “/” character. Blank spaces  
are not valid.  
186 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Host Network ID  
Specifies the name of the remote network in which the adjacent control  
point (the host) resides. This entry field will only accept alpha-numeric  
characters and the “@”, “#”, and “$” characters. Blank spaces are not valid.  
The Common Programming Interface (CPI) - Communications  
partner_LU_name of the host, consists of the host remote network identifier  
and the host remote location. For example, if the host partner_LU_name is  
USIBMSU.S10A4045, then the Host Network ID is USIBMSU.  
Host Location Name  
Specifies the remote location name (of the host) to which the 3494 will  
communicate. This entry field will only accept alpha-numeric characters and  
the “@”, “#”, and “$” characters. Blank spaces are not valid.  
The Common Programming Interface (CPI) - Communications  
partner_LU_name of the host, consists of the remote network identifier and  
the remote location. For example, if the host partner_LU_name is  
USIBMSU.S10A4045, then the Host Location Name is S10A4045.  
Host Adapter Address  
Specifies the LAN adapter address of the remote controller (the host). This  
can be the host adapter card universally administered address (UAA), such  
as 10005A1E3338, or a locally administered address (LAA), such as  
400012345678. Only hexadecimal digits may be entered in this field. Blank  
spaces are not valid. This entry field will only accept alpha-numeric  
characters and the “@”, “#”, and “$” characters. Blank spaces are not valid.  
|
|
Ethernet Format Check Box  
If the adapter address is in Ethernet Format, check this box.  
|
|
|
|
XID  
(Exchange ID) This is an optional field. If left blank, the XID will be assigned  
a value of ″00000000″. If an XID value is entered, it must be either five or  
eight hexadecimal bytes. If only five bytes are entered, the prefix ″05D″ will  
be used.  
|
|
Note: XID is optional for APPC and APPC/VTAM hosts. Not applicable for  
TCP/IP hosts.  
|
The following are the push-buttons:  
OK  
The information on this window will be used to add a LAN attached host to  
the library system.  
Cancel  
Close this window without adding a host operation.  
Help Display the help panel.  
If APPC/VTAM is selected as the communications protocol, an Add LAN Host to  
Library pop-up window as shown in Figure 119 on page 188 will appear. This allows  
a LAN connected host such as VSE/ESA to be added to the 3494 configuration. Fill  
in the following fields:  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 119. Add LAN Host to Library Pop-Up Window (APPC/VTAM Selected)  
Host Alias (optional)  
The alias for a host is a customer supplied nickname for that host. This is  
an optional field and may be left blank if an alias is not desired. This entry  
field will only accept alpha-numeric characters and the “.” character.  
Host Transaction Program Name  
Specifies the name of the LAN transaction program that runs on the host to  
receive data from the Library Manager. This entry field will only accept  
alpha-numeric characters and the “/” character. Blank spaces are not valid.  
For example, if the host is VSE/ESA, the default transaction program name  
is VSE1LCA.  
Host Network ID  
Specifies the name of the remote network in which the adjacent control  
point (the host) resides. This entry field will only accept alpha-numeric  
characters and the“@”, “#”, and “$” characters. Blank spaces are not valid.  
The Common Programming Interface (CPI) - Communications  
partner_LU_name of the host, consists of the host remote network identifier  
and the host remote location. For example, if the host partner_LU_name is  
USIBMSU.VSE1LCA, then the Host Network ID is USIBMSU.  
Host Location Name  
Specifies the remote location name (of the host) to which the 3494 will  
communicate. This entry field will only accept alpha-numeric characters and  
the “@”, “#”, and “$” characters. Blank spaces are not valid.  
The Common Programming Interface (CPI) - Communications  
partner_LU_name of the host, consists of the remote network identifier and  
the remote location. For example, if the host partner_LU_name is  
USIBMSU.VSE1LCA, then the Host Location Name is VSE1LCA.  
188 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Host Adapter Address  
Specifies the LAN adapter address of the remote controller (host). This can  
be the host adapter card universally administered address (UAA), such as  
10005A1E3338, or a locally administered address (LAA), such as  
400012345678. This entry field will only accept alpha-numeric characters  
and the “@”, “#”, and “$” character. Blank spaces are not valid.  
Ethernet Format Check Box  
If the adapter address is in Ethernet Format, check this box.  
Physical Unit Name  
This is the name of the physical unit the 3494 will communicate with for this  
host, for example, VSE3174. The physical unit name must be either 8 or  
fewer characters, or 8 or fewer characters followed by a period (.) and 8 or  
fewer characters. This field will only accept alpha-numeric characters and  
the “.” character. Blank spaces are not valid.  
|
|
|
|
XID  
(Exchange ID) This is an optional field. If left blank, the XID will be assigned  
a value of ″00000000″. If an XID value is entered, it must be either five or  
eight hexadecimal bytes. If only five bytes are entered, the prefix ″05D″ will  
be used.  
|
|
Note: XID is optional for APPC and APPC/VTAM hosts. Not applicable for  
TCP/IP hosts.  
|
The following are the push-buttons:  
OK  
The information on this window is used to add a LAN attached host to the  
library system.  
Cancel  
Close this window without adding a host operation.  
Help Display the help panel.  
If TCP/IP is selected as the communications protocol, an Add LAN Host to Library  
pop-up window as shown in Figure 120 on page 190 will appear. This allows a LAN  
connected host such as a RISC System/6000 to be added to the 3494  
configuration. Fill in the following fields:  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 120. Add LAN Host to Library Pop-Up Window (TCP/IP Selected)  
Host Alias (optional)  
The alias for a host is a customer supplied nickname for that host. This is  
an optional field and may be left blank if an alias is not desired. This entry  
field will only accept alpha-numeric characters and the “.”, “-”, and “_”  
characters.  
|
|
Host IP Address  
The Host IP Address is the unique internet address assigned to the host.  
This field will only accept digits and the “.”, “-”, and “_” characters. Blank  
spaces are not valid. The correct form is xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx where xxx  
represents a number from 000 to 255.  
|
Host Name  
The Host Name is the Hostname defined in the TCP/IP network. This field  
will only accept alpha-numeric characters and the “.”, “-”, and “_”  
characters. Blank spaces are not valid.  
The following are the push-buttons:  
OK  
The information on this window will be used to add a LAN attached host to  
the library system.  
Cancel  
Close this window without adding a host.  
Help Display the help panel.  
Delete LAN Host  
Figure 121 on page 191 shows the Delete Host from Library pop-up window. From  
this pop-up window, select the LAN-connected host to be deleted from the 3494  
configuration. The 3494 will no longer respond to requests from the deleted host.  
190 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 121. Delete LAN Host from Library Pop-Up Window  
Host Alias (optional)  
The alias for a host is a customer supplied nickname for that host. This is  
an optional field and may be left blank if an alias is not desired.  
Host Name  
This field lists the names of all hosts that are configured with the library  
system via LAN.  
For TCP/IP hosts, the Host Name is the Hostname defined in the TCP/IP  
network. In Figure 121, rs6000.tucson.com is a TCP/IP Hostname.  
For APPC and APPC/VTAM hosts, the Host Name is a combination of the  
Host Network ID and the Host Location Name. For example, if the Host  
Network ID is USIBMSU, and the Host Location Name is S10A4045, then  
the Host Name is USIBMSU.S10A4045.  
This window displays the host names and (if set up) the host aliases of all the hosts  
that are configured with the library system via LAN. Select the host to be deleted  
and select the OK button.  
A caution window will pop up to make sure that you really want to delete this host.  
Selecting the Yes button on this window will delete the host from the library system.  
The following are the push-buttons:  
OK  
Delete the selected host from the library system.  
Cancel  
Close this window without deleting a host.  
Help Display the help panel.  
Update LAN Host Information  
Figure 122 on page 192 shows the Update Host Information pop-up window. This  
pop-up window allows a particular LAN connected host to be selected to update  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
that hosts 3494 LAN configuration data. After a host is selected, the host  
information can be updated.  
Figure 122. Update LAN Host Information Pop-Up Window  
Host Alias (optional)  
The alias for a host is a customer supplied nickname for that host. This is  
an optional field and may be left blank if an alias is not desired.  
Host Name  
This field lists the names of all the hosts that are configured with the library  
system via LAN.  
For TCP/IP hosts, the Host Name is the Hostname defined in the TCP/IP  
network. In Figure 122, rs6000.tucson.com is a TCP/IP Hostname.  
For APPC and APPC/VTAM hosts, the Host Name is a combination of the  
Host Network ID and the Host Location Name. For example, if the Host  
Network ID is USIBMSU, and the Host Location Name is S10A4045, then  
the Host Name is USIBMSU.S10A4045.  
Select the host that requires updating and select the OK button. This will display  
the Change LAN Host Information window showing the current LAN host  
information. The following are the push-buttons on the Update LAN Host  
Information pop-up window:  
OK  
Close the window and open a new window showing the information for the  
host selected.  
Cancel  
Close the panel without selecting a host for update.  
Help Display the help panel.  
Figure 123 on page 193 shows the Change Host Information pop-up window for  
APPC hosts. Figure 124 on page 195 shows the Change Host Information pop-up  
window for APPC/VTAM hosts. Figure 125 on page 197 shows the Change Host  
Information pop-up window for TCP/IP hosts. These pop-up windows allow  
information about a  
192 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LAN host to be changed in the 3494 configuration. When this is done, the 3494  
responds to the host with the new configuration data.  
Figure 123. Change LAN Host Information Pop-Up Window (APPC)  
Host Alias (optional)  
The alias for a host is a customer supplied nickname for that host. This is  
an optional field and may be left blank if an alias is not desired. This entry  
field will only accept alpha-numeric characters and the “.”, “-”, and “_”  
characters.  
Host Transaction Program Name  
Specifies the name of the LAN transaction program that runs on the host to  
receive data from the Library Manager. This entry field will only accept  
alpha-numeric characters and the “/” character. Blank spaces are not valid.  
Host Network ID  
Specifies the name of the remote network in which the adjacent control  
point (host) resides. This entry field will only accept alpha-numeric  
characters and the “@”, “#”, and “$” characters. Blank spaces are not valid.  
The Common Programming Interface (CPI) - Communications  
partner_LU_name of the host, consists of the host remote network identifier  
and the host remote location. For example, if the host partner_LU_name is  
USIBMSU.S10A4045, then the Host Network ID is USIBMSU.  
Host Location Name  
Specifies the remote location name (of the host) to which the 3494 will  
communicate. This entry field will only accept alpha-numeric characters and  
the “@”, “#”, and “$” characters. Blank spaces are not valid.  
The Common Programming Interface (CPI) - Communications  
partner_LU_name of the host, consists of the remote network identifier and  
the remote location. For example, if the host partner_LU_name is  
USIBMSU.S10A4045, then the Host Location Name is S10A4045.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Host Adapter Address  
Specifies the LAN adapter address of the remote controller (host). This can  
be the host adapter card universally administered address (UAA), such as  
10005A1E3338, or a locally administered address (LAA), such as  
400012345678. Only hexadecimal digits can be entered. Blank spaces are  
invalid.  
Ethernet Format Check Box  
If the adapter address is in Ethernet Format, check this box.  
|
|
|
|
|
XID (optional)  
(Exchange ID) This is an optional field. If left blank, the XID will be assigned  
a value of ″00000000″. If an XID value is entered, it must be either five or  
eight hexadecimal bytes. If only five bytes are entered, the prefix ″05D″ will  
be used.  
|
|
Note: XID is optional for APPC and APPC/VTAM hosts. Not applicable for  
TCP/IP hosts.  
|
Note: If the host is AS/400, the following commands on the AS/400 will provide the  
information needed to update the Change LAN Host Information screen:  
v If the AS/400 operating system is less than version V3R6, use  
DSPLANMLD, Display LAN Information.  
v If the AS/400 operating system is version V3R6, or higher, use  
DSPLANMLB, Display LAN Media Library Information.  
The following are the push-buttons on the Change Host Information pop-up window:  
OK  
Update the LAN host information using the changes entered on this  
window.  
Cancel  
Close the panel without updating the host information.  
Help Display the help panel.  
|
|
|
|
Figure 124 on page 195 shows the Change Host Information pop-up window for  
APPC/VTAM hosts. This pop-up window allows information about a LAN host to be  
changed in the 3494 configuration. When this is done, the 3494 responds to the  
host with the new configuration data.  
194 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 124. Change LAN Host Information Pop-Up Window (APPC/VTAM)  
|
|
|
|
|
Host Alias (optional)  
The alias for a host is a customer supplied nickname for that host. This is  
an optional field and may be left blank if an alias is not desired. This entry  
field will only accept alpha-numeric characters and the “.”, “-”, and “_”  
characters.  
|
|
|
|
Host Transaction Program Name  
Specifies the name of the LAN transaction program that runs on the host to  
receive data from the Library Manager. This entry field will only accept  
alpha-numeric characters and the “/” character. Blank spaces are not valid.  
|
|
|
|
Host Network ID  
Specifies the name of the remote network in which the adjacent control  
point (host) resides. This entry field will only accept alpha-numeric  
characters and the “@”, “#”, and “$” characters. Blank spaces are not valid.  
|
|
|
|
The Common Programming Interface (CPI) - Communications  
partner_LU_name of the host, consists of the host remote network identifier  
and the host remote location. For example, if the host partner_LU_name is  
USIBMSU.S10A4045, then the Host Network ID is USIBMSU.  
|
|
|
|
Host Location Name  
Specifies the remote location name (of the host) to which the 3494 will  
communicate. This entry field will only accept alpha-numeric characters and  
the “@”, “#”, and “$” characters. Blank spaces are not valid.  
|
|
|
|
The Common Programming Interface (CPI) - Communications  
partner_LU_name of the host, consists of the remote network identifier and  
the remote location. For example, if the host partner_LU_name is  
USIBMSU.S10A4045, then the Host Location Name is S10A4045.  
|
|
|
Host Adapter Address  
Specifies the LAN adapter address of the remote controller (host). This can  
be the host adapter card universally administered address (UAA), such as  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
10005A1E3338, or a locally administered address (LAA), such as  
400012345678. Only hexadecimal digits can be entered. Blank spaces are  
invalid.  
|
|
Ethernet Format Check Box  
If the adapter address is in Ethernet Format, check this box.  
|
|
|
|
|
XID (optional)  
(Exchange ID) This is an optional field. If left blank, the XID will be assigned  
a value of ″00000000″. If an XID value is entered, it must be either five or  
eight hexadecimal bytes. If only five bytes are entered, the prefix ″05D″ will  
be used.  
|
|
Note: XID is optional for APPC and APPC/VTAM hosts. Not applicable for  
TCP/IP hosts.  
|
|
Note: If the host is AS/400, the following commands on the AS/400 will provide the  
information needed to update the Change LAN Host Information screen:  
|
|
v If the AS/400 operating system is less than version V3R6, use  
DSPLANMLD, Display LAN Information.  
|
|
v If the AS/400 operating system is version V3R6, or higher, use  
DSPLANMLB, Display LAN Media Library Information.  
|
The following are the push-buttons on the Change Host Information pop-up window:  
|
|
OK  
Update the LAN host information using the changes entered on this  
window.  
|
|
Cancel  
Close the panel without updating the host information.  
|
Help Display the help panel.  
|
|
|
|
Figure 125 on page 197 shows the Change Host Information pop-up window for  
APPC/VTAM hosts. This pop-up window allows information about a LAN host to be  
changed in the 3494 configuration. When this is done, the 3494 responds to the  
host with the new configuration data.  
196 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 125. Change LAN Host Information Pop-Up Window (TCP/IP)  
|
|
|
|
|
Host Alias (optional)  
The alias for a host is a customer supplied nickname for that host. This is  
an optional field and may be left blank if an alias is not desired. This entry  
field will only accept alpha-numeric characters and the “.”, “-”, and “_”  
characters.  
|
|
|
|
|
Host IP Address  
The Host IP Address is the unique internet address assigned to the host.  
This field will only accept digits and the “.”, “-”, and “_” characters. Blank  
spaces are not valid. The correct form is xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx where xxx  
represents a number from 000 to 255.  
|
|
|
|
Host Name  
The Host Name is the Hostname defined in the TCP/IP network. This field  
will only accept alpha-numeric characters and the “.”, “-”, and “_”  
characters. Blank spaces are not valid.  
Note: If the host is AS/400, the following commands on the AS/400 will provide the  
information needed to update the Change LAN Host Information screen:  
v If the AS/400 operating system is less than version V3R6, use  
DSPLANMLD, Display LAN Information.  
v If the AS/400 operating system is version V3R6, or higher, use  
DSPLANMLB, Display LAN Media Library Information.  
|
The following are the push-buttons on the Change Host Information pop-up window:  
|
|
OK  
Update the LAN host information using the changes entered on this  
window.  
|
|
Cancel  
Close the panel without updating the host information.  
|
Help Display the help panel.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
| LM LAN Information  
This window supplies the LAN information about the library that is required by the  
host system for the host and library to communicate. The window shown in  
Figure 126 displays the following information:  
Figure 126. Library LAN Information Pop-Up Window  
Note: If Model HA1 is installed, information for both library managers is shown. An  
asterisk (*) indicates that the item is for the local library manager.  
Library Transaction Program Name  
Specifies the name of the LAN transaction program that runs on the Library  
Manager to receive data from the Host.  
Library Network ID  
Specifies the name of the remote network in which the adjacent control  
point (the Library Manager) resides.  
The Common Programming Interface (CPI) - Communications  
partner_LU_name of the host, consists of the Library Manager network  
identifier and the Library Manager location name. For example, if the  
Library Manager partner_LU_name is USIBMSU.LIBMGRC3, then the  
Library Manager Network ID is USIBMSU.  
Library Location Name  
Specifies the remote location name (of the 3494 Library Manager) to which  
the Host will communicate.  
The Common Programming Interface (CPI) - Communications  
partner_LU_name of the Library Manager, consists of the network identifier  
and the location name. For example, if the Library Manager  
partner_LU_name is USIBMSU.LIBMGRC3, then the Library Manager  
Location Name is LIBMGRC3.  
198 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Library Adapter Address  
Specifies the LAN adapter address of the remote controller (the Library  
Manager). This can be the Library Manager adapter card universally  
administered address (UAA), such as 10005A8A5E75, or a locally  
administered address (LAA), such as 40003494001A.  
Library IP Address  
The Library Manager IP Address is the unique internet address assigned to  
the 3494 Library Manager.  
Library Name  
The Library Name is the Hostname defined in the TCP/IP network for the  
Library Manager. In Figure 126 on page 198, libmgrc3.ibm.com is a  
TCP/IP Hostname.  
The following are the push-buttons:  
OK  
Close the information window.  
Help Display the help panel.  
Operator Intervention  
Certain conditions in the 3494, when detected, require short-term operator  
intervention to resolve. These conditions do not stop the library manager from  
accepting commands, but can delay the execution of certain queued operations.  
Refer to “Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager Console Feature” on page 241 for  
most conditions requiring intervention.  
The library manager keeps track of the outstanding intervention-required conditions.  
These conditions can be displayed on the library manager console and an operator  
can indicate which conditions have been resolved. Steps are provided to resolve  
each condition. For instructions on removing a cartridge from the gripper, see  
“Cartridge Removal from the Gripper” on page 239.  
The operator intervention window (see Figure 127 on page 200) displays the list of  
conditions. If no outstanding conditions exist, the list is blank.  
1. Determine what condition to resolve, perform the necessary action, and then  
reply that the condition was resolved by highlighting the condition and choosing  
OK. You can also choose the Help button for the operator actions.  
Notes:  
a. Certain conditions (for example, library full, Convenience Input⁄Output  
Stationfull, and out of cleaner cartridges) are automatically cleared after you  
resolve the intervention-required condition.  
b. Certain conditions require the frame door to be opened to resolve.  
c. You can highlight more than one condition. Choosing OK clears all the items  
you highlighted.  
2. Repeat step 1 until all needed conditions are resolved.  
When you have replied that all outstanding conditions are resolved, the window  
is closed. Also, you can close the window and resolve some conditions later by  
choosing Cancel.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 127. Operator Intervention Pop-Up Window  
This window has one checkbox:  
|
|
|
|
Send interventions to host consoles  
If this button is checked, the first 70 characters of all operator intervention  
messages will be sent to all attached hosts. If the hosts are configured to  
display messages, these messages will be displayed on the host console.  
The following are the push-buttons:  
OK  
Remove the highlighted intervention items from the list. If all the items are  
cleared, the panel is closed.  
Cancel  
Close the panel without removing any highlighted intervention items from  
the list.  
Help Display the help panel, which contains a list of operator actions for each  
intervention condition.  
System Administrator Password  
The System Administrator pop-up window (see Figure 128 on page 201) allows the  
system administrator password, if selected during installation, to be changed. The  
system administrator password-protects the following functions:  
v Access to actions required as part of emergency power off (EPO) recovery  
during library manager start-up.  
If during initialization the library manager determines that EPO recovery is  
required, you are informed that either the system administrator or the service  
representative password is required. When the password is entered, the actions  
required for EPO recovery are displayed.  
v Inventory new storage.  
v Re-inventory complete subsystem.  
v Shutdown.  
200 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v To unlock the keyboard and display when they have been locked from the  
Lockup Library Manager under the Mode Pull-Down.  
Figure 128. System Administrator Password Pop-Up Window  
Current password  
Specifies entry of the current password.  
New password  
Specifies entry of the new password.  
Verify Specifies re-entry of the new password.  
OK  
Updates the password to the new password.  
Cancel  
Closes the pop-up window without changing the password.  
Help Provides additional information about the pop-up window.  
If you enter the current password correctly, you can access the function.  
Note: Do not forget the system administrator password. If this is the first time this  
window is displayed, the Current password is the only entry required. This  
entry becomes the system administrator password for all protected functions.  
If you cannot remember the password, call your service representative.  
You can change the password by entering a new password into the New password  
and Verify fields after entering the current password. If the current password is  
correct and the two new password fields match, you have access to the protected  
functions and the password is changed. Changing the system administrator  
password on one protected menu changes the password to all protected menus  
except for the Service menu. If service mode is active, these functions do not  
require the system administrator password.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
| Managing Import/Export Volumes  
|
|
This section contains information on managing Import/Export volumes in VTS  
systems that are Import/Export capable.  
| Manage Unassigned Volumes  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This panel will be automatically presented when the library is in Import mode and  
volumes of J-type media have been input into the library via the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station. This panel allows the operator to move Exported Stacked  
Volumes in the Unassigned category to the Import category. This is an essential  
step during a VTS import operation. The operator can also move other physical  
volumes (J-type, HPCT) to the Insert category or eject them from the library. The  
“Unassigned” volumes are presented in the list box titled “Unassigned”.  
Figure 129. Manage Unassigned Volumes Pop-Up Window  
The following are the push-buttons:  
|
|
|
Select All  
Selects all volumes within the current list box.  
|
|
De-select All  
De-selects all volumes within the current list box.  
|
|
Import  
Moves the selected volumes to the Import category list box.  
|
|
Unassigned  
Moves the selected volumes to the Unassigned category list box.  
|
|
Insert Moves the selected volumes to the Insert category list box.  
Eject Moves the selected volumes to the Eject category list box.  
|
|
Take Action  
Confirms and activates a request to move volumes to the selected category.  
202 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
Cancel  
Close the panel without saving any of the changes.  
Volser Ranges  
Brings up the Volser Range Panel. See Figure 94 on page 162.  
Refresh  
Refreshes the screen.  
Help Provides additional help for this screen.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
| Manage Import Volumes  
|
|
|
This panel allows the operator to move physical volumes (J-type) in the Import  
category to the Insert category, or if desired, eject the volumes from the library.  
Figure 130. Manage Import Volumes Pop-Up Window  
The following are the push-buttons:  
|
|
|
Select All  
Selects all volumes within the current list box.  
|
|
De-select All  
De-selects all volumes within the current list box.  
|
|
Import  
Moves the selected volumes to the Import category list box.  
|
|
Insert Moves the selected volumes to the Insert category list box.  
Eject Moves the selected volumes to the Eject category list box.  
|
|
Take Action  
Confirms and activates a request to move volumes to the selected category.  
|
|
Cancel  
Close the panel without saving any of the changes.  
|
|
Volser Ranges  
Brings up the Volser Range Panel. See Figure 94 on page 162.  
|
|
Refresh  
Refreshes the screen.  
|
|
Help Provides additional help for this screen.  
204 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
| Manage Insert Volumes  
|
|
|
|
|
This panel allows the operator to re-evaluate the physical volumes in the Insert  
category for 3590 native use. By redefining the volser ranges, the volumes can be  
moved to the Insert categories for the VTS subsystems. In addition, the operator  
can eject the volumes from the library.  
Figure 131. Manage Insert Volumes Pop-Up Window  
The following are the push-buttons:  
|
|
|
Select All  
Selects all volumes within the current list box.  
|
|
De-select All  
De-selects all volumes within the current list box.  
|
|
Insert Moves the selected volumes to the Insert category list box.  
Eject Moves the selected volumes to the Eject category list box.  
|
|
Take Action  
Confirms and activates a request to move volumes to the selected category.  
|
|
Cancel  
Close the panel without saving any of the changes.  
|
|
Volser Ranges  
Brings up the Volser Range Panel. See Figure 94 on page 162.  
|
|
Refresh  
Refreshes the screen.  
|
|
Help Provides additional help for this screen.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
| Manage Export-Hold Volumes  
|
|
|
|
This panel allows the operator to move Exported Stacked Volumes in the  
Export-hold category to the Import category. In addition, the operator can eject the  
Exported Stacked Volumes from the library.  
Figure 132. Manage Export-Hold Volumes Pop-Up Window  
The following are the push-buttons:  
|
|
|
Select All  
Selects all volumes within the current list box.  
|
|
De-select All  
De-selects all volumes within the current list box.  
|
|
Import  
Moves the selected volumes to the Import category list box.  
|
|
Export-Hold  
Moves the selected volumes to the Export-Hold category list box.  
|
Eject Moves the selected volumes to the Eject category list box.  
|
|
Take Action  
Confirms and activates a request to move volumes to the selected category.  
|
|
Cancel  
Close the panel without saving any of the changes.  
|
|
Refresh  
Refreshes the screen.  
|
|
Help Provides additional help for this screen.  
206 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
| Cancel Export/Import  
|
|
|
|
This panel allows the operator to send a cancel request to the VTS for an  
in-progress Import or Export operation. The in-progress Exports and Imports are  
presented in the list box. Only one operation can be selected at a time.  
Figure 133. Cancel Export/Import Pop-Up Window  
The following are the push-buttons:  
|
|
|
Take Action  
Sends the cancel request for the highlighted import or export operation.  
|
|
Cancel  
Exits from the Cancel VTS Export/Import screen. No action is taken.  
|
|
Help Provides additional help for this screen.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Service Access  
Enable service access  
This selection provides the ability to access the library managers through a modem  
connection, if installed. This will also allow files (log and dump) to be off-loaded  
from the library manager by service personnel. The library manager may prompt the  
operator for the administrator password.  
Disable service access  
This selection prevents the ability to access the library manager through a modem  
connection, if installed. The library manager may prompt the operator for the  
administrator password.  
SNMP Options  
The 3494 can be attached to many different host systems, with various operating  
systems that communicate with the library using different types of connections.  
During operation, the 3494 may encounter situations that the user would want to  
know about, such as a door being opened (which causes the library to stop).  
Because there are many different attachment methods, the 3494 provides a  
standard TCP/IP protocol called Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to  
send alerts (called SNMP traps) over a TCP/IP LAN network to one or more SNMP  
monitoring stations. These monitoring stations, along with other customer-supplied  
software, can be used to alert operations staff of possible problems or operator  
interventions that occur at the library. Figure 134 shows a basic SNMP block  
diagram.  
Figure 134. SNMP Basic Block Diagram  
With this method, the 3494 can be monitored at one or more locations, along with  
other equipment (both IBM and non-IBM) that also supports the SNMP protocol.  
Monitoring is independent of the host system that is controlling the equipment and  
independent of the location of the 3494s.  
The Library Manager now contains limited SNMP (Simple Network Management  
Protocol) support. This section discusses how to use the Library Manager’s SNMP  
features.  
The Library Manager generates SNMP trap messages to inform network monitoring  
stations that certain events have occurred on the 3494 Tape Dataserver. The  
Library Manager code does not contain any SNMP Management Information Base  
(MIB) support.  
208 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Library Manager code offers the ability to monitor the following Library Manager  
events:  
v OPINT - Operator Interventions  
v UNSOL - Unsolicited Attention Messages  
v SERVC - Service Request Messages (not currently supported)  
v CHCK1 - Library Manager Check1 Conditions  
v TESTM - Test SNMP Trap Message  
OPINT Events  
OPINT events inform the monitoring station of the state of the 3494. They  
can inform the monitor station that the 3494 has developed problems, and  
can even request service calls. All OPINT messages are located in the  
OPINT message table. See Table 7 on page 216.  
OPINT traps are the best way to monitor the 3494, and these Library  
Manager trap types should be selected at all times.  
UNSOL Events  
UNSOL events offer additional support to the OPINT messages. They are  
not as helpful as the OPINT message, but they can be used to track drive  
availability, volume movement, etc.  
In order to receive UNSOL messages, the 3494 must be online, and it must  
have at least one host. All UNSOL messages are located in the UNSOL  
message section. See “UNSOL Library Manager SNMP Traps” on  
page 221.  
CHCK1 Events  
CHCK1 events are posted when the Library Manager code encounters  
problems that require reinitializing the Library Manager.  
TESTM Events  
TESTM events are automatically generated by the Library Manager to test  
the ability to send SNMP trap messages. They are intended to verify the  
ability to send traps to the monitor station.  
Using the Library Manager’s SNMP Features  
Selecting SNMP Trap Types  
First, select which type of Library Manager trap events need to be monitored. To do  
this, select Commands from the Main Menu, and select SNMP options. Then  
select the Select SNMP trap types sub-menu item. A dialog box with all the Library  
Manager trap types is displayed (See Figure 135 on page 210). Select the Library  
Manager trap types that need to be monitored. When done, select OK.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 135. Select SNMP Trap Types Pop-Up Window  
Configuring SNMP Trap Destinations  
Once the Library Manager Trap Types have been selected, the Library Manager  
needs to be configured to send the SNMP traps to the correct monitoring station. To  
do this, select SNMP Options from the Commands menu, and then select Change  
SNMP trap destinations.  
The Library Manager can be configured to send SNMP traps to a maximum of five  
different trap destinations.  
Note: If this is a High Availability 3494, only the active Library Manager needs to  
be configured. The Library Manager code will automatically configure the  
standby Library Manager when the standby Library Manager becomes  
active. Only the Active Library Manager will send trap messages.  
The procedure for configuring the SNMP trap destination depends on the OS/2  
version (2.11 or 4.0). To determine which version of OS/2 you have, choose About  
from the Help menu. (See “Using the Help Pull-Down” on page 94.) Procedures for  
both versions of OS/2 are shown below.  
OS/2 Version 2.11: Figure 136 on page 211 shows the OS/2 2.11 version of the  
Change SNMP Trap Destinations pop-up window.  
210 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 136. Change SNMP Trap Destinations Pop-Up Window (OS/2 2.11)  
Adding a Destination::  
1. Enter the new SNMP trap destination in the New Trap Destination field.  
2. Select the Add push-button.  
Deleting a Destination::  
1. Highlight the SNMP trap destination that you want to delete in the list box.  
2. Select the Delete push-button.  
The changes are activated when you select the Activate Changes button. If the  
SNMP daemon is running when you select Activate Changes, the library manager  
will kill it and restart the daemon with the new changes.  
OS/2 Version 4.0: For OS/2 version 4.0, the SNMP HRMCNFIG program is used  
to configure SNMP trap destinations. If you have OS/2 version 4.0, choosing the  
Change SNMP trap destinations menu item automatically starts this program for  
you.  
Figure 137 on page 212 shows the SNMP Configuration pop-up window.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 137. SNMP Configuration Pop-Up Window  
Adding a Destination::  
1. Once the HRMCNFIG program is running, select the trap destination radio  
button. The Network Mask input field will then be grayed out. (SNMP trap  
messages do not need to use this option.)  
2. Select UDP in the Protocol field, enter the monitor station name and address in  
the appropriate fields, and select Add. Do this for each of the monitor stations.  
3. Select OK when done.  
Note: HRMCNFIG is an external process to the Library Manager, and therefore,  
the user must wait until that process has completed before Library Managers  
SNMP support is enabled. To do this, wait until the Change SNMP trap  
destinations becomes selectable again (ungrayed). Once it has become  
selectable, all SNMP features can be used.  
Deleting a Destination::  
1. Highlight the SNMP trap destination that you want to delete in the list box.  
2. Select the Delete push-button.  
3. Select OK when done.  
Starting SNMP  
Once the trap types have been selected and the SNMP trap destinations  
configured, the Library Manger SNMP support needs to be enabled. To do this,  
select Start SNMP from the SNMP options menu.  
Selecting this menu item starts the SNMP daemon. To ensure that the daemon is  
running, use Ctrl + Esc to bring up a window list, and make sure that SNMPD is  
listed.  
Stopping SNMP  
Selecting the Stop SNMP sub-menu item under the SNMP Options menu item will  
disable the Library Manager’s SNMP features. No Library Manager SNMP traps will  
be generated if the SNMP daemon is not running.  
212 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending TESTM Messages  
Once SNMP has been configured, send an SNMP trap to ensure that SNMP is  
configured correctly. The TESTM trap allows a test message to be sent to the  
monitor stations which have been set up to receive the SNMP trap messages.  
To send a TESTM SNMP trap, select Send TESTM Trap from the SNMP Options  
menu. Selecting this menu item creates a dialog box, which allows entry of a string  
to send to all the monitor stations for which the Library Manager is configured (See  
Figure 138 ).  
Figure 138. TESTM SNMP Trap Message Pop-Up Window  
Most problems sending SNMP messages are related to network configuration. If the  
monitor station does not receive the trap, check the SNMPD window located on the  
Library Manager to see if the SNMPD trap message was sent. If the daemon shows  
the message, make sure that the network path is correct to the monitor station.  
Trouble Shooting  
Most problems encountered will be related to the site network or software. The  
following is a list of things to check on the Library Manager to ensure SNMP is  
working correctly.  
1. Make sure that the SNMPD process is running.  
2. Make sure that the monitor station can be “pinged” from a Service Window. If  
the monitor station cannot be pinged, then there is a network configuration  
problem which must be corrected. The SNMP trap will never get to the  
monitoring station unless the network configuration problem is corrected.  
3. Generate a TESTM trap message, and check the SNMPD window to see if it  
was sent. To do this, use Ctrl + Esc to bring up the Window List, and use the  
mouse or arrow keys to highlight the SNMPD process. You should see the  
TESTM trap message in the window. If there are any errors, then the daemon is  
not being started correctly.  
Receiving SNMPD Traps on the Monitor Station  
All the Library Manager trap types follow a very similar format. Each Library  
Manager SNMP trap message generated has the same beginning format. This  
helps the programmer on the monitor station handle the different Library Manager  
SNMP trap message types.  
Each field in the Library Manager SNMP trap message is space delimited. This  
allows the programmer to tokenize the incoming Library Manager SNMP trap  
message.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Most Library Manager SNMP trap messages contain both a set of parameters and  
a message string. The parameters are intended to aid the programmer in extracting  
the necessary information from the trap message. The message string is intended  
for customers who do not have the ability to program the network monitor station  
software to parse and process the Library Manager SNMP traps. Each Library  
Manager SNMP contains this message string, which will contain enough information  
to post to the simplest SNMP monitor program.  
The basic format for a Library Manager SNMP Trap Message is as follows:  
3494 [Library Sequence Number] [Library Manager Trap Type] [Trap Number]  
{Rest of Message}  
3494 Indicates that this message was generated by a 3494 library.  
Library Sequence Number  
This is the Library Sequence Number of the logical Library which generated  
the message. It gives the programmer the ability to know which 3494  
generated the SNMP Trap message. All 3494s have a unique Library  
Sequence Number.  
Library Manager Trap Type  
This will be one of the following:  
v OPINT  
v UNSOL  
v SERVC  
v CHCK1  
v TESTM  
Trap Number  
This will be the trap number of the Library Manager Trap Type. Each Library  
Manager Trap Type contains a unique set of traps, each with its own  
format. This field allows the programmer to determine which Library  
Manager Trap Type message was sent.  
Rest of Message  
The content of this part of the Library Manager SNMP trap message is quite  
flexible. Some Library Manager messages will contain parameters and/or a  
message string. The Library Manager SNMP trap message parameters are  
meant to help the monitoring station software gather the related information  
quickly. The message string is meant for human readability.  
Here is an example of a Library Manager SNMP trap message:  
3494 C2444 OPINT 4 - - - *The Library is full.  
In this example, the message was generated from a 3494 tape library, with a  
Library Sequence Number of C2444. The Library Manager Trap Type is OPINT, or  
an operator intervention. The OPINT trap number is 4, the parameters are all -, and  
the rest of the trap message informs us that the library is full of cartridges.  
Outline for Receiving Library Manager SNMP Traps  
1. Make sure that the SNMP trap was generated from a 3494 Tape Dataserver.  
2. If the message was generated from a Library Manager, tokenize the incoming  
SNMP trap, and read which 3494 Tape Dataserver generated the trap message.  
This can be done by reading the Library Sequence Number.  
214 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Determine which Library Manager SNMP Trap Type was sent. This will be one  
of the Library Manager SNMP Trap Types. This is the next field in the  
space-delimited string.  
4. Once it has been determined that the SNMP trap message was generated from  
a 3494 Tape Dataserver, its identity, and which type of Library Manager SNMP  
trap message was sent, the message can be tokenized again to remove the  
message parameters and message string.  
Note: It is a good idea to program the monitor station to handle conditions such as  
an unrecognized Library Manager SNMP trap. Additional Library Manager  
SNMP traps will be added, and documentation will be updated, as they are  
updated.  
Programming Tools  
The Library Manager code contains an aid for the developer to help check the  
monitors ability to handle all the Library Manager SNMP traps. This program is  
located in c:\lm\exe.  
To use the program, first make sure that SNMP is ENABLED and configured on the  
Library Manager. The program will not generate any SNMP traps if SNMP is not  
enabled on the Library Manager.  
To start the program, open a service window and type in SNMPTEST.  
If the program does not come to the foreground, use the Ctrl + Esc keys to bring up  
the Window List. Select the SNMPTEST program. Use the program to generate the  
required SNMP traps, and when done, exit the SNMPTEST program and close the  
service window.  
OPINT Library Manager SNMP Traps  
This section discusses the format of the Library Manager OPINT SNMP traps.  
Library Manager OPINT SNMP traps are the easiest to program for, since they all  
follow the same format. The general Library Manager OPINT SNMP trap has the  
following format:  
3494 [Library Sequence Number] OPINT [OPINT Trap Number] [Parameter A]  
[Parameter B] [Parameter C] [Actual Library Manager OPINT Trap Message]  
The following is an example of an OPINT Library Manager SNMP Trap:  
3494 C2444 OPINT 48 180 - - A cartridge containing invalid media has  
been left in the device 180 feed slot. Remove the cartridge.  
In this example, a cartridge with invalid media type has been left in the feed slot of  
device 180 on library C2444.  
Note: Library Manager OPINT SNMP trap messages pad all unused parameters  
with a dash (—) in order to maintain the space delimited architecture.  
Note: All Library Manager SNMP trap messages are actually one line of text;  
however, due to the printing process, some may take up several lines of text  
in this manual.  
Valid values for the OPINT tables parameters are:  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
—
This indicates that the parameter is not used for this Library Manager  
OPINT messages.  
Gripper  
Valid Gripper values are: 1, which indicates gripper one; and 2, which  
indicates gripper two.  
Accessor  
Valid Accessor values are: A, which indicates accessor A; and B, which  
indicates accessor B.  
Note: Only High Availability 3494s have an accessor B.  
Device  
Valid Device values will be from 0 to 0xFFF. This parameter will always be  
reported in hexadecimal.  
Volser This will be a six character string (example: CNN444).  
Rack Cell  
The Rack Cell parameter has the following format: RackColumnCell. As an  
example: 1G1 means rack 1, column G and cell 1.  
External  
Same as Volser - Only used in libraries with VTSs.  
Internal  
Same as Volser - Only used in libraries with VTSs.  
VTS  
Valid VTS parameters are:  
v VTS_1, which indicates VTS 1  
v VTS_2, which indicates VTS 2  
Certain versions of OS/2 trap if the overall SNMP message is over 132 bytes in  
length. To prevent this trap, the Library Manager software checks to see if the  
SNMP trap message is longer than 132 bytes, and inserts a NULL character at the  
132 byte limit. Therefore, some Library Manager OPINT SNMP traps will be  
truncated to prevent this problem.  
Table 7 contains the Library Manager OPINT interventions.  
Table 7. Operator Intervention Messages and Parameters (OPINT TRAP Type)  
Parameter  
Parameter  
Parameter  
Actual Library Manager OPINT Trap  
Message  
OPINT #  
[A]  
[B]  
[C]  
1
2
3
4
5
Gripper  
Device  
—
Accessor  
—
—
—
—
—
Gripper Failure on gripper [A], accessor [B]  
Index failure on device [A]  
—
—
—
—
*The convenience I/O station is full.  
*The library is full.  
—
Volser  
A duplicate volser ([A]) was ejected to the  
convenience I/O station.  
6
7
8
Volser  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
A duplicate volser ([A]) was left in the  
convenience I/O station  
An unreadable volser was left in the  
convenience I/O station  
—
*The library is out of CST/ECCST cleaner  
cartridges.  
216 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 7. Operator Intervention Messages and Parameters (OPINT TRAP Type) (continued)  
Parameter  
Parameter  
Parameter  
Actual Library Manager OPINT Trap  
Message  
OPINT #  
[A]  
[B]  
[C]  
9
Volser  
—
—
An unexpected volser ([A]) was found and  
ejected to the convenience I/O station.  
10  
11  
—
—
—
—
*The high-capacity output rack is full.  
Volser  
Rack Cell  
A duplicate volser ([A]) was left in  
high-capacity input rack cell [B]  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Rack Cell  
Volser  
—
—
—
—
—
—
An unreadable volser was left in  
high-capacity input rack cell [A]  
Rack Cell  
—
An invalid volser ([A]) was left in  
high-capacity input rack cell B  
Volser  
An invalid volser ([A]) was left in the  
convenience I/O station  
Volser  
Rack Cell  
Rack Cell  
A duplicate volser ([A]) was ejected to  
high-capacity output rack cell [B]  
Volser  
An unexpected volser ([A]) was ejected to  
high-capacity output rack cell [B]  
17  
18  
Device  
Volser  
—
—
—
—
Load / unload failure on device [A].  
An unexpected volser ([A]) was left in the  
convenience I/O station.  
19  
Volser  
Rack Cell  
—
An unexpected volser ([A]) was left in  
high-capacity output rack cell [B]  
20  
21  
22  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*The convenience I/O station door is open.  
*The convenience I/O station door is open.  
Volser  
Volser ([A]) could not be put away. It was  
ejected to the convenience I/O station.  
23  
Volser  
Rack Cell  
—
Volser ([A]) could not be put away. It was  
ejected to the high-capacity output rack cell  
[B].  
24  
25  
—
—
—
—
The convenience I/O station should be  
empty but is not. Visually check the station.  
Gripper  
Accessor  
A cartridge could not be released from  
gripper [A] accessor [B].  
26  
27  
Volser  
—
—
—
—
—
A cartridge has been dropped. ([A])  
Environmental alert - Smoke has been  
detected in the enclosure.  
28  
29  
—
—
—
—
—
An emergency stop has occurred.  
Volser  
Damaged volser ([A]) ejected to the  
convenience I/O station.  
30  
Volser  
Rack Cell  
—
Damaged volser ([A]) ejected to  
high-capacity output facility cell: [B]  
31  
34  
Device  
Device  
—
—
—
—
Device [A] is not ready.  
A mislabeled cleaner cartridge has been left  
in device [A] feed slot. Remove the  
cartridge.  
35  
Device  
—
—
A recoverable error occurred on device [A].  
A service call may be needed if the error  
persists.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 7. Operator Intervention Messages and Parameters (OPINT TRAP Type) (continued)  
Parameter  
Parameter  
Parameter  
Actual Library Manager OPINT Trap  
Message  
OPINT #  
[A]  
[B]  
[C]  
36  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
A mislabeled cleaner cartridge has been  
ejected to the convenience output station.  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
—
A mislabeled cleaner cartridge has been  
ejected to the high-capacity output station.  
Rack Cell  
Rack Cell  
Rack Cell  
Rack Cell  
—
—
A cartridge or cartridge label located at cell  
[A] is upside_down.  
—
A duplicate Volser has been found at cell  
[A].  
—
The cartridge label located at cell [A] is  
unreadable.  
—
The cartridge label located at cell [A] is  
invalid.  
—
The system has failed. A service call is  
required.  
—
—
—
*The accessor or gripper configuration has  
changed. The library must be re-taught.  
—
*The top two I/O station cells are  
inaccessible. Move cartridges to cell 3.  
Volser  
Volser  
Device  
Device  
Rack Cell  
Rack Cell  
—
Volser ([A]) cannot be removed from cell:  
[B]  
Volser ([A]) cannot be removed from  
high-capacity station cell: [B]  
Device [A] has failed. A service call is  
required.  
—
A cartridge containing invalid media has  
been left in device [A] feed slot. Remove  
the cartridge.  
49  
50  
51  
52  
Volser  
Volser  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
An invalid media volser ([A]) has been  
ejected to the convenience I/O station.  
An invalid media volser ([A]) has been  
ejected to the high-capacity output station.  
*The library is out of HPCT cleaner  
cartridges.  
Volser  
A volser ([A]) with an unknown media type  
has been ejected to the convenience I/O  
station.  
53  
Volser  
Rack Cell  
—
A volser (A) with an unknown media type  
has been ejected to high-capacity output  
facility cell: [B]  
54  
55  
56  
Volser  
VTS Number  
Volser  
—
—
—
—
—
—
Volser (A) cannot be removed from  
convenience I/O station.  
Free storage threshold has been crossed for  
VTS [A].  
A volser (A) with an unknown media type  
has been left in to the convenience input  
station.  
218 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 7. Operator Intervention Messages and Parameters (OPINT TRAP Type) (continued)  
Parameter  
Parameter  
Parameter  
Actual Library Manager OPINT Trap  
Message  
OPINT #  
[A]  
[B]  
[C]  
57  
Volser  
—
—
A volser (A) with an unknown media type  
has been left in to the high-capacity input  
station.  
58  
59  
60  
Volser  
Rack Cell  
Volser  
—
—
—
—
—
—
An invalid volser (A) has been ejected to the  
convenience I/O station  
The cartridge label located at cell [A] has  
an unknown media type.  
During an Inventory Update operation,  
volser [A] was ejected to the convenience  
I/O station because there were no free cells.  
61  
Volser  
—
—
During an Inventory Update operation,  
volser [A] was ejected to the high capacity  
station because there were no free cells.  
62  
63  
64  
65  
67  
68  
69  
70  
Accessor  
Accessor  
—
—
—
—
Power failure on accessor [A]. A service call  
is required.  
—
Accessor [A] has failed. A service call is  
required.  
—
—
Dual Write has failed. A service call is  
required.  
Volser  
Volser  
—
Slot  
—
Rack Cell  
An Error occurred for cartridge [A] during  
insert from CIO slot [B] to cell [C].  
|
|
—
—
—
—
Eject failed for volser [A]. This operation  
was initiated by the Library Manager..  
|
|
—
A Library Manager switch has completed.  
This switch was initiated by the operator.  
|
|
—
—
A Library Manager switch has completed.  
This switch was due to an error.  
|
|
—
—
This message may appear as any of the  
following:  
|
1. A hard drive has failed. Call service  
|
|
2. Primary hard drive has failed on LM-A.  
Call service.  
|
|
3. Primary hard drive has failed on LM-B.  
Call service.  
|
|
4. Mirror hard drive has failed on LM-A.  
Call service.  
|
|
5. Mirror hard drive has failed on LM-B.  
Call service.  
|
|
71  
—
—
—
This message may appear as any of the  
following:  
|
1. Hard drive is disabled. Call service  
|
|
2. Hard drive is disabled on LM-A. Call  
service.  
|
|
3. Hard drive is disabled on LM-B. Call  
service.  
100  
Volser  
VTS  
—
A damaged stacked volume [A] has been  
ejected.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 7. Operator Intervention Messages and Parameters (OPINT TRAP Type) (continued)  
Parameter  
Parameter  
Parameter  
Actual Library Manager OPINT Trap  
Message  
OPINT #  
101  
[A]  
[B]  
[C]  
VTS  
—
—
—
*A VTS is out of stacked volumes.  
102  
External  
Internal  
A stacked volume has a label mismatch and  
has been ejected. Internal: [B], External:  
[A]  
103  
104  
VTS  
—
—
—
A permanent, non-recoverable Tape Volume  
Cache error has occurred.  
Volser  
VTS  
An orphaned logical volume [A] has been  
found. Call service.  
105  
107  
VTS  
—
—
—
A VTS has a CHECK1 failure.  
Stacked  
Logical  
Logical volume [B] was not fully recovered  
from damaged stacked volume [A].  
108  
109  
110  
111  
Cache  
Volser  
Volser  
Volser  
VTS  
VTS  
VTS  
VTS  
—
—
—
—
The Tape Volume Cache is degraded.  
(%04x)  
Database restore from volume [A] failed.  
Attempting to restore from next most recent.  
Insert of logical volume [A] failed during  
disaster recovery.  
Damaged volume [A] ejected during  
disaster recovery. Could not be read on 2  
drives.  
112  
113  
114  
Device  
VTS  
VTS  
—
—
—
—
Device [A] has been made unavailable by a  
VTS.  
A VTS does not have enough available  
physical drives to continue operation.  
Volser  
VTS  
A VTS attempted unsuccessfully to eject a  
stacked volume ([A]) during disaster  
recovery.  
115  
116  
117  
118  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
Volser  
Device  
VTS  
VTS  
—
—
A VTS attempted unsuccessfully to eject a  
damaged stacked volume [A].  
VTS Physical device [A] is cabled  
incorrectly. It has been made unavailable.  
Device  
VTS  
—
A VTS cannot communicate with device [A].  
It has been made unavailable.  
Physical  
Physical  
Physical  
Physical  
VTS  
Logical  
Logical  
Logical  
Logical  
VTS  
VTS  
VTS  
VTS  
—
Mount of logical volume [B] failed because  
physical volume [A] is not in the library.  
Mount of logical volume [B] failed because  
physical volume [A] is misplaced.  
Mount of logical volume [B] failed because  
physical volume [A] is inaccessible.  
Mount of logical volume [B] located on  
physical volume [A] failed.  
|
|
Accessor or  
Volser  
Stacked volume [A] is in Read-Only status  
with a reason code of [B]. (VTS z)  
|
|
Volser  
Error Code  
VTS  
—
Stacked Volume [A] is unavailable with a  
reason code of [B].  
Error Code  
VTS  
VTS Controller degraded. Error Code [A].  
Call service.  
220 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 7. Operator Intervention Messages and Parameters (OPINT TRAP Type) (continued)  
Parameter  
Parameter  
Parameter  
Actual Library Manager OPINT Trap  
Message  
OPINT #  
[A]  
[B]  
[C]  
|
|
|
126  
Device  
—
—
VTS requested that device [A] be made  
unavailable but a mount/demount is in  
progress.  
UNSOL Library Manager SNMP Traps  
This section discusses the format of the Library Manager UNSOL messages. Unlike  
the Library Manager OPINT SNMP traps, the UNSOL SNMP trap messages are all  
different, and require special programming to handle them.  
There are seven supported Library Manager UNSOL SNMP trap messages:  
1. X10 - Category State Change  
2. X11 - Library Manager Operator Message  
3. X12 - Library I/O Station State Change  
4. X13 - Operational State Change  
5. X14 - Volume Exception  
6. X15 - Device Availability Changed  
7. X16 - Device Category Change Notification  
Note: X represents the hexadecimal value.  
Category State Change SNMP Trap  
This message indicates that the Library Manager has added one or more cartridges  
into the insert category. The format for the Category State Change Library Manager  
SNMP Trap message is:  
3494 [Library Sequence Number] UNSOL 10 [Parameter A]  
*Volumes added to category: [Parameter A]  
Parameter A  
This parameter will be the category in which volumes are added.  
Library Sequence Number  
This will be the unique Library Sequence Number of the library generating  
the SNMP trap message.  
Library Manager Operator Message SNMP Traps  
The content is a message from the Library Manager operator console to all hosts  
connected to the 3494 Tape Dataserver. The basic format is:  
3494 [Library Sequence Number] UNSOL 11 *{Message from operator }  
Library Sequence Number  
Unique Library Sequence Number of the 3494 Tape Dataserver that  
generated the SNMP trap message.  
Message from operator  
This is the string that the operator on the Library Manager typed in.  
Example:  
3494 C2444 UNSOL 11 *The 3494 Tape Dataserver is being taken offline.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Here the message was generated by the C2444 3494 Tape Dataserver, and the  
operator entered “The 3494 Tape Dataserver is being taken offline.”  
Library I/O Station State Change SNMP Traps  
The Library I/O Station State Change message format is as follows:  
3494 [Library Sequence Number] UNSOL 12 [Param A] [Param B] [Param C] [Param D]  
[Param E] [Param F] [Param G] [Param H] *I/O Station  
Library Sequence Number  
The unique Library Sequence Number of the library that generated the  
SNMP trap message.  
Param A  
It will be one of the following:  
1. IE - indicating “All Convenience Input Stations Empty”  
2. —  
Param B  
It will be one of the following:  
1. IO - indicating “Open Input Door”  
2. —  
Param C  
It will be one of the following:  
1. OE - indicating “All Convenience Output Stations Empty”  
2. —  
Param D  
It will be one of the following:  
1. OF - indicating “All Convenience Output Station Full”  
2. —  
Param E  
It will be one of the following:  
1. II - indicating “3494 I/O Station in Input Mode”  
2. —  
Param F  
It will be one of the following:  
1. BA - indicating “Bulk I/O Allowed”  
2. —  
Param G  
It will be one of the following:  
1. BF - indicating “Bulk Output Station Full”  
2. —  
Param H  
It will be one of the following:  
1. OO - indicating “Open Output Door”  
2. —  
Example:  
3494 C2444 UNSOL 12 IE IO - - II - BF - *I/O Station  
222 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operational State Change SNMP Traps  
The Operational State Change message format is as follows:  
3494 [Library Sequence Number] UNSOL 13 [Mode] [State] [Degraded] [Safety  
Enclosure Interlock Open] [Vision System Non-Operational] [Intervention  
Required] [Check1] [Storage Cells Full] [Out of Cleaners] [Dual Write  
Disabled] [Smoke Detected] [Manual Mode] *Operational State Change  
Library Sequence Number  
Unique Library Sequence Number of the 3494 Tape Dataserver that  
generated the SNMP trap message.  
Mode It will be one of the following:  
v AUTO  
v PAUSE  
v MANUAL  
State It will be one of the following:  
v ONLINE  
v OFFLINE  
Degraded  
It will be one of the following:  
v —  
v DEGRAD  
Safety Enclosure Interlock Open  
It will be one of the following:  
v —  
v SO  
Vision System Non-Operational  
It will be one of the following:  
v —  
v VN  
Intervention Required  
It will be one of the following:  
v —  
v IR  
Check1  
It will be one of the following:  
v —  
v C1  
All Storage Cells Full  
It will be one of the following:  
v —  
v SF  
Out of Cleaners  
It will be one of the following:  
v —  
v OC  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Write Disabled  
It will be one of the following:  
v —  
v DD  
Smoke Detected  
It will be one of the following:  
v —  
v SM  
Manual Mode  
It will be one of the following:  
v —  
v MM  
Example:  
3494 C2444 UNSOL 13 AUTO ONLINE - - VN - - - - - - *Operational State Change  
This message indicates that vision is non-operational.  
Volume Exception SNMP Traps  
The Volume Exception message format is as follows:  
3494 [Library Sequence Number] UNSOL 14 [Exception Code] [Volser]  
[Category] [ERA] [Message]  
Library Sequence Number  
Unique Library Sequence Number of the 3494 Tape Dataserver that  
generated the SNMP trap message.  
Exception Code  
It will be one of the following:  
v 0x01  
v 0x02  
v 0x03  
v 0x04  
v 0x05  
v 0x06  
v 0x07  
v 0x08  
v 0x09  
Volser This will be a six character string.  
Category  
Category effected by the volume exception.  
ERA Additional information, not yet supported.  
Message  
The message will be one of the following:  
v *Misplaced Volume Found  
v *Volume Misplaced  
v *Duplicate VOLSER Ejected  
224 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v *Duplicate VOLSER in Input Station  
v *Unreadable VOLSER left in Input Station  
v *Unexpected Volume Ejected  
v *Volume Inaccessible  
v *Inaccessible Volumes Restored  
v *Cleaner Volume Ejected  
v *UNKNOWN VOLUME EXCEPTION  
Example:  
3494 C2444 UNSOL 14 1 CNN444 FF01 20 *Misplaced Volume Found  
Device Availability Changed SNMP Traps  
The Device Availability Changed message format is as follows:  
3494 [Library Sequence Number] UNSOL 15 [Device] [Availability] [Modifier]  
[First Errorcode] [Message String]  
Library Sequence Number  
Unique Library Sequence Number of the 3494 Tape Dataserver that  
generated the SNMP trap message.  
Device  
Device that is either going available/unavailable.  
Availability  
This will be one of the following:  
v A - Device becoming available  
v U - Device going unavailable  
Modifier  
Additional information, not currently supported.  
First Errorcode  
Additional information, not currently supported.  
Message String  
This will be one of the following:  
v *Device [Device] has been made available by the Library  
v *Device [Device] has been made unavailable by the Library  
Example:  
3494 C2444 UNSOL 15 180 A 20 6E84 *Device 180 has been made available by  
the Library.  
Device Category Change Notification SNMP Traps  
The Device Category Change Notification message format is as follows:  
3494 [Library Sequence Number] UNSOL 16 [Device] [Category] [Parameters]  
*Device Category Change  
Library Sequence Number  
Unique Library Sequence Number of the 3494 Tape Dataserver that  
generated the SNMP trap message.  
Device  
Device reporting the change.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Category  
Category change has been made to.  
Parameters  
Additional information, not currently supported.  
Example:  
3494 C2444 UNSOL 16 180 FF01 20 *Device Category Change  
CHCK1 Library Manager SNMP Traps  
This section discusses the format of the Library Managers CHCK1 messages. All  
CHCK1 Library Manager SNMP Traps have the same format.  
The format for CHCK1 Library Manager SNMP Traps is as follows:  
3494 [Library Sequence Number] CHCK1 [Errorcode] [Modifier] *A CHECK1 with  
errorcode: [Errorcode], and modifier: [Modifier], has occurred on [Library  
Sequence Number]  
Example:  
3494 C2444 CHCK1 BDDD 230 *A CHECK1 with errorcode: BDDD, and modifier:  
230, has occurred on C2444  
Note: All Library Manager SNMP trap messages are actually one line of text; some  
have been split in order to fit on the pages of this document.  
In this example, a BDDD CHECK1, with modifier 230, occurred on C2444 3494  
Tape Dataserver.  
Errorcode  
The errorcode will be a hexadecimal value between 0 and 0xFFFF  
Modifier  
The modifier is used by the CHECK1 for additional information about the  
condition. Valid values are 0 to 64K.  
TESTM Library Manager SNMP Traps  
This section discusses the TESTM Library Manager SNMP trap messages. All  
Library Manager TESTM SNMP trap messages have the same format.  
The format is as follows:  
3494 [Library Sequence Number] TESTM *{User Message}  
Example:  
3494 C2444 TESTM *THIS IS A TEST, 5/26/98 - 10:30 am  
In this example, the user entered the string “THIS IS A TEST, 5/26/98 - 10:30 am”.  
The asterix character (*) is automatically inserted in the Library Manager TESTM  
message. It is intended to aid the monitor station programmer.  
Using the Options Pull-Down  
Figure 139 on page 227 shows the Options pull-down.  
226 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 139. Options Pull-Down Menu  
The Options pull-down selections are as follows:  
Clean desktop  
Removes any visible or minimized window from the screen. See “Using the  
Operator Menu” on page 98 for the screen now displayed. Also repositions  
all windows to their home positions.  
Change power-on language  
Displays a list of supported languages, which are selectable. The current  
language is indicated by a check mark. If a language is selected, the user  
is requested to confirm the selection. The new language becomes active  
when the library manager is shutdown and restarted.  
Using Manual Mode  
Manual mode can be used as follows:  
v A problem in the 3494 prevents automated operations.  
v The service representative is performing scheduled maintenance activities.  
The library manager allows the selection of Manual mode from the Mode pull-down  
of the Operator menu. (See “Manual Mode” in “Using the Mode Pull-Down” on  
page 99.)  
When in Manual mode, the operator follows the instructions on the library manager  
display and confirms as necessary when the instructions are completed. Mount and  
demount requests issued to the virtual drives in a Virtual Tape server continue to be  
processed by the library automatically and are not included in the actions displayed  
for operator processing. If, in order to satisfy a mount to a virtual drive, a logical  
volume needs to be recalled from a physical volume, the resulting mount for that  
physical volume is included in the actions to be performed under manual mode.  
Typical actions include physical cartridge mounts, demounts, and ejects (removing  
cartridges from the library). A sample screen with pending actions is shown in  
Figure 143 on page 230.  
The library manager recognizes when a requested physical cartridge is successfully  
mounted in the requested drive and automatically removes the mount request from  
the list. Instructions to eject a cartridge are manually removed from the list when  
you use the keyboard to confirm (respond) that the action is completed or has an  
error.  
A limited number of processed instructions can be viewed on the library manager  
display to correct any mistakes. See Figure 146 on page 236.  
See “Cartridge Storage Cells” on page 24 for a description of the From and To  
locations used to find a cartridge for a mount.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The display panels shown are examples and may not be exactly the same  
as the panels displayed on your library manager display.  
Starting Manual Mode  
To select Manual mode, perform the following procedures:  
1. Select Mode (see Figure 140) from the action bar on the Operator Menu at the  
library manager. See “Using the Mode Pull-Down” on page 99.  
2. Verify that the 3494 is Online. If Offline, choose Online and confirm the  
selection. See “Online” on page 101.  
3. Select Manual from the Mode pull-down. See “Manual” on page 101.  
Figure 140. Mode Pull-Down Menu  
4. Select the Yes push-button (see Figure 141) to start the change to Manual  
mode.  
Figure 141. Mode/State Change Request Pop-Up Window  
During the change to Manual mode, a wait period allows the library manager, if  
possible, to process all operations in progress, park the cartridge accessor and  
228 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
remove power from the cartridge accessor. Figure 142 shows the wait message.  
Figure 142. Manual Pending Wait Message  
When the transition to Manual mode is complete, the Manual Mode Terminal pop-up  
window with the Action List screen (see Figure 143 on page 230) appears.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating in Manual Mode  
Figure 143 shows the Manual Mode Terminal pop-up window with the Action List  
screen.  
Action List  
Select an action. Press Enter to confirm action completion (except Mounts).  
Action  
VOLSER  
From  
To  
Mount  
Mount  
Mount  
Mount  
Mount  
Mount  
Mount  
Mount  
Mount  
Eject  
WCC007  
WSB392  
TFW001  
SCR023  
WRO112  
TGB041  
ECR223  
SFC607  
FGG641  
ERV399  
Rack  
Rack  
Device 201  
Rack  
Rack  
Rack  
Rack  
Rack  
Rack  
Rack  
12 B 11  
Device 3F1  
Device 3F0  
Device 3F1  
Device 3F0  
Device 201  
Device 200  
Device 3F1  
Device 3E1  
Device 200  
7 C  
5
12 E  
6
3 J 13  
4 F 3?  
10 D 13  
9 F  
2
11 C 10  
13 F 11  
More actions are waiting.  
Press the Refresh key (F9) to update the list.  
F1=Help F3=HideScreen F4=Error F5=Insert F6=Review F9=Refresh F10=Locate  
Figure 143. Manual Mode Terminal Pop-Up Window with Action List  
Legend:  
Action  
The operator task. See the following procedures for details.  
VOLSER  
The cartridge volume serial number.  
From The place where you should find the cartridge specified in VOLSER.  
To  
The place where you should put the cartridge.  
Device  
The 3490E/3590 tape drive.  
Rack The physical storage address that can contain one cartridge.  
?
The cartridge may not be in the location specified. See Note 2.b on  
page 232.  
The Action List screen presents tasks to perform. Perform the actions in the  
sequence listed (see Figure 143). Read the following Mount, Demount, Insert, and  
Eject procedures for how to perform each action.  
The following are the function keys of the Action List screen:  
F1  
F3  
Displays instructions for performing Manual mode tasks.  
Hides this pop-up window (Manual Mode Terminal). The Manual Mode  
Terminal pop-up window is hidden but can be retrieved by selecting the  
Mode pull-down and then selecting Manual mode.  
230 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
F4  
F5  
F6  
Indicates that an action cannot be completed. It displays the Error  
Processing screen that contains a list of possible error choices. See  
Figure 147 on page 237.  
Allows you to manually add volumes to the tape library. It displays the Insert  
Cartridges screen that contains prompts for cartridge insertion. See  
Figure 144 on page 233.  
Displays up to the last 20 commands processed in Manual mode. This can  
be used to verify or to correct a possible error when returning a cartridge to  
its storage cell.  
F7  
Displays information above the visible area of the screen.  
Displays information below the visible area of the screen.  
Updates the Action List screen with additional host requests.  
F8  
F9  
F10  
TBD Displays the Locate Cartridge Home screen, which allows you to find a  
volser’s home cell. See Figure 148 on page 238.  
In addition, the following keys are used:  
Arrows  
Highlights the action to be performed. You can use the up or down arrows.  
Enter Sends confirmation to the library manager that the highlighted action (eject)  
was completed.  
Choose the action. Instructions include the following:  
Mount Specifies the cartridge volser to be retrieved from a specific storage cell  
and loaded in a specific tape drive.  
Eject Specifies the cartridge volser to be removed from the library.  
Note: If the drive’s feed slot already contains a cartridge, perform “Demounting  
Cartridges” on page 232.  
Mounting Cartridges  
Mount requests from the host are displayed on the 3490E message display or on  
the 3590 operator panel and on the Action List screen. The two mount procedures  
are “Using the Drive Message Display”, which is the most efficient, and “Using the  
Action List Screen” on page 232.  
Attention: Do not attempt to insert a 3590 High Performance Cartridge Tape into a  
3490E. Do not attempt to insert a 3490E Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System  
Tape into a 3590.  
Using the Drive Message Display  
Do not use the library manager for this procedure.  
1. Read the 3490E/3590message display for the volume serial number of the  
cartridge and the cell location of the volume. The drive message display  
alternates between the two messages.  
2. Get the cartridge from the specified cell location.  
3. Mount the cartridge on the specified drive. If the drive’s feed slot already  
contains a cartridge, perform the “Demounting Cartridges” on page 232.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Action List Screen  
Use the library manager for this procedure.  
1. Select mounts in the order shown on the Action List screen. See Figure 143 on  
page 230 .  
The mounts are listed in order of priority with the highest priority at the top.  
Note: Mounts are automatically confirmed and removed from the Action List  
screen when a successful mount is done.  
2. Get the specified volume at its From storage cell location. See “Cartridge  
Storage Cells” on page 24 if you are not familiar with the numbering of  
components.  
Notes:  
a. If the From location is a drive, remove the cartridge from the drive.  
b. If the From location is followed by ?, the cartridge has already been used in  
Manual mode. If the cartridge is not in the indicated From location, look in  
the output facility where you are storing demounted cartridges, for example,  
the cartridge cart or the high-capacity output facility.  
3. Place the volume in specified To drive. The message display on the drive  
indicates the volser of the requested volume alternating with the cell location of  
the cartridge.  
Note: If the drive already contains a cartridge, perform “Demounting  
Cartridges”.  
Demounting Cartridges  
Note: Do not place demounted cartridges in the high-capacity output facility. If the  
High-Capacity I/O Facility is defined, it can be used to store the demounted  
cartridges.  
When you are performing a mount and the drive contains a cartridge, do the  
following:  
1. Remove the cartridge from the drive.  
2. Perform one of the following procedures with the cartridge:  
v Place the cartridges in a secure location, such as a cartridge cart. You will  
put these cartridges in the library when the 3494 is returned to Auto mode  
through an I/O station.  
v For an extended period of Manual mode, you may choose to use the  
Figure 148 on page 238 to put the cartridges in their home cells.  
v Place the cartridge in any unoccupied cartridge cell in the library, except in  
the high-capacity output cells. Make sure that the inventory update is  
enabled.  
Inserting Cartridges  
An insert action is initiated when a cartridge must be added to the 3494. One or  
more cartridges may be in the Convenience Input⁄Output Station or you may be  
handed a cartridge to be added into the library.  
1. Press the Insert key (F5) on the Action List screen of the library manager. See  
Figure 143 on page 230.  
232 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. On the Insert Cartridges screen (see Figure 144), enter the volser of the  
cartridge to be inserted. The cartridge volser is the set of up to six alphanumeric  
characters on the label attached to the end of the cartridge.  
Note: Use the left and right arrow key to move the cursor within a field. Use the  
Tab key to move between fields.  
3. Type the character (I,E or J) that corresponds to the cartridge type.  
Note:  
v Cartridge System Tape (single-tone case) is type 1.  
v Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape (two-tone case) is type E.  
v High Performance Cartridge Tape (black with blue tabs) is type J.  
|
|
4. Type the character (0, 1, or 2) that corresponds to the library to associate the  
cartridge with. The selections are:  
|
|
|
v 0. Non-VTS Library  
v 1. VTS 1  
v 2. VTS 2  
|
The associated library sequence number is displayed next to each selection.  
|
|
|
Note: Only J type media can be inserted into a Virtual Tape Server logical  
library.  
The function keys for the pop-up window are:  
Insert Cartridges  
Complete the cartridge information, then press the Enter key.  
Volser of Cartridge. . . WCC001  
Cartridge type . . . . . _1. Cartridge System Tape  
E. Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape  
J. High Performance Cartridge Tape  
Library . . . . . . . . _0. Non-VTS Library - xxxxx  
1. VTS 1 - xxxxx  
2. VTS 2 - xxxxx  
F1=Help F3=HideScreen F12=Cancel  
Figure 144. Manual Mode Insert Cartridges Screen  
|
F1  
F3  
Display the help information for this screen.  
|
|
|
Hides this pop-up window (Manual Mode Terminal). The Manual Mode  
Terminal pop-up window is hidden but can be retrieved by selecting the  
Mode pull-down and then selecting Manual mode.  
|
F12  
Close this screen and return to the Action List screen.  
|
|
Arrows  
Move the cursor by pressing the right or left arrow key.  
|
Enter Confirm entries in a field or confirm the insertion of a cartridge.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
5. Press the Enter key. A pop-up screen is displayed with the Home Cell rack  
storage location for the inserted cartridge. See Figure 145.  
6. Place the cartridge in the designated rack storage cell.  
Note: If the cartridge cannot be put in the specified storage cell, press the Error  
key (F4) to request a new storage cell location.  
7. Press the Enter key to confirm that the insert action is complete. The Insert  
Cartridges screen is displayed again.  
8. If you have another cartridge to insert, repeat steps 2 on page 233 through 7 on  
page 234 for the next cartridge. If there are no more cartridges to insert, press  
the Cancel key (F12) to return to the Action List screen.  
Insert Cartridges  
Complete the cartridge information, then press the Enter key.  
Volser of Cartridge. . . WCC001  
Cartridge type . . . . . _1. Cartridge System Tape  
_E. Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape  
_J. High Performance Cartridge Tape  
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+  
| Put the cartridge in the indicated home cell, press the Enter key.  
|
| If you cannot use the home cell, press the Error key (F4) to have a |  
| different cell specified.  
|
| Home Cell . . . Rack 1 B 10  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| F1=Help F4=Error F12=Cancel  
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+  
F1=Help F3=HideScreen F12=Cancel  
Figure 145. Manual Mode Insert Cartridges Pop-Up Window  
The function keys for the pop-up window are:  
F1  
F4  
Display help information about this pop-up window.  
Specify another home cell location because the cartridge cannot be inserted  
in the specified location.  
F12  
Close the pop-up window and return to the Insert Cartridges screen.  
Enter Send confirmation to the host program that verifies that the cartridge is  
inserted in the specified location. Also, display the Insert Cartridges screen  
for the next insert.  
|
|
|
|
Note: When you return to the Manual Mode Action List, Figure 143 on page 230  
and if you’ve inserted J-type media in an Import/Export capable Library, the  
Manage Unassigned Volumes panel will automatically be presented. The  
Manage Unassigned Volumes panel is shown in Figure 129 on page 202.  
| Ejecting Cartridges  
Use the following procedure to remove a cartridge from the 3494:  
1. From the Action List screen, determine the drive (device) or storage cell From  
location containing the cartridge to be ejected. See Figure 143 on page 230.  
234 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Go to the drive or storage cell and remove the cartridge. Verify that the cartridge  
volser matches the volser specified on the action list.  
Notes:  
a. If the From location is a drive, remove the cartridge from the drive.  
b. If the From location is followed by ?, the cartridge has already been used in  
Manual mode. If the cartridge is not present in the indicated From location,  
look in the location where you are storing demounted cartridges, for  
example, the high-capacity output area.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the enclosure or place it in a safe location. Be sure  
to remove all ejected cartridges from the enclosure when Manual mode  
operations are completed.  
4. Confirm that the eject is complete as follows:  
a. Highlight the action item to be confirmed on the Action List screen of the  
library manager.  
To highlight an item, use the up and down arrow keys to move the highlight  
bar to the desired action item.  
b. Confirm the highlighted action item by pressing the Enter key.  
Note: Be sure to confirm each ejected cartridge after completing the eject task.  
Eject actions remain on the Action List screen until they are manually  
confirmed.  
5. Press the Refresh key (F9) to update the list.  
Reviewing Unknown Volume Locations  
Use this procedure if you are not sure where a volume should go. You can display  
the volser From location and To location of the last 20 completed actions. Use this  
information to verify the accuracy of a completed action item.  
1. Press the Review key (F6) on the Action List screen of the library manager. See  
Figure 143 on page 230.  
2. Return to the Action List screen by pressing F12.  
If the volume was not listed on the Review List screen (see Figure 146 on  
page 236), use the Locate Cartridge Home screen to find a storage cell in which to  
put the volume. See Figure 148 on page 238.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Review List  
Action  
VOLSER  
From  
To  
Mount  
Eject  
Mount  
Mount  
GKT333  
SRJ485  
EPF371  
SDR495  
Rack  
Rack  
Device 200  
Rack 7 A 6  
2 B 40  
1 A 7  
Device 200  
Confirmed  
Confirmed  
Confirmed  
ERROR (see Note)  
Device 3E1  
Device 201  
F1=Help F3=HideScreen F12=Cancel  
Figure 146. Manual Mode Review List Screen  
Note: The ERROR indication is caused by the operator pressing F4 on the Action  
List screen.  
You can only view this screen. You perform the tasks (actions) from the Action List  
screen.  
Error Processing  
Use the following procedure to describe the problem to the host system if you  
cannot complete a mount or eject action:  
1. Highlight the action item that you cannot complete on the Action List screen.  
Use the up or down arrow keys to highlight the questioned action.  
2. Press the Error key (F4) on the Action List screen of the library manager.  
3. Select the error description that best fits the problem. Use the up or down arrow  
keys to highlight the error description. See Figure 147 on page 237.  
4. Press the Enter key to send the error description to the host processor.  
Note: Press the Cancel key (F12) to replace the Error Processing screen with the  
Action List screen. No error message is sent.  
236 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Error Processing  
Select the error description that best fits the error situation and press  
the Enter key.  
Action  
Mount  
VOLSER  
SSG332  
From  
Rack 2 D 22  
To  
Device 3F5  
Error Description . . .  
Rack Cell Empty  
Rack Cell In Use  
Wrong VOLSER  
Device In Use  
No Cartridge In Device  
Cartridge Not Found  
Other Error  
F1=Help F3=HideScreen F12=Cancel  
Figure 147. Manual Mode Error Processing Screen  
Locating and Identifying Home Cell Locations  
Use the following procedure to locate and identify the home cell locations:  
|
v Determine the home cell in which to place a misplaced or inaccessible volume.  
v Determine the home cell so you can find a volume.  
1. Press the Locate key (F10) on the Action List screen of the library manager.  
See Figure 143 on page 230.  
2. Enter the volume to find its home cell and then press the Enter key.  
The home cell for the volume is displayed on the Locate Cartridge Home  
screen. See Figure 148 on page 238.  
3. If you place the volume in the home cell or verify that the volume is already in  
the home cell, press the Enter key; otherwise, press the Cancel key (F12).  
4. Return to the Action List screen by pressing the Cancel key (F12).  
Note: The Locate function works only for physical volumes. Logical volumes do  
not have a home cell.  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Locate Cartridge Home  
Complete the cartridge volser and press the Enter key.  
Cartridge volser . . . MRB234  
+---------------------------------------------------------------+  
| The home cell for the specified cartridge is displayed below. |  
| If you put the cartridge in this home cell or verify that it  
| is already there, press the Enter key. Otherwise, press the  
| Cancel key (F12).  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Home Cell . . . Rack 1 A 11  
|
| F1=Help F12=Cancel  
+---------------------------------------------------------------+  
F1=Help F3=HideScreen F12=Cancel  
Figure 148. Manual Mode Locate Cartridge Home Screen  
Ending Manual Mode  
To end the Manual mode, do the following steps:  
1. Leave cartridges in the drives. They will be automatically moved by the library  
when it returns to Auto mode.  
2. Close the front doors on the library.  
3. Make sure any mounts that were started have been removed from the manual  
mode display.  
4. Press the Ctrl key and the Esc key at the same time to produce the task list.  
5. Select the Library Manager selection on the task list with the pointing device.  
6. Select Mode from the action bar on the Operator Menu.  
7. Verify that the library is Online. If the library is Offline, choose Online and  
confirm the selection.  
8. Enable Inventory Update if it is disabled so that the Inventory Update can  
re-establish current location on all volsers.  
9. Select Auto from the Mode pull-down. The mode change request pop-up  
window is displayed to ask if you want to change the operating mode. Select  
yes to change to Auto mode.  
An Auto Pending message indicates the transition to Auto mode is in progress.  
The 3494 returns to Auto mode after Manual mode.  
When the transition to Auto mode is made, an inventory update is performed.  
The inventory update must complete before the Auto activity resumes.  
238 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cartridge Removal from the Gripper  
Some operator intervention conditions require the operator to remove the cartridge  
from the gripper. Figure 149 shows the picker and the gripper assembly. Remove  
the cartridge from the gripper by doing the following:  
1. Press the Pause button on the operator control panel if the library is not already  
in Pause mode.  
2. Open the front door on the library in front of the cartridge accessor.  
3. Rotate the picker „1ꢀ so the picker is pointing toward the right side of the  
machine, paralleling the rails „3ꢀ.  
4. Push the reach assembly „5ꢀ out so it is fully extended.  
5. Press the top „2ꢀ of the gripper assembly to release the cartridge „4ꢀ.  
6. Push the reach assembly in so it is fully retracted.  
7. Close the front door.  
8. Press the Auto button on the operator control panel to return the library to Auto  
mode.  
Figure 149. Cartridge Removal from the Gripper  
Chapter 6. Advanced Operating Procedures 239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Keyboard Template  
“Appendix A. Keyboard Template” on page 305 illustrates the function keys on the  
library manager keyboard which are used during normal activity. That template can  
be copied or removed and then folded to create a triangular bar shape with the  
illustration of the keys showing on one face. The template can then be placed in a  
convenient location for quick access to the correct key for a specific function.  
240 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager Console Feature  
When the Remote Library Manager Console feature is installed, an operator can  
control or monitor operations for libraries from a remote location. The remote library  
manager console (controlling workstation) is connected to the library manager  
(controlling workstation) through a local area network (LAN). The customer orders  
either the Token Ring LAN Attachment feature or the Ethernet LAN Attachment  
feature when the Remote Library Manager Console feature is ordered. Figure 150  
shows an example of the Token Ring LAN and the Ethernet LAN.  
Figure 150. LAN Attachments  
The Distributed Console Access Facility (DCAF) product is installed on the library  
manager and the remote library manager console when the Remote Library  
Manager Console feature is installed. If this topic does not describe a task you want  
to perform, refer to Distributed Console Access Facility: Installation Guide  
SH19-4068, and Distributed Console Access Facility: V1R3.1 Target User’s Guide,  
SH19-6839. If the task is similar to one in a referenced document, use the  
description presented here.  
This topic is intended for system planners, system programmers, LAN  
administrators, and operators. Some users are expected to be familiar with  
operating system and text editor.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
241  
 
Installing and Configuring  
The Remote Library Manager Console feature can use one of two communication  
protocols to establish communications between the remote (controlling workstation)  
console and the 3494 (target workstation) library manager. To establish  
communications between the remote library manager console and the 3494, the  
communications protocol and LAN adapter protocol support must be properly  
configured. Configuration is handled by the installation program, which is on the  
Remote Library Manager Console feature disk. Review the Remote Library  
Manager Console feature installation instructions to understand the following:  
v How the remote library manager console and 3494 library communications are  
integrated  
v How the names and addresses are used to configure the communications  
protocol  
Starting DCAF on the Remote Library Manager Console  
Starting DCAF on the remote library manager console automatically causes DCAF  
to start on the library manager. To start the remote library manager console  
program, do the following steps:  
1. Start the Communications Protocol on the remote (controlling workstation)  
console.  
2. Choose the Distributed Console Access Facility group. (See Figure 151.)  
Figure 151. Icon for Distributed Console Access Facility  
3. Choose DCAF Controller (See Figure 152.)  
Figure 152. Distributed Console Access Facility Icon  
After the IBM logo is displayed, the controlling main window appears. (See  
Figure 153 on page 243.)  
242 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 153. DCAF Controlling Main Window  
4. Workstations must be added. See 8 on page 246. Choose Open Workstation  
Directory from the Session pull-down.  
The DCAF directory window appears. (See Figure 154.) It lists the link records  
of the target workstations that are directly connected through the  
Communication Protocol.  
Figure 154. DCAF Directory  
5. Select the workstation name by either of the following:  
a. Positioning the pointing device cursor on the required link (for example,  
3494 #1) and double clicking with the left pointing device button.  
b. Using the up or down arrow key to select a link record and pressing the  
Enter key.  
The DCAF target password window appears. See Figure 155 on page 244.  
Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager Console Feature 243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 155. DCAF Target Password  
6. Type in the target password (the default is lmpsword) to start the session.  
As you type the password, the cursor moves and an asterisk (*) is displayed in  
place of the character. The following are password guidelines:  
v One to eight characters  
v Uppercase or lowercase letters A–Z  
v Digits 0–9  
v Embedded blanks (blanks after the last character are ignored)  
7. Press the OK push button or click on OK with the left pointing device button.  
When the remote library manager console Distributed Console Access Facility is  
starting, it displays its status (Figure 156).  
Figure 156. Initiating the Remote Library Manager Console  
The advanced program-to-program communications (APPC) or TCPIP indicating  
Started appears momentarily on the library manager display (Figure 157 on  
page 245).  
244 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 157. Establishing Communication with the Library Manager  
After the initiation of the library manager is completed, the Main Menu appears  
on the remote library manager console (Figure 158). In this case, the selected  
library manager is paused and the Whole Queue is displayed when the remote  
library manager console is started. You can size this window to full screen by  
placing the pointing device cursor in the right box of the title bar and clicking  
once with the left pointing device button.  
Figure 158. Remote Library Manager Console Main Menu  
You can now use the pointing device cursor and buttons to select options on the  
selected 3494, just as if you were at that 3494.  
Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager Console Feature 245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
From the remote library manager console, you can also choose from the  
following options:  
Keystrokes  
See “Using Keystrokes during a Session from the Remote Library  
Manager Console”.  
Session  
See “Changing the Session State from the Remote Library Manager  
Console” on page 249.  
Services  
See “Transferring Files” on page 253.  
Help Use this push button to receive information about the item that the  
cursor is on or about the entire window.  
8. To start a session with another 3494, do the following:  
a. Press Ctrl+Esc to view the task list on the remote (controlling workstation)  
console.  
b. Under DCAF Controller, select Distributed Console Access Facility.  
c. Repeat step 4 on page 243 (Open Workstation Directory from the Services  
pull-down) through step 7 on page 244.  
Controlling the Tape Library from the Remote Library Manager  
Console  
The remote library manager console operator can control one or more tape libraries  
from a remote library manager console when Active is selected from the Session  
pull-down. The remote library manager console displays the target library manager  
screen of each selected library in the network. The operator displays the screens by  
switching between library managers or by displaying them simultaneously via  
windows by using the remote library manager console task list.  
Using Keystrokes during a Session from the Remote Library Manager  
Console  
The keystrokes mode, displayed on the title bar of the remote library manager  
consolesession window, determines whether the remote library manager console’s  
keyboard input and pointing device movements affect the remote library manager  
console or the 3494 library manager. The remote library manager console starts  
with state active and keystrokes remote displayed in the title bar. See Figure 159 on  
page 247.  
The remote library manager console operator can change keystroke modes during  
an active session.  
Keystrokes Remote Mode on the Remote Library Manager  
Console  
All the keyboard input on the remote library manager console, except the remote  
library manager consoleoperating-system hot-keys, affects the library manager.  
Operating-system hot-key combinations always affect the remote library manager  
246 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
consoleonly. Alt+Esc, Alt+Tab, and Ctrl+Esc are the hot-key combinations. For  
example, Ctrl+Esc causes the remote library manager console’s task list to appear  
on the remote library manager console.  
Pointing Device movements inside the library manager screen on the remote library  
manager consoleare sent to the library manager. If you move the pointing device  
outside the library manager screen, the pointing devicemovements are processed  
on the remote library manager console. For example, if you choose an action from  
a pull-down in a library manager screen, the action is processed on the library  
manager. If you choose an action from a pull-down on a remote library manager  
console window, the action is processed on the remote library manager console.  
You can send operating-system hot-key combinations to the library manager from  
the Keystrokes pull-down. See Figure 159.  
Figure 159. Remote Library Manager Console Window with Keystrokes Pull-Down Menu  
Figure 159 shows the remote library manager console window with a view of the  
library manager’s display during an active session. The remote library manager  
console user is working in keystrokes remote mode.  
Keystrokes Local Mode on the Remote Library Manager Console  
All the keyboard input and pointing device movements affect the remote library  
manager console only. All keystrokes on the remote console are processed by the  
remote library manager console.  
Only shortcut keys from the Keystrokes pull-down affect the library manager. These  
shortcut keys simulate operating-system hot-key combinations, which are Alt+Esc,  
Alt+Tab, and Ctrl+Esc. Table 8 on page 248 shows the effect of the shortcut keys.  
Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager Console Feature 247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 8. Shortcut Keys for the Library Manager  
Keys  
Result  
Ctrl+E  
Simulates the Alt+Esc key combination on the library manager, which causes  
the library manager to show the windows and full-screen sessions in an  
ordered rotation.  
Ctrl+U  
Ctrl+C  
Simulates the Alt+Tab key combination on the library manager, which causes  
the library manager to show the system menus for the windows and  
full-screen sessions in an ordered rotation.  
Simulates the Ctrl+Esc key combination on the library manager, which causes  
the library manager to display its task list.  
Changing Keystrokes Mode  
To change keystrokes mode on the remote library manager console, do one of the  
following:  
v Press the controlling hot-key combination (default Alt+T) to switch between  
keystrokes local and keystrokes remote mode or  
v Move the pointing device into the Keystrokes menu and choose Keystrokes  
remote or Keystrokes local from Change Keystrokes Mode.  
Using Hot-Key Combinations  
To view the task list on the remote library manager console, press Ctrl+Esc.  
To view the task list on the library manager, choose Send Ctrl+Esc from the  
Keystrokes pull-down on the remote library manager console.  
Sending the Alt+Esc Command to the Library Manager  
To send the Alt+Esc command to the library manager, do the following:  
v Choose Send Alt+Esc from the Keystrokes pull-down on the remote library  
manager console session window (Figure 159 on page 247).  
v Press the Ctrl+E shortcut key if the remote library manager console is in  
keystrokes local mode.  
Sending the Alt+Esc command lets you see the library manager’s full screen or  
window sessions in an ordered rotation. If you go through the rotation to a full  
screen session, you are immediately in the full screen session of the library  
manager.  
Sending the Alt+Tab Command to the Library Manager  
To send the Alt+Tab command to the library manager, do the following:  
v Choose Send Alt+Tab from the Keystrokes pull-down on the remote library  
manager console session window (see Figure 159 on page 247).  
v Press the Ctrl+U shortcut key if the remote library manager console is in  
keystrokes local mode.  
Sending the Alt+Tab command lets you see the system menu for the library  
manager’s full screen or window sessions in an ordered rotation. Sending this  
command causes the library manager’s system menu for the next window to be  
displayed.  
248 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending the Ctrl+Esc Command to the Library Manager  
To send the Ctrl+Esc command to the library manager during an active session, do  
the following:  
v Choose Send Ctrl+Esc from the Keystrokes pull-down on the remote library  
manager console session window (see Figure 159 on page 247).  
v Press the Ctrl+C shortcut key if the remote library manager console is in  
keystrokes local mode.  
Sending the Ctrl+Esc command lets you display the task list on the library manager.  
After you display the task list, you can choose a task from the list.  
Changing the Session State from the Remote Library Manager Console  
The session state is the current state of the session between the remote library  
manager console and the library manager workstations. Both workstation users can  
change the session. While the remote library manager console is changing the  
session state, the library manager cannot alter that session. If both users try to  
change the state at the same time, the library manager takes precedence.  
A status indicator of the session appears in the title bar of the session window or,  
when the session interface is minimized, under the remote library manager console  
icon.  
Figure 160 on page 250 shows the remote library manager console window in the  
library manager’s display during an active session. The remote library manager  
console is in keystrokes remote mode.  
Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager Console Feature 249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 160. Remote Library Manager Console Session Window with Session Pull-Down  
Menu  
The link record name (3494 #1), the current session state (active), and the  
keystrokes mode (remote) are displayed on the title bar of the remote library  
manager console window. See Table 9 on page 251 for a description of the session  
states.  
To change the session state, do the following:  
v Choose the Session pull-down and the action to change the session state.  
v Press one of the following shortcut keys associated with the action to change the  
session if the remote library manager console is in keystrokes local mode:  
Active Ctrl+A  
Monitor  
Ctrl+M  
Suspend  
Ctrl+S  
Terminate  
Ctrl+T  
250 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 9. Session States  
Session State  
Description  
Active  
A DCAF session is established. The controlling workstation (remote  
library manager console) controls the keyboard and monitors the display  
of the target workstation (library manager). The library manager  
keyboard is locked; the keystrokes and pointing devicecommands  
entered on the library manager are not processed. The library manager  
user can regain control by pressing the hot-key combination to change  
the session state.  
Busy  
A DCAF session is established. The library manager user pressed the  
hot-key combination and regained control. The remote library manager  
console user must wait until the library manager user puts the DCAF  
session in another state.  
Initiating  
Monitor  
The remote library manager console is starting a DCAF session with the  
library manager.  
A DCAF session is established. The remote library manager console  
monitors (watches) the activity of the library manager. The remote library  
manager console user sees the library manager display, but the library  
manager user is in control of the keyboard and pointing deviceinput. The  
library manager user can press the hot-key combination to change the  
session state.  
Suspend  
The DCAF session in progress is suspended (stopped temporarily). The  
remote library manager console does not monitor the library manager  
and does not have control of the keyboard and pointing device. Either  
console user can resume the session.  
Terminate  
The DCAF session is terminating (ending).  
Using the Pointing Device during a Session  
Figure 161 on page 252 shows the library manager’s display during an active  
session. The operational status from the library manager was selected with the  
pointing device by the remote library manager console user. The remote library  
manager console is in keystrokes remote mode.  
Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager Console Feature 251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 161. Remote Library Manager Console Session Window  
During an active session, the pointing device is useful for making selections from  
the remote library manager console menu bar or for performing operations on the  
library manager display. The keystrokes mode (local or remote) is for the remote  
library manager console keyboard only and has no effect on the pointing device.  
The remote library manager console pointing device determines the position of the  
pointing device of the library manager. The remote library manager console pointing  
device can move the library manager pointing deviceif the following conditions are  
true:  
v The remote library manager console session window is the active window where  
the remote library manager console user is giving pointing device commands.  
v The remote library manager console pointing device position is within the remote  
library manager console session window.  
Note: The pointing device displayed on the remote library manager console may  
not be the same as on the library manager because of differences in the  
display drivers.  
Excessive movement of the pointing device during the active state in the remote  
library manager console window can cause the operation to run slowly because the  
pointing device movement sends information across the network.  
Note: If you perform an operation that is not allowed on the remote library manager  
console, the library manager console beeps once.  
When the remote library manager console is in the active state, the library manager  
pointing device is disabled. During the monitoring, busy, or suspended states, the  
pointing device for the remote library manager console and the library manager  
function independently.  
252 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Moving Among Multiple Sessions  
Moving among multiple remote library manager console sessions follows the  
general conventions for moving around the windows.  
The remote library manager console main window displays each library manager  
session. The current sessions are listed by the appropriate link record name. To  
change to a different session, do the following:  
v Choose the new session from the remote library manager console main window.  
v Go to the task list and switch to the new session.  
You can minimize or maximize the remote library manager console session  
windows and arrange them on the remote library manager console. To return to the  
remote library manager console main window, go to the task list and switch to the  
Distributed Console Access Facility (remote library manager console main window).  
Transferring Files  
You can use the file-transfer utility to transfer files from the library manager to the  
remote library manager console. Transferring files to the library manager is not  
allowed. Only the remote library manager console can initiate a file transfer. The  
remote library manager console can be in the monitoring state or the active state.  
To transfer files from the library manager, do the following:  
1. Choose Start file transfer from the Services pull-down on the remote library  
manager console. The File Transfer Utility window appears.  
2. Type the path and the file name of the source file. If the path is not specified,  
the drive and directory where the DCAF is installed is used.  
3. Type the path and the file name of the destination file. If the file name is not  
specified, the same name as the source file is used.  
4. Mark the Overwrite check box if you want to replace a destination file that  
already exists.  
5. Press the Receive push button for the remote library manager console to  
receive the file from the library manager.  
A window appears that shows what percent of the file has transferred. To  
interrupt the file transfer, press the Stop push button.  
Library Manager Operations with a Remote Library Manager Console  
You can change the session state and the password from the library manager.  
Changing the Session State of the Library Manager  
After a session is established between the remote library manager console and the  
library manager, the remote library manager console controls the library manager  
keyboard and monitors the library manager display. The keyboard and pointing  
device on the library manager are locked.  
|
|
To regain control at the library manager, the session state must be changed. To  
change the session state do one of the following:  
|
|
v The remote library manager console operator can change the session state as  
follows:  
Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager Console Feature 253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
– Terminate the session. All remote operations stop until a new session is  
established.  
|
– Suspend the session. Control returns to the library manager.  
|
|
|
– Monitor the session. The remote library manager console can monitor the  
display on the library manager, but the keyboard on the library manager is  
active.  
|
|
v The library manager operator can change the session state by using the hot-key  
combination at the library manager keyboard as follows:  
|
|
1. Press Alt+T on the library manager console. The DCAF Target window  
appears, and shows that the target is busy. See Figure 164 on page 255.  
|
|
|
2. Click once with the pointing device in the minimize box in the upper right  
corner of the target window. The library manager keyboard is now  
operational.  
|
|
|
Attention: Do not close this window. If you CLOSE this window instead of  
MINIMIZING it, remote console access to the library manager will be disabled  
until the library manager is rebooted.  
|
|
|
v If you want to return control to the remote library manager console or want to  
allow the remote library manager console to monitor operations, change the  
session state as follows:  
|
|
– The remote library manager console operator can stop and restart the  
connection at the remote library manager console.  
|
|
– The library manager operator can restart the session as follows:  
1. Press Ctrl+Esc to display the task list.  
|
|
2. Select DCAF Target with the pointing device. See Figure 162.  
Figure 162. Window List  
|
|
3. From the DCAF target window, select the session window and select  
Active or Monitor. See Figure 163 on page 255.  
|
254 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 163. Active Session  
Changing the Password from the Library Manager  
The remote library manager console logon password can be changed only from the  
library manager during a session. To change the password, do the following steps:  
1. If you have an active session, take control at the library manager by pressing  
Alt+T and the DCAF Target window will appear. See Figure 164.  
Figure 164. Changing Sessions  
2. From the Options menu, select Password from the DCAF Target window  
(Figure 165 on page 256).  
Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager Console Feature 255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 165. Session Pull-down Menu  
3. Click on the Enable password check box ( Figure 166).  
4. Type the current password. (The default password is lmpsword.)  
Figure 166. DCAF Password  
5. Type the new password. The following are the password guidelines:  
v One to eight characters  
v Uppercase or lowercase letters A–Z  
v Digits 0–9  
v Embedded blanks (blanks after the last character are ignored)  
6. Type the new password again after Verify new password.  
7. Click on the Change push button. A message confirming the password change  
appears.  
Note: Give the password to the remote library manager console operator.  
256 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Library Manager Console Problem Analysis and Operational  
Tips  
Table 10 shows the fault symptoms and describes possible solutions to problems  
with the remote library manager console functions.  
Table 10. Fault Symptoms  
Symptom  
Description and Possible Solution  
The library  
manager  
keyboard is  
locked.  
When a session is active, the library manager keyboard is locked. In  
this case, use the Alt+T hot-key combination to regain control at the  
library manager.  
EQN0516 or  
EQN0524 error  
Ensure that the communications manager is started. If the session state  
takes too long because of network traffic, you may receive this error on  
the remote library manager console. Close the warning window for this  
error and retry the connection.  
The pointing  
device button  
As you move a window with the pointing device from the remote library  
manager console, if you drag a window (of the library manager) so high  
commands to the that its top goes out of the visible region on the remote (controlling)  
library manager  
are ignored.  
console, you are moving the pointing device out of the DCAF session.  
Therefore, the pointing device button actions are not sent to the library  
manager until the pointing device is moved back into the active session  
window at the library manager. When you move back into the active  
session, the window on the library manager appears to move with the  
pointing device and not drop, even though the pointing device button  
has been released. Click the pointing device button again to drop the  
window where you want the window to drop.  
The library  
If you perform an operation that is not allowed on the remote library  
manager console manager console, the library manager console beeps once.  
beeps.  
Chapter 7. Remote Library Manager Console Feature 257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
258 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures  
This chapter describes how to determine when a problem has occurred in the  
library and the actions necessary to resolve the problem.  
See Table 11 for quick reference to particular conditions.  
Quick Reference Table to Problem Determination Procedures  
Table 11. Quick Reference to Problem Determination procedures  
Conditions  
Reference  
|
|
Library Manager failures in a DFSMS/MVS  
environment (includes HA1 Switchovers)  
“Library Manager Failure in a DFSMS/MVS  
Environment” on page 261  
|
|
Library Manager failures in an MVS/BTLS  
environment (includes HA1 Switchovers)  
“Library Manager Failure in an MVS/BTLS  
Environment” on page 265  
Reported via a host console message  
“DFSMS System Managed Tape Messages”  
on page 268  
Intervention Required on Library Manager  
System Summary or SNMP OPINT trap  
message  
“Intervention Required Conditions and  
Actions” on page 282  
Disruption of services or physical damage to “Virtual Tape Server Recovery Actions” on  
a site with a Virtual Tape Server.  
page 302  
|
|
|
Import/Export List Volume status codes in  
the status file  
“Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server  
Import/Export Advanced Function” on  
page 307  
When a problem occurs in the library or associated tape subsystems, completion of  
one or more library operations may not be possible. This topic provides information  
on how to identify problems, what is their significance to continuing operations in  
the library, and what actions to take for recovery.  
Several symptoms indicate that a problem occurred with the library and/or  
associated tape subsystems. These symptoms are in the following general  
categories:  
1. One or more jobs that require volumes in the library are not progressing or  
completing as expected. The possible causes are:  
v The workload demand on the library exceeds its capability. For example, the  
number of requests to mount volumes on drives in a library received in a  
period exceeds the number the library can process during that period. The  
result is that the requests stay in the library manager queue for a longer  
period before being performed. Although this is not a problem with the library,  
if this is occurring on a regular basis, workload balancing must be addressed.  
v A failure of a component in the library is causing degraded performance.  
Library operations are performed, but are slower to complete because of the  
failure. For example, when one of the two grippers fails, all operations  
continue with the other gripper, but take longer to complete than when both  
grippers are functional. Service is required to correct the problem.  
v The library or attached tape subsystems detected a failure or exception  
condition that is preventing one or more library operations from completing.  
The library reports the condition to the host for operator or service  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
259  
 
representative handling. See “Failure and Exception Condition Reporting” for  
the conditions and required actions.  
2. Console messages concerning the library are being generated.  
v A failure or exception condition occurred while the library is performing one or  
more requested operations. The library reports the condition to the host which  
generates a host console message to inform the operator that a problem  
exists with the library. See “Failure and Exception Condition Reporting” for  
the conditions and required actions.  
v The library manager console provides information about many of the failure  
and exception conditions reported to the host. Although the host console  
messages are the primary source for problem determination, the information  
at the library manager is useful during operator and service representative  
problem resolution. See “Information Provided at the Library Manager  
Console” on page 276 for the information and required actions.  
3. A service representative has requested time on the library to correct a problem.  
In addition to possible host console messages, failures and exception conditions  
caused by hardware failures in the library or associated tape subsystems are  
logged in the error recording dataset on the host. MVS hosts, for example, log  
errors in file SYS1.LOGREC. A service representative reviews the datasets as  
part of normal diagnosis. Also, when errors that are recovered internally by the  
library exceed a threshold, the condition is also logged for action by the service  
representative.  
The primary indication that a problem has occurred is a host console message. The  
following topic describes what actions to take based on specific console messages.  
Failure and Exception Condition Reporting  
Failures or exception conditions detected by the library are reported to the attached  
hosts for operator action. Most failures or exception conditions are also logged at  
the host for later use by a service representative. Failures or exception conditions  
fall into one of three categories:  
1. A failure or exception condition is detected in a request from a host to perform a  
library function.  
The requested function is rejected and the reason is reported back to the host  
immediately.  
2. Some library function requests, such as mounting a cartridge, are queued within  
the library manager for subsequent execution. A failure or exception condition  
can be detected during the execution of a queued library function request.  
The host that requested the library function is notified that a failure or exception  
condition was detected during the execution of the request. The notification also  
includes the reason for the failure or exception condition.  
3. A failure or exception condition is detected that is independent of any specific  
requested library function.  
All hosts attached to the library are notified of the failure or exception condition.  
When a failure or exception condition is reported to the host, the result is  
dependent on the host’s operating system. For an MVS host, the reported condition  
results in a console message. “DFSMS System Managed Tape Messages” on  
page 268 describes the console message generated by the MVS operating system  
under the DFSMS System Managed Tape environment as a result of a library  
|
|
260 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
reported failure or exception condition. Refer to the following documentation for the  
messages provided and their format for other operating systems and environments.  
v MVS Basic Tape Library Support (BTLS) - User’s Guide and Reference  
SC26-7016  
v VM  
v OS/400  
v AIX  
For several of the conditions, one of the actions that can be specified is to choose  
the Operator Intervention pull-down. See “Operator Intervention” on page 199 for  
the actions to take for each intervention condition.  
Library Manager Failure Recovery Procedures  
Notes:  
1. This procedure is designed for the recovery of DFSMS/MVS or MVS/BTLS host  
sessions. If you are using any other host platform, contact your software  
provider before continuing with this procedure.  
2. These procedures apply to both single library manager and HA1 (dual library  
manager) configurations. In a dual library manager configuration, these  
procedures apply to the activation of the standby library manager when the  
active library manager fails.  
|
|
|
|
3. Host actions may include varying the library online after a short delay for the  
conditions that restart the library manager. Host tape operations or short jobs  
may have to be resubmitted and operator actions from the Library Manager  
console may require restart.  
When a failure occurs in the library manager from either a CHECK-1 or a processor  
exception, or when the library manager experiences certain hardware failures,  
perform the following procedures to recover host operations. These recovery  
procedures allow recovery from many different scenarios. These steps must be  
followed in the exact sequence to achieve a complete recovery.  
Throughout the recovery procedures, the operator is directed to perform certain  
actions at either the library manager or at the host operating console. It may be  
helpful to have two people perform the various tasks involved in this procedure due  
to locations of the library.  
For recovery procedures of DFSMS/MVS, see “Library Manager Failure in a  
DFSMS/MVS Environment”. For recovery procedures of MVS/BTLS, see “Library  
Manager Failure in an MVS/BTLS Environment” on page 265.  
Library Manager Failure in a DFSMS/MVS Environment  
The following failure conditions cause the operator to initiate this procedure:  
v Library manager CHECK-1 condition  
v Library manager hardware failure  
v Library manager processor exception software error  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the active library manager fails in a dual library manager environment, it may  
or may not display a message. The standby library manager displays a message  
stating that a switch over is being made, which can take approximately 10 minutes  
to complete.  
Note: Some library manager recovery operations may take longer than expected to  
complete. Allow sufficient time for the library manager to complete its switch  
over recovery procedures. Seek assistance before interrupting the library  
manager recovery operation.  
Library Manager Screens (DFSMS/MVS Environment)  
A library manager failure causes the library manager console to display certain  
messages. If the failure has not affected the display and the display is powered on,  
the library manager may have one or more of the following symptoms.  
Single Library Manager Configuration::  
v ‘Severe execution error’ dialog box  
v System hang with non-responsive library manager keyboard or mouse  
Note: If this occurs, press Alt-t to make sure the keyboard and display are not  
being controlled from the remote console.  
v Mode changes which show Pending for an excessive length of time  
v Error recovery in progress  
Dual Library Manager Configuration::  
v ‘Switching to active library manager’ dialog box displayed  
v ‘Severe execution error’ dialog box  
v System hang with non-responsive library manager keyboard or mouse  
Note: If this occurs, press Alt-t to make sure the keyboard and display are not  
being controlled from the remote console.  
v Mode changes which show Pending for an excessive length of time  
v Error recovery in progress  
|
|
To manually restart a library manager, go to “Library Manager Action – Library  
Manager Recovery Begins (DFSMS/MVS Environment)” on page 263.  
Host Messages (DFSMS/MVS Environment)  
When the library manager fails, the host operator may or may not see one or more  
of the following messages displayed on the host console:  
v Library manager CHECK-1 condition  
v Library manager equipment check  
v Library path check  
v Library manager offline  
v Library manager switchover in progress  
|
The library manager operator and the host operator should actively communicate  
with each other to reduce the amount of down time and ensure the accuracy of this  
procedure.  
262 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Start the Library Manager and Host Recovery Procedure (DFSMS/MVS  
Environment)  
Follow each step of the following procedure without deviation.  
Library Manager Action – Library Manager Recovery Begins  
(DFSMS/MVS Environment)  
Single Library Manager Configuration: For a single library manager  
configuration, do the following:  
v Contact host operations and inform them what has occurred at the library  
manager.  
– If a CHECK-1 or a processor exception occurred, the library manager  
automatically attempts to restart itself.  
Note: If, after 30 minutes, there is no change on the System Status screen  
and messages, do a manual restart. Do not power off the library  
manager. Press the CTL+ALT+DEL key sequence to restart the library  
manager.  
This procedure may need to be repeated. If, after the second attempt  
to recover the library manager, there is no response, call your next  
level of support.  
– If the failure is anything other than a CHECK-1, restart the library manager  
manually by doing the following:  
- Perform the CTL+ALT+DEL key sequence to restart the library manager.  
– While waiting for the library manager to initialize and enter the Auto/Online  
mode, go to “Library Manager Action – The Library Manager Recovers  
(DFSMS/MVS Environment)”.  
Note: This action takes approximately 20 minutes.  
Dual Library Manager Configuration: For a dual library manager configuration,  
no library manager corrective action is needed. The standby library manager  
automatically begins switching control from the active library manager.  
|
|
|
|
If the active library manager is not responding and the standby library manager  
does not indicate it is switching to active after 5 minutes (see Figure 167 on  
page 264), perform the above steps for a single library manager on the one that  
failed.  
While waiting for the library manager to initialize and go to AUTO/ONLINE mode, go  
to “Library Manager Action – The Library Manager Recovers (DFSMS/MVS  
Environment)”.  
Library Manager Action – The Library Manager Recovers  
(DFSMS/MVS Environment)  
Single Library Manager Configuration: For a single library manager  
configuration, do the following:  
1. Wait for the library manager to be reinitialized and enter Auto/Online mode. This  
process may take up to 20 minutes to reinitialize.  
2. If the failure occurred while inserting cartridges into the high-capacity I/O facility,  
do not remove the cartridges. Leave the cartridges in place and the operation  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
will restart automatically. Cartridges inserted in the Convenience I/O station that  
remain in the station will need to be removed from the station and then  
re-inserted after the library manager re-initializes.  
3. If the library manager reflects Auto/Online status, it has recovered. Contact the  
service representative for a recoverable library manager error. Continue with  
“DFSMS Host Action”.  
or  
4. If the library manager does not display Auto/Online status and more than 30  
minutes have elapsed since the re-initialization began, contact the service  
representative for a non-recoverable library manager error.  
5. When the repair action is completed and the library is available to be varied  
online, continue with “DFSMS Host Action”.  
Dual Library Manager Configuration: For a dual library manager configuration  
do the following:  
1. Wait until the switch over completes and the standby library manager has  
become the active library manager. The switch over takes approximately 10  
minutes. See Figure 167.  
Figure 167. Library Manager Switching Window  
2. Contact the service representative to repair the failed library manager.  
The failed library manager may recover from the failure and become available  
as the standby library manager after the database is synchronized.  
3. If the failure occurred while inserting cartridges into the high-capacity I/O facility,  
do not remove the cartridges. Leave the cartridges in place and the operation  
will restart automatically. Cartridges inserted in the Convenience I/O station that  
remain in the station will need to be removed from the station and then  
re-inserted after the library manager re-initializes.  
4. Notify the host operator that the switch over is complete.  
5. Continue with “DFSMS Host Action”.  
DFSMS Host Action  
|
|
|
If the library manager has been varied offline because of the failure, when the  
library manager is in the Auto/Online Mode, perform the following actions at the  
host:  
1. Return DFSMS host control of the library to online status by issuing the  
following command:  
VARY SMS, LIB(libname1), ONLINE  
1. Where libname is the name of the library.  
264 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Confirm that the appropriate drives are online and available by issuing the  
following command:  
LIBRARY DISPDRV, libname1  
For any drive that is not online, issue the following command:  
VARY xxx, ONLINE  
3. If the system environment includes JES-3, the library tape drives must be in  
normal status. Use of the JES-3 VARY commands for the GLOBAL and all  
LOCAL processors may be appropriate.  
4. If the system environment includes LEGENT Multiple Image Manager (MIM), the  
library tape drives must be in normal status. Use the MIM vary commands on  
each applicable host.  
5. If the system environment includes a different product such as ADSM or EPIC,  
use the appropriate commands to ensure normal library and tape drive status.  
6. Any pending jobs waiting for a response to an outstanding WTOR (CBR4196D)  
message may be retried by responding to the host request with an R (Retry).  
7. If the CHECK-1 occurred while doing cartridge ejects, verify if the last 3 volsers  
placed in either the high-capacity I/O facility or the Convenience I/O station are  
still present in the DFSMS database. If the volsers are present in the DFSMS  
database, the volsers must be inserted through an input station, then the  
DFSMS command to eject the volsers needs to be reissued.  
This completes the DFSMS recovery procedure. The library subsystem should now  
be ready for submission of tape jobs.  
Note: Any tape job that abended will need to be resubmitted.  
Library Manager Failure in an MVS/BTLS Environment  
The following failure conditions cause the operator to initiate this procedure:  
v Library manager CHECK-1 condition  
v Library manager hardware failure  
v Library manager processor exception software error  
When the active library manager fails in a dual library manager system, it may or  
may not display a message. The standby library manager displays a message  
stating that a switch over is being made, which can take up to 10 minutes to  
complete.  
Note: Some library manager recovery operations may take longer than expected to  
complete. Allow sufficient time for the library manager to complete its switch  
over procedures. Seek assistance before interrupting the library manager  
recovery operation.  
Host Messages (MVS/BLTS Environment)  
|
|
|
|
|
When the library manager fails, BTLS ERA=70 Library Manager Equipment  
Check may appear on the host console for single library managers or dual library  
managers unable to switch over. For dual library managers that are capable of  
switching, BTLS ERA=74 Library Informational Data may appear on the host  
console.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Library Manager Screens (MVS/BLTS Environment)  
A library manager failure causes the library manager console to display certain  
messages. If the failure has not affected the display and the display is powered on,  
the library manager may display one or more of the following screen messages:  
Single Library Manager Configuration:  
v ‘Severe execution error’ dialog box  
v System hang with non-responsive library manager keyboard or mouse  
Note: If this occurs, press Alt-t to make sure the keyboard and display are not  
being controlled from the remote console.  
v Mode changes which show Pending for an excessive length of time  
v Error recovery in progress  
Dual Library Manager Configuration:  
v Switching to active library manager dialog box displayed  
v ‘Severe execution error’ dialog box  
v System hang with non-responsive library manager keyboard or mouse  
Note: If this occurs, press ALT+T to make sure the keyboard and display are not  
being controlled from the remote console.  
|
|
To manually restart a library manager, go to “Library Manager Action – Library  
Manager Recovery Begins (MVS/BLTS Environment)”.  
Start the Library Manager and Host Recovery Procedure (MVS/BLTS  
Environment)  
Follow each step of the following procedure without deviation.  
Library Manager Action – Library Manager Recovery Begins  
(MVS/BLTS Environment)  
Single Library Manager Configuration: For a single library manager  
configuration, do the following:  
1. Contact host operations and inform them what has occurred at the library  
manager.  
2. If a BTLS ERA=70 Library Manager Equipment Check occurred, the library  
manager automatically attempts to restart itself.  
The library manager should begin initial program load (IPL) in about 5 minutes  
and may take up to 20 minutes to complete and become active. If, after 5  
minutes, there is no change in the System Status messages, or an “Error  
recovery in progress” message is not displayed, do a manual restart. Do not  
power off the library manager. Press the CTL+ALT+DEL key sequence to  
restart the library manager.  
This procedure may need to be repeated. If the library manager fails to begin  
IPL in 5 minutes, after the second attempt to recover call your next level of  
support.  
3. If the failure did not cause the Library Manager to automatically restart, perform  
the CTL+ALT+DEL key sequence to restart the library manager.  
266 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
While waiting up to 20 minutes for the library manager to initialize and enter the  
Auto/Online mode, go to“Library Manager Action – The Library Manager  
Recovers (MVS/BLTS Environment)”.  
Dual Library Manager Configuration: For a dual library manager configuration  
no library manager corrective action is needed. The standby library manager  
automatically begins switching control from the active library manager which will  
take approximately 10 minutes to complete. See Figure 168.  
|
|
|
|
If the active library manager is not responding and the standby library manager  
does not indicate it is switching to active after 5 minutes (see Figure 167 on  
page 264), perform the above steps for a single library manager on the one that  
failed.  
Figure 168. Library Manager Switching Window  
While waiting for the library manager to initialize and go to AUTO/ONLINE mode, go  
to “Library Manager Action – The Library Manager Recovers (MVS/BLTS  
Environment)”.  
Library Manager Action – The Library Manager Recovers  
(MVS/BLTS Environment)  
Single Library Manager Configuration: For a single library manager, do the  
following:  
1. Wait for the library manager to be reinitialized and enter Auto/Online mode. This  
may take up to 20 minutes to reinitialize.  
2. If the failure occurred while inserting cartridges into the high-capacity I/O facility,  
do not remove the cartridges. Leave the cartridges in place and the operation  
will restart automatically. Cartridges inserted in the Convenience I/O station that  
remain in the station will need to be removed from the station and then  
re-inserted after the library manager re-initializes.  
3. If the library manager reflects Auto/Online status, it has recovered. Contact the  
service representative for a recoverable library manager error. Continue with  
“BTLS Host Action” on page 268.  
4. If the library manager does not reflect Auto/Online status and more than 30  
minutes has elapsed since the re-initialization began, then contact the service  
representative for a non-recoverable library manager error.  
5. When the repair action is completed and the library is available to be varied  
online, continue with “BTLS Host Action” on page 268.  
Dual Library Manager Configuration: For a dual library manager, do the  
following:  
1. Wait until the switch over completes and the standby library manager has  
become the active library manager. The switch over takes approximately 10  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
minutes. The standby library manager is the active library manager when its  
System Status displays Auto/Online mode.  
2. Contact the service representative to repair the failed library manager.  
The failed library manager may recover from the failure and become available  
as the standby library manager after the database is synchronized.  
3. If the failure occurred while inserting cartridges into the high-capacity I/O facility,  
do not remove the cartridges. Leave the cartridges in place and the operation  
will restart automatically. Cartridges inserted in the Convenience I/O station that  
remain in the station will need to be removed from the station and then  
re-inserted after the library manager re-initializes.  
4. Continue with “BTLS Host Action”.  
BTLS Host Action  
When the library manager is in the Auto/Online Mode, do the following BTLS host  
actions:  
1. Display the unit status by issuing the following command for each tape drive in  
the library:  
D U,,, xxx2  
2. Redrive the mount for each tape drive showing MTP (mount pending) by issuing  
either of the following commands:  
v From TSO terminals, issue the TSO library mount command.  
LIBRARY MOUNT UNIT(unit)[VOLSER(volser)]  
or  
v Submit JCL to perform a library mount. See Basic Tape Library Support  
User’s Guide and Reference for commands.  
3. Submit tape jobs.  
4. Resubmit any tape jobs that abended.  
This process completes the MVS/BTLS recovery procedure.  
DFSMS System Managed Tape Messages  
When a failure or exception condition is reported to a host system operating under  
the DFSMS System Managed Tape environment, the following messages are  
generated. For each message, a brief description about the cause of the condition  
is described along with appropriate recovery actions.  
Also refer to MVS/ESA System Messages, Volume 2, GC28-1481 for additional  
CBRxxxx messages generated as a result of error or exception conditions detected  
with the DFSMS System Managed Tape environment software.  
In the messages, library-name is the name defined by the installation for a  
particular library.  
2. Where xxx is the device address.  
268 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table for DFSMS Library Failure Messages or Exception Conditions  
Table 12. DFSMS Messages Based on Library Failure or Exception Conditions  
Resulting Console Message  
Action  
CBR3711I Unexpected ERA code ERA-code from  
library library-name.  
Contact your service representative.  
An error has been detected during processing in tape  
library library-name. The library returned a unit check with  
error recovery action code ERA-code, which is an  
unexpected or inappropriate response to the library  
request.  
It is likely that the microcode in the library and the  
software are not at the correct level.  
CBR3712I Unexpected completion code, CC=cc, from Contact your service representative.  
library library-name.  
An error has been detected during processing in tape  
library library-name. An unexpected or inappropriate  
completion code cc has been received from the library.  
It is likely that the microcode in the library and the  
software are not at the correct level.  
CBR3721I Library library-name in manual mode.  
When the library has returned to auto mode, resubmit the  
audit requests.  
Library library-name is in manual mode and cannot  
complete or accept library audit requests. Any pending  
audit requests queued within the library when it was  
placed in manual mode are failed resulting in this  
message. Any subsequent audit requests issued to the  
library will also fail and result in this message.  
CBR3722I Library library-name equipment check.  
Contact your service representative.  
A library hardware failure has been detected by the  
library or one of the associated tape subsystems. The  
failing library component must be repaired before library  
requests can be completed successfully.  
CBR3724I Volume volser does not exist in library  
library-name.  
1. Use the ISMF mountable tape volume list function to  
examine the current state of the volume under  
DFSMS.  
Volume volser does not reside in library library-name. It is  
possible that the volume has been ejected from the  
library by another host system.  
2. Determine where the volume is and re-enter it into the  
library’s input station.  
CBR3725I Library library-name command reject for  
volume volser. Library error code=error-code.  
Contact your system administrator.  
A request for a library operation with volume volser has  
been rejected by library library-name. The error code  
indicates the reason for the rejection, but is included for  
diagnostic purposes only.  
It is likely that the microcode in the library and the  
software are not at the correct level.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 12. DFSMS Messages Based on Library Failure or Exception Conditions (continued)  
Resulting Console Message Action  
CBR3726I Function incompatible error code error-code Contact your system administrator.  
from library library-name for volume volser.  
A request for a library operation with volume volser  
cannot be processed by the library because the request  
is incompatible with the configuration or set of installed  
features of the library.  
If error-code=6, an attempt was made to eject a logical  
volume from a Virtual Tape Server.  
|
|
|
If error code = 7 or 8, a command for an Import or Export  
was issued to a VTS partition that is not capable of  
Export/Import.  
It is also possible that the microcode in the library and  
the software are not at the correct level.  
CBR3727I Control Unit and Library Manager  
incompatible in library library-name, error code  
error-code.  
1. If another tape subsystem is in the library, vary the  
drives associated with the failed subsystem offline  
and resubmit the request or job.  
2. Contact your service representative.  
During processing of a library request in library  
library-name, it was determined that the tape control unit  
and the library manager are at incompatible software  
levels. Error code error-code indicates the nature of the  
incompatibility.  
|
CBR3728I Volume volser in use in library library-name.  
{Already mounted|Mount pending|Eject in  
progress|Eject pending|Export in progress}.  
1. Determine why the volume is already in use.  
2. Resubmit the library request when the volume is no  
longer in use.  
A request for a library operation with volume volser  
cannot be processed by the library because the volume is  
already in use in the library. One of the following  
situations is present:  
v
v
v
v
v
The volume is already mounted on another drive.  
A mount request for the volume is pending.  
The volume is currently being ejected from the library.  
An eject request is pending.  
|
The volume is being exported.  
CBR3729I Library Manager for library library-name  
offline.  
1. Check that the library manager is powered on and  
operator menu is active.  
2. Check the Library manager field of the System  
Summary window. It should indicate Online.  
A library request was issued to Library library-name, but  
the library manager is offline. Possible causes are:  
3. If it does not indicate Online, use the Mode pull-down  
and place the library in the Online state. If the library  
will not go to the online state, call your service  
representative.  
v
v
The library manager is powered off.  
The library manager is still in the process of  
initialization.  
v
The library manager mode is set to offline.  
4. Vary the library online at the host console.  
5. Resubmit the request or job.  
270 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 12. DFSMS Messages Based on Library Failure or Exception Conditions (continued)  
Resulting Console Message  
Action  
|
CBR3750I Message from library library-name:  
message.  
Handle Operator Intervention as required.  
The operator at library library-name has sent message  
message to all connected hosts.  
|
|
|
Messages can be automatically sent from a VTS  
subsystem that is performing Export or Import Operations  
to post operation progress.  
|
|
|
|
|
If enabled at the library (see Figure 127 on page 200),  
text messages will also be surfaced for operator  
interventions that occur at the library. See Table 7 on  
page 216 for complete text associated with each  
numbered intervention message.  
CBR3751E Device device-number in library  
library-name is unavailable.  
1. If the device was made unavailable through the library  
manager console, make it available again through the  
library manager console.  
Device device-number in library library-name is no longer  
available. Either the state of the device has been  
changed through the library manager console, or the  
library detected a device failure.  
2. If the device was made unavailable due to a failure  
detected by the library, there will also be an  
intervention-required condition set for the device.  
Contact your service representative.  
The device is varied offline to prevent it from being  
allocated.  
CBR3752I Device device-number in library library-name Vary the device online from the host system console to  
is now available.  
make it available for allocation.  
Device device-number in library library-name, which was  
previously unavailable, is now available. The device was  
made available through the library manager console.  
CBR3753E All convenience output stations in library Remove one or more cartridges from the convenience  
library-name are full.  
output station. There is also an intervention-required  
condition set for this condition. It is automatically cleared  
when the convenience output station is no longer full.  
All storage cells in the convenience output station in  
library library-name are occupied by ejected cartridges.  
No more cartridges can be ejected to a convenience  
output station until some of the already-ejected cartridges  
have been removed. The library will continue to accept  
and queue eject requests.  
This message is retained on the console until the  
convenience output station is no longer full.  
CBR3754E High capacity output station in library  
library-name is full.  
Remove one or more cartridges from the high capacity  
output station. There is also an intervention-required  
condition set for this condition. It is automatically cleared  
when the high capacity output station is no longer full.  
All storage cells in the high capacity output station in  
library library-name are occupied by ejected cartridges.  
No more cartridges can be ejected to the high capacity  
output station until some of the already-ejected cartridges  
have been removed. The library will continue to accept  
and queue eject requests.  
This message is retained on the console until the high  
capacity output station is no longer full.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 12. DFSMS Messages Based on Library Failure or Exception Conditions (continued)  
Resulting Console Message  
Action  
CBR3755E {Input|Output} door open in library  
library-name.  
Go to the library and close the station door. There is also  
an intervention-required condition set for this condition. It  
is automatically cleared when the station door is closed.  
One of the following situations has been detected in  
library library-name:  
v
The station door has been open for more than 5  
minutes.  
v
An eject operation cannot be completed because the  
door is open.  
This message is retained on the console until the open  
door has been closed.  
CBR3757E Library library-name in {paused/manual  
mode} operational state.  
1. The library may no longer be in auto mode because  
of an operational requirement such as high-capacity  
I/O or service.  
Library library-name is not running in auto (normal) mode.  
The operational state (mode) is one of the following:  
2. If no operation or service was planned for the library  
that would have caused the change in mode, go to  
the library and determine why it is no longer in auto  
mode.  
Paused  
All mechanical motion in the library has stopped.  
Paused mode is entered automatically when a  
failure in the library prevents further automated  
operation, or entered by a command from the  
library manager operator console. The library  
manager continues to accept orders from the  
host, but queues them for execution after pause  
mode changes to auto or manual mode.  
3. If there are intervention-required conditions at the  
library, perform them and then return the library to  
auto mode.  
4. If a repair action is required, contact your service  
representative.  
Manual mode  
All mechanical motion within the library has  
stopped. Manual mode is entered by command  
from the library manager operator console. The  
library manager continues to accept orders from  
the host and instructs the operator to manually  
perform the functions that are normally done  
automatically, such as volume fetch and  
mounting.  
This message is retained on the console until the library  
has returned to the automated operational state.  
CBR3758E Library library-name operation degraded.  
1. Contact your service representative.  
2. There also may be one or more intervention-required  
conditions at the library to perform.  
One or more components of library library-name have  
failed or otherwise become unavailable for use. The  
library is continuing to function, but performance may be  
degraded. If this message is accompanied by the  
CBR3760E Library library-name vision system not  
operational message, audit and eject requests cannot be  
performed and volumes cannot be added to the library.  
This message is retained on the console until all library  
facilities have become fully operational.  
272 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 12. DFSMS Messages Based on Library Failure or Exception Conditions (continued)  
Resulting Console Message  
Action  
CBR3759E Library library-name safety enclosure  
interlock open.  
1. If an operator is performing an operation that involves  
entering the enclosure, no action is necessary.  
2. If someone could be entering the enclosure without  
authorization, contact your site security. Intervention  
at the library is required to return the library to auto  
mode.  
One of the enclosure doors to the library library-name is  
open. The library is in pause mode.  
This message is retained on the console until the safety  
interlocks are closed.  
CBR3760E Library library-name vision system not  
operational.  
1. Contact your service representative to repair the  
library vision system.  
2. Resubmit audit or eject requests when the vision  
system is operational.  
Key components of the vision system of library  
library-name have failed. The library cannot read the  
external labels on cartridges. Processing of audit or eject  
requests cannot be performed. Also, volumes cannot be  
added to the library because their external labels cannot  
be read. Other requests continue to be accepted and  
performed.  
This message is retained on the console until the vision  
system is operational again.  
CBR3761E Library library-name library manager  
offline.  
1. Determine why the library manager was placed in the  
offline state.  
2. If a repair action is required, contact your service  
representative.  
Library library-name started the process of going offline  
as the result of an operator at the library manager  
requesting the library move to the offline state. All  
requests that have already been accepted by the library  
manager are completed normally. No other requests are  
accepted.  
CBR3762E Library library-name intervention required.  
1. Go to the library and follow the instruction for the  
intervention-required condition specified on the library  
manager operator console. See “Intervention  
Required Conditions and Actions” on page 282 for the  
intervention-required conditions.  
One or more conditions in library library-name requires  
operator intervention to resolve. Library function requests  
continue to be accepted and executed, if possible. If this  
message is accompanied by CBR3757E Library  
library-name in paused mode operational state, the  
intervention condition caused automated operations to be  
stopped.  
2. After all conditions are resolved, return the library to  
auto mode, if required.  
This message is retained on the console until all  
intervention-required conditions have been cleared.  
CBR3763E Library library-name library manager check  
1 condition.  
1. Go to the library and see if the library manager is  
trying to recover. If it is, the library manager console  
is displaying an initialization message. If it is not, it is  
displaying an execution or fatal error message.  
The library manager detected a severe failure condition in  
library library-name. All requests that were accepted by  
the library manager are lost.  
2. If the library manager recovers, resubmit all  
outstanding library requests or jobs.  
3. If it does not recover, contact your service  
representative.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 12. DFSMS Messages Based on Library Failure or Exception Conditions (continued)  
Resulting Console Message  
Action  
CBR3764E Library library-name all storage cells full.  
Cartridges must be ejected before any can be added to  
the library. There is also an intervention-required  
condition set for this condition. It is automatically cleared  
when the library is no longer full.  
All storage cells in library library-name are occupied by,  
or reserved for, cartridges that are already in the library.  
No more cartridges can be added to the library.  
Cartridges in the input station of the library cannot be  
added to the library.  
This message is retained on the console until the library  
has available storage cells.  
CBR3765E No cleaner volumes available in library  
library-name.  
1. Choose Operator intervention from the Commands  
pull-down on the library manager console.  
2. Find the intervention-required condition that identifies  
which type of cleaner cartridge the library requires.  
The library manager in library library-name must perform  
a clean operation on one of the drives in the library, but  
no compatible cleaner volumes are available in the  
library.  
3. Place one or more compatible cleaner volumes, with  
bar-code labels that match the cleaner masks into the  
convenience input station.  
This message is retained on the console until the library  
has at least one appropriate cleaner volume.  
CBR3766E Dual write disabled in library library-name. Contact your service representative.  
The library manager in library library-name is not  
updating the secondary database for the library manager  
inventory. This can be the result of a hardware failure.  
Operations continue with the primary database.  
CBR3769I Misplaced volume volser found in library  
library-name.  
Resubmit the library request or job that failed because  
the volume was misplaced.  
Library library-name found volume volser, which had  
previously been reported as misplaced. The library  
manager updated the inventory to reflect the new location  
of the volume.  
CBR3770I Volume volser misplaced in library  
library-name.  
1. Go to the library and find the volume record in the  
database. (Choose Search database for volumes  
from the Database pull-down.)  
During the execution of a library operation with volume  
volser in library library-name, the volume cannot be found  
2. Place the library in pause mode.  
at the location recorded in the library manager inventory. 3. Enter the library and find the home cell the volume  
should have been in and search for it in the  
surrounding cells. If the database shows the volume  
in a device, check that device. If you find the volume,  
leave the library and place the volume in the  
convenience input station.  
4. Place the library in auto mode.  
5. Resubmit the library request or job after the input  
station is inventoried.  
CBR3771I Duplicate volume volser ejected from  
library library-name.  
1. Remove the ejected volume from the output station.  
2. Determine why the volume has a duplicate label.  
A volume was found in a library cell whose volser volser 3. Clear the item from the Intervention Required pop-up  
is a duplicate of one already in library library-name. The  
location recorded in the library manager inventory for this  
volser already contains a volume with the same volser;  
this volume was ejected from the library to a convenience  
output station.  
window. See Table 19 on page 288 for details.  
274 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 12. DFSMS Messages Based on Library Failure or Exception Conditions (continued)  
Resulting Console Message  
Action  
CBR3772I Duplicate volume volser left in input station  
in library library-name.  
1. Remove the volume from the input station.  
2. Determine why the volume has a duplicate label.  
An attempt was made to enter volume volser into library  
library-name. The volser is already recorded in the library  
manager inventory, and the location assigned in the  
inventory contains a volume with the volser. The entered  
volume remains in the input station.  
3. Clear the item from the Intervention Required pop-up  
window. See Table 19 on page 288 for details.  
CBR3773I Cartridge with unreadable or invalid  
external label left in input station in library  
library-name.  
1. Remove the cartridge from the input station and  
correct the problem with the external label, then  
re-enter the cartridge into the library.  
An attempt was made to enter a cartridge into library  
library-name. The external label on the cartridge is  
missing, unreadable, or contains an invalid character. The  
cartridge remains in the input station.  
2. Clear the item from the Intervention Required pop-up  
window. See Table 19 on page 288 for details.  
CBR3774I Unexpected volume volser ejected from  
library library-name.  
1. Remove the ejected cartridge from the output station.  
2. Determine if the label is missing or damaged and  
replace it if necessary.  
Volume volser is in an unexpected location in library  
library-name. Either no entry exists for the volser in the  
library manager inventory or the cartridge external label is  
missing or unreadable. The cartridge was ejected from  
the library to a convenience output station.  
3. Determine which library the volume belongs in using  
interactive storage management facility (ISMF) tape  
volume list application and place the volume in the  
convenience input station of that library.  
4. Clear the item from the Intervention Required pop-up  
window. See Table 19 on page 288 for details.  
CBR3776I Volume volser inaccessible in library  
library-name.  
1. Go to the library and if an intervention-required  
indication is displayed, determine whether it is for the  
inaccessible volume by viewing the intervention  
conditions. If it is the inaccessible volume, follow the  
instructions for the inaccessible condition.  
During the execution of a library operation, library  
library-name has indicated that volume volser is  
inaccessible. The volume cannot be retrieved using  
normal library automated function; manual intervention is 2. If the intervention-required indication is not displayed  
needed.  
or the inaccessible volume is not one of the  
conditions listed, find the volume record in the  
database. (Choose Search database for volumes  
from the Database pull-down.)  
3. Place the library in pause mode.  
4. Enter the library and find the home cell the volume  
should have been in and search for it in the  
surrounding cells. If the database shows the volume  
in a device, check that device. If the volume is stuck  
in the device, call a service representative to remove  
the volume. If the volume is found, and after leaving  
the library, place it in the convenience input station.  
5. Place the library in auto mode.  
6. Resubmit the library request or job after the input  
station is inventoried.  
CBR3777I Volume volser now accessible in library  
library-name.  
Resubmit the library request or job that failed because  
the volume was inaccessible.  
Volume volser, which was previously reported as  
inaccessible, is retrieved and is now accessible for  
automated operations in library library-name.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 12. DFSMS Messages Based on Library Failure or Exception Conditions (continued)  
Resulting Console Message  
Action  
CBR3778I Cleaner volume ejected from library  
library-name.  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience output  
station.  
2. Place a new cleaner cartridge of the same type, with  
a bar-code label that matches one of the cleaner  
masks, in the convenience input station.  
A cleaner volume exceeded its maximum usage count  
and was ejected from library library-name.  
CBR3779I Damaged volume volser ejected from  
library library-name.  
1. Remove the cartridge from the output station and  
repair or replace it.  
2. Clear the item from the Intervention Required pop-up  
window. See Table 20 on page 292 for details.  
Damaged volume volser has been ejected from library  
library-name. The cartridge has been physically damaged  
such that it cannot be loaded on a tape device; either the  
leader block is missing or the tape medium has become  
detached from the leader block.  
CBR3781I No {MEDIA1|MEDIA2|MEDIA3} scratch  
volumes available in library library-name.  
Either add volumes of the appropriate media type to the  
library or perform a scratch cycle though your tape  
management system to convert volumes to scratch in the  
library.  
A library operation requires a scratch volume of the  
indicated media type and there are none available in the  
library.  
CBR3782I Volume volser in library library-name  
external label missing or unreadable.  
1. Issue a library request to eject the volume from the  
library and apply a new cartridge external label, if it  
has not already been ejected.  
The external cartridge label for volume volser in library  
library-name is missing or cannot be correctly read by the 2. Place the cartridge in the convenience input station.  
library vision system. The library cannot perform volume  
verification. Mount, demount, and eject requests are  
window. See “Operator Intervention” on page 199 for  
completed without verification.  
details.  
3. Clear the item from the Intervention Required pop-up  
|
|
|
|
|
CBR3783I Library library-name is switching between  
the primary and secondary library manager. The  
switchover may be the result of a library manager  
detected unrecoverable error or an operator request  
initiated through the library manager.  
Refer to “Library Manager Failure in a DFSMS/MVS  
Environment” on page 261 for recovery procedures.  
CBR3784I will indicate when the switchover has  
completed.  
|
|
In an HA1 library, this indicates that the standby library  
manager is in the process of switching to active.  
|
|
|
CBR3784I The Library manager switchover in library  
library-name has completed.  
Any outstanding mount requests (CBR4196D) can be  
responded to and any new requests to the library can be  
submitted. Refer to “Start the Library Manager and Host  
Recovery Procedure (DFSMS/MVS Environment)” on  
page 263 to recover from inserts or ejects that may have  
been in progress at the time of the failure.  
|
In an HA1 library, this indicates that a failure on the active  
library manager has resulted in a switchover to the  
standby library manager. This message indicates that the  
switchover has been completed.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Information Provided at the Library Manager Console  
The library manager console provides information about many of the failure and  
exception conditions reported to the host. It also provides overall status about the  
operation of the library. This section shows several windows you can use for  
problem determination. See “Using the Library Manager” on page 88 for details  
about the windows. The windows are described in the order to follow when you are  
determining the source of the problem.  
276 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operator Note: The primary aids for problem determination should be the  
messages posted on the host console. Use the information at the  
library manager console only as additional information to aid in  
finding the fault.  
Using the System Summary Window  
The System Summary window (see Figure 43 on page 98) provides an overall view  
of the status of the library. If the System Summary window is not displayed on the  
console, use the Status pull-down and choose System summary. Table 13  
summarizes the key fields and what action to take.  
Table for System Summary Window Problem Determination  
Table 13. Problem Determination with the System Summary Window  
Field Name  
Action  
Cannot Display System Summary  
Contact your service representative.  
If the System Summary window cannot be displayed, a  
failure has occurred in the library manager.  
Operational Mode  
1. Determine why the mode is not Auto.  
Auto should be indicated showing normal operation.  
Pause shows that the library has stopped performing  
automated operations.  
2. Check the Enclosure doors, Overall system, and  
Intervention fields.  
3. Ensure that the front doors are closed.  
4. Place the library in Auto mode.  
Library Manager  
1. Determine why the library manager is Offline.  
2. Place the library manager in the Online state.  
Online should be indicated showing normal operation.  
Offline shows that the library manager is not  
communicating with any of the associated 3490E/3590  
subsystems in the library.  
Enclosure doors  
1. Ensure that the front doors are closed.  
2. Return the library to Auto mode.  
Closed should be indicated showing normal operation.  
Open indicates that one or more doors are open and that 3. If the library cannot be set to Auto mode, contact your  
automated operations are paused.  
service representative.  
Direct attached ports  
1. Ensure that the host is powered on and operating.  
2. Ensure that the any device driver program on the host  
is initialized.  
A hexadecimal number, 0–3 and 8–B, should be  
displayed for each installed and initialized port. If a dash  
is displayed, that port is not initialized.  
3. Contact your service representative.  
CU ports  
1. Ensure that all 3490E/3590 subsystems in the library  
are powered on. Perform the power-on procedure for  
the 3490E/3590 subsystems.  
A hexadecimal number, 0–F (depending on the port  
configuration), should be displayed for each 3490E/3590  
control unit port. If a dash is displayed, that port is not  
initialized. No communication between the library  
manager and the 3490E/3590 control unit occurs. If the  
port to a 3490E/3590 subsystem is not initialized,  
automated operations for the drives in that subsystem  
cannot be performed.  
2. Check the Error indicator on the 3490E/3590 control  
unit setup panel. If illuminated, that control unit has a  
serious fault; contact your service representative to  
repair the control unit.  
3. Contact your service representative.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 13. Problem Determination with the System Summary Window (continued)  
Field Name  
Action  
LAN Attach Ports  
The number in this field is not, by itself, an indication of  
failure. If there seems to be a problem communicating  
with a host, choose Status and then select LAN Status  
to view the status of all LAN attached hosts. Select the  
host in question from the list of hosts and note the last  
two columns of the screen. If the host is currently  
initialized, the column labeled Init contains a 1.  
A decimal count of the number of LAN attached hosts  
that are currently initialized with the 3494. If no hosts are  
initialized with the 3494, this shows as a dash. For  
example, if there are three hosts initialized with the 3494,  
this number is 3. If one host goes down, this number will  
change to 2 when the 3494 tries to communicate with  
that host.  
If a host was initialized and something happened to  
cause the host to appear to go down (to the 3494), the  
column labeled Init will be a 0, since the 3494 is not  
currently initialized with that host, and the column labeled  
Prev Init will be a 1, since that host was initialized at one  
time with the 3494. This field is only accurate since the  
last time the 3494 Library Manager was started.  
Convenience I/O  
Contact your service representative to teach the  
system or make the Convenience Input⁄Output Station  
available.  
Empty or Volumes present should be indicated.  
Unknown shows the system has not been taught or the  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station has been made  
unavailable.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Convenience I/O Mode  
Contact your service representative to teach the  
system or make the Convenience Input⁄Output Station  
available.  
Insert or Import should be indicated. Unknown implies  
that an error has occurred while attempting to determine  
the mode.  
|
High-Capacity Status  
Contact your service representative.  
Contact your service representative.  
Failed shows the high-capacity operation has failed to  
complete.  
Inventory Update  
Failed shows the inventory update operation has failed to  
complete.  
Overall System  
Contact your service representative if Failed is indicated.  
If Degraded persists, also contact your service  
representative.  
OK should be indicated. Degraded shows that a  
component in the library has failed but the library  
continued to operate. Failed shows that a component has  
failed and operations cannot continue.  
Accessor  
1. Attempt to return library to Auto Mode.  
2. If problem persists, contact your service  
representative.  
OK should be indicated. Failed shows that the accessor  
(or both accessors if Model HA1 is installed) has failed or  
has been made unavailable and operations cannot be  
completed. Degraded shows that one accessor in an  
HA1 system has failed or been made unavailable.  
Gripper  
Contact your service representative.  
OK should be indicated. Failed shows that the gripper (or  
both grippers if Model HA1 is installed) has failed or has  
been made unavailable and operations cannot be  
completed. Degraded shows that at least one gripper in  
an HA1 system has failed or been made unavailable.  
278 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 13. Problem Determination with the System Summary Window (continued)  
Field Name  
Vision  
Action  
Contact your service representative.  
OK should be indicated. Failed shows that the vision  
system (or both vision systems if Model HA1 is installed)  
has failed or has been made unavailable and operations  
cannot be completed. Degraded shows that one vision  
system in an HA1 system has failed or been made  
unavailable.  
Power  
1. If Unknown is indicated, power off the 3494 and then  
power it on.  
OK should be indicated. Power is off shows that power  
to the cartridge accessor (or both accessors in an HA1  
system) was removed and must be restored before  
automated operations can resume. Degraded shows that  
the power to one of the accessors in an HA1 system was  
removed. Unknown shows that the library manager  
cannot determine the state of the power.  
2. Ensure that all of the safety interlocks are closed.  
3. Place the library back in Auto mode.  
Port  
1. Attempt to return library to Auto Mode.  
2. If the port field does not change to OK, contact your  
OK should be indicated. Not initialized shows that  
communications with the accessor controller has not  
been established. Automated operations cannot be  
performed without communication between the library  
manager and the accessor controller. Degraded shows  
that communications with one of the accessors in an HA1  
system has not been established.  
service representative.  
Intervention  
1. Choose Operator intervention from the Commands  
pull-down. See “Intervention Required Conditions and  
Actions” on page 282 for resolving these conditions.  
None should be indicated. Required shows that the  
operator must resolve one or more conditions. Depending  
on the condition, some or all automated operations may  
be suspended.  
2. After all the conditions are resolved, return the library  
to the Auto mode, if required.  
Using the Component Availability Status Window  
The Component Availability Status window (see Figure 64 on page 116) provides  
the availability status of each component in the library. If a component is available,  
it can be used to perform library operations. If a component is unavailable, it cannot  
be used to perform library operations. To show the window, choose Component  
availability status from the Status pull-down.  
The three major groupings of components in this window are the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Stations, the accessor and its associated components, and the  
3490E/3590 subsystems. All components should indicate 1, which shows that the  
component is available. If any component indicates 0 (not available) or an asterisk  
(*) (degraded), contact your service representative so that it can be repaired and  
made available.  
Using the Search Database for Volumes Window  
|
|
Use the Search Database for Volumes window (see Figure 83 on page 140) to  
determine if the library contains volumes for which some action must be taken. To  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
show the window, choose Search database for volumes from the Database  
pull-down. You can also use this window to find volumes reported in a host console  
message.  
|
|
For each volume in the library, flags in the database indicate status or an exception  
condition. Figure 169 shows a summary of the volume status.  
Figure 169. Status Flags  
Table 14 on page 281 lists the problem scenarios for which the Search Database for  
Volumes window can be helpful in problem resolution.  
280 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table for Problem Determination using the Search Database for  
Volumes Window  
Table 14. Problem Determination with the Search Database for Volumes Window  
Problem Scenario  
Action  
Specific Inaccessible Volume  
1. Enter the volser in the field provided and then select  
the Search button.  
A host console message indicates that an operation failed  
because the volume is inaccessible.  
2. The database record for the volume is shown. The  
inaccessible flag should be set (the fourth position of  
the flags field set to 1).  
|
|
An Import/Export operation produced a Status File record  
with a Status Code 16 Stacked Volume Access Failure  
3. Place the library in Pause mode.  
4. Enter the library and find the volume using the cell  
positions indicated in the database record. Check  
both the cell and home positions. If the cell position  
indicated is a device, check that device.  
5. If the volume is stuck in a device, call your service  
representative.  
6. If you can remove the volume, place it in the  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station.  
7. Check the volumes on either side of the cell to ensure  
that they are fully seated in their cells. If a volume is  
not seated, the gripper cannot get the volume to the  
left of the unseated volume.  
8. Return the library to Auto mode.  
9. Resubmit the library request or job after the inventory  
update is complete.  
Specific Misplaced Volume  
1. Enter the volser in the field provided and select the  
Search button. The database record for the cartridge  
is shown.  
A host console message indicates that an operation failed  
because the volume is misplaced.  
The misplaced flag should be set (the first position of  
the flags field set to 1).  
|
|
An Import/Export operation produced a Status File record  
with a Status Code 16 Stacked Volume Access Failure  
2. If the Manual mode flag (fifth position of the flag field)  
is also set, check if the volume was taken out of the  
library.  
3. Place the library in Pause mode.  
4. Open the front doors on the library and find the  
location where the volume was last known to be  
(indicated in the database record for the cell and  
home location).  
5. Look for the volser in the surrounding cells. If the cell  
location indicated is a device, check that device.  
6. If the volume is stuck in a device, call your service  
representative.  
7. If you find the volume, place it in the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station.  
8. Return the library to Auto mode.  
9. Resubmit the library request or job after the inventory  
update is complete.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 14. Problem Determination with the Search Database for Volumes Window (continued)  
Problem Scenario  
Action  
Locating other Misplaced Volumes  
1. Leave the volser field blank, select the Yes button for  
the Misplaced volser flag, and then choose the  
Search button. The database records, if any, for the  
cartridges that are misplaced are shown.  
Search the database to check if the library contains any  
other misplaced volumes.  
2. Perform the “Specific Misplaced Volume” procedure.  
See Table 14 on page 281.  
Locating other Inaccessible Volumes  
1. Leave the volser field blank, choose the Yes button  
for the Inaccessible volser flag, and then choose the  
Search button. The database records, if any, for the  
inaccessible cartridges are shown.  
Search the database to check if the library contains any  
other inaccessible volumes.  
2. Perform the “Specific Inaccessible Volume”  
procedure. See Table 14 on page 281.  
Locating Misplaced Volumes in other Libraries  
1. At each library in the installation, enter the volser of  
the misplaced volume in the field provided and  
choose the Search button.  
If an operation on one library failed because the volume  
was misplaced, and you cannot find the volume in that  
library, check the inventories of the other libraries to see if 2. If a database record is found for the volser, eject it  
it was put in another library by mistake.  
from that library and place it in the Convenience  
Input⁄Output Station of the library with the original  
error.  
Using the Whole Queue Window  
When trying to determine why a particular library operation is not completing as  
expected, the Whole Queue window (see Figure 80 on page 137) can be used to  
determine what, if anything, needs to be done. This is particularly useful in the  
absence of any host console messages. Choose Whole queue from the Queues  
pull-down. Each library operation in the queue has status that is one of the  
following:  
Queued  
The operation has not yet started. Other operations are in the queue that  
have a higher priority or were placed in the queue first. If you do not want  
to wait for the operation to progress through the queue, select Promote a  
command in the queue from the Commands pull-down and promote the  
operation.  
In-Progress  
The operation is being performed. No operator action is needed.  
Blocked  
The operation is waiting for another operation to complete before it can be  
started. When the blocking operation completes, the status of the operation  
changes to in-progress. No operator action is needed.  
Intervention Required Conditions and Actions  
When the library manager determines that an error or exception condition has  
occurred within the library that requires operator assistance to correct, it performs  
the following actions:  
1. Adds the condition detected to the list of outstanding operator intervention  
required conditions maintained by the library manager.  
282 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. If not previously in the Intervention Required state, places the library in that  
state and notifies all attached hosts of the state change. The System Summary  
window is updated to indicate intervention is required.  
The notification that the library is in the Intervention Required state will generate  
the following console message for libraries managed under DFSMS/MVS  
System Managed Tape environment: CBR3762E, Library library-name  
intervention required  
The message will stay on the console as long as the library is in the intervention  
required state.  
|
|
|
3. If “Send Interventions to Host Consoles” is enabled on the Operator Intervention  
screen (under the Commands Menu), a broadcast message of the operator  
intervention text will be sent to all attached hosts.  
|
|
|
|
|
For Libraries managed under DFSMS/MVS system managed tape environment,  
this will result in the following message being displayed at the host console:  
CBR3750I Message from Library library-name: message. Intervention text will  
be truncated at 70 characters. See Table 7 on page 216 for complete text string  
based on intervention number.  
For other operating systems, consult the associated supporting software  
publications to determine operator notification methods.  
To determine the cause of an intervention required condition and the steps required  
for its resolution, the operator selects the Operator Intervention item from the  
Commands pull-down menu on the library manager console. Each condition is  
listed separately and also indicates the date and time that the condition occurred.  
The operator intervention conditions are described in the following set of tables.  
Similar conditions are grouped together in each table to make it easier to find a  
specific condition. The following table provides a summary of the grouped  
conditions:  
Quick Reference Table to Intervention Required Conditions  
Table 15. Quick Reference to Intervention Required Conditions  
Condition Type  
Table Location  
Conditions relating to tape devices in the library  
Conditions relating to other library components  
Conditions relating to input/output stations or facilities  
Conditions relating to external cartridge labels  
Conditions relating to data cartridges  
Table 16 on page 284  
Table 17 on page 285  
Table 18 on page 286  
Table 19 on page 288  
Table 20 on page 292  
Table 21 on page 293  
Table 22 on page 295  
Conditions relating to cleaner cartridges  
Conditions relating to a Virtual Tape Server in the library  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table for Intervention Conditions of Library Tape Drives  
Table 16. Intervention Required Conditions relating to tape drives in the library  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the enclosure.  
Load / unload failure on device xxx. Empty the feed  
slot.  
3. If the cartridge is accessible, remove it.  
4. If the cartridge is in a CST/ECCST type device  
(model C1A or C2A), make the device not ready by  
pressing the Ready button, press the Unload button  
to unload the cartridge, remove the cartridge, then  
make the device ready by pressing the Ready  
button.  
Probable Cause  
Tape device xxx has failed to load or unload a tape  
cartridge. The automatic recovery process was not able  
to unload the cartridge from the device and put it away.  
The device and/or cartridge may be defective.  
5. If the cartridge is in a CST/ECCST type device  
(model F1A), press the Load/Unload button to  
unload the cartridge, then remove the cartridge.  
6. If the cartridge is in a HPCT/EHPCT type device,  
select Unload from the Options Menu and press  
Enter then remove the cartridge.  
7. If the cartridge is damaged, repair it (for example,  
re-attach the leader block). If it cannot be repaired, it  
should be re-inserted and an eject should be issued  
from the host.  
8. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
9. Close the enclosure.  
10. Place the library system in auto mode.  
11. A service call may be needed if the error persists.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the enclosure.  
Device xxx is not ready.  
Probable Cause  
3. If the cartridge is in a CST/ECCST type device (model  
C1A or C2A), make the device not ready by pressing  
the Ready button, press the Unload button to unload  
the cartridge, remove the cartridge, then make the  
device ready by pressing the Ready button.  
During a prior operator intervention or service action at a  
3490 type tape device, device xxx was left in the not  
ready state.  
If the drive does not become ready, call your service  
representative.  
4. If the cartridge is in a CST/ECCST type device (model  
F1A), Press the Load/Unload button to unload the  
cartridge, then remove the cartridge.  
5. If the cartridge is in a HPCT/EHPCT type device,  
select the Unload from the Options Menu and press  
Enter, then remove the cartridge  
If a check code appears on the message display,  
record the code and report it to your service  
representative.  
6. Place the cartridge in the error recovery cell. The  
error recovery cell is cell 1A1 (cell 1A3 if dual  
grippers are installed in the library).  
7. Close the enclosure.  
8. Place the library system in auto mode.  
284 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 16. Intervention Required Conditions relating to tape drives in the library (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
Although the intervention message can be cleared from  
the list of actions, the device failure will remain. Further  
attempts to use the device will re-display the intervention  
required message.  
Device xxx has failed. A service call is needed.  
Probable Cause  
A load or unload failure was detected on tape device xxx  
and the automatic recovery process was not able to  
successfully complete the operation. The device is no  
longer available for use and requires service.  
Table for Intervention Conditions of Other Library Components  
Table 17. Intervention Required Conditions relating to other library components  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
A cartridge could not be released from gripper x.  
Probable Cause  
3. Remove the cartridge from the indicated gripper.  
4. Place the cartridge in the error recovery cell. The  
error recovery cell is cell 1A1. (Cell 1A3 if dual  
grippers are installed in the library.)  
The cartridge in gripper x remained in the gripper after an  
attempt was made to put it in a cell or device. This may  
be because of a damaged cartridge, alignment of the  
library or a failing gripper. The gripper remains available  
for use after the cartridge is removed.  
5. Close the enclosure door.  
6. Place the library system in auto mode.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
Gripper failure on gripper x.  
Probable Cause  
3. Remove the cartridge from the indicated gripper.  
4. Place the cartridge in the error recovery cell. The  
error recovery cell is cell 1A1. (Cell 1A3 if dual  
grippers are installed in the library.)  
Gripper x has repeatedly failed to release a cartridge.  
Service is required.  
5. Close the enclosure door.  
6. Place the library system in auto mode.  
7. Call your service representative.  
Message  
1. Call your service representative.  
2. The library system must be put in service mode and  
re-taught to show the current gripper configuration.  
The gripper configuration has changed. The library  
must be re-taught.  
3. This condition cannot be cleared by selecting it from  
the list of actions. Instead, this condition is cleared  
automatically by the library system when it is  
re-taught.  
Probable Cause  
The second gripper has either been installed or removed  
from the library, but the library has not been re-taught.  
Damage to the library can result if the library is not  
re-taught.  
Message  
1. Determine what caused the stop. The usual cause is  
an open enclosure door, check the System Summary  
window item Enclosure Doors to see if one or more  
doors are open.  
An emergency stop has occurred.  
Probable Cause  
2. Close the enclosure door(s).  
If an enclosure door is opened while the library is in Auto  
mode, an emergency stop is performed.  
3. Place the library system in Auto mode.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 17. Intervention Required Conditions relating to other library components (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Cartridges must be ejected from the library before  
more cartridges can be inserted into the library  
system.  
The library is full.  
Probable Cause  
2. This condition cannot be cleared by selecting it from  
the list of actions. Instead, this condition is cleared  
automatically by the library system when space  
becomes available in the library.  
An attempt was made to insert cartridges into the library  
and there are no available cells in the library other than  
the convenience I/O station or the high-capacity facility.  
Message  
Call your service representative.  
The system has failed. A service call is required.  
Probable Cause  
A major failure in of the systems in the library has  
occurred.  
Table for Intervention Conditions of Input/Output Stations  
Table 18. Intervention Required Conditions relating to Input/Output Stations or facilities  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Remove all cartridges from the convenience I/O  
station.  
The convenience I/O station is full.  
Probable Cause  
2. This condition cannot be cleared by selecting it from  
the list of actions. Instead, this condition is cleared  
automatically by the library system when space  
becomes available in the convenience I/O station.  
All of the cells of the convenience I/O station are full and  
at least one additional cartridge is queued to be ejected  
to the convenience I/O station.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
3. Remove all cartridges from the high-capacity facility.  
4. Close the enclosure door.  
The high-capacity facility is full.  
Probable Cause  
5. Place the library system in auto mode.  
All of the cells of the high-capacity facility are full and at  
least one additional cartridge is queued to be ejected to  
the high-capacity facility.  
6. This condition cannot be cleared by selecting it from  
the list of actions. Instead, this condition is cleared  
automatically when empty cells are found during  
inventory update.  
Message  
1. Close the convenience I/O station door.  
2. This condition cannot be cleared by selecting it from  
the list of actions. Instead, this condition is cleared  
automatically by the library system when the  
convenience I/O station door is closed.  
The convenience I/O station door is open.  
Probable Cause  
The convenience I/O station door has been left in the  
open position for greater than 5 minutes or there is an  
eject operation queued for the convenience I/O station  
and the door is open.  
286 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 18. Intervention Required Conditions relating to Input/Output Stations or facilities (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Remove any cartridges from the convenience I/O  
station and inspect their label.  
The convenience I/O station should be empty but is  
not, visually check the station.  
2. Remove any debris that may be obscuring the  
cartridge present sensor.  
Probable Cause  
3. Verify that the System Summary panel displays the  
convenience I/O station status as Empty.  
When the convenience I/O station insert operation  
completed, the cartridge present sensor indicated that  
cartridges were still present when none should have  
been. This can be caused by a cartridge without a label  
in the station or by debris obscuring the cartridge present  
sensor.  
Message  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience I/O  
station.  
Volser (xxxxxx) cannot be removed from the  
convenience I/O station.  
2. Inspect the cartridge and cell for damage.  
3. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
Probable Cause  
The cartridge accessor tried several times to remove  
cartridge xxxxxx from the convenience I/O station but  
failed. This could be due to a problem with the cartridge,  
the I/O station, the gripper or the alignment of the library.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
Volser (xxxxxx) cannot be removed from the  
high-capacity facility cell: yyyy.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the high-capacity facility  
cell.  
Probable Cause  
4. Inspect the cartridge and cell for damage.  
5. Close the enclosure door.  
The cartridge accessor tried several times to remove  
cartridge xxxxxx from the high capacity facility but failed.  
This could be due to a problem with the cartridge, the  
cell, the gripper or the alignment of the library. The  
cartridge is in high capacity facility cell yyyy.  
6. Place the library system in auto mode.  
7. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
Message  
1. Open the Convenience I/O station.  
2. Remove the cartridges from the top two cells of the  
I/O station.  
The top two I/O station cells are inaccessible. Move  
cartridges to cell 3 or below.  
3. Replace the cartridges in the I/O station using cell 3  
or below.  
Probable Cause  
4. Close the Convenience I/O station.  
In a library that is configured with dual grippers, gripper 1  
had failed and cartridges were placed in the top two cells  
of the I/O station. The top two cells of the convenience  
I/O station are no longer usable until gripper 1 is  
repaired.  
5. This condition cannot be cleared by selecting it from  
the list of actions. Instead, this condition is cleared  
automatically by the library system when the  
cartridges are removed from the top two Convenience  
I/O station cells and the I/O station is closed.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table for Intervention Conditions of External Cartridge Labels  
Table 19. Intervention Required Conditions relating to external cartridge labels  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience I/O  
station.  
A duplicate volser (xxxxxx) was ejected to the  
convenience I/O station.  
2. Determine why the cartridge is a duplicate and take  
corrective action.  
Probable Cause  
During an inventory or inventory update operation, a  
cartridge was found whose external volume serial  
number, xxxxxx, is the same as that of another cartridge  
in the library. The volume was placed in the convenience  
I/O station. The library does not support more than one  
cartridge with the same volume serial number.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
A duplicate volser (xxxxxx) was ejected to  
high-capacity facility cell: yyyy.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the high-capacity facility.  
4. Determine why the cartridge is a duplicate and take  
corrective action.  
Probable Cause  
5. Close the enclosure door.  
During an inventory or inventory update operation, a  
cartridge was found whose external volume serial  
number, xxxxxx, is the same as that of another cartridge  
in the library. The convenience I/O station is either not  
installed, is full or is unavailable. The volume was placed  
in high-capacity facility cell, yyyy. The library does not  
support more than one cartridge with the same volume  
serial number.  
6. Place the library system in auto mode.  
Message  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience I/O  
station.  
A duplicate volser (xxxxxx) was left in the  
convenience I/O station.  
2. Determine why the cartridge is a duplicate and take  
corrective action.  
Probable Cause  
During an insert operation, a cartridge was found whose  
external volume serial number, xxxxxx, is the same as  
that of another cartridge in the library. The library does  
not support more than one cartridge with the same  
volume serial number.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
A duplicate volser (xxxxxx) was left in high-capacity  
facility cell: yyyy.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the high-capacity facility.  
4. Determine why the cartridge is a duplicate and take  
corrective action.  
Probable Cause  
5. Close the enclosure door.  
During an insert operation, a cartridge was found in  
high-capacity facility cell, yyyy, whose external volume  
serial number, xxxxxx, is the same as that of another  
cartridge in the library. The library does not support more  
than one cartridge with the same volume serial number.  
6. Place the library system in auto mode.  
288 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 19. Intervention Required Conditions relating to external cartridge labels (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience I/O  
station.  
An unreadable volser was left in the convenience I/O  
station.  
2. Replace the unreadable label with a readable label.  
3. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
Probable Cause  
During an insert operation, the vision system was not  
able to read the external volume serial number label on  
the cartridge. The label may not have been installed  
incorrectly, is damaged or is not one of the supported  
label types.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
An unreadable volser was left in high-capacity facility  
cell: yyyy.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the high-capacity facility.  
4. Close the enclosure door.  
Probable Cause  
5. Place the library system in auto mode.  
6. Replace the unreadable label with a readable label.  
7. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
During an insert operation for the high-capacity facility,  
the vision system was not able to read the external  
volume serial number label on the cartridge. The problem  
cartridge is left in cell, yyyy. The label may not have been  
installed incorrectly, is damaged or is not one of the  
supported label types.  
Message  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience I/O  
station.  
An invalid volser (xxxxxx) was left in the convenience  
I/O station.  
2. Determine why the cartridge is invalid and take  
corrective action. Invalid volsers contain leading or  
imbedded blanks or invalid characters. Valid  
characters are A through Z and 0 through 9.  
Probable Cause  
During an insert operation, the vision system read the  
external volume serial number label on the cartridge and  
it contained one or more invalid characters. The label  
must not contain leading or imbedded blanks or  
characters other than upper-case A through Z and the  
numbers 0 through 9.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the high-capacity facility.  
4. Close the enclosure door.  
An invalid volser (xxxxxx) was left in high-capacity  
facility cell: yyyy.  
Probable Cause  
5. Place the library system in auto mode.  
During an insert operation with the high-capacity facility,  
the vision system read the external volume serial number  
label on the cartridge and it contained one or more invalid  
characters. The label must not contain leading or  
imbedded blanks or characters other than upper-case A  
through Z and the numbers 0 through 9. The problem  
cartridge is left in cell, yyyy.  
6. Determine why the cartridge is invalid and take  
corrective action. Invalid volsers contain leading or  
imbedded blanks or invalid characters. Valid  
characters are A through Z and 0 through 9.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 19. Intervention Required Conditions relating to external cartridge labels (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience I/O  
station.  
An unexpected volser (xxxxxx) was found and  
ejected to the convenience I/O station.  
2. Determine where the cartridge belongs and take  
corrective action.  
Probable Cause  
During a library operation other than inventory or  
inventory update, a cartridge was found whose external  
volume serial number xxxxxx indicates a volser that is not  
in the library manager’s database. It is likely that the  
cartridge was added to the library when one of the doors  
was open and an inventory operation was not performed  
or inventory update has been disabled.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the high-capacity facility.  
4. Close the enclosure door.  
An unexpected volser (xxxxxx) was found and  
ejected to high-capacity facility cell: yyyy.  
Probable Cause  
5. Place the library system in auto mode.  
During a library operation other than inventory or  
inventory update, a cartridge was found whose external  
volume serial number xxxxxx indicates a volser that is not  
in the library manager’s database and the convenience  
I/O station is not installed, is full or is not available. It is  
likely that the cartridge was added to the library when  
one of the doors was open and an inventory operation  
was not performed or inventory update has been  
disabled. The problem cartridge was placed in rack cell,  
yyyy.  
6. Determine where the cartridge belongs and take  
corrective action.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the cell.  
A cartridge or cartridge label located at cell yyyy is  
upside-down.  
4. If the cartridge label is installed upside-down, remove  
the label and replace it (or a new label) the correct  
way up on the cartridge.  
Probable Cause  
During an inventory or inventory update operation, the  
vision system could not read the external volume serial  
number label because the cartridge or the label was  
upside-down in the cell. Most likely the cartridge was  
placed in the library upside-down. The cartridge is in cell  
yyyy.  
5. Replace the cartridge in the same cell. Ensure that it  
is the correct way up. (It will not insert fully into the  
cell if it is upside-down).  
6. Close the enclosure door.  
7. Place the library system in auto mode.  
Message  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience I/O  
station.  
A volser (xxxxxx) with an unknown media type has  
been ejected to the convenience I/O station.  
2. If no seventh character is present; either add one, or  
modify the volser ranges to include this volser. See  
“Volser Range for Media Types” on page 161 on how  
to modify the volser ranges.  
Probable Cause  
During an inventory or inventory update operation, the  
media type of a cartridge could not be determined by the  
vision system, the volser did not fit into an established  
media type range and a default media-type was not  
defined for the library.  
3. Inspect the cartridge’s seventh character. Install a  
readable seventh character representing the media  
type. See “Cartridge System Tape Labels” on page 20  
for the procedure.  
4. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
290 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 19. Intervention Required Conditions relating to external cartridge labels (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the high-capacity facility.  
4. Close the enclosure door.  
A volser (xxxxxx) with an unknown media type has  
been ejected to high-capacity facility cell: yyyy.  
Probable Cause  
5. Place the library system in auto mode.  
During an inventory or inventory update operation, the  
media type of a cartridge could not be determined by the  
vision system, the volser did not fit into an established  
media type range and a default media-type was not  
defined for the library. In addition, the convenience I/O  
station is either not installed, is full or is unavailable. The  
cartridge is in H.C.F. cell yyyy.  
6. If no seventh character is present; either add one, or  
modify the volser ranges to include this volser. See  
“Volser Range for Media Types” on page 161 on how  
to modify the volser ranges.  
7. Inspect the cartridge’s seventh character. Install a  
readable seventh character representing the media  
type. See “Cartridge System Tape Labels” on page 20  
for the procedure.  
8. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
Message  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience I/O  
station.  
An invalid media volser (xxxxxx) has been ejected to  
the convenience I/O station.  
2. Inspect the cartridge’s seventh character. Install the  
correct seventh character representing the media  
type. See “Cartridge System Tape Labels” on page 20  
for the procedure.  
Probable Cause  
During an inventory or inventory update operation, the  
media type label of a cartridge has a media type  
character that is not supported by the library. Supported  
media type characters are 1, E, J and K.  
3. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the high-capacity facility.  
4. Close the enclosure door.  
An invalid media volser (xxxxxx) has been ejected to  
the high-capacity facility.  
Probable Cause  
5. Place the library system in auto mode.  
During an inventory or inventory update operation, the  
media type label of a cartridge has a media type  
character that is not supported by the library. Supported  
media type characters are 1, E, J and K. In addition, the  
convenience I/O station is either not installed, is full or is  
unavailable.  
6. Inspect the cartridge’s seventh character. Install the  
correct seventh character representing the media  
type. See “Cartridge System Tape Labels” on page 20  
for the procedure.  
7. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 19. Intervention Required Conditions relating to external cartridge labels (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
3. If the cartridge is accessible, remove it.  
A cartridge containing invalid media has been left in  
device xxx feed slot.  
4. If the cartridge is in a 3490 device, make the device  
not ready by pressing the Ready switch, press the  
Unload switch to unload the cartridge, remove the  
cartridge, then make the device ready by pressing  
the Ready switch.  
Probable Cause  
During a mount operation, tape device xxx determined  
that the cartridge is not of a compatible media type but  
was not able to unload the cartridge. It is likely that the  
cartridge has a missing or damaged media type label or  
the media type label is incorrect for the cartridge’s media  
type.  
5. If the cartridge is in a 3590 device, select Unload  
from the Options Menu and press Enter. Remove  
the cartridge.  
6. If unable to remove cartridge, call your service  
representative.  
7. Close the enclosure door.  
8. Place the library system in auto mode.  
9. Inspect the cartridge’s seventh character. Install the  
correct seventh character representing the media  
type. See “Cartridge System Tape Labels” on  
page 20 for the procedure.  
10. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
Table for Intervention Conditions of Data Cartridges  
Table 20. Intervention Required Conditions relating to data cartridges  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience I/O  
station.  
Damaged volser (xxxxxx) ejected to the convenience  
I/O station.  
2. Inspect the cartridge for damage. If the leader block is  
detached from the tape, replace the leader block. See  
the tape drive Operator’s Guide for the procedure.  
Probable Cause  
3. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
During a cartridge load operation on a tape device, the  
device determined that the cartridge does not have a  
leader block or that the tape media has a break in it. The  
library accessor was able to remove the cartridge from  
the device.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the high-capacity facility.  
4. Close the enclosure door.  
Damaged volser (xxxxxx) ejected to high-capacity  
facility cell: yyyy.  
Probable Cause  
5. Place the library system in auto mode.  
During a cartridge load operation on a tape device, the  
device determined that the cartridge does not have a  
leader block or that the tape media has a break in it. The  
library accessor was able to remove the cartridge from  
the device. In addition, the convenience I/O station is  
either not installed, is full or is unavailable. The cartridge  
is in H.C.F. cell yyyy.  
6. Inspect the cartridge for damage. If the leader block is  
detached from the tape, replace the leader block. See  
the tape drive Operator’s Guide for the procedure.  
7. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
292 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 20. Intervention Required Conditions relating to data cartridges (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience I/O  
station.  
Volser (xxxxxx) could not be put away. It was ejected  
to the convenience I/O station.  
2. Place the library system in pause mode.  
3. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
Probable Cause  
4. Inspect the cartridge’s home cell for damage or  
blockage.  
During a demount operation, the accessor was not able  
to place the cartridge into its home cell and there are no  
other available storage cells in the library. The cartridge  
may be damaged or something is blocking its home cell.  
If something is blocking its home cell it is likely to be a  
cartridge without an external volume serial number label.  
5. Close the enclosure door.  
6. Place the library system in auto mode.  
7. Inspect the cartridge for damage.  
8. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
Volser (xxxxxx) could not be put away. It was ejected  
to high-capacity facility cell: yyyy.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the high-capacity facility.  
4. Inspect the cartridge’s home cell for damage or  
blockage.  
Probable Cause  
5. Close the enclosure door.  
During a demount operation, the accessor was not able  
to place the cartridge into its home cell and there are no  
other available storage cells in the library. In addition, the  
convenience I/O station is either not installed, is full or is  
unavailable. The cartridge may be damaged or something  
is blocking its home cell. If something is blocking its  
home cell it is likely to be a cartridge without an external  
volume serial number label. The cartridge is in H.C.F. cell  
yyyy.  
6. Place the library system in auto mode.  
7. Inspect the cartridge for damage.  
8. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the indicated cell.  
4. Inspect the cell for damage.  
Volser (xxxxxx) cannot be removed from cell: yyyy.  
Probable Cause  
5. Close the enclosure door.  
The accessor was not able to remove the cartridge from  
its home cell. The cartridge or its home cell may be  
damaged or something is blocking its home cell. The  
library could also be out of alignment or the gripper is  
failing. The cartridge is in cell yyyy.  
6. Place the library system in auto mode.  
7. Inspect the cartridge for damage.  
8. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
Table for Intervention Conditions of Cleaner Cartridges  
Table 21. Intervention Required Conditions relating to cleaner cartridges  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Place 3490 type cleaning cartridges in the  
convenience I/O station.  
The library is out of CST/ECCST cleaner cartridges.  
Probable Cause  
2. This condition cannot be cleared by selecting it from  
the list of actions. Instead, this condition is cleared  
automatically by the library system when a cleaning  
cartridges, of the appropriate type, are inserted by the  
operator.  
A clean operation for a 3490 type tape device needs to  
be performed, but there are no available compatible  
cleaner cartridges in the library. Either no cleaner  
cartridges have been added to the library, or they have all  
been used and have been ejected.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 21. Intervention Required Conditions relating to cleaner cartridges (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Place 3590 type cleaning cartridges in the  
convenience I/O station.  
The library is out of HPCT cleaner cartridges.  
Probable Cause  
2. This condition cannot be cleared by selecting it from  
the list of actions. Instead, this condition is cleared  
automatically by the library system when a cleaning  
cartridges, of the appropriate type, are inserted by the  
operator.  
A clean operation for a 3590 type tape device needs to  
be performed, but there are no available compatible  
cleaner cartridges in the library. Either no cleaner  
cartridges have been added to the library, or they have all  
been used and have been ejected.  
Message  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience output  
station.  
A mislabeled cleaner cartridge has been ejected to  
the convenience I/O station.  
2. Check if the volser on the cartridge is included in the  
range(s) of volsers defined for cleaner cartridges  
using the Cleaner Masks item from the Commands  
pull-down on the library manager console.  
Probable Cause  
An attempt was made to a clean a tape device but the  
cartridge was determined to be a data cartridge, not a  
cleaner cartridge. Either the cartridge was mistakenly  
labeled with an external volser that falls within the range  
of volsers designated for cleaner volumes in the library or  
the ranges set in the library conflict with ranges already in  
use for data cartridges.  
3. Correct either the cleaner masks or relabel the  
cartridge.  
Message  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
3. Remove the cartridge from the high-capacity facility.  
4. Close the enclosure door.  
A mislabeled cleaner cartridge has been ejected to  
the high-capacity facility cell: yyyy.  
Probable Cause  
5. Place the library system in auto mode.  
An attempt was made to a clean a tape device but the  
cartridge was determined to be a data cartridge, not a  
cleaner cartridge. The convenience I/O station was either  
not installed, is full or is unavailable. Either the cartridge  
was mistakenly labeled with an external volser that falls  
within the range of volsers designated for cleaner  
volumes in the library or the ranges set in the library  
conflict with ranges already in use for data cartridges.  
The cartridge is in H.F.C. cell yyyy.  
6. Check if the volser on the cartridge is included in the  
range(s) of volsers defined for cleaner cartridges  
using the Cleaner Masks item from the Commands  
pull-down on the library manager console.  
7. Correct either the cleaner masks or relabel the  
cartridge.  
294 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 21. Intervention Required Conditions relating to cleaner cartridges (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Place the library system in pause mode.  
2. Open the appropriate enclosure door.  
3. If the cartridge is accessible, remove it.  
A mislabeled cleaner cartridge has been left in device  
xxx feed slot. Remove the cartridge.  
4. If the cartridge is in a 3490 device, make the device  
not ready by pressing the Ready switch, press the  
Unload switch to unload the cartridge, remove the  
cartridge, then make the device ready by pressing  
the Ready switch.  
Probable Cause  
During a clean operation, tape device xxx determined that  
the cleaner cartridge is not compatible with the device but  
was not able to unload the cartridge. It is likely that the  
cartridge has a missing or damaged media type label or  
the media type label is incorrect for the cartridge media  
type.  
5. If the cartridge is in a 3590 device, select Unload  
from the Options Menu and press Enter. Remove  
the cartridge.  
6. If unable to remove cartridge, call your service  
representative.  
7. Close the enclosure door.  
8. Place the library system in auto mode.  
9. Inspect the cartridge’s seventh character. Install the  
correct seventh character representing the media  
type. See the tape drive Operator’s Guide for the  
procedure.  
10. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
Table for Intervention Conditions of a Library Virtual Tape Server  
Table 22. Intervention Required Conditions relating to a Virtual Tape Server in the Library  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Notify your system administrator.  
Logical volume xxxxxx was not fully recovered from  
damaged stacked volume yyyyyy. (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
|
|
|
|
|
|
During the attempted movement of logical volume xxxxxx  
from a damaged stacked volume which is in Read-only  
mode, a permanent read error was encountered. The  
error was not recoverable. The data associated with the  
logical volume was not recovered, and was not moved to  
another stacked volume.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 22. Intervention Required Conditions relating to a Virtual Tape Server in the Library (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience I/O  
station.  
A damaged stacked volume xxxxxx has been ejected  
to the convenience I/O station. (VTS z)  
2. Notify your system administrator.  
|
|
3. If the cartridge is still within a warranty period, and  
damaged logical volumes are no longer needed,  
return it to your supplier.  
Probable Cause  
|
|
During a prior operation with the stacked volume, the  
Virtual Tape Server controller encountered an  
|
|
4. If damaged logical volumes must be recovered, call  
your service representative.  
|
|
unrecoverable error indicating that the media of the  
volume may be damaged. During that operation,  
customer data was not fully recovered, resulting in job  
termination. The stacked volume was placed in read-only  
mode to limit use to recall of other logical volumes only.  
|
|
|
|
On an hourly basis, the Virtual Tape Server controller  
determines whether there are any stacked volumes in  
read-only mode and starts a process that moves the valid  
logical volumes to other stacked volumes and then ejects  
the damaged stacked volume from the library. See  
messages Logical volume xxxxxx was not fully recovered  
from damaged stacked volume yyyyyy. (VTS z) above for  
logical volumes not recovered and not moved to other  
stacked volumes.  
|
|
|
|
|
Message  
1. Insert one or more 3590 cartridges that have volume  
serial numbers within the range of stacked volumes  
defined for Virtual Tape Server z.  
A Virtual Tape Server is out of stacked volumes. (VTS  
z)  
|
|
|
|
|
Note: When the VTS is out of stacked volumes,  
logical mount requests will be queued, but not  
performed. Queued logical mounts are performed  
once a stacked volume has been inserted.  
Probable Cause  
There are two ways this condition is determined:  
v
Once an hour the Virtual Tape Server checks if there  
are empty stacked volumes. During that check Virtual  
Tape Server z did not have any empty stacked  
volumes.  
v
An operation that requires an empty stacked volume  
needs to be performed and Virtual Tape Server z does  
not have an empty stacked volume. The operations  
that need empty stacked volumes are copying data  
from the Tape Volume Cache or reclamation of  
unusable space on stacked volumes.  
296 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 22. Intervention Required Conditions relating to a Virtual Tape Server in the Library (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Remove the cartridge from the convenience I/O  
station.  
A stacked volume has a label mismatch and has been  
ejected to the convenience I/O station. Internal:  
xxxxxx, External: yyyyyy  
2. If human intervention in the library is the cause,  
perform an inventory update operation.  
3. If human intervention is not the cause, check the  
external label of the cartridge for damage and relabel  
if necessary.  
Probable Cause  
During validation that the correct stacked volume was  
mounted, the volume serial number read from the media  
did not match what was expected. The volume is ejected  
to the convenience I/O station.  
4. Place the cartridge in the convenience I/O station.  
This is likely caused by human intervention in the library  
that involved moving physical cartridges between storage  
cells and, when the library was returned to auto mode,  
inventory update was disabled. Without performing  
inventory update, the library has no way of updating its  
database to know where cartridges have been moved.  
Message  
1. Notify your system administrator.  
2. If this intervention occurs multiple times, call your  
service representative.  
Orphaned logical volume xxxxxx found.  
Probable Cause  
During a check of the Virtual Tape Server database, a  
reference to logical volume xxxxxx was found, but there  
is no record of its physical location. This could be the  
result of a hardware or internal software problem. Any  
data associated with the logical volume is lost.  
Message  
1. Record the error code and contact your service  
representative.  
The Tape Volume Cache is degraded (Error Code  
xxxx). (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
A disk drive in one of the Tape Volume Cache storage  
capacity features of Virtual Tape Server z has failed.  
Operations with the Virtual Tape Server continue, but  
performance degradation may be experienced. Service is  
required.  
Message  
1. Contact your service representative.  
A permanent, non-recoverable Tape Volume Cache  
error has occurred. (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
During the initialization of the Virtual Tape Server z,  
unrecoverable errors were detected with the Tape Volume  
Cache. The Virtual Tape Server is unusable. Service is  
required.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 22. Intervention Required Conditions relating to a Virtual Tape Server in the Library (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Record the error code and contact your service  
representative.  
Virtual Tape System z has a CHECK1 (xxxx) failure.  
Probable Cause  
2. The Virtual Tape Server will restart itself.  
3. Restart all active host jobs.  
An error was detected in Virtual Tape Server z that  
cannot be recovered. The error could be a result of  
hardware or internal software problems. The Virtual Tape  
Server Controller will automatically restart itself. Any host  
jobs using virtual volumes and devices are abended and  
any data that has not been written to the Tape Volume  
Cache is lost.  
Message  
1. Insert more 3590 cartridges into the library. Make sure  
their volume serial numbers are within the range of  
stacked volumes defined for Virtual Tape Server  
reporting the condition.  
Free storage threshold has been crossed. (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
2. The VTS Active Data panel for Virtual Tape Server will  
be updated to reflect any newly added stacked  
volumes on the hour.  
The available free space in Virtual Tape Server z has  
fallen below the threshold set through the Set VTS  
Management Policies panel on the library manager.  
Message  
1. Remove the cartridges from the I/O station.  
2. If possible, repair the cartridge and place in the  
convenience I/O station.  
During the disaster recovery process, a stacked  
volume xxxxxx and has been ejected. (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
During the disaster recovery process, Virtual Tape Server  
z could not read the recovery information on stacked  
volume xxxxxx. Error recovery was unsuccessful. The  
media may have been damaged during the disaster. The  
cartridge is placed in the convenience I/O station.  
Message  
1. Notify your System Administrator.  
Database restore from stacked volume xxxxxx failed,  
attempting restore from next most recent. (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
During the disaster recovery process, Virtual Tape Server  
z could not successfully recover the database from  
stacked volume xxxxxx. Error recovery was unsuccessful.  
The media may have been damaged during the disaster.  
Message  
1. Notify your system administrator.  
Insert of logical volume xxxxxx failed during disaster  
recovery. (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
During the disaster recovery process, logical volume  
xxxxxx could not be added to the library manager  
inventory. It may be because the volser is already in the  
inventory or the library is already at the logical volume  
limit or the volser conflicts with a physical volume’s volser  
that is already in the library.  
298 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 22. Intervention Required Conditions relating to a Virtual Tape Server in the Library (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Contact your service representative.  
Device xxx made unavailable by a VTS. (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
During an operation with device xxx, the Virtual Tape  
Server Controller determined that the device is not  
operating correctly and requires service. It is likely that  
the device has excessive read or write errors.  
Message  
1. Contact your service representative.  
A VTS does not have enough available physical  
drives to continue operation. (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
Physical drives associated with VTS z have become  
unavailable either due to a drive failure or service  
representative action. A VTS requires a minimum of two  
available physical drives for operation.  
Message  
1. Contact your service representative.  
A VTS attempted unsuccessfully to eject a stacked  
volume (xxxxxx) during disaster recovery. (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
During processing of a physical volume during disaster  
recovery, the VTS subsystem determined that the  
physical volume was damaged and attempted to place  
the volume in the I/O station, but the attempt failed. The  
likely reason is that the cartridge has physical damage as  
a result of the disaster and it interferes with the cell in the  
I/O station.  
Message  
1. Contact your service representative.  
A VTS attempted unsuccessfully to eject a damaged  
stacked volume (xxxxxx). (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
During the last usage of a physical volume, the VTS  
subsystem determined that the volume was physically  
damaged. As part of a recovery process, an attempt was  
made to eject the physical volume which failed. The likely  
reason is that the cartridge has physical damage as a  
result of the disaster and it interferes with the cell in the  
I/O station.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 22. Intervention Required Conditions relating to a Virtual Tape Server in the Library (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Contact your service representative.  
VTS Physical device xxx is cabled incorrectly. It has  
been made unavailable. (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
During the installation of drive xxx, the interface cables  
between the drive and the library manager were  
incorrectly installed.  
Message  
1. Contact your service representative.  
A VTS cannot communicate with device xxx. It has  
been made unavailable. (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
Drive xxx has either been powered-off or has a failure  
that does not allow it to respond to requests from the  
VTS.  
Message  
|
|
|
|
1. Refer to “Using the Search Database for Volumes  
Window” on page 279, and follow the instructions in  
the “Specific Misplaced Volume” scenario using the  
physical volume volser for your search.  
Mount of logical volume xxxxxx failed because  
physical volume yyyyyy is misplaced. (rc=rrrr) (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
To satisfy a logical volume mount request, the logical  
volume must be recalled from a physical volume. The  
mount of the physical volume failed because it was not  
found in the physical storage cell indicated in the library  
manager inventory.  
Message  
1. Refer to “Using the Search Database for Volumes  
Window” on page 279, and follow the instructions in  
the “Specific Inaccessible Volume” scenario using the  
physical volume volser for your search.  
Mount of logical volume xxxxxx failed because  
physical volume yyyyyy is inaccessible. (rc=rrrr) (VTS  
z)  
Probable Cause  
To satisfy a logical volume mount request, the logical  
volume must be recalled from a physical volume. The  
mount of the physical volume failed because it is not  
accessible by the robotics of the library. The two most  
likely reasons for the volume to be inaccessible are that  
the volume is loaded in a drive that has failed or is in a  
gripper that has failed.  
300 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 22. Intervention Required Conditions relating to a Virtual Tape Server in the Library (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
1. Contact your service representative.  
Mount of logical volume xxxxxx failed because  
physical volume yyyyyy is not in the library. (rc=rrrr)  
(VTS z)  
2. Locate the physical volume and insert it into the  
library.  
Probable Cause  
To satisfy a logical volume mount request, the logical  
volume must be recalled from a physical volume. At the  
time the logical volume mount request was processed,  
the physical volume required could not be found in the  
library manager inventory.  
Message  
1. Contact your System Administrator  
2. For Dual Library Manager systems containing a VTS,  
this intervention may be the result of a Library  
Manager switchover. When a Library Manager  
switchover occurs, queued or in-progress logical  
mounts are not completed. This results in the VTS  
asking the Library Manager to post this intervention. If  
this is the case, clear the intervention and re-drive the  
mount from the host.  
Mount of logical volume xxxxxx located on physical  
volume yyyyyy failed. (rc=rrrr) (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
To satisfy a logical volume mount request, the logical  
volume must be recalled from a physical volume. The  
mount of the physical volume could not be completed and  
the VTS subsystem could not determine the exact reason  
for the failure.  
Message  
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. This Intervention Required notification will be given for  
the first volume to be placed in read-only status within  
a 24 hour period. Your service representative should  
only be contacted after your system administrator has  
been notified as described in messages Logical  
volume xxxxxx was not fully recovered from damaged  
stacked volume yyyyyy. (VTS z) and A damaged  
stacked volume xxxxxx has been ejected to the  
convenience I/O station. (VTS z), and it is necessary  
to recover a damaged logical volume.  
Stacked volume xxxxxx is in Read-Only status with a  
reason code of yyyyy. (VTS z)  
Probable Cause  
|
|
During a prior read or write operation with the volume  
(recall of a logical volume, copying of a virtual volume, or  
routine reclamation of a stacked volume), a permanent  
media error was detected by the VTS, or an excessive  
number of temporary media errors have occurred. The  
volume is placed in read-only status to prevent further  
writing of customer data. Customer data already on the  
volume remains accessible.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Message  
1. This message should be considered informational  
since the subsequent processing of read-only status  
volumes may result in transparent recovery. Your  
service representative should be contacted only when  
recovery of a logical volume is necessary after having  
received the message Logical volume xxxxxx was not  
fully recovered from damaged stacked volume yyyyyy.  
(VTZ z).  
Stacked Volume xxxxxx is unavailable with a reason  
code of yyyyy. (VTS z)  
|
|
Probable Cause  
|
|
|
During the reclamation process, a stacked volume was  
made unavailable. The volume will subsequently be  
placed in read-only status.  
|
|
|
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 22. Intervention Required Conditions relating to a Virtual Tape Server in the Library (continued)  
Intervention Required Condition  
Message  
Resolution Actions  
|
|
1. Contact your service representative.  
|
|
VTS Controller degraded. Error code yyyyy. Call  
service. (VTS z)  
|
Probable Cause  
|
|
A VTS redundant component has failed. Operation of the  
VTS is continuing.  
|
|
Message  
1. Contact your service representative.  
|
|
VTS requested that device xxx be made unavailable  
but a mount/demount is in progress. (VTS z)  
|
Probable Cause  
|
|
|
|
The VTS determined that device xxx should be made  
unavailable; however, the Library Manager found that a  
mount or demount was in process and could not mark the  
device as unavailable.  
Virtual Tape Server Recovery Actions  
In the event a Virtual Tape Server is not usable either due to interruption of utility or  
communication services to the site or through significant physical damage to the  
site and/or the Virtual Tape Server itself, access to the data managed by the Virtual  
Tape Server is restored through automated processes designed into the product.  
The recovery process assumes that the only available elements for recovery are the  
stacked volumes themselves and further assumes that only a subset of them are  
undamaged after the event.  
Although the recovery process is initiated by a service representative, there are  
some customer related actions that are necessary before the recovery can begin.  
The customer related actions are:  
v If the 3494 and Virtual Tape Server are still functional, ask the service  
representative to perform a Force Migrate operation through the library manager  
service panel. This will ensure that all data has been moved from the Tape  
Volume Cache to a stacked volume.  
v Remove the undamaged 3590 stacked volumes from the 3494 Tape Library that  
is no longer usable.  
|
|
v Take the volumes to another 3494 location which has an empty Virtual Tape  
Server.  
v Inform the service representative that the recovery process can begin.  
There are two key functions designed into the Virtual Tape Server system to support  
recovery.  
v Automatic Virtual Tape Server database backup  
The Virtual Tape Server controller maintains a database of information about the  
location and status of logical volumes on the stacked volumes it manages. When  
a stacked volume has been filled with logical volumes, a backup of the entire  
database is placed at the end of the filled stacked volume. The database  
contains a time and date stamp that identifies when the backup was performed.  
v Automatic database recovery  
302 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When a restore of the database is required, the library manager, in conjunction  
with the Virtual Tape Server controller performs the following steps when initiated  
by a service representative:  
1. Each available stacked volume in the library is mounted and the time and  
date stamp of the database backup is read. This step finds the most current  
database for the stacked volumes in the library.  
2. The stacked volume with the most current database is again mounted and  
the database in the Virtual Tape Server controller is restored.  
3. The Virtual Tape Server then provides information to the library manager to  
rebuild its inventory records for each logical volume found in the database.  
Once the recovery process has completed, the operator varies the library online at  
the recovery site host and the library manager inventory of logical volumes is  
uploaded to the host to synchronize the host catalogs (DFSMS and applicable tape  
management systems).  
At the completion of the recovery process, the Virtual Tape Server and the 3494  
library manager will contain database and inventory records and status information  
for the logical volumes as found in the most recent database backup on the  
undamaged stacked volumes. Depending on the following conditions, some  
customer data and logical volumes may not have been recovered:  
v The stacked volumes containing the latest database backups were destroyed.  
Any changes to the location or status of logical volumes since the last found  
database backup are lost. Some logical volume records may be lost. It is  
possible, however, that the database will contain the location of the previous use  
of logical volumes and that data is accessible to the host.  
v One or more stacked volumes found in the restored database were destroyed  
during the event.  
Although the Virtual Tape Server database and the library manager inventory will  
have a record of the logical volumes that resided on the missing stacked  
volumes, the data is lost.  
v A virtual volume had not been closed at the time of the event.  
The Virtual Tape Server database will not have a record of the virtual volume’s  
location on a stacked volume and the data is lost.  
v Logical volumes were written to a stacked volume between the time the last  
database backup was made and the event.  
The Virtual Tape Server database will not have a record of the new logical  
volume locations on the stacked volume and the data is lost. It is possible,  
however, that the database will contain the location of the previous use of the  
logical volume and that data is accessible to the host.  
Chapter 8. Problem Determination Procedures 303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
304 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A. Keyboard Template  
The keyboard template on page 305 shows the function keys commonly used on  
the library manager during normal application activity.  
The next template can be copied or removed and then folded to create a triangular  
bar shape with the illustration of the keys showing on one face. The template can  
then be placed in a convenient location for quick access to the correct key for a  
specific function.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
305  
 
Com m only used keys:  
Arrows  
Hom e  
End  
E sc  
PgUp  
PgDn  
Underlined  
letter  
C tr l  
+
P g U p C t r l  
+
P g D n  
S h if t  
+
E s c  
or  
M o v e  
a m o n g  
G o t o t h e  
G o t o t h e  
C a n c e l  
t h e l a s t  
h elp  
Sc ro ll u p  
o n e  
S c r o l l d o w n  
o n e  
D is p la y t h e  
t e x t t o t h e  
l e f t o f t h e  
w in d o w.  
D is p la y t h e  
t e x t t o t h e  
r i g h t o f t h e  
w in d o w.  
A l t  
+
S p a c e  
S e l e c t t h a t  
c h o i c e o n  
f i r s t c h o i c e  
l a s t c h o i c e  
G o t o a n d  
f r o m t h e  
p u ll- d o w n  
m enu.  
t h e c h o i c e s .  
i n  
a
p u l l -  
i n  
a
p u l l -  
w in d o w.  
w in d o w.  
t h e a c t i o n  
b a r o r p u l l -  
d o w n m e n u .  
d o w n m e n u .  
d o w n m e n u .  
w in d o w.  
Function keys:  
F1  
F2  
F3  
A l t  
+
F 4  
A l t  
+
F 5  
F 6  
A l t  
+
F 7  
A l t  
+
F 8  
F 9  
F11  
F12  
C t r l  
+
F 1 0  
G e t t h e  
h elp  
G e t  
P e r f o r m  
C l o s e t h e  
h elp  
R e s t o r e t h e  
w in d o w.  
M o v e t h e  
w in d o w.  
S i z e t h e  
w in d o w.  
L i s t k e y s  
f r o m w i t h in  
a n y h e lp  
A c tiv a te  
G o t o  
e x t e n d e d  
h e lp f ro m  
w i t h i n a n y  
h elp  
m a in m e n u  
a c t i o n b a r.  
s h u td o w n .  
h e lp in d e x  
f r o m w i t h in  
a n y h e lp  
w in d o w.  
w in d o w.  
w in d o w.  
S
h
if  
t
+
F
1
0
w in d o w.  
G e t h e lp  
f o r h e lp .  
w in d o w.  
A 0 6 C 0 0 0 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
| Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced  
| Function  
|
| Import and Export List Volumes Format  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Lists of volumes for Export or Import are provided to a Virtual Tape Server on  
logical volumes called the Export List Volume or the Import List Volume, which are  
resident in the VTS. The following figures define the requirements of the format for  
the Export List Volume and Import List Volume. There are fields, records or files of  
the two formats which are similar; therefore, only one figure for these similar areas  
is shown. For example, the Import List Volume figures refer to a HDR1 figure which  
is in the Export List Volume section.  
|
|
|
|
Sample JCL for preparing the Export List Volume and Import List Volume is  
available in the Object Access Method Planning, Installation, and Storage  
Administration Guide for Tape Libraries, SC26-3051, and also in the Redbook  
Enhanced IBM Magstar Virtual Tape Server: Implementation Guide, SG24-2229.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Export List Volume is an IBM Standard Labeled tape volume which is selected  
from the logical volumes in the VTS. Three files are written to the volume. The first  
file contains logical volume - destination pair records and is called the Export List  
file. The second file has a minimum of one record and is reserved for future use.  
The third file is the Export Status file and is initially written by the host without any  
data records. Upon the completion of the Export operation, the VTS will write status  
file records for each of the logical volumes listed in the Export List file indicating the  
processing results.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Import List Volume is an IBM Standard Labeled tape volume which is selected  
from the logical volumes in the VTS. Two files are written to the volume. The first  
file contains records specifying the Exported Stacked Volumes and logical volume  
to Import or to Import all logical volumes. The second file is the Import Status file  
and is initially written by the host without any data records. Upon the completion of  
the Import operation, the VTS will write status file records indicating the results for  
each of the logical volumes listed specifically and the logical volumes contained on  
an Exported Stacked Volume listed when all logical volumes were to be imported.  
|
| Export List Volume  
|
|
|
Due to the size of a monolithic, detailed format description for the export list  
volume, the format is described in hierarchical form in the tables below. Start with  
Table 23 on page 308, then proceed as directed to the portion(s) of interest.  
|
|
|
All character fields within the volume are in EBCDIC. Field contents specified in  
quotes are EBCDIC characters. The volume must be written with compaction turned  
off.  
|
|
|
|
No space is reserved in the records of the list and status files. Expansion for later  
versions can be accomplished by redefining the file identifier records and data  
records for the files. Such changes would be reflected in the Record Length entry in  
the HDR2 and EOF2 records.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
307  
 
|
Table 23. Export List Volume  
Volume Contents  
Volume Label  
|
|
Description  
|
|
|
|
|
See Table 24  
Export List File  
See Table 25  
Reserved File  
See Table 28 on page 310  
See Table 29 on page 310  
Export Status File  
Tape Mark  
|
Table 24. VOL1  
|
|
Bytes  
0–2  
3
Description  
Use  
|
|
Label Identifier  
Label Number  
Contains “VOL”  
Contains “1”  
|
|
4–9  
Volume Serial  
Number  
The six character logical volume serial number of the  
Export List Volume or Import List Volume.  
|
|
|
10  
Reserved  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
11–20  
21–34  
35–36  
VTOC Pointer  
Reserved  
|
|
Tape Recording  
Technique  
|
37–40  
41–50  
Reserved  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
|
|
Owner Name and  
Address Code  
|
51–79  
Reserved  
Retained, Not checked  
|
Table 25. Export List File  
|
|
Length  
80  
Name  
Description  
|
|
|
Data Set Header 1  
Data Set Header 2  
Tape Mark  
Table 32 on page 312  
Table 33 on page 312  
80  
|
|
80  
Export List File  
Identifier  
Table 26 on page 309  
Table 27 on page 309  
|
|
N*80  
Export List File  
Records  
|
|
|
|
Tape Mark  
80  
80  
End of File 1  
End of File 2  
Tape Mark  
Table 34 on page 313  
Table 35 on page 313  
|
308 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
Table 26. Export List File Identifier  
|
|
Bytes  
0–10  
11  
Name  
Description  
“EXPORT LIST”  
Blank character  
“01”  
|
|
|
|
Title Text  
Delimiter  
Version  
Blank  
12–13  
14  
Blank character  
|
|
15–30  
User Field  
This 16 byte field is not checked or used by the control  
unit  
|
|
31–79  
Retained, Not  
checked  
This field is not checked or used by the control unit  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The format of the Export List File record is designed to allow for ease of use. It is  
expected that a customer may manually input the needed information and the  
format needs to be tolerant of the location of the fields in the record. Each list file  
record contains up to two fields separated by a delimiter. The fields, “volser” and  
“destination” must appear in that order, separated by a field delimiter. If the record  
is not equal to 80 bytes, the record is not processed and a Status File record is  
written with a status code of X'24'. The first 13 bytes or less of data from the record  
as read is provided in the Status File record. If only one field is found in the record,  
it is assumed that a blank destination is desired.  
|
Table 27. Export List File Record  
|
|
Name  
Description  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Volser  
The volume serial number of a logical volume to be exported. The VTS will use six  
characters to identify the volser, starting with the first non-blank character and continuing  
until six non-blank characters have been found. Valid characters are A-Z, 0-9. The search for  
six non-blank characters continues until a blank or delimiter comma character is found. Note:  
If the volser found is not six characters, or contains non-valid characters, a Status File  
record is written with a Status Code of X'1E' and with the first 13 bytes of the list record.  
|
Field Delimiter  
Destination  
Comma character required if a non-blank destination is specified.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
The destination for the logical volume. The control unit will use up to sixteen characters,  
starting with the first non-blank character after the field delimiter and continuing through byte  
71, for the destination name. Embedded blanks are allowed in the destination name. Any  
characters in the record after the destination field are ignored. No validity checking is  
performed on the name found. A blank destination is also valid; however, all characters after  
the Volser or delimiter comma and throughout byte 71 must be blank.  
|
|
User Field  
Bytes 72-79 of the 80 byte record are not used or checked by the VTS. This field may  
contain line numbers for volume lists.  
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
Table 28. Reserved File  
|
|
Length  
80  
Name  
Description  
|
|
|
Data Set Header 1  
Data Set Header 2  
Tape Mark  
Table 32 on page 312  
Table 33 on page 312  
80  
|
|
|
recl  
Reserved File Identifier  
recl>=1. This record must be present; however, neither its length nor  
contents are checked or used by the control unit. Note: The minimum  
record length written to tape is 18 bytes.  
|
|
|
N*recl  
Reserved File Records  
N is a variable number of file records. N=0 is valid, recl>=1, records  
not checked or used by the control unit. Note: The minimum record  
length written to tape is 18 bytes.  
|
|
|
|
Tape Mark  
80  
80  
End of File 1  
End of File 2  
Tape Mark  
Table 34 on page 313  
Table 35 on page 313  
|
Table 29. Export Status File  
|
|
Length  
80  
Name  
Description  
|
|
|
|
Data Set Header 1  
Data Set Header 2  
Tape Mark  
Table 32 on page 312  
Table 33 on page 312  
80  
80  
Export Status File Identifier Table 30  
|
|
N*80  
Export Status File Records N=0 is valid. N is a variable number of file records. See Table 31 on  
page 311.  
|
|
|
|
Tape Mark  
80  
80  
End of File 1  
End of File 2  
Tape Mark  
Table 34 on page 313  
Table 35 on page 313  
|
Table 30. Export Status File Identifier  
|
|
Bytes  
0–12  
13  
Name  
Description  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Title Text  
“EXPORT STATUS”  
Field Delimiter  
Version  
Blank character  
14–15  
16  
“01”  
Blank  
Blank character  
17–32  
33–79  
User Field  
Retained, Not checked  
This 16 byte field is not checked or used by the control unit  
This field is not checked or used by the control unit  
310 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
Table 31. Export and Import Status File Record  
Bytes Name Description  
For Status Codes other than 01, 1E, 24 or 25, the bytes 0-12 are defined as follows:  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0–5  
Logical Volser  
For export, this field contains the volume serial number of the logical  
volume specified in the export list file. For import, this field contains  
the volume serial number of the logical volume explicitly specified in  
the import list file or, if only the Exported Stacked Volume to import is  
specified, a logical volume on the Exported Stacked Volume. When  
there is a cause for no logical volumes to have been imported from  
the Exported Stacked Volume given in bytes 7-12, the status file  
record for the Exported Stacked Volume will have blanks in this field.  
|
6
Field Delimiter  
Physical Volser  
Comma character  
|
|
|
|
|
|
7–12  
For a successful export (status code = 00), this field contains the  
volume serial number of the Exported Stacked Volume onto which the  
logical volume was copied. If the export was unsuccessful, this field  
contains all blanks. For import status, this field contains the Exported  
Stacked Volume specified in the import list file. This field is  
right-justified and padded with blanks.  
|
For Status Code 01, 1E, 24 or 25, the bytes 0-12 are defined as follows:  
|
|
|
0-12  
List File Record data.  
When a status code of 01, 1E or 24 is indicated, the Export or Import  
List File record could not be processed. The first 13 bytes of the list  
file record are provided here to aid in problem determination.  
|
13  
Field Delimiter  
Status Code  
Comma character  
|
|
14-15  
This field contains a two character status code number. See “Status  
Codes in Status File” on page 316 for more information.  
|
16  
17  
Field Delimiter  
Comma character  
|
|
|
Exception Indicator  
If the export or import was successful, this field contains the blank  
character. If the export or import was unsuccessful, this field contains  
the asterisk character.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
18–77  
Destination/Status Text  
For a successful export (status code = 00), this field contains up to a  
16 character destination name as specified in the export list file. If the  
destination was given as all blanks, this field will contain 16 question  
mark characters (??...?). For a successful import (status code = 00),  
this field is all blanks. For an unsuccessful export or import (status  
code \= 00), this field contains status text indicating the reason the  
export or import was not successful. This field is left-justified and  
padded with blanks. See “Status Codes in Status File” on page 316 for  
more information.  
|
78–79  
Reserved  
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
Table 32. HDR1  
Bytes  
0–2  
|
|
Description  
Use  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Label Identifier  
Contains “HDR”  
Contains “1”  
3
Label Number  
4–20  
Data Set Identifier  
Data Set Serial Number  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
21–26  
27–30  
31–34  
35–38  
39–40  
41–46  
47–52  
53  
Volume Sequence Number Retained, Not checked  
Data Set Sequence Number Retained, Not checked  
Generation Number  
Version Number  
Creation Date  
Expiration Date  
Data Set Security  
Block Count  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Must be “000000”  
54–59  
60–72  
73–79  
System Code  
Reserved  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
|
Table 33. HDR2  
|
|
Bytes  
0–2  
3
Description  
Use  
|
|
|
Label Identifier  
Label Number  
Record Format  
Block Length  
Contains “HDR”  
Contains “2”  
4
Retained, Not checked  
|
|
5–9  
Must be equal to the Record Length for the Export List File, Import List  
File and Status File. Retained, not checked for the Reserved file.  
|
|
10–14  
Record Length  
Must be 80 bytes for the Export List File, Import List File and Status  
file. Retained, not checked for the Reserved file.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
15  
Tape Density  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Must be “000000”  
16  
Data Set Position  
Job/Job Step Identification  
Tape Recording Technique  
Control Character  
Reserved  
17–33  
34–35  
36  
37  
38  
Block Attribute  
39–46  
47  
Reserved  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
|
|
Checkpoint Data Set  
Identifier  
|
48–79  
Reserved  
Retained, Not checked  
312 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
Table 34. EOF1  
Bytes  
0–2  
|
|
Description  
Use  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Label Identifier  
Contains “EOF”  
Contains “1”  
3
Label Number  
4–20  
Data Set Identifier  
Data Set Serial Number  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
21–26  
27–30  
31–34  
35–38  
39–40  
41–46  
47–52  
53  
Volume Sequence Number Retained, Not checked  
Data Set Sequence Number Retained, Not checked  
Generation Number  
Version Number  
Creation Date  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Expiration Date  
Data Set Security  
Block Count  
|
|
|
|
54–59  
6 EBCDIC character representation of the decimal number of blocks in  
the associated file, left padded with zeros.  
Note: This field is updated by the VTS if it modifies the associated  
file.  
|
|
60–72  
73–79  
System Code  
Reserved  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
|
Table 35. EOF2  
|
|
Bytes  
0–2  
3
Description  
Use  
|
|
|
Label Identifier  
Label Number  
Record Format  
Block Length  
Contains “EOF”  
Contains “2”  
4
Retained, Not checked  
|
|
5–9  
Must be equal to the Record Length for the Export List File, Import List  
File and Status File. Retained, not checked for the Reserved file.  
|
|
10–14  
Record Length  
Must be 80 bytes for the Export List File, Import List File and Status  
file. Retained, not checked for the Reserved file.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
15  
Tape Density  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
Retained, Not checked  
16  
Data Set Position  
Job/Job Step Identification  
Tape Recording Technique  
Control Character  
Reserved  
17–33  
34–35  
36  
37  
38  
Block Attribute  
39–46  
47  
Reserved  
|
|
Checkpoint Data Set  
Identifier  
|
48–79  
Reserved  
Retained, Not checked  
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
| Import List Volume  
|
|
|
|
|
Just as with the Export List volume, the Import List volume format is described in  
hierarchical form in the tables below. Start with Table 36, then proceed as directed  
to the portion(s) of interest. All character fields within the volume are in EBCDIC.  
Field contents specified in quotes are EBCDIC characters. The volume must be  
written with compaction turned off.  
|
Table 36. Import List Volume  
|
|
Volume Contents  
Volume Label  
Description  
|
|
|
|
See Table 24 on page 308  
See Table 37  
Import List File  
Import Status File  
Tape Mark  
See Table 40 on page 316  
|
Table 37. Import List File  
|
|
Length  
80  
Name  
Description  
|
|
|
Data Set Header 1  
Data Set Header 2  
Tape Mark  
Table 32 on page 312  
Table 33 on page 312  
80  
|
|
80  
Import List File  
Identifier  
Table 38  
|
|
N*80  
Import List File  
Records  
Table 39 on page 315. N>0, N<=50K. N is a variable  
number of file records.  
|
|
|
|
Tape Mark  
80  
80  
End of File 1  
End of File 2  
Tape Mark  
Table 34 on page 313  
Table 35 on page 313  
|
Table 38. Import List File Identifier  
|
|
Bytes  
0–10  
11  
Name  
Description  
“IMPORT LIST”  
Blank character  
“01”  
|
|
|
|
Title Text  
Field Delimiter  
Version  
12–13  
14  
Blank  
Blank character  
|
|
15–30  
User Field  
This 16 byte field is not checked or used by the control  
unit  
|
|
31–79  
Retained, Not  
checked  
This field is not checked or used by the control unit  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The format of the Import List File record is designed to allow for ease of use. It is  
expected that a customer may manually input the needed information and the  
format needs to be tolerant of the location of the fields in the record. Each list file  
record contains up to three fields separated by delimiters. The fields “physical  
volser”, “logical volser”, and “Import Option” must appear in that order, separated by  
a field delimiter. If the record is not equal to 80 bytes, the record is not processed  
and a Status File record is written with a status code of X'24'. The first 13 bytes or  
less of data from the record as read is provided in the Status File record. If only  
314 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
one field is found in the record, it is assumed to be the “physical volser”. If the  
logical volser is not specified and an import option is specified, both delimiter  
characters are required.  
|
Table 39. Import List File Record  
|
|
Name  
Description  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Volser  
The volume serial number of a Exported Stacked Volume to be imported. The VTS will use  
up to six characters to identify the volser, starting with the first non-blank character and  
continuing until a blank character has been found or the field delimiter character is found.  
Valid characters are A-Z, 0-9, and embedded blanks are not allowed. Note: If the volser  
specified is less than six characters, when used by the VTS it is padded on the right to form  
a six character field. If the volser is greater than six characters, the volume will not be  
imported and a Status File record is written with a Status Code of 01 and with the first 13  
bytes of the list record.  
|
Field Delimiter  
Logical Volser  
Comma character required if a logical volser or import option is specified.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The volume serial number of a logical volume to be imported. The VTS will use six  
characters to identify the volser, starting with the first non-blank character after the delimiter  
comma and continuing until six contiguous non-blank characters have been found. Valid  
characters are A-Z, 0-9. The search for six contiguous non-blank characters continues until a  
blank or delimiter comma character is found. This field may be all blanks or not contain any  
characters between the field delimiters, in which case all logical volumes on the specified  
Exported Stacked Volume will be imported.  
Note: Note: If the Volser found is not six characters, or contains non-valid characters, a  
Status File record is written with a Status Code of X'1E' and with the first 13 bytes of the list  
record.  
|
Field Delimiter  
Import Option  
Comma character required if an import option other than blank is specified.  
|
|
|
This field contains blanks or a keyword that defines how the logical volume is to be imported  
and begins with the first non-blank character found after the second Field Delimiter comma  
and continues through byte 71 of the record.  
|
|
|
|
|
v
If the Field Delimiter comma is not present, only blanks are allowed and if the comma is  
present and only blanks are found, then the data contents of the logical volume or  
contents of all logical volumes (if only the physical volser was specified) is copied into the  
VTS subsystem and fragment file entries and library manager inventory records are  
created.  
|
|
|
|
v
v
If the first non-blank characters found are “SCRATCH”, the data contents is not copied  
and a fragment file and library manager inventory records are created. The “SCRATCH”  
option should be used when the data is known to have been expired and will not be  
accessed after the logical volume is imported.  
|
|
|
If the first non-blank characters found are “INITIALIZE”, only library manager inventory  
records are created. The “INITIALIZE” option should be used when the logical volume is  
to be reinitialized and any prior data discarded.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: Characters found in the Import Option field after the keywords of “SCRATCH” or  
“INITIALIZE” will be ignored.  
Note: If other than all blanks (with or without the second Field Delimiter comma),  
“SCRATCH” or “INITIALIZE” with characters to be ignored are found prior to byte 72, the  
volume is not imported and a Status File record is written with a Status Code of 25 and with  
the first 13 bytes of the list record..  
|
|
User Field  
Bytes 72-79 of the 80 byte record are not used or checked by the VTS. This field may  
contain line numbers for volume lists.  
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
Table 40. Import Status File  
|
|
Length  
80  
Name  
Description  
|
|
|
|
Data Set Header 1  
Data Set Header 2  
Tape Mark  
Table 32 on page 312  
Table 33 on page 312  
80  
80  
Import Status File Identifier Table 41  
|
|
N*80  
Import Status File Records  
N=0 is valid. N is a variable number of file records. See Table 31 on  
page 311.  
|
|
|
|
Tape Mark  
80  
80  
End of File 1  
End of File 2  
Tape Mark  
Table 34 on page 313  
Table 35 on page 313  
|
Table 41. Import Status File Identifier  
|
|
Bytes  
0–12  
13  
Name  
Description  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Title Text  
“IMPORT STATUS”  
Field Delimiter  
Version  
Blank character  
14–15  
16  
“01”  
Blank  
Blank character  
17–32  
33–79  
User Field  
Retained, Not checked  
This 16 byte field is not checked or used by the control unit  
This field is not checked or used by the control unit  
|
| Status Codes in Status File  
|
|
|
|
After the completion of an Export or Import operation, the customer can determine  
the completion status of each logical volume that was specified for the operation by  
examining the Status File records. The following table describes the status codes,  
the probable cause and the recommended actions for the customer to take.  
|
Table 42. Status Codes and Status Text  
|
|
Operation Status  
Resolution Actions  
|
|
|
None needed.  
Status Code  
00  
|
|
|
Status Text  
For an Export, contains the destination name, for  
Import contains all blanks  
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The volume was successfully imported or  
exported.  
316 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
Table 42. Status Codes and Status Text (continued)  
Operation Status  
Resolution Actions  
|
|
Status Code  
1. Examine the first thirteen bytes of the status record.  
They contain the input from the list file decimal record  
number NNNNN as read.  
01  
|
|
Status Text  
|
|
2. Correct the input record and retry the operation.  
‘Invalid record format, record NNNNN’  
|
Determine why the operation was canceled and retry  
it.  
|
|
Probable Cause  
|
|
|
|
The volume could not be exported or imported  
because the format of the list file record was  
invalid.  
|
|
|
Determine why the operation was canceled and retry it.  
Status Code  
02  
|
|
Status Text  
‘Canceled - Host request’  
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The volume could not be exported or imported  
because the operation was canceled by the host  
prior to processing the volume.  
|
|
|
Determine why the operation was canceled and retry it.  
Status Code  
03  
|
|
Status Text  
‘Canceled - Library request’  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The volume could not be exported or imported  
because the operation was canceled, prior to  
processing the volume, by the operator through  
the Library Manager console.  
|
|
|
|
|
This can be a normal status if the list file contains records  
for more than one VTS or library. If that is not the case,  
determine why the logical volume is not in the VTS  
subsystem in which the operation was performed.  
Status Code  
05  
|
|
Status Text  
|
Logical volume not in VTS  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The logical volume specified in the export list is  
not resident in the Virtual Tape Server  
subsystem in which the export operation was  
performed.  
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
|
Table 42. Status Codes and Status Text (continued)  
Operation Status  
Resolution Actions  
|
|
1. Locate the Exported Stacked Volume needed and  
insert it into the library.  
Status Code  
|
|
06  
|
2. Retry the import operation.  
|
Status Text  
|
Exported Stacked Volume not in the Library  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The Exported Stacked Volume specified in the  
import list (either with a specific logical volume  
or for import of all logical volumes) is not in the  
library in which the import operation was  
performed.  
|
|
1. Use the tape management system or the TCDB  
records to verify that the logical volume is on the  
Exported Stacked Volume specified.  
Status Code  
|
|
07  
|
|
|
|
Status Text  
2. Correct any errors and retry the import operation.  
Logical volume not found on Exported Stacked  
Volume  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The logical volume specified in the import list is  
not resident on the Exported Stacked Volume  
specified.  
|
|
1. Use the tape management system or TCDB to check  
that the specified volume is an Exported Stacked  
Volume.  
Status Code  
|
|
08  
|
|
|
|
|
Status Text  
2. If the volume is an Exported Stacked Volume and is  
in the Unassigned category, move the volume to the  
Import category.  
Exported Stacked Volume not in Import category  
|
|
Probable Cause  
|
Processing for the Exported Stacked Volume not  
allowed. The Exported Stacked Volume specified  
in the import list is in the library, but is not  
assigned to the Import category.  
|
3. If the Exported Stacked Volume is found in the Insert  
category, the volume must be moved to the Eject  
category and when ejected, it must be reinserted into  
the Convenience I/O station and moved into the  
Import category.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4. Retry the import operation.  
|
|
|
5. If the volume is not found to be an Exported Stacked  
Volume, check the source for the Import List Volume  
contents.  
|
|
|
|
Retry the export of the volume when it is no longer being  
used.  
Status Code  
09  
|
|
Status Text  
Logical volume in-use  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The logical volume could not be exported  
because the volume specified in the export list  
was mounted or queued to be mounted when  
the list was processed as part of the export  
operation.  
318 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
|
Table 42. Status Codes and Status Text (continued)  
Operation Status  
Resolution Actions  
|
|
|
Call an IBM Service Representative.  
Status Code  
10  
|
|
Status Text  
Terminated by library error  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The volume could not be exported or imported  
because the operation was terminated by a  
non-recoverable (check1) error detected by the  
Library Manager prior to processing the volume.  
|
|
|
|
|
Call an IBM Service Representative. Error XXXX  
indicates the functional area within the VTS which  
encountered the non-recoverable error.  
Status Code  
11  
|
|
Status Text  
Terminated by VTS error XXXX  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The volume could not be exported or imported  
because the operation was terminated by a  
non-recoverable error detected by the Virtual  
Tape Server subsystem prior to processing the  
volume.  
|
|
|
|
Determine why more than one Export or Import List file  
record specifies the same volume.  
Status Code  
12  
|
|
Status Text  
Duplicate volume in list  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
For Export, the Export list has more than one  
entry of a logical volume to be exported. The  
logical volume will not be exported for the  
destinations provided. A Status File record with  
Status Code = 12 will be written for each of the  
logical volumes in the Export list which are the  
same. For Import, the Import list has more than  
one entry of an Exported Stacked Volume with  
the same or conflicting Logical Volser field  
values; such as, blanks, the Logical Volser, or  
blanks and a Logical Volser. Status File records  
for each Import list record will be written with  
status code = 12 and no import processing will  
occur for any records which are the same or  
conflicting.  
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
|
Table 42. Status Codes and Status Text (continued)  
Operation Status  
Resolution Actions  
|
|
|
|
Determine why the specified volume is a duplicate in the  
library.  
Status Code  
13  
|
|
Status Text  
Duplicate volume in library  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The logical volume could not be imported  
because it already resides in the library  
inventory. The library inventory includes logical  
volumes in all VTS subsystems within the same  
physical library and all physical volumes in the  
library.  
|
|
|
|
Determine why the specified volume is a duplicate in the  
enterprise.  
Status Code  
14  
|
|
Status Text  
Duplicate volume in Enterprise  
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The logical volume could not be imported  
because the attached hosts determined that it  
already resides in another library.  
|
|
1. Export or delete enough logical volumes from the  
library to provide room for the needed imported  
volumes.  
Status Code  
|
|
15  
|
|
|
|
Status Text  
2. Retry the import operation.  
Library full  
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The logical volume could not be imported  
because the library has reached the maximum  
number of logical volumes it can support.  
|
|
1. Refer to Figure 83 on page 140. For the volser  
indicated, if the Status Flags are Inaccessible or  
Misplaced, follow instructions in “Table for Problem  
Determination using the Search Database for  
Volumes Window” on page 281.  
Status Code  
|
|
16  
|
|
Status Text  
|
|
Stacked Volume access failure  
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
2. If the volser Status Flags are other than Inaccessible  
or Misplaced, call an IBM Service Representative.  
|
|
For Export, the logical volume could not be  
exported because the VTS stacked volume  
containing the logical volume could not be  
accessed.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For Import, a logical volume or all logical  
volumes on the Exported Stacked Volume  
specified in the Import List file could not be  
imported because the Exported Stacked Volume  
could not be accessed.  
320 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
|
Table 42. Status Codes and Status Text (continued)  
Operation Status  
Resolution Actions  
|
|
|
|
Suspected media failure, call an IBM Service  
Representative.  
Status Code  
17  
|
|
Status Text  
Logical volume Copy failure  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
During an export operation, the logical volume  
could not be exported because a permanent  
error was encountered when copying the volume  
from the source stacked volume to the Exported  
Stacked Volume. During an import operation, the  
logical volume could not be imported because a  
permanent error was encountered when copying  
the volume from the source Exported Stacked  
Volume to a stacked volume.  
|
|
|
|
|
Check the logical volume’s record in the tape  
management system to determine if the volume contains  
active data or not. If it does not, use the logical volume  
deletion function to remove the volume from the library. If  
it does show that the volume contains active data, call for  
service.  
Status Code  
18  
|
|
Status Text  
|
|
No Data Associated With Logical Volume  
|
|
Probable Cause  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The logical volume could not be exported  
because there is no data associated with the  
volume on a stacked volume in the VTS  
subsystem. The most likely reason is that the  
logical volume has never been used in the VTS  
prior to it being specified for export.  
|
|
|
Call an IBM Service Representative.  
Status Code  
19  
|
|
Status Text  
Logical Volume Copy/Fragment Failure  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The logical volume could not be exported  
because it is currently resident in the Tape  
Volume Cache and attempts to copy it to a  
stacked volume and create its Fragment failed.  
|
|
|
Call an IBM Service Representative.  
Status Code  
1A  
|
|
Status Text  
Logical Volume TVC State Unknown  
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The logical volume could not be exported  
because its state in the Tape Volume Cache  
could not be determined.  
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
|
Table 42. Status Codes and Status Text (continued)  
Operation Status  
Resolution Actions  
|
|
|
|
|
Call an IBM Service Representative. Error XXXX  
indicates the functional area within the VTS which  
detected the internal error.  
Status Code  
1B  
|
|
Status Text  
Logical Volume Processing Error XXXX  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The logical volume could not be exported or  
imported because an internal VTS error XXXX  
was encountered. Internal or host time-out  
occurrences also result in Export/Import Status  
file records with this Status Code for all logical  
volumes which were not successfully processed.  
|
|
|
Call an IBM Service Representative.  
Status Code  
1C  
|
|
Status Text  
Fragment File Not Readable  
|
Probable Cause  
|
|
|
For Export, the logical volume could not be  
exported because its fragment file in the Tape  
Volume Cache could not be read.  
|
|
|
|
For Import, the logical volume could not be  
imported because its fragment information could  
not be read from the Exported Stacked Volume.  
|
|
|
Call an IBM Service Representative.  
Status Code  
1D  
|
|
Status Text  
Unable to Write Fragment File  
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The logical volume could not be exported  
because its fragment file could not be written to  
the Exported Stacked Volume.  
|
|
1. Examine the first thirteen bytes of the status record.  
They contain the input from the list file decimal record  
number NNNNN as read.  
Status Code  
|
|
X'1E'  
|
|
|
|
Status Text  
2. Correct the input record and retry the operation.  
Invalid Logical Volume, record NNNNN  
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The Volser of the logical volume is not six  
characters or contains characters which are not  
valid.  
322 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
|
Table 42. Status Codes and Status Text (continued)  
Operation Status  
Resolution Actions  
|
|
1. Check intervention required messages on the library  
manager console for the reason why the recall failed.  
Status Code  
|
|
1F  
|
2. Correct the reason and retry the export operation.  
|
Status Text  
|
Logical Volume Recall Failed  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The fragment file for a logical volume being  
exported did not contain the logical volume’s  
tape label records so the VTS subsystem  
attempted to perform a recall of the logical  
volume. The recall failed so the logical volume  
was not exported.  
|
|
|
Call an IBM Service Representative.  
Status Code  
20  
|
|
Status Text  
Library Manager Error  
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The logical volume could not be exported  
because of a library manager reported error  
during export processing.  
|
|
|
1. Add physical volumes to the VTS.  
2. Retry the operation.  
Status Code  
21  
|
|
Status Text  
Terminated - out of scratch  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The logical volume could not be exported or  
imported because the operation was terminated  
after waiting 60 minutes for a scratch stacked  
volume to be made available to the VTS.  
|
|
1. Determine why the hosts attached to the VTS are not  
responding to the request to process exported  
volumes.  
Status Code  
|
|
22  
|
|
|
|
Status Text  
2. Retry the operation.  
Terminated - waiting for host response  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The logical volume could not be exported  
because the export operation was terminated  
due to inactivity for 60 continuous minutes while  
processing the volumes assigned to the  
exported category. It is likely there are no  
operational hosts attached to the VTS.  
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
|
Table 42. Status Codes and Status Text (continued)  
Operation Status  
Resolution Actions  
|
|
|
None required.  
Status Code  
23  
|
|
Status Text  
Logical volume left in Insert category  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The Import operation was canceled from the  
Library Manager console and there is no host  
attached to the VTS that can process logical  
volumes assigned to the Insert category, or the  
Import operation was terminated because the  
host had been inactive for 60 continuous  
minutes while processing volumes assigned to  
the Insert category.  
|
|
1. Examine the first thirteen bytes of the status record.  
They contain the input from the list file decimal record  
number NNNNN as read.  
Status Code  
|
|
X'24'  
|
|
|
|
Status Text  
2. Correct the input record and retry the operation.  
List File Record Incorrect Length, record  
NNNNN  
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The List File record is not 80 characters.  
|
|
1. Examine the first thirteen bytes of the status record.  
They contain the input from the list file decimal record  
number NNNNN as read.  
Status Code  
|
|
25  
|
|
|
|
Status Text  
2. Correct the input record and retry the operation.  
Import Option Invalid, record NNNNN  
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The Import Option field of the record NNNNN  
was not all blanks, SCRATCH or INITIALIZE.  
|
|
|
Call an IBM Service Representative.  
Status Code  
26  
|
|
Status Text  
Terminated, fewer than four drives available  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The volume could not be exported or imported  
because the operation was terminated when  
fewer than four 3590 drives became available to  
the VTS.  
|
|
1. Examine the first thirteen bytes of the status record.  
They contain the input from the list file decimal record  
number NNNNN as read.  
Status Code  
|
|
27  
|
|
|
|
Status Text  
2. Correct the input record and retry the operation.  
Volume is not a logical volume  
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
The Library Manager detected that the volume in  
the Export List is not a logical volume.  
324 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
|
Table 42. Status Codes and Status Text (continued)  
Operation Status  
Resolution Actions  
|
|
|
|
Suspected media failure, call an IBM Service  
Representative.  
Status Code  
28  
|
|
Status Text  
Exported Stacked Volume processing error  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
On Import, the file on the Exported Stacked  
Volume containing the list of logical volumes  
stored on the Exported Stacked Volume could  
not be read without error.  
|
|
|
Call an IBM Service Representative.  
Status Code  
29  
|
|
Status Text  
Orphaned logical volume  
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
On Export, the VTS storage management code  
does not recognize the logical volume volser;  
therefore, the logical volume cannot be exported.  
|
|
1. Check host systems attached to the VTS to insure  
that they are processing volumes in the insert  
category.  
Status Code  
|
|
30  
|
|
|
|
|
Status Text  
2. If the check above indicates that there is at least one  
host which is processing volumes in the insert  
category, determine why the specific volume has not  
been processed.  
Logical volume assigned to insert category  
|
|
Probable Cause  
|
|
For Export, the logical volume is currently  
assigned to the insert category. Volumes in the  
insert category have not been accepted by a  
host and cannot be exported.  
|
|
|
|
|
Call an IBM Service Representative.  
|
Status Code  
|
31  
|
|
Status Text  
Exported Stacked Volume unload failure  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Probable Cause  
For Import, the Exported Stacked Volume volser  
found in the Physical Volume field of the Status  
File record was used for importing logical  
volumes and could not be demounted from the  
tape drive and may not have been returned to  
the Import category.  
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
|
Table 42. Status Codes and Status Text (continued)  
Operation Status  
Resolution Actions  
|
|
|
|
|
For each logical volume having this Status Code, the  
tape management system database must be searched  
and corrected if a ’container volume’ is shown.  
Status Code  
32  
|
Status Text  
|
|
For DFSMSrmm, the following steps may be taken:  
Invalid container volume  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Using the volser of the first volume in the Status File  
with Status Code X'32', perform a RMM  
Probable Cause  
For Export, a cancel issued by an operator from  
the Library Manager console or a termination  
due to host inactivity may have resulted in a  
’container volume’ being shown in the tape  
management system database for logical  
volumes which have not been exported from the  
VTS.  
LISTVOLUME and determine if a container volume is  
shown. If none is found, proceed with RMM  
LISTVOLUME for all volumes with Status Code X'32'  
until a container is identified.  
|
|
2. If RMM LISTVOLUME has been performed for all  
logical volumes with Status Code X'32' and a  
container volume has not been found, then further  
action is not necessary.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. For those logical volumes with Status Code X'32'  
which are found to have a container volume, it is  
necessary to change the container volume to  
blanks.  
|
|
|
|
4. Using the volser identified as the container volume,  
search for volumes associated with the container  
volume and build RMM CHANGEVOLUME  
commands for each volume. Use the command:  
|
|
|
RMM SEARCHVOLUME VOLUME(*) OWNER(*) LIMIT(*)  
CONTAINER(container_volser)  
CLIST('RMM CV',' CONTAINER(" ") FORCE')  
|
|
|
5. Run the CLIST created in step 4 to perform the  
change to a blank container volume for all volumes  
found with the identified container volume.  
|
|
|
|
|
Alternatively, each logical volume with Status Code X'32'  
which has a container volume may be changed to a blank  
container without building a CLIST. After using RMM  
LISTVOLUME to find logical volumes with a container  
volume, user the command:  
|
RMM CHANGEVOLUME volser CONTAINER(' ') FORCE  
|
|
|
|
|
Note: Tape management systems other than  
DFSMSrmm must facilitate a function to search and  
change the container volume field to blanks for logical  
volumes with a Status Code X'32' in the Status File upon  
completion of the Export operation.  
|
| Import and Export Messages from Library  
|
|
|
|
During processing of an Export or Import operation, the VTS subsystem generates  
status messages that indicate the progress of the operation. The message is  
broadcast to all hosts attached to the VTS subsystem. On MVS hosts, the message  
results in a console message being written in the following format:  
|
CBR3750I MESSAGE FROM LIBRARY <library-name>: 70 EBCDIC character message  
|
The 70 character message contains the status message as defined below:  
|
|
Bytes 0–4  
Unique Message Code The unique message code is further defined as a  
326 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
|
single alpha character followed by four numeric characters. The alpha  
character indicates which element/function in the VTS/Library generated the  
message. The numeric characters are a sequential number for a specific  
element/function. The element/function codes are defined as:  
|
|
E
I
Export  
Import  
|
|
Byte 5:  
Blank character  
Bytes 6–69  
Status Message Text  
|
|
| Export Status Messages  
|
Table 43. Export Status Messages  
|
|
Message Code Message Text  
|
E0001  
EXPORT PROCESSING STARTED FOR DESTINATION XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
|
|
|
|
|
This message is generated when the VTS begins processing the logical volumes for a specific  
destination. The ‘XX...X’ field is replaced with the destination name from the export list file. The  
destination name is left justified and padded with blanks if the destination name is less than 16  
characters. If the destination name in the export list file is all blanks, a destination name of 16  
question mark characters (‘??...?’) is used.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
E0002  
E0003  
EXPORTED LOGICAL VOLUMES ON YYYYYY READY FOR HOST PROCESSING  
|
|
This message is generated when all of the logical volumes on an exported stacked volume  
YYYYYY have been placed in the exported category and are ready for the host to process.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
EXPORT PROCESSING COMPLETED FOR DESTINATION XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
|
|
|
|
|
|
This message is generated when the VTS has completed processing the logical volumes for a  
specific destination (including the host purging of the exported logical volume from the library  
manager inventory). The ’XX...X’ field is replaced with the destination name from the export list  
file. The destination name is left justified and padded with blanks if the destination name is less  
than 16 characters. If the destination name in the export list file is all blanks, a destination name  
of 16 question mark characters ( ’??...?’) is used.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
E0004  
STACKED VOLUME YYYYYY FOR DEST XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX IN EXPORT-HOLD  
|
|
|
|
|
This message is generated when the library has placed Exported Stacked Volume ’YYYYYY’ in  
the Export-Hold category. The ’XXX...X’ field is replaced with the destination name from the export  
list file. The destination name is left justified and padded with blanks if the destination name is  
less than 16 characters. If the destination name in the export list file is all blanks, a destination  
name of 16 question mark characters (’???...?’) is used.  
|
|
|
|
Action: Operator may now use the Library Manager console pop-up window, Manage Export-Hold  
Volumes, to move the Exported Stacked Volume to the Eject category or to the Import category.  
Volumes in the Eject category will be ejected to the Convenience I/O station by the Library  
Manager.  
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 327  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
Table 43. Export Status Messages (continued)  
Message Code Message Text  
E0005  
ALL EXPORT PROCESSING HAS COMPLETED  
|
This message is generated when the VTS completes an export operation.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
Reserved  
E0006  
E0007  
E0008  
E0009  
E0010  
|
|
Action:  
Reserved  
|
|
Action:  
Reserved  
|
|
Action:  
Reserved  
|
Action:  
|
|
EXPORT PROCESSING WAITING FOR HOST RESPONSE  
|
|
This message is generated every 10 minutes when there is no host activity to complete the  
processing of the logical volumes in the exported category.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
E0011  
EXPORT PROCESSING TERMINATED WAITING FOR HOST RESPONSE  
|
|
|
This message is generated when the VTS has terminated the export operation because host  
processing of the logical volumes in the exported category has been inactive for a period of 60  
continuous minutes.  
|
|
Action: Perform analysis of the Status File on the Export List volume and reissue the Export  
operation.  
|
E0012  
E0013  
E0014  
FRAGMENTS FOR STACKED VOLUME XXXXXX NOT DELETED  
|
|
There has been a VTS failure to successfully delete all of the fragments for logical volumes which  
were exported successfully otherwise.  
|
|
Action: Call service.  
EXPORT PROCESSING SUSPENDED, WAITING FOR SCRATCH VOLUME  
|
|
This message is generated every five minutes when the VTS needs a scratch stacked volume to  
continue export processing and there are none available.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
EXPORT PROCESSING RESUMED, SCRATCH VOLUME MADE AVAILABLE  
|
|
|
This message is generated when, after the export operation was suspended because no scratch  
stacked volumes were available, scratch stacked volumes are again available and the export  
operation can continue.  
|
Action: None, status only.  
328 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
|
|
Table 43. Export Status Messages (continued)  
Message Code Message Text  
E0015  
EXPORT PROCESSING TERMINATED, WAITING FOR SCRATCH VOLUME  
|
|
|
This message is generated when the VTS has terminated the export operation because scratch  
stacked volumes were not made available to the VTS within 60 minutes of the VTS readiness to  
copy logical volumes to an Exported Stacked Volume.  
|
|
Action: Operator should make more VTS stacked volumes available, perform analysis of the  
Status File on the Export List volume, and reissue the Export operation.  
|
E0016  
COPYING LOGICAL EXPORT VOLUMES FROM CACHE TO STACKED VOLUMES  
|
|
|
This message is generated when the VTS begins, and every 10 minutes during, the process of  
copying and /or fragmenting logical volumes which are still in the Tape Volume Cache and must  
be on a stacked volume before proceeding to copy them to an Exported Stacked Volume.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
E0017  
E0018  
COMPLETED COPY OF LOGICAL EXPORT VOLUMES TO STACKED VOLUMES  
|
|
This message is generated when the VTS has completed the copy of logical volumes to VTS  
stacked volumes, allowing the continuing process of copying to the Exported Stacked Volumes.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
EXPORT TERMINATED, EXCESSIVE TIME FOR COPY TO STACKED VOLUMES  
|
|
The Export process has been terminated because the logical volumes could not be copied to VTS  
stacked volumes and/or fragmented within a 10 hour period from beginning the Export operation.  
|
|
Action: Perform analysis of the Status File on the Export List volume and reissue the Export  
operation.  
|
E0019  
E0020  
E0021  
E0022  
Reserved  
|
|
Action:  
Reserved  
|
|
Action:  
Reserved  
|
|
Action:  
EXPORT RECOVERY STARTED  
|
|
The Export operation has been interrupted by a VTS error or a power off condition for which  
recovery is being attempted.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
E0023  
EXPORT RECOVERY COMPLETED  
|
The recovery attempt for interruption of an Export operation has been completed.  
|
|
Action: Perform analysis of the Status File on the Export List volume and reissue the Export  
operation, if necessary.  
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 329  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
| Import Status Messages  
|
Table 44. Import Status Messages  
|
|
Message Code Message Text  
|
I0001  
I0002  
I0003  
I0004  
IMPORT PROCESSING STARTED FOR EXPORTED STACKED VOLUME YYYYYY  
|
|
This message is generated when the VTS has started processing Exported Stacked Volume  
YYYYYY.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
IMPORTED LOGICAL VOLUMES FROM YYYYYY READY FOR HOST PROCESSING  
|
|
This message is generated when all of the logical volumes on an Exported Stacked Volume  
YYYYYY have been placed in the insert category and are ready for the host to process.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
PROCESSING ON VOLUME YYYYYY HAS COMPLETED  
|
|
This message is generated when the VTS completes import processing of the Exported Stacked  
Volume whose volser is YYYYYY.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
ALL IMPORT PROCESSING HAS COMPLETED  
|
This message is generated when the VTS completes an import operation.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
I0005  
I0006  
I0007  
I0008  
I0009  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
IMPORT PROCESSING WAITING FOR HOST RESPONSE  
|
|
This message is generated every 10 minutes when there is no host activity to complete the  
processing of the logical volumes placed in the insert category during an import operation.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
I0010  
IMPORT PROCESSING TERMINATED WAITING FOR HOST RESPONSE  
|
|
|
This message is generated when the VTS has terminated the Import operation because host  
processing of the logical volumes in the Insert category has been inactive for a period of 60  
continuous minutes.  
|
|
Action: Perform analysis of the Status List file on the Export List volume and reissue the Import  
operation.  
|
I0011  
I0012  
Reserved  
|
|
Action:  
IMPORT PROCESSING SUSPENDED, WAITING FOR SCRATCH VOLUME  
|
|
This message is generated every five minutes when the VTS needs a scratch stacked volume to  
continue import processing and there are none available.  
|
Action: None, status only.  
330 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
Table 44. Import Status Messages (continued)  
Message Code Message Text  
I0013  
IMPORT PROCESSING RESUMED, SCRATCH VOLUME MADE AVAILABLE  
|
|
|
This message is generated when, after the import operation was suspended because no scratch  
stacked volumes were available, scratch stacked volumes are again available and the import  
operation can continue.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
I0014  
IMPORT PROCESSING TERMINATED, WAITING FOR SCRATCH VOLUME  
|
|
|
This message is generated when the VTS has terminated the import operation because scratch  
stacked volumes were not made available to the VTS within 60 minutes of the VTS need for a  
scratch volume on which to copy imported logical volumes.  
|
|
Action: Operator should make more VTS stacked volumes available, perform analysis of the  
Status File on the Export List volume, and reissue the Import operation.  
|
I0015  
I0016  
IMPORT RECOVERY STARTED  
|
|
The Import operation has been interrupted by a VTS error or a power off condition for which  
recovery is being attempted.  
|
|
Action: None, status only.  
IMPORT RECOVERY COMPLETED  
|
The recovery attempt for interruption of an Import operation has been completed.  
|
|
Action: Perform analysis of the Status File on the Export List volume and reissue the Import  
operation, if necessary.  
|
| Export/Import List Volumes Failure-Reason Text  
|
|
|
|
|
If the VTS subsystem was unable to process the Export or Import list volume, the  
host generates message CBR3858I. The reason the list volume could not be  
processed is included as a text string. The following table defines the  
failure-reasons returned, the probable cause and the recommended actions for the  
customer to take.  
|
|
|
In the table below, the symbols <VOLSER>, <File>, <Record>, and <Field> will be  
replaced in the message text as appropriate to describe the location of the error  
found:  
|
|
v <VOLSER>, the logical Volser which was provided in the Export or Import  
operation.  
|
|
v <File>, Export List File, Import List File, Reserved File or Status File.  
v <Record>, within a HDR1, HDR2, EOF1 EOF2, Identifier or Record.  
|
|
v <Field>, within a Label Identifier, Block Count, Record Length, Block Count, Title  
Text or Version.  
|
Table 45. Export-Import List Volumes Failure Reason Text  
|
|
Failure-Reason Text — Probable cause.  
Volume <VOLSER> has not been written  
Recommended Action  
|
|
Operator should check for the correct identity of the  
Import/Export List Volume and, if necessary, execute the  
JCL which prepares a logical volume as the Import/Export  
List Volume.  
|
The Export or Import operation specified a Export/Import  
List Volume which has not been created (written).  
|
|
|
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 331  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
|
|
Table 45. Export-Import List Volumes Failure Reason Text (continued)  
Failure-Reason Text — Probable cause.  
Volume <VOLSER> could not be opened  
Recommended Action  
Call your IBM Service Representative.  
Call your IBM Service Representative.  
Call your IBM Service Representative.  
|
|
VTS failure.  
Volume <VOLSER> could not be rewound  
|
|
VTS failure.  
Volume <VOLSER> could not be closed  
|
VTS failure.  
|
|
Volume <VOLSER> , unable to locate Export List  
Records  
Check source data used for preparation of the Import List  
Volume or Export List Volume.  
|
|
No records were found in the Export List file on the  
Volser specified.  
|
|
Volume <VOLSER> unable to locate Import List  
Records  
Check source data used for preparation of the Import List  
Volume or Export List Volume.  
|
|
No records were found in the Import List file on the  
Volser specified.  
|
Volume Label, read error  
Call your IBM Service Representative.  
|
|
Volume Label record could not be read successfully.  
Volume Label , compacted  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
|
|
Volume Label record was compacted data.  
Volume Label, error converting Label Identifier  
|
|
The EBCDIC field did not convert to ASCII correctly.  
Volume Label, incorrect Label Identifier  
|
|
The characters ’VOL1’ were not found in the Label  
Identifier and Label Number fields of the Volume Label.  
|
Volume Label, error converting Volser  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
Call your IBM Service Representative.  
|
|
The EBCDIC field did not convert to ASCII correctly.  
Volume Label, Volser Mismatch  
|
|
The Volser found in the Volume Label does not match the  
Volser specified in the Export/Import operation.  
|
Volume Label, found tape mark instead  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
|
|
Tape Mark was found which is not in the correct format  
sequence.  
|
Volume Label, unexpected End of Tape  
|
|
The End of Tape was reached unexpectedly when  
attempting to read the Volume Label.  
|
Volume Label, record is not 80 bytes  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
Call your IBM Service Representative.  
|
|
The Volume Label record is not 80 bytes.  
<File> <record>, read error  
|
|
When attempting to read the indicated Record from the  
Tape Volume Cache, a read error occurred.  
332 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
|
|
Table 45. Export-Import List Volumes Failure Reason Text (continued)  
Failure-Reason Text — Probable cause.  
<File> <Record>, found tape mark instead  
Recommended Action  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
|
|
A tape mark was read instead of the File and Record  
indicated.  
|
<File> <Record>, unexpected End of Tape  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
|
|
The End of Tape was reached on the tape volume  
unexpectedly.  
|
<File> <Record>, compacted  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
|
|
The Record in the File indicated was compacted.  
<File> <Record>, error converting <Field>  
|
|
The EBCDIC Field in the File and Record indicated did  
not convert to ASCII correctly.  
|
<File> <Record>, incorrect <Field>  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
|
|
The Field indicated in the File and Record indicated did  
not have the correct contents.  
|
<File> <Record>, invalid Record Length  
|
|
The Record Length field of the HDR2 or EOF2 record in  
the File indicated is not equal to 80 characters.  
|
<File> <Record>, Block and Record Length mismatch Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
|
|
The Block Length and Record Length fields of HDR2 or  
EOF2 are not equal in the File and Record indicated  
|
<File> <Record>, record is not 80 bytes  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
Call your IBM Service Representative.  
|
|
The length of the HDR1, HDR2, EOF1 or EOF2 record is  
not equal to 80 bytes in the File and Record indicated.  
|
<File>, missing a tape mark  
|
|
For the File indicated, a tape mark was not found as  
expected in the format.  
|
<File>, internal processing error MMMM  
|
|
VTS error. MMMM is a decimal number which indicates  
the internal functional area encountering the error.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<File>, more than max allowed records  
Check source data used for preparation of the  
Import/Export List Volume.  
For the Export List File or Import List File as indicated,  
there are more than 50K records.  
<File>, number of records=0  
Check source data used for preparation of the  
Import/Export List Volume.  
For the Export List File or Import List File as indicated,  
the number of records was found to be 0.  
|
|
Reserved File, Identifier not found  
Check JCL which prepared the Import/Export List Volume.  
|
The Identifier record for the Reserved File was not found.  
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 333  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
| Category Recovery  
|
|
|
|
Errors may be made when placing cartridges in the Convenience I/O Station and  
moving them into other categories from the Unassigned Category when the  
Advanced Function feature is installed on at least one VTS in a Library. The error  
scenarios and recovery actions are described below:  
|
Table 46. Category Recovery Error Scenarios  
|
|
Error Scenario  
Recovery Actions  
|
|
Error Scenario  
v
v
Eject the volume through the library manager console  
using the Eject a Stacked Volume function.  
An Exported Stacked Volume with logical  
|
volumes which have not been imported has  
been assigned to the Insert category and the  
volume serial number falls within a range  
defined for VTS stacked volumes.  
|
If the Exported Stacked Volume is needed for an  
Import operation, reinsert the volume into the  
Convenience I/O station and use the Manage  
Unassigned Volumes pop-up window to assign the  
volume to the Import category.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Resultant Library Action  
|
|
|
|
|
|
The library/VTS subsystem will add the volume  
as a scratch stacked volume.  
Note: Data on a volume will be overwritten  
when the volume gets selected for use by the  
VTS subsystem.  
|
|
v
v
Eject the volumes from the library through host console  
command, ISMF or tape management system  
command.  
Error Scenario  
|
|
An Exported Stacked Volume with logical  
volumes which have not been imported has  
been assigned to the Insert category and the  
volume serial number does not fall within a  
range defined for VTS stacked volumes.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the Exported Stacked Volume is needed for an  
Import operation, reinsert the volume into the  
Convenience I/O station and use the Manage Insert  
Volumes pop-up window to assign the volume to the  
Import category.  
Resultant Library Action  
The library will assign the volume to the Insert  
category for 3590 native use and notify all  
attached hosts.  
Note: Data on a volume will be overwritten  
when the volume gets selected for use by a  
host.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
Use the Manage VTS Import Volumes pop-up window to  
eject the volume.  
Error Scenario  
An Exported Stacked Volume has been assigned  
to the Import category and has not been  
required for the Import operation.  
|
|
|
Resultant Library Action  
Volume remains in the Import category  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Use the Manage VTS Import Volumes pop-up window to  
move the volume to the Insert category defined by Volser  
ranges or eject the volume if it is not desired in the  
library.  
Error Scenario  
An HPCT volume (not an Exported Stacked  
Volume) which is needed as a scratch stacked  
volume or native 3590 volume has been  
assigned to the Import category.  
|
|
|
|
|
Resultant Library Action  
The volume remains in the Import category until  
operator action is taken.  
334 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|
| Reuse of Exported Stacked Volumes  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Once all of the logical volumes on an Exported Stacked Volume have been  
imported into a VTS subsystem, the Exported Stacked Volume can be re-used for  
any 3590 application. No cleanup or special processing is required; however, the  
Exported Stacked Volumes remain in the Import category until operator action is  
taken. It is up to the customer to determine when all of the logical volumes on an  
Exported Stacked Volume have been imported or are no longer needed and that  
the physical volume can be re-used as a stacked volume in a VTS or for native use  
on a 3590 subsystem. This would normally be determined by using the tape  
management system to check that there are no logical volumes contained on a  
physical volume previously used as an Exported Stacked Volume. For example, the  
RMM SEARCHVOLUME command can be used to make this determination as  
follows:  
|
RMM SV CONTAINER(xxxxxx)  
|
where xxxxxx is the volser of the Exported Stacked Volume in question.  
|
|
If no volumes are returned, all of the logical volumes on the Exported Stacked  
Volume have been imported and the volume may be re-used.  
|
|
|
|
|
Reuse of the physical volumes is accomplished with operator action by using a  
library manager console Manage Import Volumes pop-up window to move the  
Exported Stacked Volumes out of the Import category. (See Figure 130 on  
page 204.) Once they are moved out of the Import category, one of the following  
will happen:  
|
|
|
|
|
|
v The volumes are moved into the Insert category if they are to be used as scratch  
stacked volumes in a VTS within the current physical library. The volser of the  
physical volumes must fall in the range assigned for stacked volumes in the  
library partition the volumes are to go into. If they are not in a range assigned for  
stacked volumes, the volumes are entered into the library for native 3590 usage  
as the default.  
|
|
|
|
|
v The volumes are moved into the Insert category if they are to be used as native  
3590 cartridges. The volsers of the physical volumes must fall in the range  
assigned for native 3590 use. If they are not in a range assigned for 3590 native  
use, the volumes are entered into the library for native 3590 usage as the  
default.  
|
|
|
|
|
v Otherwise, the volumes are ejected for other use or later disposition. Exported  
Stacked Volumes may be placed in the Convenience I/O station at any time, they  
will be moved into the library in the Unassigned category, and the Manage  
Unassigned Volumes pop-up window may then be used by the operator to  
change the category to Import or Insert, or to eject the volume.  
Appendix B. Virtual Tape Server Import/Export Advanced Function 335  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
336 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
|
Notices  
References in this publication to IBM programs or services do not imply that IBM  
intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any  
reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply  
that only IBM’s product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally  
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of IBM’s  
intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or  
service. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products,  
except those expressly designed by IBM, is the user’s responsibility.  
This document contains general information, as well as requirements, for use on  
IBM and third-party products. IBM makes no warranty, express or implied, as to its  
completeness or accuracy, and the data contained herein is current only as of the  
date of publication. It assumes that the user understands the relationship among  
any affected systems, machines, programs, and media.  
IBM or third parties may have patents or pending patent applications covering  
subject matter described in this document, including appearance design patents or  
applications. The furnishing of this document does not constitute or imply a grant of  
any license under any patents, patent applications, trademarks, copyright, or other  
rights of IBM or of any third party, or any right to refer to IBM in any advertising or  
other promotional or marketing activities. IBM assumes no responsibility for any  
infringement of patents or other rights that may result from use of this document or  
from the manufacture, use, lease, or sale of apparatus described herein.  
Licenses under IBM’s utility patents are available on reasonable and  
non-discriminatory terms and conditions. IBM does not grant licenses under its  
appearance design patents. Inquiries relative to licensing should be directed in  
writing to the IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, North Castle Drive,  
Armonk, New York 10504–1785, U.S.A.  
Trademarks  
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or  
other countries or both:  
AS/400  
AIX  
AIX/ESA  
Application  
System/400  
DFSMS/MVS  
Communications  
Manager  
Current  
DFSMShsm  
DFSMS/VM  
Magstar  
OS/400  
RISC System 6000  
VSE/ESA  
ES/9000  
MVS/ESA  
POWERserver  
SP2  
ESCON  
MVS/XA  
POWERstation  
System/360  
VTAM  
IBM  
PAL  
RACF  
System/370  
400  
VM/ESA  
The following terms are trademarks of other companies:  
Ethernet  
Tri-Code  
Tri-Optic  
Xerox  
Wright Line Corporation  
Engineered Data Products Corporation  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
337  
 
Communications Statements  
Federal Commission (FCC) Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A  
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is  
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful  
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at  
his own expense.  
Properly shielded, grounded and terminated cables and connectors must be used in  
order to meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television  
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by  
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or  
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
Industry Canada Compliance Statement  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions  
from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard  
entitled: “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of Industry Canada.  
Avis de Conformité aux Normes d’Industrie Canada  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables  
aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel  
brouilleur: “Appareils numériques,” NMB-003 édictée par Industrie Canada.  
European Union (EU) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council  
Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States  
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any  
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended  
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.  
Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive  
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem deutschen EMVG  
vom 9.Nov.92 das EG-Konformitätszeichen zu führen. Der AuBteller der  
Konformitätserklärung ist die IBM.  
Dieses Gerät erfüllt die Bedingungen der EN 55022 Klasse A. Für diese Klasse von  
Geräten gilt folgende Bestimmung nach dem EMVG: Geräte dürfen an Orten, Für  
die sie nicht ausreichend entstört sind, nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des  
Bundesminesters für Post und Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes für Post  
338 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
und Telekommunikation betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn  
keine elektromagnetischen Störungen zu erwarten sind. (Auszug aus dem EMVG  
vom 9.Nov.92, Para.3, Abs.4)  
Hinweis:  
Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren ist von der Deutschen Bundepost noch nicht  
veroöffentlicht worden.  
Japan Voluntary Control Council Information  
Taiwan Class A Statement  
New Zealand, Australia (from AS/NZ 3548:1995)  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
Canada  
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian  
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement  
sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.  
Laser Safety and Compliance  
The 3494 is a Class II Laser Product. It is important for the operator to be aware of  
the laser caution label. See Figure 170 on page 340 for an example of the label.  
Notices 339  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 170. Laser Safety Caution Label  
This product complies with the performance standards set by the U.S. Food and  
Drug Administration for a Class II Laser Product. This product belongs to a class of  
laser products that requires precautions be taken to avoid prolonged viewing of the  
laser beam. Under normal working conditions, you must not come in direct contact  
with the laser beam. This classification was accomplished by providing the  
necessary protective housings and scanning safeguards to ensure that laser  
radiation is inaccessible during operation or is within Class II limits. These products  
have been reviewed by external safety agencies and have obtained approvals to  
the latest standards as they apply to this product type.  
Operator Safety  
The operator should remember the importance of safe operation when performing  
any of the tasks in this book. The operator should know the location and how to use  
the switches and controls on the IBM 3494 Tape Library.  
Safety Characteristics  
The front doors on the library should not be opened during normal operation  
because of the moving components within the library. The doors have key locks to  
prevent the doors from being opened inadvertently. The 3494 includes integral  
safety control circuits that detect whether the doors are open or closed.  
When a door is detected to be open, the power is removed from the cartridge  
accessor and the picker slowly descends. All host systems attached to the tape  
subsystems or through the RS-232 interfaces associated with the library are notified  
of the condition. This gives the operator a warning of a safety exposure and a  
warning of potential unauthorized access to the cartridges stored in the library.  
340 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
barrier door. Used, by service personnel, to separate  
the service bay from the main aisle of the 3494. This  
allows for concurrent service to the accessor and the  
associate hardware.  
This glossary defines the special terms,  
abbreviations, and acronyms used in this  
publication. If you do not find the term you are  
looking for, refer to the index or to IBM Dictionary  
of Computing , ZC20-1699.  
C
Numerics  
cartridge. Term used to refer to either the IBM  
Cartridge System Tape or the IBM Enhanced Capacity  
Cartridge System Tape.  
3490E. Term used to mean a 3490E tape subsystem.  
3494. See Tape Library Dataserver.  
cartridge accessor. The physical mechanisms, within  
the tape library that identify, retrieve, and move tape  
cartridges. It consists of a bar-code reader and picker  
mechanism.  
A
APPC. Advanced Program-to-Program  
Communication. A form of LAN communication protocol.  
cartridge automation. The process where the tape  
library automatically performs actions for inserting,  
ejecting, mounting, demounting, loading, and unloading  
of tape cartridges.  
action bar. In the library manager application, the area  
at the top of the primary window that contains keywords  
that give users access to actions available in that  
window. After users select a choice in the action bar, a  
pull-down extension is displayed.  
Cartridge System Tape. The base tape cartridge  
media that is used with 3480 or 3490 Magnetic Tape  
Subsystems.  
active accessor. Accessor currently being used to  
move cartridges within the unit.  
category. A grouping of volumes that have a common  
attribute, such as volumes to eject, volumes newly  
added to the library, and volumes to clean devices.  
active library manager. Library manager controlling  
library operation.  
caution notice. A special note in text that calls  
attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to  
people because of some existing situation. See also  
Danger notice.  
active window. In the library manager, the window  
that is in current use and which receives keyboard  
input.  
advanced program-to-program communication  
cell. See storage cell.  
(APPC). A form of LAN communication protocol.  
check box. On the library manager screen, a control  
that consists of a displayed square box and selectable  
text. It acts like a switch.  
auto mode. An operating mode, whereby, the attached  
host systems directs the operation of the tape library  
without operator interaction.  
click. With the library manager, the act of pressing a  
button on a pointing device while holding the pointing  
device pointer on the selected text. See also  
double-click.  
automatic cartridge loader (ACL). A device that  
allows multiple cartridges to be loaded from a tape drive  
without operator intervention.  
available. The term used to indicate that a component  
is available for use by the library manager. Components  
in the tape library (cartridge accessor, gripper,  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station, tape drives) are  
either available or unavailable for use. Compare with  
Online.  
client area. The area in the center of a window that  
contains the main information of the window.  
code. The term used to refer to the internal programs  
that comprise the library manager application.  
command. A control signal that initiates an action or  
the beginning of a sequence of actions.  
B
component. A part of a functional unit; for example,  
the gripper mechanism is a component of the cartridge  
accessor.  
bar code. A code representing characters by sets of  
parallel bars of varying thickness and separation.  
bar-code reader. See vision system.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
control program. The program in the host system that  
schedules and supervises the execution of application  
programs.  
E
EPO. See Emergency Power Off.  
convenience input. The term used when loading  
small numbers of tape cartridges into the tape library  
using the convenience input station.  
eject. The operation of moving a cartridge to an output  
station in the tape library.  
Emergency Power Off (EPO). A switch that removes  
all power from the equipment in the IBM 3494 Tape  
Library but does not affect power to lighting circuits.  
convenience input/output station. The part of the  
tape library used to load and unload small numbers of  
cartridges into the tape library.  
enable. To provide the means or opportunity. The  
modification of system, control unit, or device action  
through the change of a software module or a hardware  
switch (circuit jumper) position.  
D
DCAF. Distributed Console Access Facility. A LAN  
communication program.  
Enhanced Capacity Cartridge System Tape.  
Cartridge system tape with increased capacity that can  
be used with 3490E enhanced capability models only.  
Visually identified by a two-tone cartridge case.  
Danger notice. A special note in text that calls  
attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or  
extremely hazardous to people. See also Caution  
notice.  
Ethernet. A local area network (LAN) that allows  
multiple stations to access a data transmission without  
prior coordination.  
database. A collection of data that can be accessed  
by a data processing system for a specific purpose.  
|
|
|
|
Export. The VTS Export operation allows logical  
volumes to be moved from a VTS to another VTS. The  
destination VTS can be in the same tape library or in a  
different tape library.  
demount. A host command to unload a cartridge from  
a tape drive.  
dialog box. With the library manager, a moveable  
window, fixed in size, that requests information from the  
user.  
|
|
|
Exported Stacked Volume. A physical volume  
managed by a VTS that contains logical volumes that  
can be removed from the VTS.  
diskette. A thin, flexible magnetic disk and a protective  
jacket, in which the disk is permanently enclosed. See  
also hard disk.  
F
Distributed Console Access Facility (DCAF). A LAN  
communication program.  
file protected. Pertaining to a tape volume from which  
data can be read only. Data cannot be written on or  
erased from the tape.  
double-click. With the library manager, the act of  
pressing a pointing device button twice within a time  
limit while holding the pointing device pointer on the  
selected item. See also click.  
frame. (1) A housing for machine or device elements.  
(2) The hardware support structure, covers, and all  
parts mounted therein that are packaged as one entity  
for shipping.  
drop-down list. A drop-down list only displays one  
item until the user takes an action to display the other  
objects or choices.  
G
dual active accessors (DAA). The dual active  
accessors feature consists of two cartridge accessors  
and microcode which enables them to be active at the  
same time. Under normal operation, both accessors are  
active when this feature is installed.  
gripper. A part attached to the picker mechanism of  
the cartridge accessor that loads or unloads cartridges  
from storage cells and the Convenience Input⁄Output  
Station.  
dual library manager. The dual library manager  
consists of two library managers. Under normal  
operation, one library manager is the active library  
manager and the other library manager is the standby  
library manger.  
H
hard disk. A rigid, non-removable disk residing in the  
library manager.  
high availability unit. A second library manager and a  
second accessor.  
dump. To record data, at a particular instant, for the  
purpose of safeguarding or analyzing.  
342 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
high-capacity output facility. The part of the tape  
library used to unload large numbers of cartridges from  
the tape library.  
library manager. The controller for the IBM 3494 Tape  
Library. It manages the location of tape cartridges,  
monitors performance, issues commands to the  
hardware, displays status, and performs other functions.  
It communicates with host systems through the Library  
Attachment Facility in each 3490E Subsystem and  
provides operator and service panel functions.  
high-capacity input/output (I/O) facility. The part of  
the tape library used to load/unload large numbers of  
cartridges from the tape library.  
home cell. A fixed location that is assigned to a  
cartridge when it is first inserted into the library.  
load. (1) The process, performed by an operator or by  
the cartridge accessor, of placing a cartridge into a  
location within the tape library for later use or retrieval.  
(2) The term used when describing the action of the  
tape transport when it removes the leader block from a  
cartridge and threads the media through the internal  
tape path.  
home position. A position the cartridge accessor goes  
to when entering Pause mode. Home position is located  
at the far left side of the control unit frame.  
host system. A data-processing system that is used to  
prepare programs and the operating environments for  
use on another computer or controller.  
local area network (LAN). A computer network  
located on a user’s premises within a limited  
geographical area. Communications within a LAN are  
not subject to external regulations; however,  
communications across a LAN boundary may be subject  
to regulation.  
I
IPL. Initial program load.  
logical library. A logical library represents a set of  
tape volumes and tape drives that are a subset of all  
tape volumes and drives in a 3494 library. Each logical  
library within a 3494 library has a unique library  
sequence number identifying the logical library.  
icon. A pictorial representation of an object or a  
selection choice. Icons can represent objects that users  
want to work on or actions that users want to perform.  
See system menu icon.  
|
|
|
|
Import. The VTS Import operation allows logical  
volumes to be moved to a VTS from another VTS. The  
source VTS can be in the same tape library or in a  
different tape library.  
logical volume. A logical volume is a customer data  
volume which is stored on a stacked volume. A logical  
volume is not directly accessible by a host program.  
The volume serial number of the logical volume is not  
externally visible to a human or machine.  
improved data recording capability (IDRC). A data  
recording mode that can increase the effective cartridge  
data capacity and the effective data rate if invoked.  
M
initial program load (IPL). The initialization procedure  
that causes an operating system to commence  
operation.  
magazine. A container residing in a storage frame.  
Each container consists of storage cells for holding tape  
cartridges.  
insert. The operation of adding cartridges to the tape  
library. See also eject.  
manual mode. A mode of operation, where the  
operator, under the direction of the library manager,  
manually locates and moves cartridges to and from tape  
drives and storage cells. This mode allows data to be  
retrieved when normal tape library operations are  
interrupted by unexpected conditions.  
internet protocol (IP). A form of LAN communications  
protocol.  
inventory. The operation of identifying the location of  
each tape cartridge contained in the tape library.  
menu. A panel containing a list of functions available  
invoke. To start a command, procedure or program.  
The request for a feature or function to be utilized in  
future processing activities through the use of software  
or hardware commands.  
for selection.  
mount. A host command to load a cartridge into a  
tape unit.  
mount from input station. A function available  
through the Commands pull-down on the library  
manager. It allows transient cartridges outside the  
library to be mounted on devices within the library and  
is used to support stand-alone programs that do not  
require the support of a full operating system.  
L
light-emitting diode (LED). (1) A semiconductor chip  
that gives off visible or infrared light when activated. (2)  
A light that signals a change in status or the presence  
of a certain predefined condition.  
Glossary 343  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
mutually exclusive. Clicking on a radio button causes  
that choice to be selected and all others in its group to  
be de-selected.  
O
OK. With the library manager, a standard push button  
that causes the application to accept any changed  
information and close the dialog box.  
remote library manager console. The remote library  
manager console permits the 3494 library manager  
attachment to a customer-supplied local area network.  
offline. Pertaining to the operation of a unit when not  
under the direct control of a host system. Compare with  
unavailable. Contrast with Online.  
S
online. Pertaining to the operation of a unit when  
under the direct control of a host system. Compare with  
available. Contrast with Offline.  
screen. The viewing area of a workstation’s display.  
secondary window. A window, on the library  
manager, that is movable and sizeable and is always  
associated with a primary window.  
P
selection list. On the library manager screen, a  
control that contains choices from which users can  
select one choice.  
panel. (1) A control area on a machine that allows  
user interaction with the machine. (2) The information  
that is displayed on a screen.  
service bays. Frames attached to either end of the  
library to allow for storage and containment of the hot  
standby library controller and accessor.  
park. An operation the cartridge accessor performs  
when entering Pause mode. The cartridge accessor  
moves to the home position and the picker lowers. See  
also home position.  
setup. The preparation of a computing system to  
perform a job or job step.  
pause mode. An operating mode, where by, all host  
requests that require movement of cartridges are  
queued until the tape library is returned to Auto mode.  
The cartridge accessor is parked and the library doors  
may be opened.  
shortcut key. A combination of keys that a user can  
press to perform an action that is available from a  
menu. For example, Ctrl+C causes the library manager  
to display the task list.  
picker. The picker provides a mounting platform for  
the gripper and the bar-code reader.  
Stacked Volume. A stacked volume is a physical  
volume which is exclusively managed by a Virtual Tape  
Server and contains one or more logical volumes. It is  
not a customer accessible volume.  
pop-up window. On the library manager, a selectable  
window, in which users provide information that is  
required by an application so it can continue a user’s  
request.  
standby accessor. The accessor not currently being  
used to move cartridges when the high availability unit  
is installed.  
primary window. The window on the library manager  
screen in which the main dialog between users and the  
library manager takes place.  
standby library manager. The standby Library  
Manager can take control of all operations in the 3494.  
Its hardware consists of a controller, display, pointing  
device, and a keyboard. This feature is available with  
the high availability unit.  
pull-down. An extension of the action bar that displays  
a list of choices available for a selected choice in the  
action bar. When an action bar selection is made the  
pull-down appears. Additional pop-up windows can  
appear from pull-down choices.  
storage. (1) A device into which recorded information  
can be entered, retained, and processed, and from  
which it can be retrieved. (2) The action of placing data  
into a storage device. (3) A facility in which data can be  
retained.  
push button. On the library manager screen, a  
shaded rectangle, containing text and used in pop-up  
windows to initiate actions. Selecting a push button  
causes an action to take place immediately.  
storage cell. A location in the tape library where a  
cartridge can be loaded or unloaded. This includes the  
storage cells in a storage frame and the convenience  
input⁄output station.  
R
rack. See wall.  
system menu. On the library manager screen, the  
pull-down in the top left-hand corner of a window that  
allows users to restore, close, move, size, minimize,  
and maximize the window. The system menu is  
referenced by the system menu icon.  
radio button. On the library manager screen, a control  
that consists of a circle and text. Radio buttons are  
combined to show users a fixed set of choices that are  
344 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
system menu icon. The term for the symbol found in  
the top left-hand corner of some windows that is used to  
control the presence and appearance of those windows.  
See system menu.  
transient mount. See mount from input station.  
transmission control protocol (TCP). A form of LAN  
communications protocol.  
transport. The mechanism inside a tape drive that  
moves tape media. It is comprised of loading, threading  
and guiding mechanisms and motors.  
T
TCP. Transmission control protocol. A form of LAN  
communications protocol.  
U
TCP. Telecommunications Carrier Products. A form of  
unavailable. A term used to indicate that a component  
in the tape library (for example, the cartridge accessor)  
is unavailable for use by the library manager. Compare  
with Offline. Contrast with available.  
LAN communications protocol.  
tape drive. A device that is used for moving magnetic  
tape and includes the mechanisms for writing and  
reading data to and from tape. See also tape unit and  
transport.  
unit. (1) An entity capable of accomplishing a specific  
purpose; for example, a 3490E tape drive. (2) An  
individual piece of the tape library that can be added or  
deleted from a tape library configuration, for example,  
3490E control unit, 3490E tape unit, storage frame, or  
Convenience Input⁄Output Station.  
tape library. A term used to refer to the customer’s  
collection of tapes. Within the IBM 3494 Tape Library,  
this simply means the set of cartridges contained within  
the enclosure.  
tape library dataserver. An automated tape library  
consisting of mechanical components, cartridge storage  
frames, IBM tape subsystems, and controlling hardware  
and software. The tape library dataserver performs tape  
cartridge mounts and demounts without operator  
intervention.  
unit emergency power off (UEPO). The 3494 switch  
that, when operated in an emergency, cause the 3494  
to be disconnected from the ac power source.  
unit power off (UPO). A switch that removes all power  
from a specific units of the tape library.  
unload. To remove cartridges from a 3490E drive.  
tape management software. A program that controls  
the scratch status of tape volumes.  
V
tape unit. A device that contains tape drives and their  
associated power supplies and electronics.  
VTAM. Virtual Telecommunications Access Method. A  
form of LAN communication protocol.  
tape volume cache. The Tape Volume Cache is a  
major component of a Virtual Tape Server and is a  
combination of RAID DASD, RAM buffering and internal  
licensed code that stores and manages virtual volumes.  
VTS. A Virtual Tape Server is comprised of a Virtual  
Tape Server controller, 3590 tape devices and the 3494  
Tape Library. Together they manage the utilization of the  
cartridge storage capacity and performance capabilities  
of the 3590 tape technology transparently to host  
software and applications.  
teach. The process that allows the library manager,  
using the cartridge accessor, to learn the exact physical  
locations of each major unit within the tape library.  
virtual tape drive. A virtual tape drive is a  
representation of the functionality of a 3490E class tape  
drive as viewed by the host control program. The data  
from/to the drive is directed to the Tape Volume Cache  
and all drive related commands are emulated through  
the internal licensed code in the Virtual Tape Server  
controller.  
telecommunications carrier products (TCP). A form  
of LAN communications protocol.  
title bar. The area at the top of each window that  
contains the window title and system-menu icon. When  
appropriate, it also contains the minimize, maximize,  
and restore icons.  
virtual tape server (VTS). A Virtual Tape Server is  
comprised of a Virtual Tape Server controller, 3590 tape  
devices and the 3494 Tape Library. Together they  
manage the utilization of the cartridge storage capacity  
and performance capabilities of the 3590 tape  
technology transparently to host software and  
applications.  
token-ring network. A local area network (LAN) that  
uses ring topology, where tokens are passed from node  
to node. A node that is ready to send can capture a  
token and insert data for transmission.  
transient cartridges. Cartridges that reside in a  
customer’s library that are not stored within the confines  
of the automated tape library and are not recorded as  
part of the automated library’s inventory.  
virtual volume. A virtual volume is a customer  
accessible volume that exists in the Tape Volume Cache  
Glossary 345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
of a Virtual Tape Server. When a virtual volume is  
copied from the Tape Volume Cache to a stacked  
volume it becomes a logical volume. When a logical  
volume is recalled from a stacked volume to the Tape  
Volume Cache it becomes a virtual volume.  
virtual telecommunications access method (VTAM).  
Virtual Telecommunications Access Method. A form of  
LAN communication protocol.  
vision system. A Class II laser bar-code reader used  
to identify tape cartridge labels and other features in the  
3494.  
volser. Volume serial identifier. The physical label on  
the cartridge. Also, the same or different identifier  
encoded on the magnetic tape.  
volume. See cartridge.  
W
wall. Walls located inside the library house the  
cartridge storage cells. The walls on the front doors of  
the library are labeled with even numbers and the walls  
on the rear of the library are labeled with odd numbers.  
346 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
changing  
modes  
Numerics  
30 cell I/O 78, 80  
3490E  
emulation of the tape drive 41  
3494  
auto 100  
manual 101  
pause 100  
password 200  
characteristics  
CHECK-1 condition state 261  
3590 1, 37  
operational 41  
safety 340  
CHECK-1 condition 261  
clean schedule panel controls 156  
cleaner  
A
accessors 106  
accessors, disable dual active 107  
accessors, enable dual active 107  
administrator, system password 200  
advanced operating procedures 85, 259  
Auto mode, changing to 76  
auto selection 100  
cartridge  
eject 158  
end-of-life 156  
volume masks 172  
cleaning selection, schedule 155  
command  
priorities 54  
promote in the queue selection 160  
commands pull-down 152  
component availability selection 115  
console, remote library manager  
changing sessions 249  
configuring 242  
B
basic operating procedures 75, 85  
C
Cancel Export/Import 207  
cartridge.  
distributed console access facility 241, 242  
feature 46, 241  
hot-keys 248  
3494 tape library 25  
cell location 24  
convenience input⁄output station 17  
demounting 232  
ejecting 234  
file protection 20  
high-capacity output facility 16  
initial installation  
cleaner volumes 58  
customer volumes 58  
service volume 58  
input facility 16  
installing 242  
keystrokes 246, 247  
library manager operations  
changing password 255  
changing session states 253  
moving among sessions 253  
problem analysis 257  
tips 257  
transferring files 253  
control unit frame  
controls  
2
inserting 77, 232  
labeling 22, 23  
labels 20  
description 31  
host control 59  
library manager 34, 88  
operator panel 32, 38  
mounting 231  
output facility 16  
removing ejected 81  
requirements 19  
reserved storage cells 25  
single-cell output facility 17  
storage capacity 25  
storage cells 24  
system tape  
convenience input⁄output station 2, 4  
D
database  
information 28  
pull-down 139  
description 18  
database volumes, list 145  
demounting cartridges 232  
DFSMS messages 268  
DFSMS/MVS environment, library manager failure 261  
disable dual active accessors 107  
disable inventory update 47, 153  
displaying  
requirements 19  
transient 58, 181  
cartridge placement guidelines 59  
category  
mount from 55  
volume 48  
cell location 24  
drive message, using 231  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1993, 1999  
347  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
displaying (continued)  
search results selection 143  
distributed console access facility 241, 242  
initial  
cartridge installation 58  
volume inventory upload 59  
insert logical 153, 164  
insert logical status 165  
inserting cartridges  
drive unit frame  
2
dual active accessors, disable 107  
dual active accessors, enable 107  
dual-write status 274  
in Auto mode 77  
in Manual mode 232  
initial installation  
cleaner volumes 58  
customer volumes 58  
service volumes 58  
unlabeled 184  
E
eject stacked 153, 166  
ejected cartridges, removing 81, 234  
enable dual active accessors 107  
error  
intervention, operator 199  
introduction  
inventory  
1
processing 236  
error detection and reporting. 47  
new storage 169  
status 173  
update 47  
inventory update 47  
F
facilities  
cartridge input and output 16  
convenience input⁄output station 17  
high-capacity output 16  
single-cell output 17  
fixed home cell mode 65  
floating home cell mode 65  
frames  
K
keyboard  
selecting with 92  
template  
diagram 305, 314  
using 240  
control unit  
drive unit  
2
keystrokes 246, 247  
2
storage unit  
2
functional components 4, 6  
L
label, cartridge 20  
library manager  
H
component availability status window 279  
database information 28, 29  
display location 34  
information provided at console 276  
keyboard location 34  
help  
action bar and function keys 95, 98  
pull-down, using 94  
search 95  
high-capacity output facility 16  
High Performance Cartridge Tape  
home cell mode  
making selections  
1
description 92  
keyboard 92  
pointing device 92  
fixed 65  
floating 65  
messages, action based 277, 281  
operator  
locating and identifying locations 237  
host  
menu, using 98  
consoles selection, send message 159  
operation control 59  
hot-keys 246, 247  
panel controls 89  
password-protection 27  
search database for volumes window 279  
system summary window, using 277  
user interface  
I
general operator 27  
identifying home cell locations 237  
indicators  
service representative 27  
system administrator 27  
using 88  
convenience input⁄output station 33  
description 31  
motion controls 32  
operator panel 32, 38  
status 32, 38  
whole queue window, using 282  
library manager failure, DFSMS/MVS environment 261  
library manager failure, MVS/BTLS environment 265  
library manager recovery procedures 261  
List database volumes 145  
local area network 6, 47, 241  
locating home cell locations 237  
tape subsystem 35, 37  
informational state transitions 73  
informational states 67  
348 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
location, cartridge cell 24  
operating procedures (continued)  
basic 75, 85  
Manual mode 230  
operational  
M
Manage Export-Hold Volumes 206  
Manage Import Volumes 204, 205  
Manage Unassigned Volumes 202  
Manual mode  
characteristics 41  
informational 67  
informational transitions 73, 75  
mode transitions 68, 71  
modes 63  
safety 340  
state transitions 71, 73  
states 65  
ending 238  
operating in 230  
selection 101  
starting 228  
using 227  
status selection 111  
tips 257  
media  
3494 tape library 25  
cell location 24  
convenience input⁄output station 17  
demounting 232  
ejecting 234  
file protection 20  
high-capacity output facility 16  
initial installation  
cleaner volumes 58  
customer volumes 58  
service volume 58  
input facility 16  
inserting 77, 232  
labeling 22, 23  
labels 20  
mounting 231  
output facility 16  
removing ejected 81  
requirements 19  
operations  
audit 56  
demount 56  
host control 59  
mount 55  
operator  
actions 199  
intervention 199  
involvement 46  
menu, using library manager 98  
panel 32, 38  
pop-up window 200  
procedures 75, 85  
safety 340  
options pull-down 226  
output facility  
high-capacity 16  
single-cell 17  
reserved storage cells 25  
single-cell output facility 17  
storage capacity 25  
storage cells 24  
P
password  
protection 27  
system tape  
system administrator 200  
Pause mode, changing to 76  
Pause selection 100  
description 18  
requirements 19  
transient 58, 181  
performance statistics selection 119  
placement, cartridge 59  
pointing device, selecting with 92  
power  
messages, host console 268  
modes  
changing 32, 68, 99  
fixed home cell 65  
floating home cell 65  
pull-down 99  
controls 32, 38  
local 32, 45  
relationship between modes and states 68  
mount from input station 58, 181  
mounting cartridges 231  
MVS/BLTS environment, library manager failure 265  
local to remote, changing from 76  
remote 32, 45  
remote to local, changing from 76  
unit emergency power 32, 38, 75  
unit power switch 32, 75  
powering on or off the 3494 75  
N
preface  
1
notices 337  
priority levels 54  
problem determination  
search database for volumes window 279  
system summary window, using 277  
tips 257  
O
Offline selection 103  
Online selection 101  
operating procedures  
advanced 85, 259  
problem determination procedures 259  
problem determination procedures 259  
Index 349  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pull-downs  
commands selection 152  
states (continued)  
operational 65  
database 139  
help 94  
relationship between modes and states 68  
volume 52  
menu selections 98  
mode 99  
status pull-down 109  
storage  
options 226  
queues 137  
cartridge capacity 25  
cartridge cells 24  
status selection 109  
reserved cartridge cells 25  
unit frame  
2
Switch Active Accessor to Standby 106  
switch active library manager to standby 105  
system  
Q
queues pull-down 137  
administrator  
involvement 46  
password 200  
summary  
R
recovery procedures 261  
DFSMS/MVS environment 261  
dual library manager 261  
MVS/BTLS environment 265  
single library manager 261  
reinventory complete system selection 169  
remote library manager console  
changing sessions 249  
configuring 242  
pop-up window 98  
problem determination window 277  
selection 131  
T
tape  
3494 tape library 25  
cell location 24  
convenience input⁄output station 17  
demounting 232  
ejecting 234  
distributed console access facility 241, 242  
feature 46, 241  
hot-keys 248  
installing 242  
file protection 20  
high-capacity output facility 16  
initial installation  
cleaner volumes 58  
customer volumes 58  
service volume 58  
input facility 16  
keystrokes 246, 247  
library manager operations  
changing password 255  
changing session states 253  
moving among sessions 253  
problem analysis 257  
tips 257  
inserting 77, 232  
labeling 22, 23  
labels 20  
transferring files 253  
removing ejected cartridges 81  
reserved storage cells 25  
mounting 231  
output facility 16  
removing ejected 81  
requirements 19  
reserved storage cells 25  
single-cell output facility 17  
storage capacity 25  
storage cells 24  
S
safety  
characteristics 340  
laser 339  
operator 339  
search  
system tape  
entry field selection 140  
results selection 142  
service selection 104  
shutdown selection 108  
single-cell output facility 17  
snmp 208  
stand-alone device  
operations 57  
reset 182  
description 18  
requirements 19  
transient 58, 181  
tape subsystem, 3490E 1, 35  
tape subsystem, 3590 1, 37  
tape subsystem controls 35, 37  
tips  
operational 257  
problem determination 257  
trademarks 337  
setup 180  
status 183  
transient cartridges 58, 181  
transitions  
states  
3494 CHECK-1 condition 261  
informational 67  
informational 73, 75  
350 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
transitions (continued)  
mode 68, 71  
operational state 71, 73  
U
unlabeled cartridges 20, 22, 184  
V
volser ranges 153, 162  
volser validity checking 52  
volume  
categories 48  
cleaner masks 158, 172  
initial inventory upload 59  
reviewing unknown locations 235  
states 52  
VTS category attributes 153, 167  
VTS management policies 153, 169  
W
whole queue window, using 279  
write, dual 274  
Index 351  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
352 Magstar 3494 Tape Library Operator Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You  
Magstar 3494 Tape Library  
Operator Guide  
Publication No. GA32-0280-09  
Overall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book?  
Very Satisfied  
Satisfied  
Neutral  
Dissatisfied  
Very Dissatisfied  
Overall satisfaction  
h
h
h
h
h
How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:  
Very Satisfied  
Satisfied  
Neutral  
h
Dissatisfied  
Very Dissatisfied  
Accurate  
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
Complete  
h
Easy to find  
h
Easy to understand  
Well organized  
Applicable to your tasks  
h
h
h
Please tell us how we can improve this book:  
Thank you for your responses. May we contact you?  
h Yes  
h No  
When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any  
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.  
Name  
Address  
Company or Organization  
Phone No.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cut or Fold  
Along Line  
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You  
GA32-0280-09  
IBMR  
Fold and Tape  
Please do not staple  
Fold and Tape  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
NO POSTAGE  
NECESSARY  
IF MAILED IN THE  
UNITED STATES  
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL  
FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK  
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE  
International Business Machines Corporation  
Information Development  
Department GZW  
9000 South Rita Road  
Tucson, AZ 85775-4401  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
Fold and Tape  
Please do not staple  
Fold and Tape  
Cut or Fold  
Along Line  
GA32-0280-09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IBMR  
Printed in the United States of America  
on recycled paper containing 10%  
recovered post-consumer fiber.  
GA32-0280-09  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Graco Cyclometer 13785 7 00 User Manual
Haier Dishwasher DW9 TFE3 User Manual
Hamilton Beach Gas Grill OG01 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Automobile Accessories 98239 User Manual
Havis Shields Laptop Docking Station 43680381 User Manual
Honeywell Thermostat CT3400 User Manual
Hotpoint Oven ST87EX User Manual
iHome Stereo System IH52 User Manual
iHome Switch IH U500FB User Manual
Iiyama Computer Monitor B1702S User Manual